Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 1861

Marc 2010

Volume C: Program Input

Corporate
MSC.Software Corporation
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707
Telephone: (800) 345-2078
FAX: (714) 784-4056

Europe
MSC.Software GmbH
Am Moosfeld 13
81829 Munich
GERMANY
Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0
Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6

Asia Pacific
MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200
Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201

Worldwide Web
www.mscsoftware.com

User Documentation: Copyright 2010 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This document, and the software described in it, are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of such license. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written authorization of
MSC.Software Corporation is strictly prohibited.
MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this document are for illustrative and educational purposes
only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. THIS DOCUMENT IS
PROVIDED ON AN AS-IS BASIS AND ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE
DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
MSC.Software logo, MSC, MSC., MD Nastran, Adams, Dytran, Marc, Mentat, and Patran are trademarks or registered trademarks of
MSC.Software Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. Python is a trademark of the Python Software Foundation. LS-DYNA is a trademark of
Livermore Software Technology Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC.Software suppliers.
METIS is copyrighted by the regents of the University of Minnesota. HP MPI is developed by Hewlett-Packard Development Company,
L.P. MS MPI is developed by Microsoft Corporation. PCGLSS 6.0, copyright 1992-2005 Computational Applications and System
Integration Inc. MPICH Copyright 1993, University of Chicago and Mississippi State University. MPICH2 copyright 2002, University
of Chicago.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer
Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation),
as applicable.

MA*V2010*Z*Z*Z*DC-VOL-C

Contents
Marc Volume C: Program Input

Contents

Preface
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Who Should Read this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Other Marc Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Introduction

Formats in Marc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Free Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28
28
28

Input of List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29
31

Edges and Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Typical Marc Problem Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marc Input for New Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38
39
40

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49

Parameters List

Parameters

Basic Input Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


TITLE Output Title Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALLOCATE Initial Workspace Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIZING Working Space Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREALLOC Initial Workspace Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELEMENTS Element Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68
69
70
71
72
73

4 Marc Volume C: Program Input

VERSION Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


FEATURE Specification of the Behavior of a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCESSOR Parallelization Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNIT Invoke Unit System Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
$NO LIST No Listing of Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTENDED Extended Precision of Reading in Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END End of Parameter Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analysis Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELASTIC Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN SENSITIVITY Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN OPTIMIZATION Perform Design Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADAPTIVE Adaptive Mesh Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINEAR Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOURIER Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DYNAMIC Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARMONIC Frequency Response Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS-ROLLING Steady State Transport Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESPONSE Spectrum Response Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R-P FLOW Rigid-Plastic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPFLOW Superplastic Forming Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LARGE DISP Large Displacement or Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LARGE STRAIN Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPDATE Updated Lagrange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINITE Finite Strain Plasticity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONSTANT DILATATION Define That Elements Are to Use Constant Dilatation Formulation.
ASSUMED STRAIN Improved Bending Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELASTICITY Elasticity Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLASTICITY Plasticity Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOLLOW FOR Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry
Application of Total Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUCKLE Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREEP Creep Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCO ELAS Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRUCTURAL Mechanical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COUPLE Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECOUPLING Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUID Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PORE Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T-T-T Time-Temperature-Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEAT Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOULE Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIFFUSION Diffusion Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABLATION Specify Ablation Occurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PYROLYSIS Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

74
75
77
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
89
90
91
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
120
121
122
124
125
126
127

Contents 5

CURING Curing Analysis Parameter Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


BEARING Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRO Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAGNETO Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EL-MA Perform Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIEZO Activate Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACOUSTIC Acoustic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIATION Radiation Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAVITY Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBE Rigid Body Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MACHINING NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
138
139
140

Rezoning and Substructure Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REZONING Allow Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MNF MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPER Super Element Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER Create User-defined Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

141
142
143
144
145

Additional Flags for Various Analyses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


CENTROID State Storage at Centroid Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALL POINTS State Storage at All Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD COR Residual Load Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO LOADCOR Suppression of Load Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCALE Scaling to First Yield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISTRESS Define Initial Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUMP Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPBC Application of Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACCUMULATE Accumulation of Strain and Displacements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIAS Define Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158

Program Function and I/O Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


NEW Use New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE Indicate How Tables are to be used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMENT Define Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT Debug Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP Exit following Workspace Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOTES Print Notes and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT TAPE Specify Device for Model Definition Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELSTO Out-of-Core Storage of Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OOC Out-of-core Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBOOC Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO ECHO Suppress Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INCLUDE Insert File into the Input File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159
160
161
162
163
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173

6 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Modifying Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


STATE VARS Define Number of State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST LOADS Distributed Loads or Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUXES Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILMS Film Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTRICTOR Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELDING Welding Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Specify Maximum Number of Boundary Conditions to be Defined
SHELL SECT Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSHEAR Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIE
Define Tying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC-CHECK Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOMSET Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOSPC Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO-DEACTIVATE Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
188
189

Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


BEAM SECT Beam Section Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

190
191

Model Definition Options List

Model Definition Options

MESH2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-dimensional Mesh Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESH2D Define a Two-dimensional Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCKS Define Working Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type) Define Block Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANY TYPES Define Multiple Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START NUMBER Specify Starting Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOUNDARY Define Boundary Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFIED NODES Specify Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAPPER Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONSTRAINT Generate Boundary Condition Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MERGE Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MERGE SELECTIVE Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECT Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRTCONNECT Print Out Block Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYMMETRY Define Axis of Symmetry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERATE End of Mesh Generation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229

Mesh Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEW Use New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFINE (Sets) Define Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

230
231
232

Contents 7

CONNECTIVITY Specify Element Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


CONN FILL Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONN GENER Copy Element Connectivity Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFCONN Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORDINATES Enter Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INCLUDE Insert File into the Input File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FXORD Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE CIRCLE Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE FILL Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE GENER Generate Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE MERGE Merge Duplicate Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFXORD Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CYLINDRICAL Define Cylindrical Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WRITE Write Connectivity and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADAPTIVE Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADAPT GLOBAL Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINTS Define Geometric Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURVES Define Geometric Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURFACES Define Geometrical Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRING Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTACH NODE Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTACH EDGE Define the Element Edges which are attached to Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTACH FACE Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GEOMETRY Specify Geometrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODAL THICKNESS Define Nodal Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTUATOR Define the Length of the Actuator Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSFORMATION Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORD SYSTEM Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom
SHELL TRANSFORMATION Define Shell Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UTRANFORM Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CYCLIC SYMMETRY Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TYING Define Tying Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERVO LINK Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBE2 Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBE3 Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RROD Rigid 2-node Constraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIN CODE Define Pin Code for Beam Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSERT Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPRINGS Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBUSH Input Data for Cbush Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CFAST Shell Patch Fastener Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PFAST CFAST Fastener Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CWELD Weld or Fastener Element Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWELD Connector Element Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235
237
238
240
241
243
244
247
248
249
250
251
252
254
255
263
274
275
280
286
288
290
291
292
296
297
298
301
308
309
310
313
321
323
325
328
329
330
332
336
344
347
349
357

8 Marc Volume C: Program Input

SWLDPRM Parameters for CWELD Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


SUPERELEM Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications) Create DMIG of Substructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DMIG-OUT Output Control of Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSQUEAL Specify Data for Output of Matrices used in Brake Squeal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPCOUT Output Control of Tying Matrices (MPC Entries) for all Glued Contacts . . . . . . . . . .
DMIG Direct Matrix Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K2GG, K2PP Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2GG, M2PP Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B2GG, B2PP Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P2G Selects Direction Input Load Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BACKTOSUBS Recover Substructure Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MNF UNITS MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STIFSCALE Define Stiffness Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COEFFICIENT Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEACTIVATE Deactivate Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERROR ESTIMATE Create Error Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USDATA Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

359
365
367
370
375
377
378
381
382
383
384
385
386
388
389
392
393
394

Program Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CASE COMBIN Combine Load Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLVER Specify Direct or Iterative Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPTIMIZE Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST Create File for Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOADCASE Define Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACK Enter a List of Points to be Tracked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLOW LINE Define a Flow Line Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IRM
Intergraph Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDRC SDRC I-DEAS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYPERMESH HyperMesh Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CHOICE Specify Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT ELEMENT Specify Elements to be Included in Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT NODE Specify Nodes to be Included in Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT SPRING Controls the Print Out of Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT SPRING Deactivates the Printing of All Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CONTACT Prints the Contact Body Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT CONTACT Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRID FORCE Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT VMASS Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAUTO Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTART Set Flags for Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTART LAST Use Condensed Restart File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UDUMP Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUMMARY Create Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

395
396
398
402
404
423
426
427
429
435
438
440
442
445
447
448
449
450
451
452
454
455
457
460
462
463

Contents 9

NO SUMMARY Do Not Create Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


ELEMENT SORT Sort Element Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO ELEM SORT Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NODE SORT Sort Nodal Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO NODE SORT Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN OBJECTIVE Define Objective Function to be Optimized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN VARIABLES Define Variable Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Displacement Response . . . . . .
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Stress Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Strain Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response . . . . . . .

464
465
467
468
470
471
472
474
476
478
480

Mechanical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Mechanical) Control Option for Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATUDS Provide Additional Data for Material User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONUDS Provide Additional Data for Contact User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Define Fixed Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED DISP (Mechanical) Define Fixed Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input) Define Distributed Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST LOADS Define Distributed Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FACE IDS Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films,
and Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input) Define Nodal Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT LOAD Define Nodal Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input) Neglect Incremental Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOLD NODES Neglect Incremental Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INERTIA RELIEF Define Inertia Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATION A Define Rotational Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CORNERING AXIS Define Cornering Axis in Steady State Rolling Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUID DRAG Define Fluid Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAVITY Define Constants and Reference Values for Structures with Internal Cavities . . . . . . .
PRE STATE Transfer History Data from Previous Analysis to the Current Analysis as
the Initial State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AXITO3D Transfer Data from Axisymmetric Analysis to 3-D Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLK Generation of Global Local File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLOBALLOCAL Structural Zooming Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT STRESS Define Initial Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN Define Initial Plastic Strain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input) Initialize State Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL STATE Initialize State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input) Redefine State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

481
482
489
493
494
495
499
501
506
511
516
520
523
525
526
528
529
530
532
533
537
541
542
546
548
552
554
556
559
562

10 Marc Volume C: Program Input

CHANGE STATE Redefine State Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


INITIAL FICTIVE (with TABLE Input) Initialize Fictive Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL FICTIVE Initialize State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAP TEMP Map Temperatures from Different Meshes to Current Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL LOADS Input Temperature Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress) Define Initial Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress) Define Initial Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input) Define Point Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT TEMP Define Point Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORCDT Input Displacement or Load Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input) Input Elastic Foundation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOUNDATION Input Elastic Foundation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOURIER Describe Fourier Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J-INTEGRAL Define Path for J-Integral Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LORENZI Define Path for Modified J-Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VCCT Virtual Crack Closure Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELAMINATION Determines When to Split Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISLAND REMOVAL Deactivate Islands of Connected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

566
570
572
574
576
578
580
582
584
586
587
590
591
593
594
597
601
603

Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deformable and Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motion of Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Variables and Option Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact/Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Heat Transfer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Electrical Data (Joule Heating Analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Step Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Contact - Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three-dimensional Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selective Contact Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact with Adaptive Meshing or Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spring-Back Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corner Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Segment-to-segment Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT (2-D) Define 2-D Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) Define 3-D Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES Define Contact Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

604
604
604
605
605
606
606
607
608
608
608
608
612
623
623
625
625
625
626
627
629
632
646
659
678
694

Contents 11

CONTACT TABLE Define Contact Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


SPLINE Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UMOTION Invoke User Subroutine to Prescribe Surface Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFRICTION Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface Friction Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UHTCOEF Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface/Environment Thermal Behavior. . . . . . .
UHTCON Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface to Surface Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT NODE Define Nodes for Surface Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEACT GLUE Define Deact Glue for Nodes in Glued Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXCLUDE Ignore Contact with Certain Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WEAR Input of Wear Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

703
710
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721

Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Elastic Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Elastic-Plastic Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. Temperature Dependent Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D. Relative Density Dependent Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E. Low Tension Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F. Soil Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G. Material Dependent Failure Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H. Characterization of Gap Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I. Laminated Composite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J. Material Preferred Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K. Material Property (Element) Coordinate Systems in Marc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress) Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Stress) Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Define Mechanical Data for
Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical) Define Mechanical Data for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . .
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis.
ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical) Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYPOELASTIC Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOONEY (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOONEY Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRUDBOYCE Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENT (with TABLE Input) Define Data for the Gent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENT Define Data for the Gent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OGDEN (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model
OGDEN Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NLELAST Simplified Nonlinear Elastic Models Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOAM (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Foam Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOAM Define Data for Foam Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GASKET Define Material Data for Gasket Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

723
723
726
728
728
728
728
728
729
729
729
729
737
745
751
757
761
768
772
774
776
782
786
790
793
797
800
804
807
813
817
820

12 Marc Volume C: Program Input

TABLE Define Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


STRAIN RATE (Material Properties) Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress . . . . . . . . . . .
FORMING LIMIT Forming Limit Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WORK HARD Define Workhardening Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress) Define Effects of Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress) Temperature Effects in Coupled
Thermal-Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHO TEMP (Structural) Define Temperature Effects for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . .
TIME-TEMP Define Effects of Time/Temperature Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input) Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model . . . . . .
SHAPE MEMORY Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input) Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking. . . . . . . .
CRACK DATA Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input) Define Failure Criteria Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAIL DATA Define Failure Criteria Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATERIAL DATA Define Additional Material Data Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRAIN SIZE Define Grain Size Growth Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAMAGE Define Properties for Damaging Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GAP DATA Define Data for Gap Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPOSITE Define Properties for Laminated Composite Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIXTURE Define Constituents of Composite Material in Original and Potentially Damaged State
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input) Define Material Data for Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COHESIVE Define Mechanical Data for Cohesive Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSHELL Shell Element Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REBAR Define Rebar Positions, Areas, and Orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORIENTATION Define Orientation of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWDER (with TABLE input) Define Powder Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWDER Define Powder Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DENSITY EFFECTS Define Effects of Density on Powder Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELATIVE DENSITY (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or
Coupled Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELATIVE DENSITY Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or Coupled Thermal
Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOIL (with TABLE Input) Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOIL Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input) Define Initial Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL POROSITY Define Initial Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input) Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis . .
INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis
INITIAL VOID RATIO Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input) Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis . . . . .
INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PC Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIFIC WEIGHT Define Specific Weight Constant for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . .

823
831
833
835
838
843
850
860
864
870
874
876
877
891
902
903
905
912
913
916
919
922
925
928
935
943
949
953
956
958
959
965
969
971
972
974
976
977
979
981
982
983

Contents 13

INITIAL PORE Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input) Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled Soil Analysis . . . . .
CHANGE PORE Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input) Define Pressure Film Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESS FILM Define Pressure Film Coefficient Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

985
988
990
993
996

Rate Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREEP (with TABLE Input) Define Creep Constitutive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREEP Define Creep Constitutive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PHI-COEFFICIENTS Define Phi-Coefficients for Rubber Viscoelastic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELPROP Define Properties for Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELORTH Define Properties for Viscoelastic Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELMOON Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELOGDEN Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Ogden Materials . . . . . . . . . .
VISCELFOAM Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHIFT FUNCTION Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple Viscoelastic Materials .
VISCEL EXP Viscoelastic Thermal Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

997
999
1002
1007
1008
1009
1011
1012
1013
1014
1016

Dynamic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAMPING Define Damping Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUID SOLID Define Fluid-Solid Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL DISP Define Initial Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL VEL Define Initial Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED ACCE Define Fixed Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASSES Define Concentrated Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONM1 Define a General Concentrated Mass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONM2 Define a Diagonal Mass/Moment of Inertia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESPONSE SPECTRUM Define Density for Spectral Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODAL INCREMENT Define Increments for Eigenvalue Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUCKLE INCREMENT Define Increments for Buckling Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1017
1018
1020
1021
1024
1025
1027
1028
1029
1030
1036
1038
1039
1041

Heat Transfer Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input) Define Fixed Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED TEMPERATURE Define Fixed Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILMS (with TABLE Input) Define Thermal Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILMS Define Convection Film Coefficient Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input) Define Sink Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input) Define Distributed Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST FLUXES Define Distributed Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input) Define Point Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT FLUX Define Point Fluxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVECT (with TABLE Input) Define Thermal Vector Flux Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input) Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source . .

1043
1044
1047
1049
1053
1054
1056
1059
1060
1063
1064
1068

14 Marc Volume C: Program Input

WELD FLUX Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELD PATH Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELD FILL Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Thermal or
Electrical Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL CONTACT (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Thermal or Electrical
Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Thermal or
Electrical Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL CONTACT (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Thermal or Electrical
Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer) Define Initial Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer) Define Initial Temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials .
ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer) Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for
Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . .
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Model Definition Option for Heat
Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANISOTROPIC (Thermal) Model Definition Option for Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Material Data for Interface Elements . . . . . .
COHESIVE Define Material Data for Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LATENT HEAT Define Latent Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer) Define Variation of Material Properties in
Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHO TEMP (Thermal) Define Variation of Orthotropic Thermal Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Heat Transfer) Define Control Parameters for Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . .
CONVERT Define Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONRAD GAP Define Convection/Radiation Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANNEL Define Fluid Channel Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VIEW FACTOR Read in Radiation View Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIATING CAVITY Define Outline of Radiating Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAD-CAVITY Define Radiation Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAVITY DEFINITION Define Geometry of a Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMISSIVITY Define Emissivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer) Define Nodal Velocity Components
VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer) Define Nodal Velocity Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURE RATE Cure Kinetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT CURE (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Degree of Cure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT CURE Define Initial Degree of Cure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURE SHRINKAGE Shrinkage Property of Resin Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMO-PORE Define Properties of Thermal Degrading Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURFACE ENERGY Define Surface Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1072
1076
1082
1085
1093
1099
1110
1119
1122
1124
1126
1128
1131
1133
1136
1138
1140
1141
1142
1145
1150
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1159
1162
1165
1167
1169
1172
1174
1175
1178
1183

Contents 15

RECEDING SURFACE Define Areas where Surface Recedes Due to


Thermo-chemical Erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THROAT Define Coordinates of Throat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PYROLYSIS Define Initial Pyrolysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer) Define Initial Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STREAM DEFINITION Define Stream Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT STREAMLINE Control Output of Results along a Streamline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACK STREAMLINE Track Behavior of a Point along a Streamline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1189
1191
1192
1194
1196
1198
1199

Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


JOULE Define Conversion Factor for Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Distributed Currents . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating) Define Distributed Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Point Currents. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (Joule) Define Nodal Point Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Fixed Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED VOLTAGE Define Nodal Fixed Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) Define Electric Conductivity
Properties for Isotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) Define Electric Conductivity
Properties for Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) Define Electric Conductivity
Properties for Anisotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1200
1201
1202
1205
1206
1208
1209
1211

Diffusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Initial Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Fixed Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Distributed Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Nodal Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Diffusion Properties for Isotropic Materials.
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Diffusion Properties for
Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Model Definition Option for Diffusion Analysis .

1222
1223
1225
1227
1230
1232

Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) Define Nodal Velocity Components . . . . . . . .
VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic) Define Nodal Velocity Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THICKNESS (with TABLE Input) Define Lubrication Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THICKNESS Define Lubrication Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input) Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTRICTOR Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Hydrodynamic) Define Maximum Number of Increments for Bearing Analysis . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) Define Lubricant Material Properties . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic) Define Lubricant Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic) Define Effect of Temperature in Bearing Analysis

1238
1239
1241
1243
1245
1246
1248
1249
1250
1252
1253

1212
1214
1218

1234
1236

16 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Acoustic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Fixed Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic) Define Nodal Fixed Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Distributed Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST SOURCES (Acoustic) Define Distributed Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Point Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic) Define Point Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Acoustic) Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis . .
ACOUSTIC Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1255
1256
1259
1261
1264
1265
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271

Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Fixed Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic) Define Fixed Nodal Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic) Define Fixed Nodal Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE Define Nodal Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity) Define Electric Permittivity Properties for
Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity) Define Electric Permittivity
Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for
Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for
Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical) Define Electrical Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . .

1272
1273
1276
1278
1280
1282
1285
1286
1288

Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric) Define Fixed Nodal Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric) Define Distributed Charges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric) Define Nodal Point Charges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Electrical Data for
Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric) Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric Analysis. . . . . . . . . .

1300
1301
1304
1305
1308
1309
1311

Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Fixed Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1317
1318
1320

1289
1291
1295
1296
1297
1299

1312
1315

Contents 17

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . .


FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Currents . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Point Current . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Point Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COIL CURRENT Define the current in a Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMWINDING Define Path and Are Orientation for Coil or Winding Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for
Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability) Define Magnetic Permeability
Properties for Isotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability) Define Magnetic Permeability
Properties for Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for
Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . .
B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear Magnetic Material.
PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Permanent Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERMANENT (Magnetostatic) Define Permanent Magnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Magnetostatic) Control for Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Currents. . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Charges. . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Point Fluxes . . . . .
POINT CURRENT-CHARGE Define Nodal Point Currents and Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties
for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties for
Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties for
Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic) Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear
Magnetic Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERMANENT (Electromagnetic) Define Permanent Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic) Control for Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1322
1325
1327
1330
1331
1333
1334
1336
1341
1343
1345
1349
1350
1354
1356
1358
1360
1362
1363
1364
1367
1369
1372
1373
1376
1377
1379
1380
1382
1384
1387
1389
1391
1393

18 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Fluid Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGION (Fluid) Define Elements in a Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COUPLING REGION Define Coupling Regions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED DISP (Fluid) Define Fixed Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid) Define Fixed Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIXED VELOCITY Define Fixed Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid) Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis. . . . . . . .
ISOTROPIC (Fluid) Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRAIN RATE (Fluid) Define Strain Rate Dependent Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal) Temperature Effects in Coupled
Fluid-Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Fluid) Control Option for Fluid Analysis or Fluid-Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Fluid-Solid) Control Option for Fluid-Stress or Fluid-Thermal-Stress Analysis. . . .
END OPTION Model Definition Data End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

History Definition Options List

History Definition Options

1394
1396
1397
1401
1403
1406
1408
1410
1412
1415
1418
1421
1427

Elastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical, Acoustic, Piezoelectric or Electrostatic-Structural or Electromagnetic Analyses . . . . .
Heat Transfer Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table Driven Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1434
1434
1434
1434
1435
1435
1435
1435

General Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMENT Enter Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TITLE Output Title Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEW (History Definition) Use New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INCLUDE (History Definition) Insert File into the Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CHOICE (History Definition) Define Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition) Specify Elements to be Included in Output . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT NODE (History Definition) Define Nodes and Nodal Quantities to be Printed . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT (History Definition) Suppress Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) Prints the Contact Body Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout . .
PRINT SPRING (History Definition) Controls the Print Out of Springs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition) Deactivates the Printing of All Springs . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRID FORCE (History Definition) Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level . . . . . . . . . .
SUMMARY (History Definition) Create Summary Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO SUMMARY (History Definition) Suppress Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELEMENT SORT (History Definition) Sort Elements for Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1443
1445
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1454
1455
1456

Contents 19

NO ELEM SORT (History Definition) Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element . . . . . . . . . . . .


NODE SORT (History Definition) Sort Nodal Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NO NODE SORT (History Definition) Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT VMASS (History Definition) Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and
Strain Energies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition) Control Option for Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS (History Definition) Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis. . . . .
SOLVER (History Definition) Specify Direct or Iterative Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST (History Definition) Create File for Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST INCREMENT Define Increments between Writing on Post File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESTART INCREMENT Define Increments between Writing on Restart File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition) Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing.
LOADCASE (History Definition) Define Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DMIG-OUT (History Definition) Output Control of Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K2GG, K2PP (History Definition) Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M2GG, M2PP (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B2GG, B2PP (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P2G (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Load Vector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1458
1459
1461
1462
1463
1470
1474
1478
1494
1495
1496
1507
1510
1515
1517
1518
1519

Static, Dynamic, Creep Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


DISP CHANGE Define Displacement Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELEASE NODE Define Nodes for which the Boundary Condition is Gradually Released . . . .
GAP CHANGE Redefine Data for Gap Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TYING CHANGE Define Tying Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST LOADS (History Definition) Define Distributed Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT LOAD (History Definition) Define Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO LOAD Define Equal Load Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition) Define Inertia Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BEGIN SEQUENCE Initiate a Series of Repeated Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END SEQUENCE Terminates a Series of Repeated Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT Define Proportional Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO INCREMENT Define Automatic Load Stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO STEP Adaptive Load Step Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TERMINATE Terminate Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPERPLASTIC Superplastic Forming Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THERMAL LOADS (History Definition) Define Thermal Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO THERM Specify Data for Automatic Thermal Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE STATE (History Definition) Change State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT TEMP (History Definition) Define Point Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE PORE (History Definition) Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis. . . . .
TIME STEP Define Time Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESET TIME Resets Time to Zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUCKLE Specify Buckling Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPERELEM (History Definition) Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for Adams MNF Interface.

1520
1521
1524
1525
1526
1527
1531
1533
1534
1536
1537
1538
1539
1544
1551
1553
1555
1557
1559
1563
1565
1568
1569
1570
1572

20 Marc Volume C: Program Input

SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - History Definition) Create DMIG of Substructure . . . . . . .


ASSEM LOAD Assemble Equivalent Nodal Force Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTIVATE Activate Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEACTIVATE (History Definition) Deactivate Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOUNDATION (History Definition) Define Foundation Spring Force for Elements . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE RIGID Define New Geometry For a Rigid Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D) Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface. . . . . .
ADD RIGID (2-D) Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADD RIGID with TABLES (3-D) Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface . . . .
ADD RIGID (3-D) Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition) Define Contact Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT TABLE (History Definition) Define Contact Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT NODE (History Definition) Define Nodes for Surface Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOTION CHANGE Define Motion of Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SS-ROLLING Define the Parameters for Steady State Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RELEASE Define Release Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPROACH Move Rigid Surfaces into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVE (History Definition) Perform Rigid Body Motion on Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANNEAL Modify State of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYNCHRONIZED Move Rigid Surfaces into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINE (History Definition) Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body . . . . . .
EXCLUDE (History Definition) Ignore Contact with Certain Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACTUATOR Define the Length of the Actuator Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1574
1576
1577
1578
1581
1582
1590
1596
1601
1611
1621
1630
1637
1638
1640
1643
1644
1645
1647
1648
1649
1651
1652

Rate Dependent Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


CREEP INCREMENT Define Creep Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO CREEP Control Transient Creep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACCUMULATE Specify Accumulation Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTRAPOLATE Specify Extrapolation Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO THERM CREEP Automatic, Thermally-Loaded Elastic-Creep Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1653
1654
1655
1657
1658
1659

Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODAL SHAPE Define Modal Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECOVER Recover Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic) Define Integration in Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECTRUM Initiate Spectral Response Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARMONIC (Dynamic) Define Excitation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACC CHANGE Define Acceleration Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1663
1664
1666
1668
1669
1670
1671

Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


TRANSIENT Specify Transient or Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer) Specify Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST FLUXES (History Definition) Define Distributed Fluxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT FLUX (History Definition) Define Point Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WELD FLUX (History Definition) Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source . .
WELD PATH (History Definition) Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source. . . . .

1672
1673
1675
1676
1677
1678
1682

Contents 21

WELD FILL (History Definition) Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition) Define Controls for Heat Transfer Analysis . . .
TEMP CHANGE Specify or Change Fixed Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILMS (History Definition) Define Film Coefficients and Sink Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VELOCITY CHANGE Modify Nodal Velocity Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1688
1691
1693
1695
1696

Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


EMRESIS Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Resistance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History Definition) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition) Define Nodal Point Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VOLTAGE CHANGE Define or Change Voltage for Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1698
1699
1700
1701
1702

Diffusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POROSITY CHANGE Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VOID CHANGE Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST MASS (Diffusion) Define Distributed Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT MASS (Diffusion) Define Nodal Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1704
1705
1707
1709
1712

Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


THICKNS CHANGE Define Thickness Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAMPING COMPONENTS Define Damping Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STIFFNS COMPONENTS Define Stiffness Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1714
1715
1716
1717

Acoustic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESS CHANGE Define Fixed Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST SOURCES (History Definition) Define Incremental Distributed Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History Definition) Define Incremental Nodal Point Sources . . . .
HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition) Define Excitation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1718
1719
1721
1722
1723

Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEADY STATE (Electrostatic) Specify Steady-State Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMCAPAC Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Capacitance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . .

1724
1725
1726

Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Potential
Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Nodal Point Charges. . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1727
1728
1730
1731

Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic) Specify Steady-State Magnetostatic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMINDUC Initiate an Inductance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMLAMIN Initiate Lamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORCE MAGNETOSTATIC Calculate Lorenzi Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1733
1734
1735
1737
1738
1739

22 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Excitation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . .
DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Dynamic Change . . . . . . . .
POTENTIAL CHANGE Define or Redefine Potential Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Point Current and/or Charge.
DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . .
DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . .
CONTINUE (History Definition) End Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rezoning Options List

Rezoning Options

Rezoning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REZONE Specify Rezoning Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLIT BODIES Defines Rezoned Data of Contact Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTIONING (Rezoning) Define Sections for Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTIVITY CHANGE Define or Change Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GEOMETRY CHANGE Specify New Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORIENTATION CHANGE Redefine Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GAP DATA CHANGE Redefine Gap Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORDINATE CHANGE Redefine Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFRORD Use Subroutine UFRORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVE (Rezoning) Redefine Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACT CHANGE Change Surface Contact after Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning) Select Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
URCONN Invoke User Subroutine URCONN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTINUE (Rezoning) End Rezoning Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END REZONE End Input for Rezoning Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1741
1742
1743
1744
1746
1747
1749
1751

1756
1757
1758
1759
1761
1762
1766
1768
1770
1771
1772
1773
1779
1781
1782
1783

Program Messages

Marc Exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 1-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 1001-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 2001-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 3001-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 4001-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 5001-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Numbers 9001-10000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1785
1785
1791
1793
1796
1799
1801
1803

Contents 23

Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option

Estimating Workspace Sizes for Marc Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1806

I/O With Marc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1807

Estimating File Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1808

Running Marc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1810

Examples of Running Marc Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1817

Default File

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model Definition Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control File

Environment Variables

Material Database

Flow Line File Format

3-D Remeshing Files

Units

Tables of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameters List

Options List

1820
1820

1834

Marc Volume C: Program Input


Preface

Preface

About this Manual

Who Should Read this Manual

Other Marc Manuals

Chapter Contents

25

25
25

25

25 Marc Volume C: Program Input

About this Manual


This document describes the file format of the Marc input file. Its chapters and sections roughly parallel
the organization of that file. Appendices describe Marc program messages and provide an alphabetical
list of parameters and options for easy reference. Plus, at the beginning of each chapter is a list of the
parameters or options discussed in that particular chapter.

Who Should Read this Manual


This document is intended for current and new users of Marc. It does not purport to teach the use of Marc,
but is a reference to its specific functioning. Other Marc documents are listed below.

Other Marc Manuals


The Marc Reference Library includes:
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information
Marc Volume B: Element Library
Marc Volume C: Program Input
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines
Marc Volume E: Demonstrations Problems

Marc Users Guide


Marc Python Tutorial and Reference Manual
Marc Mentat Help Reference

Chapter Contents
Chapter 1

Introduction

introduces basic concepts of Marc


program input.

Chapter 2

Parameters

describes the options that are used in the


parameter section of the Marc input files.

Chapter 3

Model Definition Options

describes the options that are used in the


model definition section of the Marc
input files.

Chapter 4

History Definition Options

describes the options that are used for


displaying the results of the analysis.

Chapter 5

Rezoning Options

describes the options that are used in Marc


input files to specify load
history information.

Preface 26

Appendix A Program Messages

describes the messages one might see upon


termination of Marc.

Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing Option

details the running of Marc on


supported computers.

Appendix C Default File

lists the most commonly used parameters


and options put into a default file.

Appendix D Control File

describes how to create and use a control


file.

Appendix E Environment Variables

introduces user-controlled
environment variables.

Appendix F Material Database

describes how to enter new material into


the database.

Appendix G Flow Line File Format

provides the flow line format.

Appendix H 3-D Remeshing Files

provides how to view files within the GUI


for remeshing observation.

Appendix I

Units

provides tables for the International System


(SI) of units and conversation tables for
Imperial units from US units.

Appendix J

Parameters List

provides a complete alphabetical list of all


parameters and their associated
page numbers.

Appendix K Options List

provides a complete alphabetical list of all


program options and their associated
page numbers.

Chapter 1 Introduction
Marc Volume C: Program Input

Introduction

Formats in Marc

Input of List Items

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

38

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

49

28
29

Chapter 1 Introduction 28
Formats in Marc

This chapter contains a brief outline of the various data input options and problem solution setups which
are available to a Marc user. It highlights only a small segment of the total problem solution capability
available. You only have to select the options required for the solution of your problem. In addition, you
can further elect to use the many default and built-in conditions which have been provided in these
options.
This user-selection feature forms the basis for Marc and input data organization. Marc then provides a
solution capability based on your selection of options. Further details on Marcs organization can be
found in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Formats used by Marc are discussed in this chapter. A short description of the organization of the input
data is given, followed by an illustrative example particularly useful for new users. Selected portions of
the output generated by Marc are shown and discussed. The last section of this chapter summarizes the
input requirements for different classes of analyses.

Formats in Marc
Marc is written in FORTRAN, but does its own data conversion to avoid system aborts due to user data
errors. All input data files are read as alphanumeric and are converted to integer, floating point, or
keywords, as necessary. Marc issues error messages and displays the illegal image if it cannot interpret
the data field according to the specifications given in the manual. When such errors occur, Marc attempts
to scan the remainder of the data files and ends the run with an exit error message at the END OPTION
(or end file). Two conventions are allowed for input format controlfixed and free format. Fixed and
free format can be mixed within a data file, but on a single data line, only one type of format can be
entered. The syntax rules for each format type are as follows:

Fixed Field
1. Integers must be right-justified (right blank fill) in their fields.
2. Floating point numbers can be given with or without exponent. In either case, the mantissa must
contain a decimal point. If an exponent is given, it must be preceded by the character E or D and
must be right justified. The size of the number must lie in the range 10-72 to 1072.
Note that, in the this manual, integer fields are indicated as I and floating point numbers are indicated
as E or F and the allowable column field is specified.

Free Field
Data can be input in free field under the following syntax rules:
1. Each data block must contain the same number of data items that it would contain under standard
fixed format control as documented in this manual. Thus, for example, the 3rd data block of the
CONNECTIVITY option is given as (16I5); therefore, no more than 16 numbers can appear on a
data line in this data block under fixed or free field format. This syntax rule allows mixing of
fixed-field and free-field data in the data file, since the number of data blocks needed to input any
data list is the same in both cases.

29 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Input of List Items

2. Data items on a data line must be separated by a comma. This separator can be surrounded by an
arbitrary number of blanks. Within the data item itself, no embedded blanks can appear.
3. Floating point numbers can be given with or without exponent. In either case, the mantissa must
contain a decimal point. If an exponent is given, it must be preceded by the character E or D and
must immediately follow the mantissa (no embedded blanks). The size of the number must lie in
the range 10-35 to 1035.
4. Keywords must be typed exactly as written in the manual. Embedded blanks do not count as
separators here (for example, BEAM SECT is one word only).
5. Note that you must distinguish between a real and integer zero when entering data; the floating
point zero must contain a decimal point, as in Rule 3, above.
6. If a data line contains only one free-field data item, that item must be followed by a comma. Thus,
1 must be entered as 1, if it is the only data item on a data line.

Input of List Items


Marc requests that you input a list of items in association with certain program functions. These items,
as an example, can be a set of elements as in conjunction with the ISOTROPIC option, or a set of nodes
as in conjunction with the POINT LOAD option. There are 12 types of items that can be requested:
Element numbers

Points

Node numbers

Curves

Degree of freedom numbers

Surfaces

Integration point numbers

Bodies

Layer numbers

Edges

Increment numbers

Faces

A set of items can be expressed as a combination of one or more subsets. These subsets can be specified
in three different forms, depending on your convenience. The operations that can be performed between
subsets are:
AND
INTERSECT
EXCEPT

In forming a set, subsets are combined in binary operations going from left to right. Hence, a set can be
formed as:
1. SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2

which implies all items in SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2. Duplicate items are eliminated and the
resultant set is sorted.
2. SUBLIST1 INTERSECT SUBLIST2

which implies only those items occurring both in SUBLIST1 and SUBLIST2.

Chapter 1 Introduction 30
Input of List Items

3. SUBLIST1 EXCEPT SUBLIST2

which implies all items in SUBLIST1 except those which occur in SUBLIST2.
4. SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2 EXCEPT SUBLIST3 INTERSECT SUBLIST4

which implies take the items in SUBLIST1 and SUBLIST2 and remove those items that occur in
SUBLIST3. Then, if these items also occur in SUBLIST4, include them in the set.
The SUBLISTS can have the form:
1. A range of items can be specified as:
l TO m BY n

or
1 THROUGH M BY n

which implies items l through m by n; if BY n is not included, it is assumed to be BY 1. Note


that the range can be either increasing or decreasing.
2. A string of items can be specified as:
a1 a2 a3 ... an

which implies that n items are to be included. If continuation data is necessary, a C or


CONTINUE should be the last item on the data line.
3. A setname can be specified as:
MYSET

which implies that all items previously specified to be in the set MYSET are to be used. The items
in a set are specified using the DEFINE option.
In a list, edges and faces are entered as pairs (i:j) where i is the user element id and j is the edge id or
face id. The edge id/face id for the different element classes is given beginning on page 31.
There are two types of edge and face sets; those expressed in Marc convention or the Marc Mentat
convention. The edge/face id in Marc convention is one greater than the Marc Mentat convention.
For example, to specify edge 1 on elements 1 to 20, one would use:
1:1 TO 20:1

Sorted vs. Unsorted Lists


In Marc, most lists are sorted lists. That is, regardless of the order of the list items on the list line, Marc
returns these items sorted from lowest to highest. Unsorted lists are required in several places, however.
These places are:
1. List of nodes in the TYING option.
2. List of nodes in the SUPERINPUT and SUBSTRUCTURE option.
3. List of degrees of freedom in the FIXED DISP option.
When defining unsorted lists, the sublist connectors EXCEPT and INTERSECT cannot be used. Setnames
can be used as long as the sets themselves are unsorted. In Marc, degree of freedom sets are always

31 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Edges and Faces

unsorted. Unsorted node sets can be defined by using set type NDSQ (for node sequence) rather than set
type NODE (see the DEFINE model definition option).

Examples
Define subsets FLOOR, NWALL, WWALL
DEFINE NODE SET FLOOR
1 TO 5 (i.e. NODES 1,2,3,4,5)
DEFINE NODE SET NWALL
5 TO 15 BY 5 AND 20 to 22 (i.e. NODES 5,10,15,20,21,22)
DEFINE NODE SET WWALL
11 TO 20 (i.e. NODES 11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20)

Possible lists can be:


1. NWALL AND WWALL, which would contain nodes
5
16

10
17

11
18

12
19

13
20

14
21

15
22

2. NWALL INTERSECT WWALL, which would contain node


15

20

3. NWALL AND WWALL EXCEPT FLOOR, which would contain nodes:


10
16

11
17

12
18

13
19

14
20

15
21

22

Edges and Faces


Marc 2003 introduces the concept of edge ids and face ids that are used with the ATTACH EDGE,
ATTACH FACE, and edge and face sets. The edge and face ids follow two different conventions - either
Marc or Marc Mentat. The difference is that the Marc Mentat number is equal to the Marc number minus
one. The edge and face ids are dependent upon the element geometry and are shown below.
1-D 2-Node Elements
y
2
1

EDGE ID
1

NODES
12

Chapter 1 Introduction 32
Edges and Faces

1-D 3-Node Elements


3

EDGE ID
1

NODES
123

2
1
2-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Elements
4

3
EDGE ID
1
2
3
4

NODES
12
23
34
41

Load shown on EDGE ID 1


2-D 8-Node Quadrilateral Elements
4

EDGE ID
1
2
3
4

NODES
152
263
374
481

33 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Edges and Faces

2-D 3-Node Triangle


3

EDGE ID
1
2
3

NODES
12
23
31

EDGE ID
1
2
3

NODES
142
253
361

2-D 6-Node Triangle


3

3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral


4
3

1
2

EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6

NODES
12
23
31
14
24
34

Chapter 1 Introduction 34
Edges and Faces

3-D 6-Node Pentahedral


6
4

3
1
2

EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

NODES
12
23
31
45
56
64
14
25
36

EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

NODES
12
23
34
41
56
67
78
85
15
26
37
48

3-D 8-Node Brick


8
7

5
6
4

3
2

3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral


4
8

10
3

9
7
6

1
5
2

EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6

NODES
12 5
23 6
31 7
14 8
24 9
3 4 10

35 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Edges and Faces

3-D 20-Node Brick


8
16

15

EDGE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

20

13

14

6
17

19

4
12

11
18

3
9

10
2

NODES
12 9
2 3 10
3 4 11
4 1 12
5 6 13
6 7 14
7 8 15
8 5 16
1 5 17
2 6 18
3 7 19
4 8 20

3-D 3-Node Shell


z

FACE ID
1

NODES
123

1
y
x

3-D 4-Node Shell/Membrane


4

P
FACE ID
1
3

1
2

NODES
1234

Chapter 1 Introduction 36
Edges and Faces

3-D 6-Node Shell


3
P

FACE ID
1

NODES
123456

3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral


4
3

FACE ID
1
2
3
4

NODES
124
234
314
123

1
2
3-D 6-Node Pentahedral
6
4

3
1
2

FACE ID
1
2
3
4
5

NODES
1254
2365
3 1 4 6
132
456

37 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Edges and Faces

3-D 8-Node Brick


8
7

5
6
4

FACE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6

NODES
1265
2376
3487
4158
1234
6587

3
2

3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral


4

10

FACE ID
1
2
3
4

9
7
6

NODES
1 2 4 5 09 08
2 3 4 6 10 09
3 1 4 7 08 10
1 2 3 5 06 07

1
5
2
3-D 15-Node Pentahedral
3
15

FACE ID
1
2
3
4
5

6
8

9
11

12

13
4

14
10

NODES
1 2 5 04 07 14 10 13
2 3 6 05 08 15 11 14
3 1 4 06 09 13 12 15
3 2 1 08 07 09
4 5 6 10 11 12

Chapter 1 Introduction 38
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

3-D 20-Node Brick


8
16

15
7

20

13

14

6
17

19

4
12

11
18

FACE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6

NODES
1 2 6 5 09 18 13 17
2 3 7 6 10 19 14 18
3 4 8 7 11 20 15 19
4 1 5 8 12 17 16 20
1 2 3 4 09 10 11 12
6 5 8 7 13 16 15 14

3
9

10
2

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data


The input data for Marc is organized into three basic groups. These groups form a natural subdivision of
the data. Each group is then subdivided into various optional blocks of input data. The optional blocks of
data within each group have been organized to minimize the input of unnecessary data. The main idea is
to enable you to specify only the data for the optional blocks needed to define your problem. The various
blocks of input are referred to here as optional in the sense that many have built-in default values which
can be used and does not imply that they are optional in all cases. The input data is divided into the
following three groups:
Parameter Data
This group of data is used to allocate the necessary working space for the problem and to set up initial
switches which control the flow of Marc through the desired analysis. This set of input data is terminated
with END parameter data.
Model Definition Data
This set of data is used to read in the initial loading, geometry, and material data of the model. It also
provides nodal point data such a boundary conditions. In general, the initial model data is provided in this
group and control restart. Print options can also be specified here for further Marc processing. This data
provides Marc with the necessary information for determination of an initial elastic solution (zero
increment solution in Marc terminology). This group of data is terminated with END OPTION data.
History Definition Data
This group of data provide the load incrementation and control of Marc after the initial elastic analysis.
The group also includes blocks which allow changes in the initial model specifications. Each set of load
incrementation data is terminated with CONTINUE data. This data sends Marc back for another increment
or series of increments if the auto incrementation features are requested.

39 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

Input data file organization for Marc is shown in Figure 1-1.

Linear Analysis

Linear and Nonlinear Analysis


Requiring Incrementation

Proportional
Increment
Auto Load
Etc.

Connectivity
Coordinates
Fixed Displacements
Etc.

Title
Sizing
Etc.

Figure 1-1

Model
Definition

Parameter

Marc Input Data File

Typical Marc Problem Data Files


Marc Parameter Data
END Data

Marc Model Definition Data


(Zero Increment)
END OPTION Data

Marc History Definition Data


for the First Increment
CONTINUE Data

(Additional History Definition Data


for the 2nd, 3rd, ..., Increments)

History
Definition

Chapter 1 Introduction 40
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

Marc Input for New Users


Marc input format is designed to allow the input of very complex problems. The new user is, however,
faced with gaining familiarity with the system and its conventions. At the outset, therefore, you should
adopt a systematic approach to the preparation of input data. One approach is to follow the construction
of Marc and adopt the procedure of preparing input for each of the data blocks (parameter, model
definition, and history definition options) in turn.
We shall illustrate our discussion by preparing input for the analysis of a thin plate with hole subjected
to pressure loading. The problem, as shown in Figure 1-2, is a well-known one so that the results can be
compared to the exact solution (Timoshenko, Theory of Elasticity). The hole/plate size ratio is chosen to
approximate an infinite plate. A procedure preparing Marc input takes the following steps:
Finite Element Modeling
The plate has an outside dimension of 10 inches x 10 inches with a central hole of 1 inch radius. The
thickness of the plate is assumed to be 0.1 inches and the material property is assumed to be isotropic and
linear elastic. The Youngs modulus is 30 x 106 pounds per square inch (psi) with Poissons ratio of 0.3.
These quantities are sufficient to define the behavior of an isotropic, linear-elastic material.
= 1.0 psi

10 in.

R = 1.0 in.

10 in.
Plate Thickness = 0.1 in.
E = 30 X 106 psi

Figure 1-2

Plate with Hole

As shown in Figure 1-2, due to symmetry conditions, only a quarter of the plate is analyzed. Prescribed
displacement boundary conditions exist along the lines of symmetry (that is, u = 0 at line x = 0; v = 0 at
line y = 0) and traction (pressure) boundary condition exits at the top of the plate.

41 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

This quarter plate is approximated by a finite element mesh consisting of twenty 8-node plane stress
elements with appropriate loading and boundary conditions. The element (Marc type 26) is a secondorder, isoparametric two-dimensional element for plane stress. There are eight nodes with two
translational degrees of freedom at each node. A description of element type 26 can be found in Marc
Volume B: Element Library.
This example uses a coarse mesh for demonstration purposes only. The analyst must anticipate the sharp
stress gradients in this problem and design the mesh accordingly. This is achieved in this problem by
using progressively smaller elements as the hole is approached. If necessary, further mesh refinement can
be achieved by adding elements to the mesh.
The preparation of parameter, model definition, and history definition data for this example is
demonstrated as follows:
Parameter Data
The analysis to be carried out in this example is a linear elastic analysis with plots. Consequently, only
five parameters are needed for the input data:
TITLE
ELEMENTS
SIZING
END

In this example, the title, Elastic Analysis of a Thin Plate with Hole, is chosen for the problem and entered
through the TITLE parameter.
The selected Marc element type 26 is entered through the ELEMENTS parameter.
No data is required on the SIZING parameter:
Finally, the parameters are completed with an END parameter.
At this stage, the input data is:
TITLE
ELASTIC ANALYSIS OF A THIN PLATE WITH HOLE
SIZING
ELEMENTS,26,
END
Model Definition Data
The model definition data contains the bulk data for the analysis. The data entered here concerns:
1. the topology of the model (finite element mesh in terms of element connectivity and nodal
coordinates, as well as plate thickness),
2. material property (Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio),

Chapter 1 Introduction 42
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

3. pressure loading and prescribed displacement boundary conditions, and


4. plotting and output controls.
A list of the model definition options can be found in Chapter 3 of this document.
1. Topology of the Model
The topology of the plate model is numerically defined by the following model definition options:
CONNECTIVITY
COORDINATES
GEOMETRY

In this example, the mesh consists of 20 elements and 79 nodes. The data required for element
connectivity and nodal coordinates are:
CONNECTIVITY
20
1
26
1
2
26
3
3
26
9
4
26
11
5
26
5
6
26
3
7
26
30
8
26
32
9
26
38
10
26
40
11
26
1
12
26
47
13
26
9
14
26
53
15
26
49
16
26
47
17
26
30
18
26
69
19
26
38
20
26
75
COORDINATES
0
0
1
1.4000
2
1.5500
3
1.7000
.
.
.
77
0.0000
78
0.4931
79
0.0000

3
5
11
13
3
1
32
34
40
42
9
53
17
59
64
66
38
75
29
66

11
13
19
21
27
29
40
42
27
25
53
55
59
61
66
29
75
77
66
64

9
11
17
19
25
27
38
40
29
27
47
49
53
55
47
1
69
71
75
77

2
4
10
12
4
2
31
33
39
41
6
50
14
56
62
63
35
72
43
78

7
8
15
16
23
24
36
37
44
45
52
54
58
60
65
67
74
76
67
65

10
12
18
20
26
28
39
41
28
26
50
51
56
57
63
24
72
73
78
79

6
7
14
15
22
23
35
36
43
44
46
48
52
54
48
46
68
70
74
76

1.4000
1.0500
0.7000

1.2500
1.1910
1.3750

The data in the CONNECTIVITY option consists of element numbers (1,2,...,19,20), element type
(26), and for each element, four corner node numbers and four midside node numbers.

43 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

The data in the COORDINATES option consists of the node number (1); and coordinates (x = 1.4,
y = 1.4) of node 1 in the global coordinate system (x, y).
Finally, the plate thickness is entered through GEOMETRY as:
GEOMETRY
0,
0.1,
1 TO 20
A thickness of 0.1 inches is assumed for all twenty (1 to 20) elements.
2. Material Property
Material properties of the plate are entered through the ISOTROPIC option. For our problem, the only
data required for a linear elastic analysis are Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio. The same material is
used for the whole mesh (from Element No. 1 to Element No. 20). This is given a material ID of 1. The
data in ISOTROPIC is:
ISOTROPIC
1,
1,
30.E6,0.3,
1 TO 20
3. Pressure Loading and Prescribed Displacement Boundary Conditions
As shown in Figure 1-3, the pressure loading is acted on two elements (elements 13 and 14), along the
lines 61-60-59 and 59-58-17.
From CONNECTIVITY, we observe that these lines represent the 2-6-3 face of the elements. As a result,
a distributed load type of 8 can be determined for the pressure loading from the QUICK REFERENCE
of element 26 in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
"LOAD TYPE (IBODY)=8 FOR UNIFORM PRESSURE ON 2-6-3 FACE"
In addition, as shown in Figure 1-4, the sign conversion of the pressure loading is that a negative
magnitude represents a tensile distributed load. Consequently, the input for the one pound tensile
distributed loading (DIST LOADS) acting on elements 13 and 14 takes the following form:
DIST LOADS
0,
8,-1.,
13,14,

Chapter 1 Introduction 44
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

60

61

57

59

58

14

17

13
16

55

12

51

11

19

49
62
64
79
77
73
71

15
20
18

16
19
17 9
7
8 10

20

5 in.

4
5

34 37424525 22 5

2
5 in.
8

13

16

21

Radius of the
hole = 1 in.
x

Figure 1-3
4

Mesh Layout for Plate with Hole


7

Figure 1-4

Integration Points of Eight-Node, 2-D Element

The FIXED DISP option is used for the input of prescribed displacement boundary conditions at the lines
of symmetry (x = 0, y = 0). As indicated in the QUICK REFERENCE of element 26, the nodal degrees
of freedom are as follows:
dof 1 = u = global x-direction displacement
dof 2 = v = global y-direction displacement.

45 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

In this example, the symmetry conditions require that:


dof 1 = u = 0 for nodes (71, 73, 77, 79, 64, 62, 49, 51, 55, 57, 61)
along the line x=0.

and
dof 2 = v = 0 for nodes (34, 37, 42, 45, 25, 22, 5, 8, 13, 16, 21)
along the line y=0.

The input data takes the following format:


FIXED DISP
2,
0.,
2,
34,37,42,45,25,22,5,8,13,16,21,
0.,
1,
71,73,77,79,64,62,49,51,55,57,61,
4. Bandwidth Optimization and Output Controls
Although the bandwidth in this sample problem cannot be extremely large, the use of the OPTIMIZE
model definition option demonstrates the bandwidth optimization capabilities in Marc. This option can
reduce considerable computing costs in larger problems. The bandwidth optimization option creates an
internal node numbering different from your node numbering, but all data input and output is in your
node numbering system.
There are a number of options available to you for bandwidth optimization. The option number 2
(Cuthill-McKee algorithm) with a maximum of ten iterations is selected for this example.
OPTIMIZE,2,0,0,1,
10,
In order to minimize the output quantity (number of printed pages), the PRINT ELEMENT option is used
for printing out stresses and strains at a few integration points of a number of elements. The elements to
be printed are:
From Element

to

Element

10

10

Only two integration points (numbers 4 and 6) where stresses and strains are to be printed. Nodal
quantities (displacement, reactions, etc.) are printed for all nodes (from node 1 to node 79). The input
data of PRINT ELEMENT is:
PRINT ELEMENT
1,

Chapter 1 Introduction 46
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

STRESS STRAIN
2,4,5,8,10
4,6,
The SUMMARY option produces summary tables containing maximum and minimum values of stresses
and strains.
The model definition data is completed with an END OPTION.
History Definition Data
This following example is a linear-elastic analysis which requires no incrementation data.
title
elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole
sizing
elements
26
end
connectivity
20
1
26
1
3
11
9
2
7
10
6
2
26
3
5
13
11
4
8
12
7
3
26
9
11
19
17
10
15
18
14
4
26
11
13
21
19
12
16
20
15
5
26
5
3
27
25
4
23
26
22
6
26
3
1
29
27
2
24
28
23
7
26
30
32
40
38
31
36
39
35
8
26
32
34
42
40
33
37
41
36
9
26
38
40
27
29
39
44
28
43
10
26
40
42
25
27
41
45
26
44
11
26
1
9
53
47
6
52
50
46
12
26
47
53
55
49
50
54
51
48
13
26
9
17
59
53
14
58
56
52
14
26
53
59
61
55
56
60
57
54
15
26
49
64
66
47
62
65
63
48
16
26
47
66
29
1
63
67
24
46
17
26
30
38
75
69
35
74
72
68
18
26
69
75
77
71
72
76
73
70
19
26
38
29
66
75
43
67
78
74
20
26
75
66
64
77
78
65
79
76
coordinates
0
0
1
1.4000
1.4000
2
1.5500
1.0500
3
1.7000
0.7000
4
1.8500
0.3500
5
2.0000
0.0000
6
2.3000
2.3000
7
2.5250
1.1500
8
2.7500
0.0000
9
3.2000
3.2000
10
3.2750
2.4000
11
3.3500
1.6000
12
3.4250
0.8000
13
3.5000
0.0000

47 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

4.1000
4.1750
4.2500
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
1.7500
1.4900
1.2300
1.5000
1.3900
1.2800
1.1700
1.0600
0.7070
0.8315
0.9238
0.9810
1.0000
0.7953
1.0129
1.1250
0.8835
1.0008
1.1019
1.1855
1.2500
0.9718
1.1910
1.3750
1.0500
0.7000
0.3500
0.0000
1.1500
0.0000
2.4000
1.6000
0.8000
0.0000
2.0500
0.0000
3.7500
2.5000
1.2500
0.0000
0.0000
0.6150
0.0000
0.2650
0.5300
0.7950

4.1000
2.0500
0.0000
5.0000
3.7500
2.5000
1.2500
0.0000
0.0000
0.6150
1.2300
0.0000
0.2650
0.5300
0.7950
1.0600
0.7070
0.5557
0.3825
0.1948
0.0000
0.7953
0.4194
0.0000
0.8835
0.6753
0.4562
0.2299
0.0000
0.9718
0.4931
0.0000
1.5500
1.7000
1.8500
2.0000
2.5250
2.7500
3.2750
3.3500
3.4250
3.5000
4.1750
4.2500
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
5.0000
1.7500
1.4900
1.5000
1.3900
1.2800
1.1700

Chapter 1 Introduction 48
Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

68
0.5557
0.8315
69
0.3825
0.9238
70
0.1948
0.9810
71
0.0000
1.0000
72
0.4194
1.0129
73
0.0000
1.1250
74
0.6753
1.0008
75
0.4562
1.1019
76
0.2299
1.1855
77
0.0000
1.2500
78
0.4931
1.1910
79
0.0000
1.3750
geometry
1
0.1
1 to 20
isotropic
1
1
30000000.
.3
1 to 20
dist loads
1
8 -1.
13
14
fixed displacement
2
0.0000e+00
2
34
37
42
45
25
0.0000e+00
1
71
73
77
79
64
optimize,2,0,0,1,
10,
print element
1
stress strain
2
4
5
8
10
4
6
end option

22

13

16

21

62

49

51

55

57

61

49 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users


Selected portions of the output for this problem are shown in the following. The small type on the output
are the authors comments and gives a further explanation.
Marc first gives a notes section which identifies the version of Marc being used. This is followed by an
echo of the input data and a summary of program sizing and options requested.
W
W
MMMMM
MMMMM
WWWWW
WWWWW
MMMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWW
WWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWW
WWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWW
MMMMMM
MMMMMMMMMMM
MMMMMM
WWWWWW
WWWWWWWWWWW
WWWWWW
MMMM
MMMMMMM
MMMM
WWWW
WWWWWWW
WWWW
MM
MMM
MM
WW
WWW
WW
M
M
M
W
W
W
MM
MMM
MM
WW
WWW
WW
MMMM
MMMMMMM
MMMM
WWWW
WWWWWWW
WWWW
MMMMMM
MMMMMMMMMMM
MMMMMM
WWWWWW
WWWWWWWWWWW
WWWWWW
MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWWWWWW
WWWWWWWWWWWWW
MMMMMMMMM
MMMMMMMMM
WWWWWWWWW
WWWWWWWWW
MMMMM
MMMMM
WWWWW
WWWWW
M
M
Marc REVISION 2010
MSC.SOFTWARE CORPORATION
machine type: NT
(c) COPYRIGHT 2010 MSC.Software Corporation, all rights reserved

Marc - N T

Chapter 1 Introduction 50
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

i n p u t
p a g e

d a t a

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------title
prob e2.9 elastic analysis
title
plate with hole
title
prob e2.9 elastic analysis - elmt 26
sizing
card
5
elements,26,
processor,1,1,1,
version,10,
end
connectivity
card
10
20
1
26
1
3
11
9
2
7
10
6
2
26
3
5
13
11
4
8
12
7
3
26
9
11
19
17
10
15
18
14
4
26
11
13
21
19
12
16
20
15
card
15
5
26
5
3
27
25
4
23
26
22
6
26
3
1
29
27
2
24
28
23
7
26
30
32
40
38
31
36
39
35
8
26
32
34
42
40
33
37
41
36
9
26
38
40
27
29
39
44
28
43
card
20
10
26
40
42
25
27
41
45
26
44
11
26
1
9
53
47
6
52
50
46
12
26
47
53
55
49
50
54
51
48
13
26
9
17
59
53
14
58
56
52
14
26
53
59
61
55
56
60
57
54
card
25
15
26
49
64
66
47
62
65
63
48
16
26
47
66
29
1
63
67
24
46
17
26
30
38
75
69
35
74
72
68
18
26
69
75
77
71
72
76
73
70
19
26
38
29
66
75
43
67
78
74
card
30
20
26
75
66
64
77
78
65
79
76
coordinates
2
79
1
1.4000
1.4000
2
1.5500
1.0500
card
35
3
1.7000
0.7000
4
1.8500
0.3500
5
2.0000
0.0000
6
2.3000
2.3000
7
2.5250
1.1500
card
40
8
2.7500
0.0000
9
3.2000
3.2000
10
3.2750
2.4000
11
3.3500
1.6000
12
3.4250
0.8000
card
45
13
3.5000
0.0000
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
p a g e

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------14
4.1000
4.1000
15
4.1750
2.0500
16
4.2500
0.0000
17
5.0000
5.0000
card
50
18
5.0000
3.7500
19
5.0000
2.5000
20
5.0000
1.2500
21
5.0000
0.0000
22
1.7500
0.0000

51 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

card

55

23
1.4900
0.6150
24
1.2300
1.2300
25
1.5000
0.0000
26
1.3900
0.2650
27
1.2800
0.5300
card
60
28
1.1700
0.7950
29
1.0600
1.0600
30
0.7070
0.7070
31
0.8315
0.5557
32
0.9238
0.3825
card
65
33
0.9810
0.1948
34
1.0000
0.0000
35
0.7953
0.7953
36
1.0129
0.4194
37
1.1250
0.0000
card
70
38
0.8835
0.8835
39
1.0008
0.6753
40
1.1019
0.4562
41
1.1855
0.2299
42
1.2500
0.0000
card
75
43
0.9718
0.9718
44
1.1910
0.4931
45
1.3750
0.0000
46
1.0500
1.5500
47
0.7000
1.7000
card
80
48
0.3500
1.8500
49
0.0000
2.0000
50
1.1500
2.5250
51
0.0000
2.7500
52
2.4000
3.2750
card
85
53
1.6000
3.3500
54
0.8000
3.4250
55
0.0000
3.5000
56
2.0500
4.1750
57
0.0000
4.2500
card
90
58
3.7500
5.0000
59
2.5000
5.0000
60
1.2500
5.0000
61
0.0000
5.0000
62
0.0000
1.7500
card
95
63
0.6150
1.4900
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
p a g e

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------64
0.0000
1.5000
65
0.2650
1.3900
66
0.5300
1.2800
67
0.7950
1.1700
card 100
68
0.5557
0.8315
69
0.3825
0.9238
70
0.1948
0.9810
71
0.0000
1.0000
72
0.4194
1.0129
card 105
73
0.0000
1.1250
74
0.6753
1.0008
75
0.4562
1.1019
76
0.2299
1.1855
77
0.0000
1.2500
card 110
78
0.4931
1.1910
79
0.0000
1.3750
isotropic
card

115

1
0.300e+08 0.300e+00 0.000e+00 0.000e+00 0.100e+21 0.000e+00

Chapter 1 Introduction 52
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

card

120

card

125

card

130

3
16

4
17

5
18

6
19

7
20

10

11

12

13

14

geometry
1
1.
1 to 20
fixed displacement
0.0000e+00
2
34
37
42
0.0000e+00
1
71
73
77
dist loads

45

25

22

13

16

21

79

64

62

49

51

55

57

61

8
-1.000
13
14
summary
card 135
optimize,2,0,0,1,
10,
print element
1
stress strain
card 140
2
4
5
8
10
4
6
post
16
17
2
0
19
17
equivalent von mises stress
card 145
11
1st comp of total stress
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
p a g e

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------12
2nd comp of total stress
13
3rd comp of total stress
end option
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*************************************************
*************************************************
program sizing and options requested as follows
element type requested*************************
number of elements in mesh*********************
number of nodes in mesh************************
max number of elements in any dist load list***
maximum number of point loads******************
load correction flagged or set************
number of lists of distributed loads***********
values stored at all integration points****
tape no.for input of coordinates + connectivity
no.of different materials
1 max.no of slopes
number of points on shell section *************
new style input format will be used*********
maximum number of set names is*****************
number of processors used *********************
Marc input version ************************
end of parameters and sizing
*************************************************
*************************************************

26
20
79
2
0
3
5
5
11
50
1
10

15

53 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

At this stage, Marc attempts to allocate core for input of the model definition data and assembly of the
element stiffness matrix. Marc first prints out the key to strain, stress, and displacement output for each
element type chosen. Column numbers identifying output quantities are referenced to the appropriate
components of stress, strain, or displacement. Then, the required number of words is printed out followed
by a list of the internal core allocation parameters. They reflect the maximum requirements imposed by
different elements. The internal element variables are different for each element type and are repeated for
each element type used in a given analysis.
key to stress, strain and displacement output

element type

26

8-node isoparametric plane stress quadrilateral


stresses and strains in global directions
1=xx
2=yy
3=xy
displacements in global directions
1=u global x direction
2=v global y direction
workspace needed for input and stiffness assembly
internal core allocation parameters
degrees of freedom per node (ndeg) 2
max. number of coordinates per node
2
max. nodes per element (nnodmx) 8
max. invariants per int. points (neqst) 1
max.stress components per int. point (nstrmx)
strains per integration point (ngens) 3

53059

flag for element storage (ielsto) 0


elements in core, words per element (nelsto)
total space required
vectors in core, total space required

1046
20920
6004

words per record on disk set to

40960

internal element variables

internal element number 1 library code type 26


number of nodes= 8
stresses stored per integration point =
direct continuum components stored = 2
shear continuum components stored = 1
shell/beam flag = 0

Chapter 1 Introduction 54
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

curvilinear coord. flag = 0


int.points for elem. stiffness 9
number of local inertia directions 2
int.point for print if all points not flagged 5
int. points for dist. surface loads (pressure) 3
library code type = 26
large disp. row counts
4
4
7
residual load correction is invoked

For nonlinear problems, it is important to note if the residual load correction was turned on. this is
automatically done in the current version.
This is followed by the model definition data; how it is read and interpreted by Marc. Marc then
calculates the bandwidth of the stiffness matrix and optimizes it if the OPTIMIZE model definition option
is included. The original bandwidth (try 0) and the optimized bandwidth (try 10).
direct symmetric profile solver is invoked for region
maximum connectivity in stiffness matrix is

17 at node

75

workspace needed for optimizing =


45562
maximum sky-line including fill-in is526at try 0(forward numbering)
maximum sky-line including fill-in is1128at try10(backward numbering)
maximum sky-line including fill-in is1307at try10(forward numbering)
maximum sky-line including fill-in is900at try10(backward numbering)
maximum connectivity in stiffness matrix is

maximum half-bandwidth is

26

14 at node

between nodes

21

40

and

number of profile entries including fill-in is

900

number of profile entries excluding fill-in is

546

total workspace needed with in-core matrix storage =

61121

load increments for each degree of freedom


summed over the whole model
from distributed loads
dist. loads on undeformed configuration - increments for dist. loads
increments for point loads
0.000000E+00
5.000000E+00
point loads
0.000000E+00

0.000000E+00

start of assembly
wall time =

cycle number is
2.00

start of matrix solution


wall time =
2.00

46

55 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

singularity ratio

1.8140E-01

end of matrix solution


wall time =
2.00

element with highest stress relative to yield is


where equivalent stress is 3.091E-20 of yield

NT version
Marc 2010
output for increment

0. "prob e2.9 elastic analysis - elmt 26"

total strain energy


within which:
elastic strain energy
plastic strain energy
total ext-force work
within which:
work by appl. force/disp.
work by contact forces
work by frictional forces

is

4.60569E-07

is
is
is

4.60569E-07
0.00000E+00
4.60569E-07

is
is
is

4.60569E-07
0.00000E+00
0.00000E+00

After the bandwidth calculation (and optimization), Marc assigns the necessary workspace for the in-core
solution of this matrix.
maximum connectivity is
14 at node
40
maximum half-bandwidth is
26 between nodes
21 and
46
number of profile entries including fill-in is
900
number of profile entries excluding fill-in is
546
total workspace needed with in-core matrix storage = 60117

Marc then calculates the loading and sums the load applied to each degree of freedom for distributed
loads and point loads. This information provides for a valuable check on the total loads in the different
degrees of freedom.
load increments associated with each degree of freedom
summed over the whole model
distributed loads
0.000e+00 5.000e-01
point loads
0.000e+00 0.000e-00
load increments associated with each degree of freedom
summed over the whole model
distributed loads
0.000e+00 5.000e-01
point loads
0.000e+00 0.000e-00

Chapter 1 Introduction 56
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

Then it prints the time (system billing units) at the start of assembly measured from the start of the job.
It then prints out the bandwidth which might have changed due to optimization of the nodal numbering
(if specified by you). This is followed by a printout of the time at the start of the matrix solution
start
time
start
time

of assembly
=
0.18
of matrix solution
=
0.24

If the out-of-core solver is used, a figure representing the profile of the global stiffness matrix is shown.
It then prints the following message which gives an estimate of the conditioning of the matrix. If the
singularity is of the order of the accuracy of the machine (10 for 64 bits), the equations can be considered
singular and the solution unreliable. For nonlinear problems, incremental changes in the singularity ratio
reflects approaching instabilities. Marc then prints the time at the end of the matrix solution. This is the
time at the end of matrix triangularization.

singularity ratio
1.8140e-01
end of matrix solution
time =
0.25
At this stage, Marc enters a back substitution for the displacements. This is followed by calculation of
element stress values. Default yield stress is set by Marc for a linear elastic analysis.

MARC 2010, 01/03/07, output for increment


0.
plate with hole
element with highest stress relative to yield is
0.309e-19 of yield

elastic analysis of a thin


8

where equivalent stress is

A heading is printed next. The Tresca Intensity is output for application in ASME code applications. The
Mises intensity is the equivalent yield stress. Principal stress and strain values are output. This is followed
by individual stress and strain components. The number of each column is to be used with the key printed
at the beginning of the analysis.
tresca
mises
mean
p r i n c i p a l
v a l u e s
o m p o n e n t s
intensity intensity normal minimum intermediate maximum
1
5
6

p h y s i c a l
2

intensity
element
20 point
4
integration pt. coordinate=
0.234e+00
0.121e+01
section thickness = 0.100e+00
engsts 5.802e-01 5.413e-01-1.342e-01-4.914e-01 0.000e+00 8.880e-02-4.531e-01 5.052e-02-1.440e-01
engstn 2.514e-08 1.550e-08-3.131e-09-1.727e-08 0.000e+00 7.874e-09-1.561e-08 6.215e-09-1.248e-08
element
20 point
6
integration pt. coordinate=
0.261e+00
0.137e+01
section thickness = 0.100e+00
engsts 6.055e-01 5.255e-01-2.275e-02-3.369e-01 0.000e+00 2.686e-01-2.677e-01 1.995e-01-1.926e-01
engstn 2.624e-08 1.518e-08-5.307e-10-1.391e-08 0.000e+00 1.232e-08-1.092e-08 9.326e-09-1.669e-08

The stress and strain results are followed by the increment of displacements and the total displacements
for all the nodes. If it is requested to print and store all stress points, a printout of the reaction forces would
follow the displacement output.

57 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

n o d a l

p o i n t

i n c r e m e n t a l
1 -2.17163e-08

7.15861e-08

4 -4.76926e-08
7 -4.39062e-08

1.49932e-08
4.43055e-08

d a t a

d i s p l a c e m e n t s

2 -3.08177e-08

5.15029e-08

3 -4.07290e-08

3.20392e-

08
5 -5.04297e-08
8 -5.45603e-08

t o t a l
1 -2.17163e-08

7.15861e-08

4 -4.76926e-08
7 -4.39062e-08

1.49932e-08
4.43055e-08

0.
0.

6 -2.76616e-08
9 -3.22702e-08

9.27126e-08
1.16274e-07

d i s p l a c e m e n t s
2 -3.08177e-08

5.15029e-08

3 -4.07290e-08

3.20392e-

08
5 -5.04297e-08
8 -5.45603e-08

0.
0.

6 -2.76616e-08
9 -3.22702e-08

9.27126e-08
1.16274e-07

total equivalent nodal forces (distributed plus point loads)


1
4
7

0.
0.
0.

0.
0.
0.

2
5
8

0.
0.
0.

0.
0.
0.

3
6
9

0.
0.
0.

0.
0.
0.

reaction forces at fixed boundary conditions, residual load correction elsewhere


1

1.21431e-17 -3.61690e-16

1.24033e-16 -1.11022e-16

3 -1.86483e-16

9.54098e-

1.31839e-16

1.42247e-16

5 -4.68375e-17 -4.27307e-02

6 -7.19910e-17

1.66533e-

7 -5.20417e-18

1.11022e-16

17
16
8 -3.96005e-17 -0.11445

9 -1.72388e-17

summary of externally applied loads


0.00000e+00
-0.72045e-17

0.50000e+00
summary of reaction/residual forces
-0.50000e+00

The results are concluded with an indication of the magnitude of distributed loads.

distributed load
list number
1

type
8

current
magnitude
-1.000

0.

0.

1.04083e-16

Chapter 1 Introduction 58
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

The SUMMARY model definition option prompts Marc to print summary tables of stresses and strains
as follows:

************************************************************************
************************************************************************
*
*
*
elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole
*
*
*
*
increment
0
MARC 2010
*
*
*
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
quantity
*
value
* elem.* int.*layer*
*
*
*number*point*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of stress
* 0.52712e+00 *
7 * 2 *
1 *
* min first comp. of stress
* -0.11257e+01 *
18 * 7 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of stress
* 0.31370e+01 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min second comp. of stress
* -0.75958e-01 *
18 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max third comp. of stress
* 0.15887e+00 *
18 * 1 *
1 *
* min third comp. of stress
* -0.84812e+00 *
7 * 3 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
equivalent
stress
* 0.30910e+01 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
equivalent
stress
* 0.26979e+00 *
17 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
mean
stress
* 0.10821e+01 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
mean
stress
* -0.38696e+00 *
18 * 7 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
tresca
stress
* 0.31419e+01 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
tresca
stress
* 0.29647e+00 *
17 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of total strain
* 0.58578e-08 *
7 * 1 *
1 *
* min first comp. of total strain
* -0.37172e-07 *
18 * 7 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of total strain
* 0.10347e-06 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min second comp. of total strain
* 0.34023e-08 *
17 * 7 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max third comp. of total strain
* 0.13769e-07 *
18 * 1 *
1 *
* min third comp. of total strain
* -0.73504e-07 *
7 * 3 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
equivalent
total strain
* 0.87678e-07 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
equivalent
total strain
* 0.77458e-08 *
17 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
mean
total strain
* 0.00000e+00 *
1 * 1 *
1 *
* min
mean
total strain
* 0.00000e+00 *
1 * 1 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************

59 Marc Volume C: Program Input


Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

The message end of increment 0 signifies the end of analysis for 0th increment. Additional output
concerns only with post plottings. The output is finally concluded by plot messages, since plotting
was requested.

************************************************************************
************************************************************************
*
*
*
elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole
*
*
*
*
increment
0
MARC 2010
*
*
*
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
quantity
*
value
* elem.* int.*layer*
*
*
*number*point*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max
tresca
total strain
* 0.13162e-06 *
8 * 3 *
1 *
* min
tresca
total strain
* 0.12847e-07 *
17 * 4 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max temperature
* 0.00000e+00 *
1 * 1 *
1 *
* min temperature
* 0.00000e+00 *
1 * 1 *
1 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************
************************************************************************

Chapter 1 Introduction 60
Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

******************************************************************
******************************************************************
*
*
*
elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole
*
*
increment
0
Marc 2010
*
*
*
******************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
quantity
*
value
* node *
*
*
* number *
*
*
*
*
******************************************************************
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of incremental disp * -0.19968e-08 *
48 *
* min first comp. of incremental disp * -0.73223e-07 *
21 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of incremental disp *
0.20382e-06 *
61 *
* min second comp. of incremental disp *
0.14872e-07 *
26 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of total disp.
* -0.19968e-08 *
48 *
* min first comp. of total disp.
* -0.73223e-07 *
21 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of total disp.
*
0.20382e-06 *
61 *
* min second comp. of total disp.
*
0.14872e-07 *
26 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max first comp. of reaction force
*
0.12293e-01 *
73 *
* min first comp. of reaction force
* -0.13867e-01 *
57 *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* max second comp. of reaction force
* -0.13839e-01 *
34 *
* min second comp. of reaction force
* -0.11445e+00 *
8 *
*
*
*
*
******************************************************************
******************************************************************

e n d
o f
time =

i n c r e m e n t
1.17

The Marc exit number 3004 indicates the problem is completed.

Marc Volume C: Program Input


Chapter 2 Parameters List

Parameters List

Parameter

Page

$NO LIST

80

ABLATION

126

ACCUMULATE

157

ACOUSTIC

134

ADAPTIVE

87

ALIAS

158

ALL POINTS

149

ALLOCATE

70

APPBC

156

ASSUMED STRAIN

107

AUTOMSET

186

AUTOSPC

188

BEAM SECT

191

BEARING

129

Chapter 2 Parameters List 62

Parameter

Page

BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

181

BUCKLE

112

CAVITY

138

CENTROID

148

COMMENT

162

CONSTANT DILATATION

106

COUPLE

116

CREEP

113

CURING

128

DECOUPLING

117

DESIGN OPTIMIZATION

86

DESIGN SENSITIVITY

85

DIFFUSION

125

DIST LOADS

176

DYNAMIC

91

ELASTIC

84

ELASTICITY

108

ELECTRO

130

ELEMENTS

73

EL-MA

132

ELSTO

169

END

82

EXTENDED

81

FEATURE

75

FILMS

178

FINITE

105

FLUID

118

63 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Parameter

Page

FLUXES

177

FOLLOW FOR

110

FOURIER

90

HARMONIC

93

HEAT

122

IBOOC

171

INCLUDE

173

INPUT TAPE

168

IO-DEACTIVATE

189

ISTRESS

154

JOULE

124

LARGE DISP

98

LARGE STRAIN

99

LINEAR

89

LOAD COR

150

LUMP

155

MACHINING

140

MAGNETO

131

MNF

143

MPC-CHECK

185

NEW

160

NO ECHO

172

NO LOADCOR

151

NOTES

167

OOC

170

Chapter 2 Parameters List 64

Parameter

Page

PIEZO

133

PLASTICITY

109

PORE

120

PREALLOC
PRINT
PROCESSOR

72
163
77

PYROLYSIS

127

RADIATION

135

RBE

139

RESPONSE

95

RESTRICTOR

179

REZONING

142

R-P FLOW

96

SCALE

152

SHELL SECT

182

SIZING

71

SPFLOW

97

SS-ROLLING

94

STATE VARS

175

STOP

166

STRUCTURAL

115

SUPER

144

TABLE

161

THERMAL

153

TIE

184

TITLE

69

TSHEAR

183

T-T-T

121

65 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Parameter
UNIT

Page
79

UPDATE

104

USER

145

VERSION

74

VISCO ELAS

114

WELDING

180

Chapter 2: Parameters
Marc Volume C: Program Input

Parameters

Basic Input Requirements

Analysis Types

Rezoning and Substructure Parameters

Additional Flags for Various Analyses

Program Function and I/O Controls

Modifying Default Values

Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements

68

83
141
147
159

174
190

67 Marc Volume C: Program Input

This chapter describes the parameter section of the Marc input file. It is the first section of the file. The
parameter section is used to specify the title of the file, the work space requirements, the elements to be
used in the analysis, and the type of analysis to be performed. It is organized according to loosely defined
categories of parameter types, as shown in the above list.
Only the TITLE, ELEMENTS, and END parameters are required. Optional parameters flag the use of
certain elements, analysis capabilities, or change the default values. The first ten columns of the
parameter data are reserved for the key words which control the input of the parameters. These key words
must be entered as left justified. Some options are set by the order in which data is input.

Chapter 2: Parameters 68
Basic Input Requirements

Basic Input Requirements

69 TITLE
Output Title Definition

TITLE

Output Title Definition

This parameter is REQUIRED.


Description
This required parameter defines the output title. There is no limit to the number of the title data read in
as long as the word TITLE appears in the first field. However, only the last TITLE data is used as an output
header. Due to the free-format processor, do not place commas within the TITLE data (Columns 11-80).
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Type Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word TITLE.

11-80

2nd

Enter the title to be output with results.

ALLOCATE 70
Initial Workspace Definition

ALLOCATE

Initial Workspace Definition

Description
This parameter allows the specification of memory to be allocated at the start of the job. Marc uses
additional memory if necessary and it is available. See Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing
Option for more details. Values which are too large waste memory. The initial allocation can be done for
the following parts.
General memory: This specifies the initial allocation of the so-called general memory. This is used for
boundary condition data, material data, storing element stiffness matrices, and part or all of the assembled
global stiffness matrix among other things. Please note that element data like stresses and strains are no
longer part of the general memory starting with the 2005r3 release. Solver 0 also uses the general memory
area for the decomposition of the stiffness matrix. Initial allocation of the general memory can be used
for avoiding reallocation (increase of the workspace). For parallel processing, the amount specified is the
total for the job. It is divided by the number of domains used.
Matrix solver: This specifies the initial allocation of memory for solver 8. By giving a value that is more
than the maximum used during the run, one avoids that the solver workspace is increased (reallocated).
This can be particularly useful for large contact jobs, where additional memory may be allocated due to
contact. If the given workspace is less than what is needed, it is automatically increased. This option is
only for use with solver type 8. No check is done to see if solver type 8 is used in the job. For parallel
processing, the amount specified is the total for the job. It is divided by the number of domains used.
Format
Format
Free

Fixed

Data
Type Entry

1-8

1st

Enter the word ALLOCATE.

11-15

2nd

Size of workspace in MByte for general memory.

16-20

3rd

Size of workspace in MByte for solver memory.

71 SIZING
Working Space Definition

SIZING

Working Space Definition

Description
This parameter can be used to specify the maximum number of nodes and elements.
The values for the maximum number of elements and nodes should be set to an upper-bound if a manual
rezoning analysis is performed. In general for other cases, they are not needed.
If the number of elements or nodes in the model is greater than the value of MAXNUM in the include
file located in the tools directory, then either the value of MAXNUM should be increased or the number
of elements and nodes should be given on the SIZING parameter. The default value for MAXNUM is
one million. The value of MAXNUM may also be set using the environment value of MSC_MMEM. This is
often preferable to changing the include file.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Type Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word SIZING.

11-20

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

21-25

3rd

Maximum number of elements.

26-30

4th

Maximum number of nodal points.

PREALLOC 72
Initial Workspace Allocation

PREALLOC

Initial Workspace Allocation

Description
This parameter allows the specification of memory to be allocated at the start of the job. The workspace
for solver 8, given in the second field, is used for allocating the workspace for the solver before any other
memory is allocated. By giving a value that is more than the maximum used during the run, one avoids
that the solver workspace is increased (reallocated). This can be particularly useful on 32 bit systems for
large jobs. If the given workspace is less than what is needed, it is automatically increased.
This option is only for use with solver type 8. No check is done to see if solver type 8 is used in the job. In
a job using parallel processing, the allocation applies to the local domain and is the same on all domains.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word PREALLOC.

11-20

2nd

Size of workspace in words for solver type 8 (Multifrontal Direct


Sparse Solver).

73 ELEMENTS
Element Type Selection

ELEMENTS

Element Type Selection

This parameter is REQUIRED.


Description
This required parameter is used to identify the elements used in the analysis. Element codes for all the
allowable element types are found in Marc Volume B: Element Library. This data can be repeated as often
as necessary.
Note that the ALIAS parameter is available to change element library code descriptions on the
CONNECTIVITY model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word ELEMENTS.

11-15

2nd

Library code of the first type of element selected.

16-20

3rd

Library code of the second type of element selected.

21-25

4th

Library code of the third type of element selected.

Etc.

Etc.

Etc. up to 14 element types.

VERSION 74
Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File

VERSION

Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File

Description
This parameter is used to control which version of the program to use from an input perspective and a
defaults perspective. The following numbers are appropriate.
9

defaults and input associated with MSC.Marc 2001

10

defaults and input associated with MSC.Marc 2003

11

defaults and input associated with MSC.Marc 2005

12

defaults and input associated with Marc 2007

Note:

If this parameter is not included or is given a value of zero, it is automatically set to nine.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word VERSION.

11-15

2nd

Enter the input/analysis version to be used.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 for multiphysics input associated with Marc 2008 and earlier
versions (default).
Enter 2 for multiphysics input based upon defining physics type on
material and control options.

75 FEATURE
Specification of the Behavior of a Feature

FEATURE

Specification of the Behavior of a Feature

Description
This parameter allows the user to specify that a particular feature is to be defined in a selected data style.
This permits data files to maintain compatibility with older versions of the program while still utilizing
the latest technology.
Currently, the following options used this capability:

Option

Feature ID
(ifeat)

Consequence

RADIATION

3301

Radiation viewfactor cut-off is relative; default for before


version 11.

RADIATION

3302

Radiation viewfactor cut-off is relative; default for


version 11.

MOONEY, ARRUDBOYCE,
GENT, OGDEN

3402

use mixed J, u, p formulation for updated Lagrange rubber


formulations and permits use of series representation of
volumetric strain energy function.

5700

Set absolute rigid link rotation tolerance to 0.001; this is the


default.

5701

Do not set absolute rigid link rotation tolerance by default;


instead, read off the CONTROL option.

5800

Conventional element type 140.

5801

Add the enhanced strain contribution to improve the shell


element performance especially for distorted meshes (linear
analysis only).

5802

Extensions to 5801 for nonlinear analysis.

1002

Contact tolerance is based upon edge length of boundary


elements only.

4401

Skip recycle due to body-body contact; generally reduces


computational costs.

5301

Use double-sided tying in contact - this sometimes improves


behavior for self contact, but often leads to increase costs. It
should only be used if no other method resolves penetration
problems.

-53xx

Release node after xx separations.

+53xx

Hold node and skip separation check after xx separations.

xx>5

Message in .out file should be adjusted.

6601

Remove deactivated deformable bodies from the post file.

CONTROL

CONTACT

FEATURE 76
Specification of the Behavior of a Feature

Feature ID
(ifeat)

Option

Consequence

8201

Activates improvements for force based friction models.

10201

After remeshing, make certain that nodes in contact stay


in contact.

PIN CODE

6901

Use static condensation to remove pin code degrees of


freedom. This is not recommended for dynamics.

HEAT

7001

Switch off Lobatto integration for convective boundary


conditions to improve compatibility with 2005 r3.

7902

Used for higher order tetrahedral elements 127, 130 and 133:
check inside-out condition based upon 16 integration points.

DIST LOADS

10101

Do not apply distributed load to a face or an edge if all nodes


on the face or edge are in contact. This feature internally
turns on FOLLOW FOR parameter.

Postprocessor

10401

Do not write out new geometry on post file due to initial


stress free projection in contact analysis. This resolves some
problems associated with external post processors.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word FEATURE.

11-15

2nd

Enter the feature ID.

This parameter may be repeated as often as necessary, or you can enter 14


feature IDs per line.

77 PROCESSOR
Parallelization Control

PROCESSOR

Parallelization Control

Description
This parameter may be used to specify the decomposition of the model when the single input DDM
procedure is used. It is necessary to start the analysis using the -nps command line argument. For more
details, see Table 2-3: Keyword Descriptions in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 2:
Program Initiation.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word PROCESSOR.

11-15

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

21-25

4th

Not used; enter 0.

26-30

5th

Not used; enter 0.

31-35

6th

Not used; enter 0.

36-40

7th

Decomposition method:
Enter 10 to use user specified decomposition (the user domains are
specified using the DEFINE element set option with name of domain*)
Enter 11 to use Metis Best decomposition; default.
Enter 12 to use Metis Element-Based decomposition.
Enter 13 to use Metis Node-Based decomposition.
Enter 14 to use Vector decomposition.
Enter 15 to use Radial decomposition.
Enter 16 to use Angular decomposition.
Enter 17 to use Recursive Coordinate Bisection decomposition.

41-45

8th

Enter 1 to use out-of-core storage for DDM single input file.

46-50

9th

Flag for Additional Domain Decomposition Information (Default 0)


0 - No additional input
1 - Additional Input (Data Blocks 2 and 3 required)

PROCESSOR 78
Parallelization Control

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Island Removal Flag for Domain Decomposition (Default is 0)


0 - Do not attempt to remove Islands
1 - Attempt to remove Islands
2 - Detect contact during Decomposition; do not attempt to remove
Islands
3 - Detect contact during Decomposition; attempt to remove Islands

6-10

2nd

Fine Graph Flag for Domain Decomposition


(Default is 0)
0 - Coarse Graph
1 - Fine Graph

11-15

3rd

Control of point on axis of rotation for Radial/Angular Decompositions.


0 - Use Centroid of the Bounding Box of the model
1 - User-supplied point; defined in 4th, 5th, and 6th fields of 3rd data
block.

16-25

4th

Element coefficient weight - Controls balance between computational


cost of domains. Range <0.,1.0>. Default is 1.0 (use full element weight).
0 means do not use element weight.

3rd data block


1-10

1st

First direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15, or
16.

11-20

2nd

Second direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15,
or 16.

21-30

3rd

Third direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15,
or 16.

31-40

4th

x-coordinate of point on axis.

41-50

5th

y-coordinate of point on axis.

51-60

6th

z-coordinate of point on axis.

79 UNIT
Invoke Unit System Definition

UNIT

Invoke Unit System Definition

Description
This parameter allows users to specify the unit system used in the analysis. The material data read in from
the material data base or from the ISOTROPIC, WORK HARD, TEMPERATURE EFFECTS, MATERIAL
DATA, GRAIN SIZE, and PARAMETERS options are converted to this set of units where appropriate.
The output indicates both the user-defined quantity and the converted value. Note that if the material data
is entered through a user subroutine, it must be consistent with the unit type specified here. This option
is not applied to data entered through the TABLE option. Hence, the data must be consistent with the unit
type entered here. For material data, it is advantageous to enter data normalized with respect to the
reference value to avoid this problem. If this parameter is not included, no conversions are performed.
If this parameter is included, the display of the results indicate the unit of the resultant quantity.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word UNIT.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for SI-meter unit.


Enter 2 for SI-millimeter unit.
Enter 3 for US-inch unit.

Notes:

For the unit definition and conversions, see Appendix I: Units.


The unit is assumed to be SI-mm if this parameter is not used.

$NO LIST 80
No Listing of Input Data

$NO LIST

No Listing of Input Data

Description
Using this parameter results in the suppression of the printout of the remainder of the input file.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the words $NO LIST.

81 EXTENDED
Extended Precision of Reading in Data

EXTENDED

Extended Precision of Reading in Data

Description
This parameter is used to indicate that models are to be in extended precision and/or a large number of
elements or nodes exist in the model. If this option is included, the width of all the data fields described
in this manual must be doubled. For example, all I5 integer fields change to I10. If this parameter is
included, all input lines must be in this format.
Note that the post file is written in 32 bit integer mode so the largest element of node ID is still limited
to about one billion.
Note that all floating point numbers are stored in double precision. So, when using the EXTENDED
parameter, one can have about 15 digits of precision for coordinate positions.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word EXTENDED.

END 82
End of Parameter Section

END

End of Parameter Section

This parameter is REQUIRED.


Description
This required parameter terminates the input of parameter data, signaling the end of the
parameter section.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word END.

83
Analysis Types

Chapt Analysis Types


er 2:
Para
meter
s

ELASTIC 84
Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads

ELASTIC

Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads

Description
When this option is invoked, each load case is independent. Total loads must be input with the POINT
LOAD, DIST LOADS, or CHANGE STATE/THERMAL LOADS model definition options after END
OPTION.
If the direct solver is invoked, the decomposed stiffness matrix is used for each load case and only a back
substitution on a series of load vectors is performed.
When the ADAPTIVE meshing option is used in conjunction with this parameter, only the loads before
the END OPTION (increment zero) are considered. This load is then re-analyzed until the error criteria
is satisfied.
Notes:

This data should never be used with any data which flags nonlinear analysis or which
change the stiffness matrix; for example, the LARGE DISP parameter or the DISP CHANGE
option.
If temperature dependent material properties are included, then a new assembly is
performed (if temperature loading is on).

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word ELASTIC.

11-15

2nd

Element storage parameter, to reduce storage in elastic analysis.


Set to 1, so that creep, swelling, plastic, incremental strains, plastic strain
rates, and incremental stresses are not stored.
Set to 2, so that strain energies, thermal strains, and elastic strains are
not stored.
Note:

If you request these items on the post file and they are not
stored, the information is incorrect.

85 DESIGN SENSITIVITY
Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only

DESIGN SENSITIVITY

Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only

Description
This parameter invokes the design sensitivity capability in Marc. In this release, the capability is
restricted to linear static structural analysis and eigenvalue analysis. This option requires the model
definition options: DESIGN VARIABLES and at least one of DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS,
DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS, or DESIGN FREQUENCY
CONSTRAINTS. If multiple load cases are to be evaluated, the ELASTIC parameter should be included.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-18

1st

Enter the words DESIGN SENSITIVITY. Fixed field can be truncated to 12


characters

N/A

2nd

Enter the word SORT* if you desire to sort the constraints by degree of
criticalness (optional), and also optionally to limit the number of
constraints to be analyzed (see third field).

N/A

3rd

Only if SORT* is invoked, enter the number of most critical constraints


to be analyzed. If no number is entered, the default number (100) of most
critical constraints are isolated by sorting and are subjected to
sensitivity analysis.

*If there are any eigenvalue constraints in the sorted group, these will be output before any static
response constraints. Thus, the first constraint to be output may not always be the most critical one.

DESIGN OPTIMIZATION 86
Perform Design Optimization

DESIGN OPTIMIZATION

Perform Design Optimization

Description
This parameter invokes the design optimization capability in Marc. In this release, the capability is
restricted to linear static structural analysis and eigenvalue analysis. This option requires the model
definition options: DESIGN OBJECTIVE, DESIGN VARIABLES and at least one of DESIGN
DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRAIN
CONSTRAINTS, or DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS. The DESIGN OBJECTIVE option is used to
define the objective function. If multiple load cases are to be evaluated, the ELASTIC parameter should
be included.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-19

1st

Enter the words DESIGN OPTIMIZATION. Fixed field can be truncated to


12 characters.

N/A

2nd

Enter the word ACTIVESET (optional).

N/A

3rd

Only if ACTIVESET is invoked, enter the maximum number of constraints


for the active set. This does not limit the number of constraints that can be
prescribed by you.
Default is 100.

N/A

4th

Enter the word CYCLES (optional).

N/A

5th

Only if CYCLES is invoked, enter the maximum number of design


optimization cycles (including analyses). Default is 20.
The order of the ACTIVESET and CYCLES can be reversed; for example,
Free Formats 4th and 5th become 2nd and 3rd while Free Formats 2nd and
3rd become 4th and 5th.

87 ADAPTIVE
Adaptive Mesh Refinement

ADAPTIVE

Adaptive Mesh Refinement

Description
This parameter is required when either a local adaptive meshing or global adaptive meshing is to be used
to improve the accuracy and/or mesh quality. The parameter indicates whether fixed bounds are set on
the number of elements and nodes or whether dynamic memory should be used.
Local Adaptive Meshing
The criteria for determining when local remeshing should occur is provided in the ADAPTIVE model
definition option.Local remeshing is available for lower-order shell and continuum elements including
triangular, quadrilateral, tetrahedral, and brick elements.
In an elastic analysis, Marc iterates based upon the excitation given to satisfy an error tolerance. The
ELASTIC parameter must be included. In a steady-state heat transfer, electrostatic, or magnetostatic

analysis, Marc iterates until the error criteria is satisfied.


In a nonlinear incremental analysis, Marc adapts the mesh at each increment, or user controlled frequency
to improve the solution.
New elements are created as described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Global Adaptive Meshing
The criteria for determining when global remeshing is to occur is provided in the ADAPT GLOBAL
model or history definition option. This option also indicates which remeshing procedure is to be used.
Additionally, the REZONING,1 parameter must be used.

Global adaptive meshing is available for lower-order triangular, quadrilateral, and tetrahedral,
continuum, and shell elements in Marc.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-8

1st

Enter the word ADAPTIVE.

11-15

2nd

Enter an upper bound to the number of elements in the mesh.

16-20

3rd

Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes in the mesh.

ADAPTIVE 88
Adaptive Mesh Refinement

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to continue to perform an incremental analysis. If the number of


nodes or elements created exceeds the maximums specified, the previous
mesh is used.

26-30

5th

Enter 1 if analysis is to be stopped when upper-bound is reached;


otherwise, dynamically allocate more space.

Note:

If only the word ADAPTIVE is entered, the program dynamically allocates memory for the
new elements and nodes (there is no limit to the number of elements or nodes unless all
memory is exceeded).

89 LINEAR
Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis

LINEAR

Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis

Description
This parameter allows additional values to be stored rather than being recalculated during subsequent
increments. This means an increase in the overall size of the workspace used for the problem, but can
actually result in a reduced computation time. The efficiency of this parameter is highly dependent upon
the analysis data and the machine on which the problem is computed. It has proven very effective in
reducing computation time for linear elastic and small displacement dynamic problems. When set to 0,
the parameter has also been used effectively on nonlinear problems such as rigid plastic flow.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word LINEAR.

11-15

2nd

Enter 0 (default) to save BETA matrix (Strain-Displacement).


Enter 1 to save the BETA matrix and the stress-strain law.

FOURIER 90
Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures

FOURIER

Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures

Description
This parameter governs the analysis of axisymmetric structures under arbitrary loading by means of the
Fourier series expansion technique. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for a description
of this analysis technique. To perform a modal Fourier analysis, you must include a DYNAMIC parameter.
To perform a Fourier buckling analysis, you must include a BUCKLE parameter.
The Fourier capability assumes that the material is linear elastic and is only available for Fourier
elements, type 62, 63, 73, 74, and 90.
Note:

Fourier analysis is not supported with the table driven input format.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word FOURIER.

11-15

2nd

Total number of FOURIER series expansions needed for characterizing


the circumferential variation of tractions, thermal loads and boundary
conditions.

16-20

3rd

Maximum number of harmonics in any of the series. The number of series


terms is two times the number of harmonics plus one.

21-25

4th

Total number of nodal degrees of freedom that are loaded by concentrated


forces or restrained by nonzero boundary conditions described by a
FOURIER series expansion.

26-30

5th

If only symmetric (cos) terms are present in all expansions used, set this
flag to 1. For strictly antisymmetric (sin) expansions, set this flag to 2.
Default is 0 which allows for the full expansion containing sine and
cosine terms.
To skip increments 0 and 1 for symmetric terms only, set this flag to -1. To
skip increments 0, 1 and 2 for antisymmetric terms only, set this flag to -2.
A negative value of this flag means that no constant loading or constant
nonzero boundary condition around the circumference are present.

31-35

6th

Maximum number of stations around circumference used for printout


during the superposition using CASE COMBIN option. Default is 24.

36-40

7th

Enter 1 if the initial stress stiffness is to be included in modal


Fourier calculation.

91 DYNAMIC
Dynamic Analysis

DYNAMIC

Dynamic Analysis

Description
This parameter sets the flags for one of several possible dynamic analysis methods. Any of several
optional data blocks can be required. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. The MODAL
SHAPE history definition option or the MODAL INCREMENT model definition option controls the
eigenvalue extraction. The DYNAMIC CHANGE or AUTO STEP history definition options control the
time steps. The RECOVER history definition option allows for modal stress recovery or storing
eigenvectors on the post file. Eigenvectors can also be stored on the post file with the MODAL
INCREMENT option.
Notes:

1) The single step Houbolt procedure is the recommended method for nonlinear
transient analysis.
2) The Lanczos method is the recommended method for extracting eigenvalues.
3) The central difference operator do not work with zero mass at any degrees of freedom.
4) The direct integration operators automatically use residual load correction, and this
cannot be overridden. The CENTROID parameter should not be used.
5) The Houbolt (IDYN=3)and central difference (IDYN=4) operators can only be used
with constant time step. If the time step is changed during analysis, results are in error.
The Newmark-beta (IDYN=2), fast central difference operator (IDYN=5), and Single
Step Houbolt (IDYN=6) can use a variable time step.
6) Rigid body modes can be handled by the inverse power sweep or Lanczos method. Use
the flag in the CONTROL option for solving a singular equation.
7) The fast central difference operator can be used with element types (2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10,
11, 18, 19, 20, 52, 64, 75, 98, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120).
8) The Newmark-beta method is unconditionally stable for linear analysis, with = 0.25,
= 0.50. These parameters can be reset through the PARAMETERS option.
9) The central difference (IDYN = 4) operator does not consider damping.
10) The central difference (IDYN = 4 or IDYN = 5) operator cannot be used with
Herrmann elements.

DYNAMIC 92
Dynamic Analysis

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word DYNAMIC.

11-15

2nd

Enter the dynamic operator type (IDYN).


Set to 1 for modal superposition dynamic response.
Set to 2 for Newmark direct integration.
Set to 3 for Houbolt direct integration.
Set to 4 for explicit direct time integration using central difference.
Set to 5 for fast explicit direct integration.
Set to 6 for Single Step Houbolt integration (preferred for implicit dynamic
analysis with contact).
Set to 8 for generalized alpha method direct integration.

16-20

3rd

Maximum number of modes to be used in the modal superposition


dynamic option. If the inverse power sweep method is used for eigenvalue
analysis, it is also the number of mode shapes and frequencies to
be extracted.

21-25

4th

Set to 0 for Inverse power sweep with double eigenvalue extraction.


Set to 1 to for the Lanczos method.
Set to 3 for Inverse power sweep with single eigenvalue extraction.

26-30

5th

Enter 1 if modal stress recovery or storing eigenvectors on post tape is to


be performed in this analysis.

31-35

6th

Not used; enter 0.

36-40

7th

Used only if the 2nd field is 8. Enter 0 (default) if the parameters of the
generalized alpha method are optimized for an analysis involving dynamic
contact; enter 1 if these parameters are optimized for an analysis without
dynamic contact. Note that user-defined values can be entered on the
PARAMETERS model definition or history definition option.

93 HARMONIC
Frequency Response Analysis

HARMONIC

Frequency Response Analysis

Description
The HARMONIC parameter allows the frequency response analysis to be superimposed
upon the deformed configuration. This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the EL-MA
parameter for electromagnetic (harmonic) analysis or ACOUSTIC parameter for acoustic analysis or
PIEZO parameter for piezoelectric analysis.
Note that the 3rd through 5th fields are not required if the table input format is used.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word HARMONIC.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if complex damping matrix is used. Default is no complex


damping.

16-20

3rd

Maximum number of excitation boundary conditions.

21-25

4th

Maximum number of excitation distributed load lists.

26-30

5th

Maximum number of elements in any excitation distributed load list.

31-35

6th

Enter 1 to include inertia effects in the calculation of the harmonic


reaction force. Note that if damping is used, the mass proportional part of
the damping matrix also contributes to the inertia effects.

SS-ROLLING 94
Steady State Transport Analysis

SS-ROLLING

Steady State Transport Analysis

Description
This flag activates steady state rolling analysis. No additional data is needed for this parameter.
Using this procedure, an Eulerian/Lagrange analysis is performed on a body that is spinning about an
axis, which may also be rotating. This is typically applied to tire models, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information for more detail.
Model definition options ROTATION A and CORNERING AXIS are used to define rotation and cornering
axes in a steady state rolling analysis. History definition option, SS-ROLLING, is used to define
parameters such as spinning velocity, cornering velocity, and translational velocities. See the options
descriptions for more details.
Only three-dimensional solid elements are supported in the current release.
This procedure results in a nonsymmetric matrix; hence, the iterative solvers are not available.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter SS-RO.

95 RESPONSE
Spectrum Response Analysis

RESPONSE

Spectrum Response Analysis

Description
This parameter allows you to perform a spectrum response analysis. See Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information for detailed directions. The modes used are specified in the SPECTRUM response load
incrementation data. To perform a spectrum response calculation, it is also necessary to include the
DYNAMIC parameter and either the MODAL INCREMENT or MODAL SHAPE option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word RESPONSE.

11-15

2nd

Enter the number of data points used to specify spectral density function.
Enter 0 to use the USSD user subroutine.

R-P FLOW 96
Rigid-Plastic Flow

R-P FLOW

Rigid-Plastic Flow

Description
This parameter is used to specify a rigid, perfectly-plastic flow analysis. See Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information for an introduction to this technique. This parameter is used either with the Herrmann
elements or with conventional elements. In the latter case, a penalty function is used to apply the
incompressibility constraint. The penalty factor is defined through the PARAMETERS history
definition option.
This parameter has two modes. In the first mode, a steady state solution is obtained.
This parameter can also be used for the analysis of laminar fluid flow problems. See the UNEWTN user
subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines. This method requires iteration on
the velocity field for convergence; convergence controls are input in the CONTROL option.
In the second mode, a transient solution is obtained. This mode is always used in contact problems. This
method required iteration on the incremental displacements. Increment 0 is suppressed.
In this formulation, if the strain rate falls below a certain value, the material is effectively rigid. This
cutoff value is specified through the PARAMETERS history definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-8

1st

Enter the words R-P FLOW.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for steady state procedure.


Enter 2 for transient procedure (default).

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 for constant penalty factor (default).


Option 2 is not available.
Enter 3 for variable penalty factor (adjusted to limit volume loss).

97 SPFLOW
Superplastic Forming Analysis

SPFLOW

Superplastic Forming Analysis

Description
This parameter specifies the use of data for superplastic forming analysis. Use of this parameter
automatically turns on the FOLLOW FOR,1 parameter. See ISOTROPIC model definition option for use
of power law and rate power law hardening models (only available hardening rules for superplastic
forming) and SUPERPLASTIC history definition option for control parameters in this document for
more information.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word SPFLOW.

LARGE DISP 98
Large Displacement or Buckling

LARGE DISP

Large Displacement or Buckling

Description
This parameter is used to specify large displacement or buckling analysis. It signals Marc to calculate the
geometric stiffness matrix and the initial stress stiffness matrix. This parameter automatically switches
on the residual load correction option and switches off the scaling option. Default is no large
displacement terms. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more information about large
displacement and buckling analysis.
Note:

The CENTROID parameter should not be used in conjunction with this parameter.

Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the words LARGE DISP.

99 LARGE STRAIN
Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

LARGE STRAIN

Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

Description
This option indicates that a nonlinear structural problem will be performed where either the
displacements and/or the strains will be large. If no other options are specified, Marc automatically
chooses the procedure used based upon the material model selected and the element type for each element
group. If possible, the updated Lagrange procedure is the preferred procedure. In a few special cases that
are discussed below, the total Lagrange procedure is automatically flagged but can be over-ridden by the
3rd field of the LARGE STRAIN option.
Procedures
For more details on the available procedures, the user is referred to Marc Volume A: Theory And User
Information, Chapter 5. A brief synopsis is provided here to highlight the approach that is internally
flagged when the LARGE STRAIN is used.
Updated Lagrange: The equations of equilibrium are formed on the current configuration. The Cauchy
stresses and logarithmic strains are the prevailing stress and strain measures. The updated Lagrange
procedure comes in two flavors: Additive Decomposition and Multiplicative Decomposition.
a. Additive Decomposition:
This is an incremental approach where the total incremental strain is formed by using
= th + e + p +

where th is the incremental thermal strain, e is the incremental elastic strain, p is the
incremental plastic strain, etc.
b. Multiplicative Decomposition:
Here, the strain measure is based on the deformation gradient F which, in general, is given by
th e p

F = F F F

where F p is the thermal deformation gradient, F e is the elastic deformation gradient and F p
is the plastic deformation gradient. When there is no plasticity (e.g. rubber elasticity), F p is
unity.
Total Lagrange: The equations of equilibrium are formed on the original configuration. The 2nd PiolaKirchhoff stresses and Green-Lagrange strains are the prevailing stress and strain measures.
Selection of Procedure:
When LARGE STRAIN is specified, the selection of the procedure used is based upon three criteria.
1. Large strain hyperelastic material models vs. small elastic strain Elastic or Elastic-Plastic Models.
2. Displacement elements vs. Herrmann (Mixed) elements.
3. Three dimension state of stress (3-D, plane strain, axisymmetric) vs. plane stress condition.

LARGE STRAIN 100


Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

Hyperelastic Materials
The large strain hyperelastic materials are either incompressible or nearly incompressible which are
defined through the MOONEY, OGDEN, GENT, or ARRUDBOYCE options or highly compressible
defined in the FOAM option.
For the case of large strain incompressible rubber materials the following procedure will be used by
default.
Herrmann Element

Displacement Element not plane


stress

Displacement Element plane stress

Updated Lagrange F e

Updated Lagrange - F e

Total Lagrange

For the case of large strain compressible foam materials the following procedure will be used by default.
Herrmann Element

Displacement Element not plane


stress

Displacement Element plane stress

Not Available

Updated Lagrange - F e

Total Lagrange

Isotropic Materials
The ISOTROPIC option is formulated for small elastic strains but may include large plastic (inelastic)
strains. The procedure used by default is based upon three subcriteria, whether a yield stress is provided,
the type of yield surface (von Mises or other) or other material factors. The procedure to be used is also
controlled by the suboption used: LARGE STRAIN,1 or LARGE STRAIN,2.
When LARGE STRAIN, 1 is used, the options can be summarized as follows:

Herrmann Element

Displacement Element Displacement Element


not plane stress
plane stress

No Yield

Updated Lagrange FeFp

Updated Lagrange Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

ELASTIC

Updated Lagrange - F e

Total Lagrange

Total Lagrange

Updated Lagrange

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

Von Mises Yield Updated Lagrange e p

F F

Other Yield or
Cracking

Not Available

Additive - Finite
Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

No Yield refers to the yield type set to blank in this case, the formulation is the same as that used for
Von Mises Yield. Other Yield or Cracking includes Linear Mohr-Columb, Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb,
Buyokozturk Concrete, ORNL yield rules, Hill, Barlat, Shima Oyane, Exponential Cap, Generalized
Plasticity, Cam Clay.

101 LARGE STRAIN


Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

One observes that in the case of an ISOTROPIC option with an ELASTIC yield stress type, Marc
switches to a total Lagrange formulation for displacement elements. This switch occurs only for the
elastic material under the following circumstances: no creep data, no failure data, no damage data, not
associated with a gasket and not a shell or beam element (i.e., only for 2-D plane strain, axisymmetric,
plane stress and 3-D continuum elements excluding the solid shell). This switch to total Lagrange may
be useful when there is frequent loading and unloading. Since the total Lagrange formulation is based on
a strain energy functional, a zero stress state at complete unloading is captured. If an updated additive
formulation is desired even for these conditions, then one can avoid the internal total Lagrange switch by
setting the 3rd field of the LARGE STRAIN option to a 1 (i.e., LARGE STRAIN,1,1). In this case, the
following formulations are used for the elastic material:

Herrmann Element
Elastic

Updated Lagrange - F e

Displacement Element Displacement Element


not plane stress
plane stress
Updated Lagrange Additive

Updated Lagrange Additive

One observes that in the case of an ISOTROPIC option with a von Mises yield stress type, Marc default
is to use the additive decomposition of strain. In situations where elastic strains may be larger (e.g.
polymers) or when there is loading/unloading, the additive decomposition may not yield sufficient
accuracy and it may be desired to use the multiplicative formulation. This can be achieved by setting the
2nd field of the LARGE STRAIN option to 2.
The following formulations are used for LARGE STRAIN,2 in conjunction with an isotropic material

Herrmann Element
No Yield

Updated Lagrange -

Displacement Element Displacement Element


not plane stress
plane stress
Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

e p

F F

ELASTIC

Updated Lagrange - F e

Von Mises Yield Updated Lagrange e p

F F

Other Yield or
Cracking

Not available

LARGE STRAIN 102


Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

Other Materials
For the ORTHOTROPIC or ANISOTROPIC material model the updated Lagrange F e F p formulation is not
available and the additive procedure is used where appropriate.

Herrmann Element

Displacement Element Displacement Element


not plane stress
plane stress

No Yield

Not available

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

ELASTIC

Total Lagrange

Total Lagrange

Total Lagrange

Von Mises Yield Not available

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

Other Yield or
Cracking

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange
Additive - Finite

Not Available

Note that the internal switch to total Lagrange for ELASTIC can again be prevented by using LARGE
STRAIN,1,1. When the 1 on the 3rd field is activated, then Updated Lagrange Additive is used for the
orthotropic/anisotropic elastic material.
For cohesive materials which are used in conjunction with the interface elements, the relationship is
between the traction and the opening displacement which always takes into account the large
deformations and rotations.
For gasket materials which are used in conjunction with continuum composite elements, the LARGE
STRAIN option results in an updated Lagrange additive formulation.

For the NLELAST family of material models, the option initiates an updated Lagrange additive
formulation.
For the rigid-plastic problem, there are two variants: steady-state and transient. For the transient
procedure, the Updated Lagrange Additive formulation is used.
For the HYPOELASTIC material model, the option sets the flags for an Updated Lagrange Additive
formulation. The user is provided with quantities like F (deformation gradient), R (rotation tensor), etc.
in HYPELA2.F to provide flexibility in either using an additive or multiplicative formulation.
For the SHAPE MEMORY material model, the Updated Lagrange Additive formulation is set for the
thermo-mechanical model and the Updated Lagrange Multiplicative formulation is set for the mechanical
model.
For the SOIL material model, the Updated Lagrange Additive formulation is set.

Miscellaneous
It is important to note that the updated Lagrange additive or multiplicative procedure is not available for
some classes of elements including the rebar elements, Fourier elements, pipe bend (type 17), cable

103 LARGE STRAIN


Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

element (type51), shear panel (type 68), axisymmetric with bending (types 95 and 96) and piezoelectric
elements. Also, the updated Lagrange multiplicative procedure is not available for 3-D shells.
If a procedure is chosen which is not available for a particular material/element type, the program will
terminate with an Exit 13.
When using the updated Lagrange procedure, the material data should be provided with respect to the
Cauchy stress and logarithmic strain; and the output will be provided using these measures as well.
When the LARGE STRAIN option is used but the total Lagrange formulation is activated, the material
data should be provided with respect to the 2nd Piola Kirchhoff stress and the Green Lagrange strain. It
should also be noted that while the 2nd Piola Kirchhoff stresses are used for the total Lagrange analysis,
the stress quantities put on the post file for post codes 17, 117, 11 16, 111 116, 311, 391, 397 are the
appropriate Cauchy stresses.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the words LARGE STRA.

11-15

2nd

Flag to define preferred elasticity-plasticity procedure in an elastic-plastic


analysis.
= 1 Hypoelasticity and additive plasticity with mean normal return
mapping (default)
=2 Hyperelasticity and multiplicative plasticity with radial
return mapping.

16-20

3rd

Flag indicating that updated Lagrange option should be used when


possible.
If set to 1 then the total Lagrange formulation is not internally activated
for elastic materials.

UPDATE 104
Updated Lagrange Procedure

UPDATE

Updated Lagrange Procedure

Description
This parameter flags the use of the classical updated Lagrange procedure for elastic-plastic materials, the
elements for which such a formulation can be applied. The use of the procedure has two consequences.
First, the element stiffnesses are assembled in the current configuration of the element. Second, the stress
and strain output is given in the coordinate system which is applicable in the updated configuration of
the element.
The procedure is useful for analysis of shell and beam structures where rotations are large and the
nonlinear terms in the curvature expressions can no longer be neglected.
The updated Lagrange procedure can be used with or without the LARGE DISP parameter. With the
LARGE DISP parameter invoked, the effect of the internal stresses on the stiffness is taken into account.
Also, the strain increment is calculated to second order accuracy and, hence, large rotation increments
might be allowed. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a list of the elements that can be used in
an updated Lagrangian analysis. Instead of invoking the LARGE DISP parameter, the 4th entry of the
UPDATE parameter can be set to 1.
When the UPDATE parameter is used in conjunction with a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the element
conductivity is assembled based on the current configuration of the element.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-6

1st

Enter the word UPDATE.

11-15

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

3rd

Enter 2 to allow large incremental rotations for beam elements. This is


available for beam element types 52, 76, 77, 78, 79, and 98.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to account for the effect of the internal stresses on the stiffness.

105 FINITE
Finite Strain Plasticity

FINITE

Finite Strain Plasticity

Description
This parameter flags the use of the large strain plasticity option. With this option invoked, the effects of
the change in metric due to large inelastic deformations is included. This results in a different stiffness of
the structure as well as in a modified calculation of stresses and inelastic strains. This parameter is only
used for the elements which are formulated in terms of the updated Lagrange procedure. When using this
parameter, true stresses are printed out.
The UPDATE parameter must be included in all cases when this parameter is invoked. When the FINITE
parameter is used, the work hardening slope for plasticity is defined as the rate of true stress versus the
true plastic strain rate. Hence, the work hardening curve must be entered as the true stress versus
logarithmic plastic strain curve in a uniaxial tension test. The anisotropic plasticity formulation cannot
be used with this option. The finite strain option in Marc is written such that fairly large strain increments
(up to 3%) can be allowed. However, large increments can result in many recycles as well as in decreased
accuracy.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-6

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word FINITE.

CONSTANT DILATATION 106


Define That Elements Are to Use Constant Dilatation Formulation

CONSTANT DILATATION

Define That Elements Are to Use


Constant Dilatation Formulation

Description
When performing nearly incompressible analysis with displacement based elements, the conventional
isoparametric interpolation methods result in poor behavior for lower order elements. This results in
overly stiff behavior when using element type 7, 149 (brick), type 10, 152 (axisymmetric), type 11, 151
(plane strain), type 19 (generalized plane strain), type 20 (axisymmetric with twist), or 136 (pentahedral).
When this option is included, all elements of these types are modified to use the constant dilatation
formulation. This is recommended for elastic-plastic analysis and creep analysis because of the
potentially nearly incompressible behavior.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-8

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word CONSTANT.

107 ASSUMED STRAIN


Improved Bending Behavior

ASSUMED STRAIN

Improved Bending Behavior

Description
The bending behavior can be improved by using the assumed strain formulation for element type 3, 160
(plane stress), type 11, 161 (plane strain), and type 7, 163 (brick). This procedure replaces the standard
linear interpolation functions with an enriched group that is able to represent pure bending behavior. This
formulation results in improved accuracy for isotropic behavior, but it should be noted that the
computational costs increase.
Note:

This option may not be used with all material behavior and is deactivated for those
elements for which it is not applicable.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word ASSUMED.

11-15

2nd

Enter -1 to deactivate assumed strain formulation (forced).

ELASTICITY 108
Elasticity Procedure

ELASTICITY

Elasticity Procedure

Description
This option can be used to define which formulation is used for large strain elasticity, including rubber
and foam materials. The default is total Lagrange elasticity procedure. For rubber materials, either total
(using Herrmann elements) or updated Lagrange (using either Herrmann or displacement elements) can
be used. For foam, either total or updated Lagrange procedure is supported using the displacement based
elements. The updated Lagrange procedure does not support plane stress elements and switches to total
Lagrange procedure for these elements. For more details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word ELASTICITY.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for total Lagrange formulation (default).


Enter 2 for updated Lagrange formulation.

109 PLASTICITY
Plasticity Procedure

PLASTICITY

Plasticity Procedure

Description
This option can be used to define the plasticity procedure that is used in Marc. The default is the mean
normal procedure for satisfying the yield criteria and the additive decomposition of the incremental
strains into elastic and plastic parts. For problems which have large elastic and plastic strains, the
multiplicative decomposition is more accurate. The multiplicative decomposition implementation
requires that the elasticity is isotropic. For more details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word PLASTICITY.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for additive decomposition using the mean normal method; small
strain formulation (default).
Enter 2 for additive decomposition using the radial return method; small
strain formulation.
Enter 3 for additive decomposition using the mean normal method; large
strain formulation using the updated Lagrange procedure.
Enter 4 for additive decomposition using the radial return method; large
strain formulation using the updated Lagrange procedure.
Enter 5 for multiplicative decomposition (FeFp) using the radial return
method and the three field variational principle; large strain formulation
using the updated Lagrange procedure.

FOLLOW FOR 110


Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry Application of Total
Boundary Condition

FOLLOW FOR

Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on


Current Geometry Application of Total Boundary Condition

Description
The FOLLOW FOR parameter is used for follower force (for example, pressure) problems. Separate flags
under this parameter are used to control follower forces for distributed loads and point loads respectively.
When this parameter is used with default values for the associated flags, all distributed loads are formed
on the basis of current geometry. This parameter requires the use of the residual load correction and,
therefore, forces the use of that option regardless of other parameters (for example, the NO LOADCOR
parameter is ignored).
Whenever FOLLOW FOR is used, the distributed load magnitude given in the FORCEM user subroutine
must be the total magnitude to be reached after the current increment, and not the incremental magnitude.
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the fluxes are based upon the current geometry.
When the table driven input procedure is not used, boundary conditions in structural analysis are
normally entered as incremental values. To specify total values, use the third field of this option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the words FOLLOW FOR.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if follower force stiffness due to distributed loads is not required


(default).
Enter 2 if follower force stiffness due to distributed loads is to be included.
Enter 3 if the follower force for distributed loads is based upon the
displacement at the beginning of the increment, as opposed to the last
iteration.
Enter -1 if the undeformed geometry is required but total values of
distributed loads are to be used.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 if total values of boundary conditions are to be entered on


DISP CHANGE, POINT LOAD, and DIST LOADS options as opposed to
the default incremental loads.

21-25

4th

Enter 0 if follower force for point loads is not required (default).


Enter 1 if follower force for point loads is to be considered.

111 FOLLOW FOR


Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry Application of Total

Notes:

If the follower force stiffness is included, the use of the SOLVER option can be used to
specify a nonsymmetric formulation. This improves convergence, but results in longer
solver times.
If the 2nd field is 0 and the 4th field is 0, follower force is turned on for all distributed loads
in the model (this allows compatibility with previous versions).
Setting the 4th field to 1 only allows the possibility that point loads can be follower forces.
Individual point loads specified under the POINT LOAD model and history definition
options are used to actually specify if the load is a follower force or not.
Follower force stiffness is not currently available for point loads.

Follower force stiffness for distributed loads is available for element types (3, 7, 10, 11, 18, 72, 75, 80,
82, 84, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 139, 149, 151, 152, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, and 185).

BUCKLE 112
Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis

BUCKLE

Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis

Description
This parameter specifies the use of buckling load estimation by eigenvalue analysis, based on a
perturbation of the tangent stiffness. Multiple eigenvectors are allowed for the case where the closest root
to the current load set is not pertinent. Either the inverse power sweep method or the Lanczos method can
be used. The BUCKLE history definition option or the BUCKLE INCREMENT modal definition option
controls the eigenvalue extraction. The RECOVER history definition option allows for modal stress
recovery or storing eigenvectors on a post file. The LARGE DISP parameter should be included to obtain
the nonlinear collapse load estimate.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-6

1st

Enter the word BUCKLE.

11-15

2nd

Maximum number of buckling modes to be estimated at any time.

16-20

3rd

Number of buckling modes with positive eigenvalues to be estimated at


any time.
In many buckling problems, collapse modes corresponding to loads of
opposite magnitude to those of interest exist. By specifying a larger
number of modes (say 5) in Columns 11-15 and one or two modes in this
field, you can ensure getting the one or two modes you are interested in.
Marc stops the modal search when all these modes have been formed, or
when all the modes requested in columns 11-15 have been formed,
whichever occurs first. If this field is left blank, all modes asked for in
columns 11-15 are formed regardless of sign.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 if modal stress recovery or storing eigenvectors on post tape is to


be performed in this analysis.

26-30

5th

Enter 3 to perform non-axisymmetric Fourier buckling.

31-35

6th

Enter 1 to use inverse power sweep with single eigenvalue extraction.

36-40

7th

Enter 0 if inverse power sweep method is to be used (default).


Enter 1 if Lanczos method is to be used.

113 CREEP
Creep Analysis

CREEP

Creep Analysis

Description
This parameter specifies a creep analysis. For more information about creep analysis, see the Creep
Constitutive Data block model definition option in the section of this manual and Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information. The Marc CRPLAW and VSWELL user subroutines, used with creep analysis, are
explained in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
Note:

When using the implicit Maxwell creep model, the stress dependence must be in
exponential form, the CRPLAW user subroutine cannot be used.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word CREEP.

11-15

2nd

Enter the flag for type of explicit creep analysis. Default of 0, normal
creep (Maxwell Model); 1, viscoplastic creep; 2, viscoplastic creep with
nonassociative flow rule.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 for explicit Kelvin Model. (This is identical to the VISCO ELAS
parameter.)

21-25

4th

Enter 1 for implicit Maxwell creep or implicit viscoplastic model.

26-30

5th

For the implicit Maxwell creep model or implicit viscoplastic model:


When using the implicit Maxwell creep model, the stress dependence
must be in exponential form, the CRPLAW user subroutine cannot be used.
Enter 0 for elastic tangent
Enter 1 for secant tangent
Enter 2 for radial return

VISCO ELAS 114


Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model)

VISCO ELAS

Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model)

Description
This parameter flags the use of the CRPVIS user subroutine to model generalized Kelvin material
behavior using an explicit procedure. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details. This
parameter automatically flags the CREEP option as well, so that Maxwell behavior (VSWELL, CRPLAW
user subroutines can be included with CRPVIS).
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the words VISCO ELAS.

115 STRUCTURAL
Mechanical Analysis

STRUCTURAL

Mechanical Analysis

Description
This parameter is used in multi-physics analyses if one of the physics types is structural. It is used in
combination with other parameters such as HEAT or ELECTRO. The inclusion of both the STRUCTURAL
and ELECTRO parameters results in a coupled electrostatic-structural analysis. In such a multi-physics
analysis, one pass will be a mechanical analysis and subjected to boundary conditions defined in the
FIXED DISP, POINT LOAD, DIST LOADS, FOUNDATION, and CONTACT options.
The STRUCTURAL parameter may be used in conjunction with:
HEAT

- coupled thermal mechanical analysis

JOULE

- coupled thermal-electrical resistance analysis

ELECTRO

- Coulomb force calculation

MAGNETO

- Lorenzi force calculation

ACOUSTIC

- coupled structural-acoustic analysis

PIEZO

- structural analysis with piezoelectric effects

Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word STRUCTURAL.

COUPLE 116
Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis

COUPLE

Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis

Description
This parameter allows a coupled thermal-stress analysis. In these problems, the independent variables are
displacements and temperatures. If you define displacement elements in the connectivity, heat transfer
capabilities are included for these elements. To obtain the coupling between plastic work and internal
heat generated, a DIST FLUXES model definition option with a flux type of 101 must be included. The
CUPFLX user subroutine can be used to define an alternative model for internal heat generation. Care
must be taken in defining the factor used to convert inelastic mechanical energy to thermal energy (see
the CONVERT model definition option). If shell elements are present or latent heats are used, the HEAT
parameter might also be required.
For a coupled thermo-mechanical-electrical problem, it is also necessary to include a JOULE parameter.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word COUPLE.

117 DECOUPLING
Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis

DECOUPLING

Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis

Description
This parameter allows users to manually analyze contact between the workpiece and deformable tools in
a decoupled manner.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word DECOUPLING.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for mechanical-only analysis.The deformable tools are treated as


rigid bodies.
Enter 2 for coupled analysis. The deformable tools are treated as rigidthermal bodies.
Enter 3 for tool stress analysis only.

Notes:

Using contact decoupling assumes that the deformation in deformable tool is small
compared to the workpiece deformation.
No remeshing is allowed in the deformable tools.
Typically, a decoupling analysis is run through the run_marc command: -dcoup.
However, you can use the control here to run the analysis manually. The data transfer file
is defined through READ FILE and WRITE FILE history options or, by default, using
jid.t70 in the current directory.

FLUID 118
Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis

FLUID

Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis

Description
This parameter controls the procedure when performing a fluid analysis. In this release, Marc provides
the ability to solve the Navier Stokes equations, excluding turbulence for incompressible fluids. Marc
offers either weakly (staggered method) or strongly (simultaneous method) procedures in multi-physics
type problems. Using the weak formulation, more iterations might be necessary, but overall computation
costs might be less. For fluid-thermal problems, the strongly coupled procedure is recommended; while
for fluid-solid problems, the weakly coupled procedure should be used. Furthermore, you can select how
the fluid incompressibility conditions are to be satisfied. Either a mixed method, with degrees of freedom
of velocity and pressure or a penalty method with degrees of freedom of velocity can be used with the
continuum elements. The penalty factor can be entered through the PARAMETERS option. For more
details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Caution:

Fluid analysis cannot be performed with element types 155 through 157.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word FLUID.

11-15

2nd

Enter one of the following codes:


10 fluid analysis mixed method
11 fluid analysis penalty method
12 fluid-thermal mixed method strong coupling
13 fluid-thermal penalty method strong coupling
2 fluid-thermal mixed method weak coupling
3 fluid-thermal penalty method weak coupling
40 fluid-solid mixed method weak coupling
41 fluid-solid penalty method weak coupling
42 fluid-thermal-solid mixed method strong weak coupling
43 fluid-thermal-solid penalty method strong weak coupling
44 fluid-thermal-solid mixed method weak weak coupling
45 fluid-thermal-solid penalty method weak weak coupling

119 FLUID
Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis

Format
Fixed
16-20

Free
3rd

Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter 1 to obtain gradients and fluxes at integration points.


Enter 2 to obtain in addition external flux values at nodal points. If this
field is left blank, only temperatures at integration points and nodal
temperatures are printed.

PORE 120
Soil Analysis

PORE

Soil Analysis

Description
This parameter sets the flags for one of several possible soil analysis. It is possible to perform either a
pore pressure calculation (transient or steady state), a soil analysis (including the effects of previously
obtained pore pressures), or a coupled pore-soil plasticity analysis. For information about soil analyses,
see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Notes:

If only a pore pressure calculation is be performed, use element types 41, 42 or 44.
If an uncoupled soil calculation is to be performed, use element types 27, 28 or 21.
If a coupled fluid-soil analysis is to be performed, use element types 32, 33 or 35.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word PORE.

11-15

2nd

Enter 0 if pore pressure data is to be entered.


Enter 1 if a steady state pore pressure calculation is to be performed.
Enter 2 if a transient pore pressure calculation is to be performed.

16-20

3rd

Enter 0 if only the pore pressure is to be calculated; for example, no


stress analysis.
Enter 1 if a stress analysis is to be performed.

Example
If a fully coupled analysis is required, enter:
PORE, 2, 1

121 T-T-T
Time-Temperature-Transformation

T-T-T

Time-Temperature-Transformation

Description
This parameter allocates storage for the time-temperature-phase dependent properties. The properties
themselves are defined using the TIME-TEMP model definition option.
Most materials, when quenched or air cooled from a sufficiently high temperature, exhibit a change in
mechanical or thermal properties. At any stage during the cooling process, these properties are usually
dependent not only on the current temperature but also on the previous thermal history. This is due to the
fact that the properties are influenced by the internal microstructure of the material and this in turn usually
depends on the rate at which the temperature changes. Only in instances where the temperature is
changed very gradually does the material respond in an equilibrium manner where properties are simply
a function of the current temperature. In addition, during the cooling process, certain solid-solid phase
transformations can occur. These represent another form of change in the material microstructure which
can influence the mechanical or thermal properties. This parameter allows you to account for the timetemperature-transformation interrelationships of what are generally termed thermomechanical effects.
For more information about this type of analysis, see the Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-5

1st

Enter the expression T-T-T.

11-15

2nd

Enter the maximum number of material groups with time-temperaturetransformation dependent material properties (default is 1).

16-20

3rd

Enter the maximum number of cooling rates used to define any one
property of any material group (see Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information for details). Default is 3.

21-25

4th

Enter the maximum number of temperature points at which a property


value is specified for any cooling rate. Default is 5.

25-30

5th

If the thermal coefficient of expansion for any material group is to be


expressed in terms of polynomial expansions in temperature, enter the
maximum number of temperature points at which an expansion is defined
for any cooling rate.

HEAT 122
Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis

HEAT

Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis

Description
This parameter specifies a heat transfer (conduction) analysis instead of displacement/stress analysis.
Convection can be included if the velocities are known or in a steady-state rigid plastic analysis. For the
solution of the coupled thermal/flow problem, the FLUID parameter should be used. For more
information about heat transfer capabilities in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
The HEAT parameter may be used in conjunction with:
STRUCTURAL

- coupled thermal mechanical analysis

JOULE

- Joule heating - resistive heating analysis

ELECTRO

- resistance heating

MAGNETO

- resistance and Eddy current

EL-MA (harmonics) - induction heating analysis

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-4

1st

Enter the word HEAT.

11-15

2nd

Temperature distribution in thickness direction of heat transfer shell


elements 50, 85, 86, 87, and 88.
Enter 0 for linear temperature distribution in thickness direction.
Enter 1 for quadratic temperature distribution in thickness direction.
Default is 0.

16-20

3rd

Maximum number of latent heats associated with any material type.


Default is 0.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to obtain gradients and fluxes at integration points.


Enter 2 to obtain in addition external flux values at nodal points. If this
field is left blank, only temperatures at integration points and nodal
temperatures are printed.

26-30

5th

Enter 2 to include convective terms. This automatically initiates the


nonsymmetric solver. The velocity must be prescribed.

123 HEAT
Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

31-35

6th

Enter the number of heat transfer layers for composite shell elements.
Default is 1.

36-40

7th

Enter 1 to linearize calculation of surface energy and receding surface


data (default).
Enter 2 to not linearize calculation.

JOULE 124
Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis

JOULE

Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis

Description
This parameter allows you to perform a coupled thermoelectrical (Joule heating) problem or a coupled
thermo-mechanical-electrical problem. The coupling between the electrical problem and the thermal
problem is because: (1) the resistance in the electric problem is dependent on temperatures and (2) the
internal heat generation in the thermal problem is a function of the electric flow. For more information
about the finite element formulation of Joule heating problems, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
In the analysis of Joule heating, the model definition options JOULE, VOLTAGE, DIST CURRENT and
POINT CURRENT must be used for the definition of electric problems. However, options for the heat
transfer analysis remain unchanged.
For a coupled thermo-mechanical-electrical problem, it is necessary to have either a COUPLE or a
STRUCTURAL parameter. In such problems, there is additional coupling because of the change in
boundary conditions through the CONTACT option which changes both the thermal and electrical
behavior. Heat is generated not only by electrical resistance (Joule heating), but also by heat generated
due to inelastic behavior.
Note:

Joule heating is not applied to shell elements, conventional heat transfer will be applied in
these regions.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-5

1st

Enter the word JOULE.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for conventional model


Enter 2 if electrical properties are a strong function of temperature.

125 DIFFUSION
Diffusion Analysis

DIFFUSION

Diffusion Analysis

Description
This parameter indicates that a diffusion analysis is to be performed. The boundary conditions are applied
using the FIXED PRESSURE, DIST MASS, and POINT MASS options.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word DIFFUSION.

ABLATION 126
Specify Ablation Occurrence

ABLATION

Specify Ablation Occurrence

Description
This parameter is used to specify that ablation is to occur. It is normally used in conjunction with the
PYROLYSIS parameter. The surface to be ablated is specified via the RECEDING SURFACE option. Data
used to control the ablation is entered via the SURFACE ENERGY option for the advanced model.
For more information, refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 6, Nonstructural
Procedure Library, Ablation.
Note:

Ablation is not applied to shell elements.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter word ABLATION.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 to use normal based upon all surfaces.


Enter 2 to use normal based upon surfaces given by RECEDING
SURFACE data (default).
Enter 3 to use normal based upon direction of streamline.
Enter 4 to use normal based upon direction of streamline with projected
magnitude.

16-20

3rd

The following is used only with the shaver mesher:


Enter 1 if new surface node coordinate is equal to old, shaved coordinate
(default).
Enter 2 if new surface node coordinate is projected coordinate.

21-25

4th

Enter the frequency to write the recession information to jid.rec file,


default is write every increment.

26-30

5th

Enter 0, if s calculated at surface integration points (default).


Enter 1 if s calculated at the nodal point.

127 PYROLYSIS
Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis

PYROLYSIS

Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis

Description
This parameter is used to indicate that a thermo-poro-ablative model is being analyzed. The region which
can undergo pyrolysis is defined either via the THERMAL CONTACT or STREAM DEFINITION option.
If the simplified streamline fluid flow model is used, the STREAM DEFINITION option is required.
For more information, refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 6, Nonstructural
Procedure Library, Pyrolysis
Note:

Pyrolysis is not applied to shell elements, conventional heat transfer will be applied in
these regions.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter word PYROLYSIS.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for no fluid generation (default).


Enter 2 for streamline fluid flow model.
Enter 3 for DArcy fluid flow model.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 to linearize calculation of surface energy and receding surface data


(default).
Enter 2 to not linearize system.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to symmetrize convective terms (default).


Enter 2 to use nonsymmetric formulation.

26-30

5th

Enter 0 or 1 if
magnitude of

m
m

used in the surface energy or recession calculation is the


.

Enter 2 if in used in the surface energy or recession calculation is the


projection of m n .

31-35

6th

Enter 1 for in rate term (default).


Enter 2 for 2 in rate term.
Enter -1 for no in rate term.

36-40

7th

Enter 1 to include divergence in g (default).


Enter 2 to exclude divergence in g .

CURING 128
Curing Analysis Parameter Definition

CURING

Curing Analysis Parameter Definition

Description
The parameter flags the capability to take into account the curing effect on either the heat transfer or
structural analysis. In a heat transfer analysis, the cure reaction heat flux is calculated and coupled into
the heat transfer equation system. In a structural analysis, the cure induced volumetric shrinkage can also
be incorporated.
For more information, refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 5, Structural
Procedure Library, Cure-Thermal-Mechanically Coupled Analysis.
Notes:

The CURING parameter works in two analysis types:


(a) Heat transfer analysis
(b) Thermal-mechanical coupled analysis

Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word CURING.

129 BEARING
Bearing Analysis

BEARING

Bearing Analysis

Description
This parameter activates the bearing analysis facility for the analysis of lubrication problems. For more
information about Marcs bearing analysis capabilities, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
In a bearing analysis, the model definition options VELOCITY, THICKNESS, RESTRICTOR,
ISOTROPIC, FIXED PRESSURE, DAMPING COMPONENTS, STIFFNS COMPONENTS, and THICKNS
CHANGE can be used to define the problem.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-7

1st

Enter the word BEARING.

11-15

2nd

Enter the maximum number of subincrements. Default is 4.

ELECTRO 130
Electrostatic Analysis

ELECTRO

Electrostatic Analysis

Description
This parameter allows an electrostatic analysis to be performed. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC
model definition options are used to define the material properties. The FIXED POTENTIAL, DIST
CHARGES, and POINT CHARGE options are used to prescribe the boundary conditions while the history
definition option STEADY STATE is used for the steady state solution. For more information about the
electrostatic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. For
information about elements used in electrostatic analysis, see Marc Volume B: Element Library.
The ELECTRO parameter may be used in conjunction with:
STRUCTURAL

- Coulomb force calculation

HEAT

- resistance heating analysis

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word ELECTRO.

11-15

2nd

Potential distribution in thickness direction of shell elements 50, 85, 86,


87, and 88.
Enter 0 for linear potential distribution in thickness direction.
Enter 1 for quadratic potential distribution in thickness direction. Default
is 0.

16-20

3rd

Flag to indicate which method for Coulomb Force calculation is used in


a coupled electrostatic analysis.
Enter 0 for using the electric field intensity based calculation. Use this
when the distance between charged bodies is small.
Enter 1 for the nodal charge based calculation. Use this when the distance
between charged bodies is large.
See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details).
Default is 0.

131 MAGNETO
Magnetostatic Analysis

MAGNETO

Magnetostatic Analysis

Description
This parameter specifies a magnetostatic analysis. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC model
definition options are used for the input of isotropic or orthotropic magnetic permeabilities. The model
definition options FIXED POTENTIAL, POINT CURRENT, and DIST CURRENT are used for prescribed
potential and current boundary conditions. The COIL CURRENT and EMCOIL PATH may be used to
define the geometry and location of a coil. B-H RELATION is used for the input of the variation of
magnetic permeability with either the magnetic field density or the magnetic field vector. Permanent
magnets can be introduced by using the PERMANENT model definition option. The STEADY STATE
history definition option is used for the steady state option.
For more information about the magnetostatic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information. For information about elements used in magnetostatic analysis, see Marc Volume
B: Element Library.
The MAGNETO parameter may be used in conjunction with:
STRUCTURAL

- Lorenzi force calculation

HEAT

- resistance and Eddy current heating

Format
Format
Fixed
1-6

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word MAGNETO.

EL-MA 132
Perform Electromagnetic Analysis

EL-MA

Perform Electromagnetic Analysis

Description
This parameter activates the capability in Marc to perform an electromagnetic analysis. The
electromagnetic analysis can be either a harmonic or a transient analysis. The ISOTROPIC and
ORTHOTROPIC model definition options are used to define the material properties. The FIXED
POTENTIAL, DIST CURRENT, and POINT CURRENT-CHARGE options are used to prescribe the
boundary conditions while the HARMONIC and DYNAMIC CHANGE history definition options are used
for the harmonic and transient solutions, respectively. Refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information for a description of the electromagnetic analysis capability in Marc. An electromagnetic
analysis can be performed with element types 111, 112, or 113. See Marc Volume B: Element Library for
further details.
The EL-MA parameter may be used in conjunction with:
HEAT

- induction heating simulation

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word EL-MA.

11-15

2nd

Set to 0 for transient electromagnetic analysis.


Set to 1 for harmonic electromagnetic analysis.
Default is 0.

16-20

3rd

Set to 0 for transient electromagnetic analysis using Newmark


beta procedure (default).
Set to 1 for transient electromagnetic analysis using backward Euler
procedure; preferred for low-frequency simulations.

133 PIEZO
Activate Piezoelectric Analysis

PIEZO

Activate Piezoelectric Analysis

Description
This parameter activates a piezoelectric analysis. Possible analysis types are static, modal, transient
dynamic, harmonic, or buckling. A description of the piezoelectric capabilities is included in Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information. Piezoelectric analysis may be performed with the following
element types:
160

4-node plane stress

161

4-node plane strain

162

4-node axisymmetric

163

8-node brick

164

4-node tetrahedron

Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word PIEZO.

ACOUSTIC 134
Acoustic Analysis

ACOUSTIC

Acoustic Analysis

Description
This parameter activates the capability to perform an acoustic analysis. The ACOUSTIC model definition
option is used to prescribe the material behavior of the fluid. The FIXED PRESSURE, DIST SOURCES,
and POINT SOURCE model definition options are used to prescribe boundary conditions.
For Modal Acoustic analysis, Marc calculates the fundamental frequencies when the MODAL SHAPE
option is encountered. A transient analysis can be performed using the DYNAMIC CHANGE option. This
option can only be used in combination with cavities with rigid reflecting surfaces
For Harmonic Acoustic analysis, Marc calculates the response of the coupled acoustic-solid system. The
coupling is done via the CONTACT option. The frequency range is specified using the HARMONIC
history definition option. Reactive boundary conditions can be given via the CONTACT TABLE option.
For more information about the acoustic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information. For information about elements used in acoustic analysis, see Marc Volume B:
Element Library.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word ACOUSTIC.

11-15

2nd

Maximum number of modes to be used in the modal superposition


DYNAMIC parameter. If the inverse power sweep method is used for
eigenvalue analysis, it is also the number of mode shapes and frequencies
to be extracted. Only needed for modal acoustics.

16-20

3rd

For modal acoustics:


Enter 0 for inverse powder sweep method.
Enter 1 to force the Lanczos method.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 if modal stress recovery or storing eigenvectors on post file is to


be performed in this analysis. Only needed for modal acoustics.

26-30

5th

Flag to indicate whether modal acoustics or harmonic acoustic analysis


is used.
1 = modal acoustics (default)
2 = harmonic acoustics

135 RADIATION
Radiation Analysis

RADIATION

Radiation Analysis

Description
This parameter activates the radiation analysis capabilities in heat transfer and coupled analyses. This
parameter selects the method to evaluate the viewfactors and controls the accuracy of the calculation of
the vivisectors, and the resulting thermal radiation calculation as well. Depending on which method is
chosen different model definition options are required to define the cavity and the specification of the
emissivity as defined below. If spectral dependent emissivity is defined it is also necessary to use the
PARAMETERS model definition option to specify the speed of light in the cavity medium.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-9

1st

Enter the word RADIATION.

11-15

2nd

View factor calculation flag (IRADFL).


Set to 0 to calculate viewfactors once using the direct integration method.
The RADIATING CAVITY model definition option defines the cavity. This
procedure is only available for axisymmetric cavities. The emissivity is
defined with other material data through the ISOTROPIC,
ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.
Set to 1 to read viewfactors from a file created by the direct integration
approach. The emissivity is defined with other material data through the
ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.
Set to 2 to read view factor file created by Marc Mentat using the Monte
Carlo method. They are read from a file jid.vfs. This procedure also
requires the use of the VIEW FACTOR model definition option. The
emissivity is defined with other material data through the ISOTROPIC,
ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.
Set to 3 to calculate viewfactors by the hemi-cube projection method, and
the view factor file will be in ascii format. The CAVITY DEFINITION
option defines the cavity. The thermal radiation calculation is only active
if the RAD-CAVITY option indicates that the cavity is used in a boundary
condition, and the LOADCASE option is used to indicate that the boundary
condition is active. The emissivity is defined either with other material
data through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options, or through
the EMISSIVITY (preferred) option.

RADIATION 136
Radiation Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Set to 4 to calculate viewfactors by the hemi-cube projection method, and
the view factor file will be in binary format. The CAVITY DEFINITION
option defines the cavity. The thermal radiation calculation is only active
if the RAD-CAVITY option indicates that the cavity is used in a boundary
condition, and the LOADCASE option is used to indicate that the boundary
condition is active. The emissivity is defined either with other material
data through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options, or through
the EMISSIVITY (preferred) option. Default is 0

16-20

3rd

Only used if IRADFL is 0 or 1. Enter the file number (IFILVF) for


viewfactors. Viewfactors are written if IRADFL = 0, and are read if
IRADFL = 1. When IRADFL = 0 and IFILVF = 0, the viewfactors are
not saved. Default is 0.

21-25

4th

Temperature unit flag.


Set to 0 to use offset temperature entered in PARAMETERS option.
(Default)
Set to 1 if user input is in degrees Celsius.
Set to 2 if user input is in degrees Kelvin.
Set to 3 if user input is in degrees Fahrenheit.
Caution: Do not enter temperatures in degrees Rankine.

26-35

5th

Enter the Stefan-Boltzmann constant in the correct units. Default is the


value given in PARAMETERS option, 5.67051 x 10-8W/m2K4.

For the direct integration approach.


36-40

6th

Number of divisions used in view factor calculation. Default is 3.

41-45

7th

Number of Gauss points used in each subdivision. Default is 3.

46-50

8th

Enter unit number for debug printout.

51-55

9th

Enter 4 for alternative (K4) method for calculation of view factors.

For the Monte Carlo approach (IRADFL=2) the 6th, 7th, 8th, and 9th fields are zero.
For the hemi-cube approach (IRADFL=3 or IRADFL=4).
36-40

6th

Enter the number of pixels (default is 500).

41-45

7th

Enter 1 to possibly re-evaluate the viewfactors based upon the motion of


the structure. Only available in a coupled analysis using the updated
Lagrange method, or in an analysis with ABLATION.

46-50

8th

For axisymmetric cavities, enter the number of divisions around


circumference. Default is 36.

51-55

9th

Not used; enter 0.

137 RADIATION
Radiation Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

For either the Monte Carlo or hemi-cube method.


56-65

10th

Enter the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be used as a


cutoff. Viewfactors read in or calculated below this cutoff are ignored.
Default is 0.0001.

66-75

11th

Enter the fraction of the maximum view factor that is to be treated


implicitly (contribute to operator matrix). View factor values smaller than
this cutoff are treated explicitly. Default is 0.01.

CAVITY 138
Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities

CAVITY

Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities

Description
This parameter governs the analysis of structures with internal cavities. When using the CAVITY
parameter, the FOLLOW FOR parameter is automatically switched on.
Note:

This capability is not available if the table input option is used.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word CAVITY.

11-15

2nd

Enter an upper bound to the number of cavities. Maximum is 1000.

16-20

3rd

Enter an upper bound to the number of segments in the cavity.

21-25

4th

Enter the number of nodes per segment.


Enter 2 for low-order 2-D elements.
Enter 3 for high-order 2-D elements.
Enter 3 or 4 for low-order 3-D elements.
Enter 6 or 8 for high-order 3-D elements.
Default is 8.

139 RBE
Rigid Body Elements

RBE

Rigid Body Elements

Description
This option can be used to define the number of degrees of freedom for a reference node used in the RBE2
or RBE3 model definition option. This might be necessary in cases where the number of degrees of
freedom for all other nodes in the structure is smaller than the required number of degrees of freedom for
the reference node. This, for example, happens if the RBE2 or RBE3 option is used in an analysis with
continuum elements only.
It can also be used to set special features of RBE2 and RBE3.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word RBE.

11-15

2nd

Enter 3 for a 2-D analysis.


Enter 6 for a 3-D analysis.
Note:

16-20

3rd

Values other than 3 or 6 are not allowed.

Enter 1 to use large displacement formulation of RBE2 based upon a fixed


coordinate system.
Enter 3 to deactivate automatic convergence test by the RBE2 module.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to use large displacement formulation of RBE3 based on small


rotational increment assumption.
Enter 2 to activate non-normalized rotation constraint coefficient of RBE3.

MACHINING 140
NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis

MACHINING

NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis

Description
This parameter flags the capability to simulate the NC machining (that is, Metal Cutting or Material
Removing) processes. With this option invoked, the deactivation of elements can be done according to
the cutter path defined by either the APT source or CL files.
The DEACTIVATE model or history definition option must be used in order to apply this capability during
the course of analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-9

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word MACHINING.

141
Rezoning and Substructure Parameters

Chapt Rezoning and Substructure Parameters


er 2:
Para
meter
s

REZONING 142
Allow Rezoning

REZONING

Allow Rezoning

Description
This parameter is used to indicate that rezoning can occur during this run. During rezoning, it is possible
to add and/or delete elements and/or nodal points. If elements and/or nodal points are added, there should
be enough elements and nodes allocated with the SIZING parameter in the initial run. The REZONING
parameter can be used with all continuum displacement elements, shell elements 22, 75, 138, 139, and
140 and Herrmann elements 80 through 84 as well as elements 155 through 157.
If the second field is entered as 1 or 2, automatic remeshing followed by rezoning is activated. In this
case, use the ADAPTIVE parameter to define the upper-bound of the number of elements and nodes in the
mesh and the ADAPT GLOBAL history definition option to define the criteria in global remeshing.
Automatic remeshing with rezoning can only be used with the updated Lagrangian formulation, and with
continuum (displacement or Herrmann) element. Marc switches to updated Lagrangian framework if the
total Lagrangian formulation is specified in the input file. Global adaptive remeshing is available for
lower-order triangular, quadrilateral continuum elements in 2-D and lower-order tetrahedral, lower-order
triangular, or quadrilateral shell elements in 3-D.
Note:

If rezoning is to be performed in this analysis, this parameter must be included from the
very beginning. It cannot be added upon restart.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word REZONING.

11-15

2nd

Enter 0 for user supplied mesh for rezoning (default).


Enter 1 for 2-D automatic remeshing followed by rezoning.
Enter 2 for 3-D automatic remeshing followed by rezoning.

143 MNF
MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options

MNF

MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options

Description
This optional parameter allows the user to request that stress and/or strain modes be computed and
exported to the MNF. It also allows the user to pick the layer number for shell elements.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word MNF.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 to compute and export stress modes to MNF.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 to compute and export strain modes to MNF.

21-25

4th

Enter the shell layer:


0: continuum elements.
1: shell top layer.
2: shell middle layer.
3: shell bottom layer.

SUPER 144
Super Element Input

SUPER

Super Element Input

Description
This parameter allows the user to define an upper-bound to the number of degrees of freedom per node
when DMIGs are used to define superelements.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-5

1st

Enter the word SUPER.

11-15

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

21-25

4th

Enter the maximum number of degrees of freedom per node number in


any super element.

145 USER
Create User-defined Element

USER

Create User-defined Element

Description
You can define your own stiffness or mass matrix using this parameter and user subroutine USELEM to
specify equivalent nodal loads, stiffness matrix, mass matrix, stress recovery, and internal force. When
using this capability, the element type given on the CONNECTIVITY model definition option and the
ELEMENTS parameter is a negative number. This parameter can be used repeatedly to define different
element types.
For a thermo-mechanically coupled analysis, a user-defined element for the stress pass can be associated
with a regular Marc element or a user-defined element for the heat transfer pass. In the latter case, note
that USER parameter should be defined for all the user-defined stress elements first followed by USER
parameters for the associated heat transfer elements in the same order.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word USER.

11-15

2nd

Enter the element type; must be a negative number.

16-20

3rd

Number of degrees of freedom per node.

21-25

4th

Maximum number of stress quantities to be stored per integration point;


can be 0.

26-30

5th

Number of nodes per element; must be less than 101.

31-35

6th

Number of generalized strains; can be 0.

36-40

7th

Number of coordinates per node.

41-45

8th

Number of integration points per element; can be 0.

46-50

9th

Number of direct components of stress; can be 0.

51-55

10th

Number of shear components of stress; can be 0.

56-60

11th

Enter the element class based upon:

Conventional Marc Element Classes


0 = Pipe

8 = 3-D solid (brick, tet)

1 = Truss

9 = Fourier

2 = Shell

10 = Axisymmetric solid with twist

3 = Plate

11 = Axisymmetric shell

4 = Plane stress

12 = Open section beam

USER 146
Create User-defined Element

Conventional Marc Element Classes


5 = Plane strain

13 = Closed section beam

6 = Generalized plane strain

14 = Membrane

7 = Axisymmetric solid

15 = Gap

61-65

12th

Heat transfer flag;


0 = Stress element
1 = Heat transfer element

66-70

13th

Associated heat transfer element if this is a stress element and the analysis
is coupled. This can be a positive normal Marc element type or another
negative user element type.

71-75

14th

Enter the topology class based upon:


Conventional Marc Topology Classes

11 = 2-node line (linear)

41 = 4-node tetrahedral (linear)

12 = 3-node line (quadratic)

42 = 5-node tetrahedral (4+1) (linear)

21 = 3-node triangle (linear)

43 = 10-node tetrahedral (quadratic)

22 = 4-node triangle (3+1) (linear+bubble)

51 = 6-node pentahedral

23 = 6-node triangle (quadratic)

52 = 15-node pentahedral

31 = 4-node quadrilateral (linear)

61 = 8-node hexahedral (linear)

32 = 5-node quadrilateral (4+1) Lagrange


multiplier)

62 = 9-node hexahedral (8+1) (linear + Lagrange


multiplier)

33 = 6-node quadrilateral

63 = 12-node hexahedral

34 = 8-node quadrilateral (quadratic serendipity)

64 = 20-node hexahedral (quadratic - serendipity)

35 = 9-node quadrilateral (8+1) (quadratic Lagrange)

147 USER
Additional Flags for Various Analyses

Chapt Additional Flags for Various Analyses


er 2:
Para
meter
s

CENTROID 148
State Storage at Centroid Only

CENTROID

State Storage at Centroid Only

Description
This parameter is used for calculation and storage of stress and strain (or, for heat transfer, temperature)
at the centroid of each element only.
The CENTROID parameter reduces the storage requirements, and the computational costs. However, it is
not recommended for nonlinear analysis because it reduces the accuracy of the solution. If this parameter
is used, the residual load correction should be switched off by using the NO LOADCOR parameter.
Note:

The POST option may be used to specify that output is at the CENTROID while insuring
an accurate analysis.

Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word CENTROID.

149 ALL POINTS


State Storage at All Points

ALL POINTS

State Storage at All Points

Description
This parameter is used for calculation and storage of stress and strain (or, for heat transfer, temperature)
at all integration points of all elements. Output is obtained for each integration point of each element. For
the integration point locations of Marc elements, see Marc Volume B: Element Library.
If this parameter is switched off by the use of the CENTROID parameter, the state at each integration point
of the element is set equal to the value at the centroid of the element. This is not important in small
displacement elastic solutions and might not be significant where the mesh is very fine. However, the
utility of the sophisticated elements lies in the use of integration point data with relatively few elements.
Use of this parameter is recommended for any nonlinear analysis, particularly nonlinear shell and large
displacement analysis. If this parameter is turned off, the residual load correction should be switched off
(using the NO LOADCOR parameter) since an accurate stress distribution is necessary for this correction
to be effective. In general, use of this feature increases the run time; however, this parameter allows the
use of a coarser mesh, which can result in a lower overall cost for the analysis. Storage requirements are
also higher. This also can affect THERMAL LOADS or CHANGE STATE input requirements.
Note:

This parameter has the default value of on in the K2 and subsequent versions. This
parameter has the default value of off in all versions previous to K2.

Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the words ALL POINTS.

LOAD COR 150


Residual Load Correction

LOAD COR

Residual Load Correction

Description
This parameter is used to ensure that the nonlinear solution is always in equilibrium. In versions
subsequent to K2, this was the default option. It is recommended that the ALL POINTS parameter always
be used in conjunction with residual load correction. The residual correction depends on integrating
stress over the elements, and this can only be accurate if stresses are stored at all points.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the words LOAD COR.

151 NO LOADCOR
Suppression of Load Correction

NO LOADCOR

Suppression of Load Correction

Description
Residual load correction is automatically included for any analysis. This parameter is used to override
any automatic setting. This parameter should be the last parameter given before the END parameter.
Note:

Certain parameters (DYNAMIC and LARGE DISP) override this parameter and always turn
the load correction on. The use of this parameter should be limited to linear
elastic problems.

Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the words NO LOADCOR.

SCALE 152
Scaling to First Yield

SCALE

Scaling to First Yield

Description
This parameter causes scaling of the linear-elastic solution to first yield in the highest stressed element,
for small displacement elastic-plastic analysis where element properties are not temperature dependent.
Using this parameter causes all aspects of the initial solution (displacements, strains, stresses,
temperature changes, loads) to be scaled. Thus, subsequent incrementation is built onto the scaled
solution; for example, the PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT history definition set proportions the
scaled load.
Note:

This parameter cannot be used in dynamic, large disp, or coupled analysis.

Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word SCALE.


This entry automatically switches on the load correction. This flag is
ignored if large displacement or dynamic analysis is flagged.

153 THERMAL
Thermal Stress Analysis

THERMAL

Thermal Stress Analysis

Description
This parameter specifies the use of thermal loading or temperature-dependent material properties in the
analysis. See THERMAL LOADS, CHANGE STATE, INITIAL TEMP, POINT TEMP, and TEMPERATURE
EFFECTS or TABLE model definitions in this document for more information.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word THERMAL.

ISTRESS 154
Define Initial Stress

ISTRESS

Define Initial Stress

Description
This parameter allows you to input an initial set of stresses. It is your responsibility to input a
self-equilibrating set of stresses. These stresses should not produce any material nonlinearity. The
stresses are input through the UINSTR user subroutine or through the INIT STRESS model
definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word ISTRESS.

11-15

2nd

0: Initial stress in element coordinate system (Default)


1: Initial stress in preferred material coordinate system

155 LUMP
Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix

LUMP

Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix

Description
This parameter lumps the mass matrix (for dynamics) or specific heat matrix (for heat transfer) into a
diagonal matrix.
Note:

LUMP can also be used for acoustics. However, it tends to lower the eigenfrequencies.

Use of this parameter is not recommended for second order elements (8-node quadrilateral
or 20-node brick elements) or for shell type elements.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-4

1st

Enter the word LUMP.

5-10

2nd

If greater than or equal to zero, use lumped mass matrix.

11-15

3rd

If greater than zero, does not add mass to rotational degrees of freedom of
the following shell elements: 22, 75, 138, 139, 140.

APPBC 156
Application of Boundary Conditions

APPBC

Application of Boundary Conditions

Description
The APPBC parameter specifies that the application of boundary conditions is performed by row-column
elimination, forcing re-assembly if there are any nonzero applied displacements. If this option is not
included, boundary conditions are applied using the penalty method. The penalty factor is entered
through the PARAMETERS option.
This option has no effect when the CASI iterative solver is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word APPBC.

157 ACCUMULATE
Accumulation of Strain and Displacements

ACCUMULATE

Accumulation of Strain and Displacements

Description
This parameter reserves workspace for the storage of accumulated total strains, plastic strains, creep
strains, and total displacements. Such accumulated values can be used for purposes of extrapolation in
nonlinear creep and/or plasticity analysis. In particular, it can be used in analysis of cyclic loading
problems, where from one complete cycle the accumulated strains and displacements can be extrapolated
to cover multiple loading cycles.
Note:

This parameter must be used with extreme care. Because of the nature of extrapolation, the
results can only be considered to be an estimate of the values that would have otherwise
been obtained with complete analysis. After an extrapolation, the analysis can be continued
in the usual way. See the ACCUMULATE and EXTRAPOLATE options in the history
definition section of this manual for more information.

Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word ACCUMULATE.

ALIAS 158
Define Aliases

ALIAS

Define Aliases

Description
In many cases, you might wish to enter a different element type identification to the library element type
given on the ELEMENTS parameter when the mesh is read from the CONNECTIVITY model definition
set. A common example is the use of the same mesh for heat transfer and stress analysis. The library
element code on the ELEMENTS parameter must be changed, but you might not wish to change the
library code on the CONNECTIVITY option. This parameter defines the aliases corresponding to the
library element types in this analysis. For example, if a heat transfer analysis is to be done with 4-node,
axisymmetric quadrilateral (library code 40) but the mesh has been generated with element code type 10
(the corresponding stress analysis element) the alias is set up as 10 for library code type 40.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-5

1st

Enter the word ALIAS.

11-15

2nd

Number of aliases to be entered. More than one alias can be used for any
one element library code.

16-20

3rd

Alias for element library code (the type given on the CONNECTIVITY
option).

21-25

4th

Actual library code for the above alias (the type given on the ELEMENTS
parameter and the one to be used in the analysis).
Etc.

Note:

Alias correspondence pairs are continued in fields of I5 to column 75. Continuation blocks,
if needed, are given in 16I5 format.

159
Program Function and I/O Controls

Chapt Program Function and I/O Controls


er 2:
Para
meter
s

NEW 160
Use New Format

NEW

Use New Format

Description
This parameter can be used to switch from input in extended format to the default width or vice-versa.
Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW option is encountered.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word NEW.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input. This
overrides the EXTENDED parameter.
Enter 2 if the double width of the data fields is used for input.

161 TABLE
Indicate How Tables are to be used

TABLE

Indicate How Tables are to be used

Description
This option defines how many tables are included in the input data, and how are they to be used.
Tables may currently be used for defining nonlinear material behavior, and boundary conditions and
contact data.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-5

1st

Enter the word TABLE.

6-10

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

4th

Enter 0 if old style input is used for:


FIXED DISP, etc.
POINT LOAD, etc.
DIST LOADS, etc.
FOUNDATION or FILMS option

Enter 2 if new style input is used for:


FIXED DISP, etc.
POINT LOAD, etc.
DIST LOADS, etc.
FOUNDATION or FILMS option

21-25

5th

Enter 0 if old style input is used for:


ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN,
FOAM, HYPOELASTIC, GENT, ARRUDBOYCE options.

Enter 1 if new style input is used for:


ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN,
FOAM, HYPOELASTIC, GENT, ARRUDBOYCE options.

26-30

6th

Enter 0 if old style input is used for CONTACT option.


Enter 1 if new style input is used for CONTACT option.

31-35

7th

Not used; enter 0.

36-40

8th

Enter 0 if a zero table reference value has to be set to one (default).


Enter 1 if a zero table reference value has to remain zero.

COMMENT 162
Define Comment

COMMENT

Define Comment

Description
The COMMENT parameter is used to enter informative comments. This parameter can be used as often
as desired within the model definition and history definition options. Use of this parameter does not affect
the analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word COMMENT.

11-80

2nd

User-entered comment.

Alternate Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-1

1st

Enter the $ character.

3-80

2nd

User-entered comment.

163 PRINT
Debug Printout

PRINT

Debug Printout

Description
This parameter allows printout of various items for debugging; however, the amount of output is
increased accordingly. Default is no check printout. Multiple print flags can be set using columns 11
to 80.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-5

1st

Enter the word PRINT.

11-80

2nd

Enter as many print codes as required.


Enter 1 for output of element stiffness matrices (this also prints out the
shell surface metric for doubly curved shells 4, 8, and 24), consistent mass
matrix, and equivalent nodal loads.
Caution: This produces significant output.
Enter 2 for output of the matrices used in tying. (See TYING, SERVO LINK,
UFORMS.)
Enter 3 to force the solution of a nonpositive definite matrix. This is only
recommended for the AUTO INCREMENT option to pass collapse points
in the collapse analysis. This can be entered on the CONTROL option.
Enter 5 to obtain additional information concerning gap convergence. In
contact analysis, set to 5 to obtain information concerning nodes touching
or separating from surfaces and also to print out the maximum residual and
reaction forces.
Enter 6 to obtain output of nodal value array during rezoning.
Enter 7 to obtain tying information in CONRAD GAP option and fluid
element numbers in CHANNEL option which is used to define fluid
channel input data in heat transfer analysis.
Enter 8 to obtain incremental displacements in local system in
contact problems.
Enter 9 to obtain latent heat output.
Enter 10 to obtain the stress-strain relation in the local coordinate system.
Enter 11 to obtain additional information on the interlaminar
stress calculation.
Enter 12 to output the right-hand side and solution vector.
Caution: This produces significant output.

PRINT 164
Debug Printout

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Enter 13 to obtain additional information regarding CPU resources used.
Enter 14 to obtain information regarding the mesh adapting process.
Enter 15 to obtain additional information regarding surface
energy balances.
Enter 16 to obtain additional information regarding pyrolysis calculation.
Enter 17 to obtain additional information regarding creation
of streamlines.
Enter 18 to obtain information about rezoning when using ADAPT
GLOBAL option.

Enter 20 to obtain information regarding the evaluation of tables.


Enter 21 to obtain information about application of kinematic boundary
conditions when table input is used.
Enter 22 to obtain information about distributed loads, point loads, films,
foundations, and initial conditions when table input is used.
Enter 23 to obtain information about ablation deformation.
Enter 24 to print internal heat generated in coupled analysis.
Enter 25 to print additional information regarding remeshing
during ablation.
Enter 26 to print additional information regarding sink points.
Enter 27 to obtain reaction forces at tied nodes.
Enter 28 to obtain additional information about convective terms in heat
transfer and fluid analysis.
Enter 29 to obtain additional information on the internal created domains
(not supported yet).
Enter 30 to obtain information on cavity pressure loading.
Enter 31 to obtain information about the welding process. The total weld
heat input for each weld flux and the filler element creation history
are printed.
Enter 33 to obtain nodes and elements that are cut.
Enter 34 to print a description of what independent variables may be used
with a physical quantity.
Enter 35 to obtain detailed information on every call to a coupling region
API routine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines,
Chapter 12: Code Coupling Interface)
Enter 36 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has the least details).

165 PRINT
Debug Printout

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Enter 37 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has more details).
Enter 38 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has the most details).
Enter 39 to obtain detailed information about memory allocation.
Enter 40 to obtain information about Marc-Adams integration.
Enter 42 to create a step on the post file containing the rezoned model
before the next increment of the analysis.
Enter 43 to obtain information about VCCT.
Enter 44 to obtain information during progressive failure.
Enter 46 to obtain information as to what subroutine caused the fatal error.

STOP 166
Exit following Workspace Allocation

STOP

Exit following Workspace Allocation

Description
For large problems, you might desire to see the exact sizing requirements for running a job without
actually executing the analysis. The insertion of this parameter causes Marc to exit normally following
workspace allocation. The solution space allocated is based on the optimized bandwidth if you request
the OPTIMIZE option in the model definition section. This is not the total memory required in the case of
the hardware provided solver (solver type 6), the CASI iterative solver (solver type 9), the Pardiso solver
(type 11), or the MUMPS solver (type 12).
Format
Format
Fixed
1-4

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word STOP.

167 NOTES
Print Notes and Updates

NOTES

Print Notes and Updates

Description
This parameter provides detailed, updated information about Marc (manual update, new program
features, etc.)
Format
Format
Fixed
1-5

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word NOTES.

INPUT TAPE 168


Specify Device for Model Definition Data

INPUT TAPE

Specify Device for Model Definition Data

Description
This parameter allows specification of a storage device which contains previously generated
CONNECTIVITY and COORDINATES model definition data.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the words INPUT TAPE.

11-15

2nd

Unit number for main input of coordinates and connectivity.


Default is unit 5. For larger problems, involving out-of-core options, you
should avoid using unit 2, 3, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 for mesh input.

169 ELSTO
Out-of-Core Storage of Elements

ELSTO

Out-of-Core Storage of Elements

Description
This parameter is used to save core storage for large problems. All element quantities, strains, stresses,
etc. are stored on an auxiliary storage device. If the number of words actually required is less than the
buffer specified below, this option is turned off by Marc.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word ELSTO.


This stores element arrays on unit 3.

11-15

2nd

Buffer size for out-of-core element storage.


The default is 40960 words. This buffer size is usually adequate unless
shell elements are used with a large number of layers.

OOC 170
Out-of-core Solver

OOC

Out-of-core Solver

Description
This parameter is used to indicate that the global stiffness matrix is assembled using auxiliary disk space
and will not reside in memory. This is available for solver types 0, 2, 4, 8, and 9 only. It can be used to
save memory. Additionally, for solver types 0 and 4, this parameter controls the decomposition of the
matrix. Normally, Marc automatically switches to the out-of-core solver only when it is unable to
dynamically allocate any more space, and the system is unable to fit into the real/virtual memory
available. For solver type 8, Marc automatically switches to the out-of-core assembly when there is
inadequate memory for the decomposition.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word OOC.

11-15

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 to further reduce memory requirements. Available only for solver


type 8. In this case, the memory needed for the nodal vectors will be partly
used by the direct solver. Furthermore, the memory for the direct solver
will be limited to almost the minimum needed by that solver. This will
reduce the memory but might increase the I/O time.

171 IBOOC
Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data

IBOOC

Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data

Description
During the Newton-Raphson iteration process, Marc makes a second copy of the solution space. Marc
normally does this in memory unless sufficient memory is not available; in which case, it uses auxiliary
disk space. This option can be used to force it to use disk space (file jobname.t29). This is often useful
for large problems when the sparse solver (type 0) or the multifront sparse solver (type 8) is used, as this
back-up copy is allocated before the decomposition memory is allocated. If the solver has insufficient
memory to perform its function, the job fails prematurely.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word IBOOC.

NO ECHO 172
Suppress Echo

NO ECHO

Suppress Echo

This parameter is used to limit echoing of certain input data to the output file during reading. Different
codes are used to suppress different things.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-7

1st

Enter the words NO ECHO.

11-80

2nd

Up to 19 codes in I5 or I10 format.


Enter 1 to suppress echo on node and element lists. Only one line and a
summary of the number of lines read are printed.
Enter 2 to suppress echo of boundary condition summary. Only the
number of boundary conditions is printed.
Enter 3 to suppress echo of NURBS data.
Enter 4 to suppress information about coordinate systems.

173 INCLUDE
Insert File into the Input File

INCLUDE

Insert File into the Input File

Description
Inserts an external file into the input file. The include statement may appear in either the parameter,
model definition, or history definition section. In Marc, an include file may reference another include
file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited to
240 characters.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word INCLUDE.

11-80

2nd

Physical filename.
If the file name is specified without a path, the file should be in the same
directory as the input file. If a path is given, the file should be in the path
relative to the current working directory. Also, note that the file name is
case sensitive and blanks should not be included in the name.

Chapter 2: Parameters 174


Modifying Default Values

Modifying Default Values


Chapter 2: Parameters

175 STATE VARS


Define Number of State Variables

STATE VARS

Define Number of State Variables

Description
This parameter allows consideration of state variables in addition to that of temperature. The number of
predefined state variables stored at each point of the structure can be increased from the default of one
(temperature for heat transfer and lubricant pressure for bearing analysis) by the use of this parameter. In
addition, additional storage can be allocated for user-defined global scalar quantities.
For more information, see THERMAL LOADS, INITIAL STATE, or CHANGE STATE model definition
data in this document and INITSV or NEWSV user subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and
Special Routines.
Note:

In bearing analysis, the first state variable equals the lubricant pressure. For this reason, the
number of state variables must be set to 2 if viscosity varies with temperature in this type
of analysis.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the words STATE VARS.

11-15

2nd

Number of state variables to be stored per point.

16-20

3rd

Number of global variables to be stored.

DIST LOADS 176


Distributed Loads or Point Loads

DIST LOADS

Distributed Loads or Point Loads

Description
This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of different lists of distributed loads, the
maximum number of elements in any particular distributed load list, and the maximum number of nodes
with point loads applied.
This parameter is only necessary if the number of different lists of distributed loads, or the maximum
number of elements per list, or the number of point loads is increased in the history definition section.
Note:

This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the words DIST LOADS.

11-15

2nd

Maximum number of different lists of distributed loads. The default is 3.

16-20

3rd

Maximum number of elements in any particular distributed load list.

21-25

4th

Enter the maximum number of nodes with point loads applied.

177 FLUXES
Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes

FLUXES

Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes

Description
This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of different lists of distributed fluxes, the
maximum number of elements in a particular distributed flux list, and the maximum number of nodes
with point fluxes applied.
This parameter is only necessary unless the number of different lists of distributed fluxes, or the
maximum number of elements per list, or the number of point fluxes is increased in the history
definition section.
Note:

This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-6

1st

Enter the word FLUXES.

11-15

2nd

Maximum number of different lists of distributed fluxes. Default is 3.

16-20

3rd

Maximum number of elements in any particular distributed flux list.

21-25

4th

Enter the maximum number of nodes with point fluxes applied.

FILMS 178
Film Coefficients

FILMS

Film Coefficients

Description
This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of elements that have films. This parameter
is only needed if the number of elements with films is increased in the history definition section.
Note:

This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word FILMS.

11-15

2nd

Maximum number of elements that have films.

179 RESTRICTOR
Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis

RESTRICTOR

Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis

Description
This parameter must be included to allow the use of restrictors in lubrication analysis. See the
RESTRICTOR model definition option section of this document for more information.
Note:

This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word RESTRICTOR.

11-15

2nd

Number of element surfaces for which restrictor conditions are imposed.

WELDING 180
Welding Analysis

WELDING

Welding Analysis

Description
This parameter can be used to define the maximum number of weld fluxes in the model and other related
maximum quantities for welding processes. This parameter is recommended, in general, for any welding
analysis, but is particularly required if the number of weld fluxes, weld paths, weld fillers and other
related quantities are increased in the history definition section.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word WELDING.

11-15

2nd

Enter an upper bound to the number of welding heat sources.

16-20

3rd

Enter an upper bound to the number of elements associated with any weld
heat source.

21-25

4th

Enter an upper bound to the number of weld paths.

26-30

5th

Enter an upper bound to the number of weld fillers.

31-35

6th

Enter an upper bound to the number of elements associated with any


weld filler.

36-40

7th

Enter an upper bound to the number of curves associated with any weld
path. This is set to 1 by the program if left undefined.

41-45

8th

Enter an upper bound to the number of points associated with any weld
path curve. This is set to 2 by the program is left undefined.

181 BOUNDARY CONDITIONS


Specify Maximum Number of Boundary Conditions to be Defined

BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

Specify Maximum Number of Boundary


Conditions to be Defined

Description
This option allows the user to specify the maximum number of boundary conditions (FIXED DISP., etc.,
DIST LOADS, etc., POINT LOAD, etc., FILMS or FOUNDATION) labels to be given. If all boundary
conditions are specified before the END OPTION, this is not necessary. This is only necessary if the table
driven style input is used for defining boundary conditions.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word BOUNDARY.

11-15

2nd

Enter the maximum number of boundary condition ids.

SHELL SECT 182


Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness

SHELL SECT

Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness

Description
By default, all the shell and beam-in-a-plane elements in Marc use a Simpson rule for integration through
the cross section. This numerical integration allows any material behavior at each layer; for example, the
yielding of a nonlinear elastic-plastic shell can be followed through the section, from a fully elastic to a
fully plastic section. The density of integration points through the thickness is chosen with this parameter.
For purely linear material behavior, 1 point (the minimum) is required for exact integration across the
section. For most nonlinear problems, 7 points are sufficient to describe the nonlinear material response
exactly. For extremely nonlinear response, such as elastic-plastic dynamic problems, 11 points might be
needed. The default if this parameter is not used is 11 points.
If the COMPOSITE option is used for a group of elements, it controls the number of layers used, and the
integration is performed using the trapezoidal rule. This option (4th field) may be used to control the
procedure which can improve computational performance but limit materials selection.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the words SHELL SECT.

11-15

2nd

Number of points across the section for Simpson rule integration of


stresses. The default is 11; minimum is 1. Must be an odd number.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 if you are going to perform your own integration through the
shell/beam thickness. This requires you to input a generalized stress-strain
law through the GENSTR user subroutine.

21-25

4th

Enter the default method for integrating through the thickness of


composite shell elements. If a value is given on the COMPOSITE option,
it will be used for that particular material.
Enter 1 (default) for conventional procedure, which supports all material
behavior available for composite elements.
Enter 2 if stiffness is to be fast-integrated through the thickness based
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements and
computational costs for elastic shells. Thermal strains and temperature
dependent properties are not supported.
Enter 3 if stiffness is to be fast-integrated through the thickness based
upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements and
computational costs for elastic shells. This procedure uses more memory
and computational time than method 2.

183 TSHEAR
Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185

TSHEAR

Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185

Description
The default distribution of transverse shear strain through the thickness for thick shell element types 22,
75, and 140, and for thick beam 45, is a constant. With the inclusion of the TSHEAR parameter, a more
parabolic beam-like distribution derived from a strength-of-materials approach is used. This distribution
is exact for beam 45 but is only approximate for shells 22, 75, or 140 since it is based on the assumption
that the stresses in perpendicular directions are independent of each other.
For unstacked solid shell element, type 185, and 3D composite brick elements, type 149 and 150, the
inclusion of the TSHEAR parameter results in an improved transverse shear distribution. For solid shell
elements, if not used as a composite material, the shear correction factor should be entered in the
GEOMETRY option.
The interlaminar shear is printed only if the PRINT ELEMENT option is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word TSHEAR.

TIE 184
Define Tying Data

TIE

Define Tying Data

Description
This allocates storage for tying data. See TYING and SERVO LINK model definition options in Chapter
3 of this manual. Also see the UFORMSN user subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and
Special Routines.
This parameter is necessary only if TYING CHANGE is used to increase the number of constraints.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word TIE.

11-15

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

21-25

4th

Maximum number of retained nodes plus one involved in any tying type
or servo link constraint.

26-30

5th

Not used; enter 0.

185 MPC-CHECK
Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter

MPC-CHECK

Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter

Description
This parameter allows the user to specify the amount of checking and ordering done by the program
during the application of multi-point constraints arising from the model definition options: CONTACT,
CYCLIC SYMMETRY, INSERT, RBE2, RBE3, SERVO LINK, and TYING.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the words MPC-CHECK.

11-15

2nd

1: Apply the MPCs in the default order:


1. MPCs obtained from SERVO LINK option.
2. MPCs obtained from INSERT option.
3. MPCs obtained from TYING, RBE2, or RBE3 options (the actual
order follows from the order of these options in the model
definition block of the data file).
4. MPCs obtained from CYCLIC SYMMETRY option.
5. MPCs obtained from CONTACT option.
Print a warning message if a tied degree of freedom is being used by a
subsequent MPC.
2: Same as 1, but instead of warning, a fatal error message is printed and
the analysis will stop with exit 2011.
3: Try to rearrange the MPCs in such a way that a tied degree of freedom
will not be used in a subsequent MPC. If this reordering cannot
successfully be completed, print a fatal error message and stop the
analysis with exit 2011.
If the MPC-CHECK parameter is not present in the input file:
For Version 10 or earlier, default is 1.
For Version 11, default is 3.

AUTOMSET 186
Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes

AUTOMSET

Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes

Description
Without this option, a tied degree of freedom cannot be used as a tied degree of freedom in other tying
constraints nor can it be used as a fixed degree of freedom in a single point constraint (for example,
FIXED DISP/FIXED TEMPERATURE).
When this option is used, the above is allowed as long as the number of constraints is not larger than the
number of degrees of freedom. The program re-writes the tying constraint equation so that one of the
retained degrees of freedom becomes the tied degree of freedom.
If this option is activated, the MPC-CHECK parameter is ignored.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

1-10

1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word AUTOMSET.

Examples
Example 1
X displacement of node 3 is tied to X displacements of node 1 and node 2:
Ux(3) = 0.5 * Ux(1) + 0.5 * Ux(2)
X displacement of node 3 is fixed to be 0.1:
Ux(3) = 0.1
Without the AUTOMSET option, this is not allowed; with the AUTOMSET option, these two constraints
are rewritten as:
Ux(1) = 2*Ux(3) - Ux(2)
Ux(3) = 0.1
Example 2
X displacement of node 3 is tied to X displacement of node 1 and node 2:
Ux(3) = 0.5 * Ux(1) + 0.5 * Ux(2)
X displacement of node 3 are tied to X displacement of node 4:
Ux(3) = Ux(4)
X displacement of node 3 is fixed to be 0.1:
Ux(3) = 0.1

187 AUTOMSET
Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes

Without the AUTOMSET parameter, this is not allowed; with the AUTOMSET parameter, these two
constraints are rewritten as:
Ux(1) = 2*Ux(3) - Ux(2)
Ux(4) = Ux(3)
Ux(3)=0.1
The parameter is effective for constraints generated by the following options:
TYING
SERVO LINK
RBE2
RBE3
RROD
CONRAD GAP

It is not active for constraints generated by the following options:


INSERT
CONTACT
INERTIA RELIEF

AUTOSPC 188
Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes

AUTOSPC

Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes

Description
The AUTOSPC option applies a constraint to multiple degrees of freedom to eliminate rigid body modes
in the structure. This procedure can only be used with the direct solvers type 0, 4, and 8.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word AUTOSPC.

189 IO-DEACTIVATE
Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out

Chap
IO-DEACTIVATE

Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out

Description
This parameter will result in the simulation continuing even if an element goes inside-out due to large
deformation or material instability. The element that has gone inside-out will be deactivated from the
model. This option is intended for use with damage models where the reduced stiffness of the element
may result in these difficulties. It should be used with caution in the simulation, and it should be
recognized that this will result in a decrease in mass in the system.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-10

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word IO-DEACT.

Chapter 2: Parameters 190


Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements

Chapt Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements


er 2:
Para
meter
s

191 BEAM SECT


Beam Section Definition

BEAM SECT

Beam Section Definition

Description
This parameter is used to define the sectional properties of beam sections used in the analysis. The format
and exact data entered depends upon which elements are used. Formats for all available Marc beam
elements are shown below. This parameter must be included if element 13, 77, or 79 is used, if 14, 25,
31, 76, or 78 is used with a noncircular section, or if element 52 or 98 is used with a nonprismatic section
or if element 52 or 98 is used with numerical section integration. See Marc Volume B: Element Library
for more information about individual elements.
If used, the BEAM SECT parameter must directly follow the SIZING and ELEMENTS parameters. Each
beam section used in the analysis must then be described. A LAST statement must follow the last beam
section description to complete the BEAM SECT parameter definition.
There are four methods in this option to define the beam cross section properties:
a. For thin section open and closed beams
b. Elastic non-integrated element types 31, 52, and 98
c. Numerically integrated standard solid section
d. Numerically integrated non-standard solid section
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

For all beam elements, use the 1st and last data blocks described below.
1st data block
1-10

1st

Enter the words BEAM SECT.

.
.

(Include all beam section definitions here.)

.
Last data block
1-10

1st

Enter the word LAST.

Method A
For elements 13, 14, 25, and 76 to 79, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, 5a to define each beam section:
2a data block
1-10

1st

Descriptive title of beam section.

BEAM SECT 192


Beam Section Definition

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3a data block for elements 13, 14, 25, and 76 - 79


1-5

1st

Number of branches used to input section.

6-10

2nd

Number of divisions in first branch. Must be an even number.

11-15

3rd

Number of divisions in second branch. Must be an even number.

Etc.

Etc.

Etc.

Note that a beam section consisting of one straight branch has no stiffness against rotation along the
branch direction.
Data blocks 4a and 5a are given one pair per branch. (X, Y, and S are coordinates on the cross-section
face.) See Marc Volume B: Element Library.
Note that a branch with zero thickness does not contribute to the stiffness but is used to ensure that the
branches form a connected path for open section beams.
4a data block
1-10

1st

X-Coordinate of beginning of branch.

11-20

2nd

Y-Coordinate of beginning of branch.

21-30

3rd

DX/DS at beginning of branch.

31-40

4th

DY/DS at beginning of branch.

41-50

5th

X-Coordinate of end of branch.

51-60

6th

Y-Coordinate of end of branch.

61-70

7th

DX/DS at end of branch.

71-80

8th

DY/DS at end of branch.

5a data block
1-10

1st

Length of branch.

11-20

2nd

Thickness of beginning branch.

21-30

3rd

Thickness of end branch. Default to thickness at beginning if left zero.

Method B
For elastic non-integrated element types 31, 52, or 98, use data blocks 2b and 3b formats to define each
beam section.
2b data block
1-10

1st

Descriptive title of section.

3b data block for element type 31, 52, or 98


1-5

1st

Enter 0.

6-15

2nd

Area of cross section A.

16-25

3rd

Ixx Moment of inertia about local x-axis.

193 BEAM SECT


Beam Section Definition

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

26-35

4th

Iyy Moment of inertia about local y-axis.

36-45

5th

K Torsional stiffness factor. The torsional stiffness is calculated as


EK
--------------------21 +

46-55

6th

A xs

Effective transverse shear area in x-direction (only applies to element

31 and 98). Default A xs = A.

56-65

7th

Effective transverse shear area in y-direction (only applies to element


31 and 98).
Default A ys = A.
A ys

Method C
For elements 52 and 98 using the standard numerically integrated sections, use data blocks 2c, 3c, 4c,
and 5c to define the beam section:
2c data block
1-10

1st

Descriptive title of beam section.

3c data block
1-5

1st

Enter 0 for the standard cross-section shapes (i.e., elliptical, rectangular,


trapezoidal, or hexagonal).

6-15

2nd

Enter N sec t for the cross-section type. The negative value indicates the
section is numerically integrated. The value is entered as a real number.

16-25

3rd

N sec t

= -1 for an elliptical section

N sec t

= -2 for a rectangular section

N sec t

= -3 for a trapezoidal section

N sec t

= -4 for a hexagonal section

Enter a, the first dimension defining the cross section.


if N sec t = -1: a is the diameter of the circle or the length of the ellispe in
local x.
if N sec t = -2: a is the length of the square or the rectangle in local x.
if N sec t = -3: a is the width of the trapezoid in local x on minus local y side.
if N sec t = -4: a is the width of the hexagon in local x at y = 0.

BEAM SECT 194


Beam Section Definition

Format
Fixed
26-35

Free
4th

Data
Entry Entry
F

Enter b, the second dimension defining the cross-section. The default is a


when blank or zero.
if N sec t = -1: b is the height of the ellipse in local y.
if N sec t = -2: b is the height of the rectangle in local y.
if N sec t = -3: b is the height of the trapezoid in local y.
if N sec t = -4: b is the height of the hexagon in local y.

36-45

5th

Enter c, the third dimension defining the cross section. The default is zero
when blank.
if N sec t = -1: c is not used. Leave blank or enter 0.
if N sec t = -2: c is not used. Leave blank or enter 0.
if N sec t = -3: c is the width of the trapezoid in local x on the plus local
y side.
if N sec t = -4: c is the width of the hexagon in local x on either local y side.

4c data block
1-5

1st

For an elliptical section, enter the number of subdivisions in radial


direction. The default is 3.
For a rectangular or trapezoidal section, enter the order of the integration
rule used in local x-direction. If the number is positive and odd, a Simpson
rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes rule is
used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is 5 and
the order cannot be larger than 10.
For a hexagonal section, enter the order of the integration rule used in local
x-direction over each trapezoidal half. If the number is positive and odd, a
Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes
rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is
5 and the order cannot be larger than 10.

6-10

2nd

For an elliptical section, enter the number of subdivisions in


circumferential direction of a 90 sector. The default is 2.
For a rectangular or trapezoidal section, enter the order of the integration
rule used in local y-direction. If the number is positive and odd, a Simpson
rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes rule is
used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is what
was entered in the first field and the order cannot be larger than 10.

195 BEAM SECT


Beam Section Definition

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
For a hexagonal section, enter the order of the integration rule used in local
y-direction over each trapezoidal half. If the number is positive and odd, a
Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes
rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is
half the order in x-direction plus 1 and the order cannot be larger than 10.
For non-Gauss rules, the points in the top row of the lower trapezoid
coinciding with the points in the bottom row of the upper trapezoid (i.e.,
the points coinciding at y = 0) are merged together.

11-15

3rd

Enter one if the section is to be treated as a pre-integrated section. The


default, when blank or zero, is not to treat it as a pre-integrated section and
use numerical integration throughout the analysis. If a one is entered in
this field, the input in the 1st and the 2nd field of this data block is ignored.

16-20

4th

Not used; leave blank or enter 0.

21-30

5th

Enter the normal stiffness factor f 1 .

31-40

6th

Enter the bending stiffness factor f 2 for bending about local x.

41-50

7th

Enter the bending stiffness factor f 3 for bending about local y.

61-70

8th

Enter the shear stiffness factor f 4 for shear in local x.

71-80

9th

Enter the shear stiffness factor f 5 for shear in local y.

51-60

10th

Enter the torsional stiffness factor f 6 .

Stiffness factors default to 1 when left blank or entered as 0.


Entered stiffness factors must be positive
5c data block
1-10

1st

For a uniform change in cross section, enter the effective Poissons ratio.
The default is zero when left blank. This datum is not used at this time and
its value will be ignored.

Not more than 100 integration points can exist in any cross section. Note that pre-integrated sections do
not allow746+5 stress and strain output in section integration points; only generalized stresses and
strains can be requested for output.
Method D
For elements 52 and 98 using the more general numerically integrated sections that use quadrilateral
segments as building blocks, use data blocks 2d, 3d, 4d, and 5d to define the beam section.
2d data block
1-10

1st

Descriptive title of beam section.

BEAM SECT 196


Beam Section Definition

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3d data block
1-5

1st

Enter N seg , the negative of the number of quadrilateral shaped segments.


The negative number indicates the section is solid.

6-10

2nd

Enter the order of the integration rule used for each quadrilateral shaped
segment in parametric -direction. If the number is positive and odd, a
Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes
rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is
5 and the order cannot be larger than 10.

11-15

3rd

Enter the order of the integration rule used for each quadrilateral shaped
segment in parametric -direction. If the number is positive and odd, a
Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes
rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is
the same rule and order as in parametric -direction and the order cannot
be larger than 10.

16-20

4th

Enter a one if the section is to be treated as a pre-integrated section. The


default, when blank or zero, is not to treat it as a pre-integrated section and
use numerical integration throughout the analysis. If a 1 is entered in this
field, the input in the 2nd and the 3rd field of this data block is ignored.

21-30

5th

Enter the normal stiffness factor f 1 .

31-40

6th

Enter the bending stiffness factor f 2 for bending about local x.

41-50

7th

Enter the bending stiffness factor f 3 for bending about local y.

61-70

8th

Enter the shear stiffness factor f 4 for shear in local x.

71-80

9th

Enter the shear stiffness factor f 5 for shear in local y.

51-60

10th

Enter the torsional stiffness factor f 6 .

Stiffness factors default to 1 when left blank or entered as 0.


Entered stiffness factors must be positive
Enter the 4d data block N seg times as follows (i.e., one data block for each quadrilateral segment.
4d data block
1-10

1st

x-coordinate of the first corner of the segment.

11-20

2nd

y-coordinate of the first corner of the segment.

21-30

3rd

x-coordinate of the second corner of the segment.

31-40

4th

y-coordinate of the second corner of the segment.

41-50

5th

x-coordinate of the third corner of the segment.

197 BEAM SECT


Beam Section Definition

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

51-60

6th

y-coordinate of the third corner of the segment.

61-70

7th

x-coordinate of the fourth corner of the segment.

71-80

8th

y-coordinate of the fourth corner of the segment.

The corners are given in counterclockwise order with respect to the local x-y axis.
5d data block
1-10

1st

For a uniform change in cross section, enter the effective Poissons ratio.
Default is zero when left blank. This data is not used at this time and its
value will be ignored.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 to have the principal axis associated with the largest area moment
of inertia to be aligned with the local x-axis.
Enter 2 to have the principal axis associated with the smallest area moment
of inertia to be aligned with the local x-axis.
Enter 3 to have the x-axis of the coordinate system for which the section
is being defined to be aligned with the local x-axis is given in the
GEOMETRY option.
Default is 3 when left blank or zero.

16-25

3rd

Enter the x-coordinate of a point that, when projected, lies on the positive
side of the local x-axis. If the principal moments of inertia are equal, this
defines the x-coordinate of a point on the positive local x-axis. This
coordinate defaults to X cg + 1 , where X cg is the x-coordinate of the center
of gravity of the section in the coordinate system in which the section was
entered. The default is used when this field is blank or zero or when the
user point coincides with the center of gravity.

26-35

4th

Enter the y-coordinate of a point that, when projected, lies on the positive
side of the local x-axis. If the principal moments of inertia are equal, this
defines the y-coordinate of a point on the positive local x-axis. This
coordinate defaults to Y cg , where Y cg is the y-coordinate of the center of
gravity of the section in the coordinate system in which the section was
entered. The default is used when this field is blank or zero or when the
user point coincides with the center of gravity.

Not more than 100 integration points can exist in any cross section. Note that pre-integrated sections do
not allow stress and strain output in section integration points; only generalized stresses and strains can
be requested for output. A section not pre-integrated cannot have more than 100 segments; using single
point integration each. For pre-integrated sections, there is no limit on the number of segments.

Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List

Model Definition Options List

Model Definition Option

Page

ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)

1270

ACOUSTIC

1271

ACTUATOR

297

ADAPT GLOBAL

263

ADAPTIVE

255

ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical)

768

ANISOTROPIC (Thermal)

1136

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

1236

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)

1218

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)


ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

761
1133

ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input)

786

ARRUDBOYCE

790

ATTACH EDGE

290

ATTACH FACE

291

ATTACH NODE

288

AXITO3D

537

199 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Model Definition Option

Page

B2GG, B2PP

383

BACKTOSUBS

385

B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic)

1389

B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic)

1356

BLOCKS

216

BOUNDARY

220

BSQUEAL

375

BUCKLE INCREMENT
CASE COMBIN
CAVITY DEFINITION

1041
396
1159

CAVITY

532

CFAST

344

CHANGE PORE

990

CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input)

988

CHANGE STATE

566

CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input)

562

CHANNEL
COEFFICIENT
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
COHESIVE (with TABLE Input)

1154
389
1138
919

COHESIVE

1140

COHESIVE

922

COIL CURRENT
COMPOSITE

1334
913

CONM1

1030

CONM2

1036

CONN FILL

237

CONN GENER

238

CONNECT

226

CONNECTIVITY

235

CONRAD GAP

1153

CONSTRAINT

223

CONTACT (2-D)

646

CONTACT NODE

718

Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List 200

Model Definition Option

Page

CONTACT TABLE

703

CONTACT TABLE with TABLES

694

CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)

632

CONTACT with TABLES (3-D)

659

CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic)

1393

CONTROL (Fluid)

1418

CONTROL (Fluid-Solid)

1421

CONTROL (Heat Transfer)

1150

CONTROL (Hydrodynamic)

1249

CONTROL (Magnetostatic)

1362

CONTROL (Mechanical)

482

CONUDS

494

CONVERT

1152

COORD SYSTEM

301

COORDINATES

241

CORNERING AXIS
COUPLING REGION

529
1397

CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input)

874

CRACK DATA

876

CREEP (with TABLE Input)

999

CREEP

1002

CURE RATE

1169

CURE SHRINKAGE

1175

CURVES

275

CWELD

349

CYCLIC SYMMETRY

310

CYLINDRICAL

252

DAMAGE

905

DAMPING

1018

DEACT GLUE

719

DEACTIVATE

392

DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type)

217

DEFINE (Sets)

232

DELAMINATION

601

201 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Model Definition Option

Page

DENSITY EFFECTS

953

DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS

474

DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS

480

DESIGN OBJECTIVE

471

DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS

478

DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS

476

DESIGN VARIABLES

472

DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic)

1376

DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic)

1285

DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric)

1308

DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

1373

DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic)

1282

DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

1305

DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic)

1372

DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating)

1205

DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic)

1330

DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

1369

DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)

1202

DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

1327

DIST FLUXES

1059

DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input)

1056

DIST LOADS

506

DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input)

501

DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

1227

DIST SOURCES (Acoustic)

1264

DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)

1261

DMIG

378

DMIG-OUT

370

ELEMENT SORT

465

EMISSIVITY

1162

EMWINDING

1336

END OPTION

1427

ERROR ESTIMATE

393

EXCLUDE

720

Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List 202

Model Definition Option

Page

FACE IDS

511

FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input)

877

FAIL DATA

891

FILMS

1053

FILMS (with TABLE Input)

1049

FIXED ACCE

1028

FIXED DISP (Fluid)

1401

FIXED DISP (Mechanical)

499

FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)

495

FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic)

1276

FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

1273

FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic)

1320

FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

1318

FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic)

1367

FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic)

1280

FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic)

1325

FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric)

1304

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

1364

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

1278

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

1322

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

1301

FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic)

1259

FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)

1256

FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

1225

FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input)

1044

FIXED TEMPERATURE

1047

FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid)

1403

FIXED VELOCITY

1406

FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)

1209

FIXED VOLTAGE

1211

FLOW LINE

427

FLUID DRAG

530

FLUID SOLID

1020

FOAM (with TABLE Input)

813

FOAM

817

203 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Model Definition Option

Page

FORCDT

586

FORMING LIMIT

833

FOUNDATION

590

FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input)

587

FOURIER

591

FXORD

244

GAP DATA

912

GASKET

820

GENERATE

229

GENT (with TABLE Input)

793

GENT

797

GEOMETRY

292

GLK

541

GLOBALLOCAL

542

GRAIN SIZE

903

GRID FORCE

452

HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input)

523

HOLD NODES

525

HYPERMESH

438

HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input)

772

HYPOELASTIC

774

INCLUDE

243

INERTIA RELIEF

526

INIT CURE (with TABLE Input)

1172

INIT CURE

1174

INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input)

546

INIT STRESS

548

INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer)

1194

INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input)

1021

INITIAL DISP

1024

INITIAL FICTIVE (with TABLE Input)

570

INITIAL FICTIVE

572

Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List 204

Model Definition Option

Page

INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input)

979

INITIAL PC

981

INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input)

552

INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN

554

INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input)

983

INITIAL PORE

985

INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input)

969

INITIAL POROSITY

971

INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

1223

INITIAL PYROLYSIS

1192

INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input)


INITIAL STATE

556
559

INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer)

1122

INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress)

580

INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer)


INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress)

1119
578

INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input)

1025

INITIAL VEL

1027

INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input)

974

INITIAL VOID RATIO

976

INSERT

330

IRM

429

ISLAND REMOVAL

603

ISOTROPIC (Acoustic)

1269

ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)

1382

ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic)

1296

ISOTROPIC (Fluid)

1410

ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer)

1126

ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic)

1252

ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)

1349

ISOTROPIC (Stress)

745

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)

1268

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

1232

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)

1212

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity)

1289

205 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Model Definition Option

Page

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

1380

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

1295

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid)

1408

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)

1250

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability)

1343

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

1341

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress)


ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)
J-INTEGRAL
JOULE
K2GG, K2PP
LATENT HEAT

737
1124
593
1201
381
1141

LOADCASE

423

LORENZI

594

M2GG, M2PP

382

MANY TYPES

218

MAP TEMP

574

MAPPER

222

MASSES

1029

MATERIAL DATA

902

MATUDS

493

MERGE

224

MERGE SELECTIVE

225

MESH2D

215

MIXTURE

916

MNF UNITS

386

MODAL INCREMENT

1039

MOONEY (with TABLE Input)

776

MOONEY

782

MPCOUT

377

Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List 206

Model Definition Option

Page

NEW

231

NLELAST

807

NO ELEM SORT

467

NO NODE SORT

470

NO PRINT

447

NO PRINT CONTACT

451

NO PRINT SPRING

449

NO SUMMARY

464

NODAL THICKNESS

296

NODE CIRCLE

247

NODE FILL

248

NODE GENER

249

NODE MERGE

250

NODE SORT

468

OGDEN (with TABLE Input)

800

OGDEN

804

OPTIMIZE

402

ORIENTATION

935

ORTHO TEMP (Structural)

850

ORTHO TEMP (Thermal)

1145

ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical)

1299

ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)

1387

ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)

1354

ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical)

757

ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal)

1131

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

1234

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity)

1214

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity)

1291

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

1384

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

1297

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability)

1345

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

1350

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)


ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

751
1128

207 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Model Definition Option

Page

P2G

384

PARAMETERS

489

PBUSH

336

PERMANENT (Electromagnetic)

1391

PERMANENT (Magnetostatic)

1360

PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

1358

PFAST

347

PHI-COEFFICIENTS

1007

PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric)

1315

PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

1312

PIN CODE

329

POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric)

1311

POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic)

1286

POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric)

1309

POINT CHARGE

1288

POINT CURRENT (Joule)

1208

POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic)

1333

POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating)

1206

POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic)

1331

POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic)

1377

POINT CURRENT-CHARGE

1379

POINT FLUX

1063

POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input)

1060

POINT LOAD

520

POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input)

516

POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion)

1230

POINT SOURCE (Acoustic)

1267

POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic)

1265

POINT TEMP

584

POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input)

582

POINTS

274

POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input)

972

POST

404

POWDER (with TABLE input)

943

POWDER

949

Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List 208

Model Definition Option

Page

PRE STATE

533

PRESS FILM

996

PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input)

993

PRINT CHOICE

440

PRINT CONTACT

450

PRINT ELEMENT

442

PRINT NODE

445

PRINT SPRING
PRINT STREAMLINE

448
1198

PRINT VMASS

454

PRTCONNECT

227

PSHELL

925

PWELD

357

QVECT (with TABLE Input)

1064

RAD-CAVITY

1157

RADIATING CAVITY

1156

RBE2

323

RBE3

325

REAUTO

455

REBAR

928

RECEDING SURFACE

1189

REGION (Fluid)

1396

RELATIVE DENSITY (with TABLE Input)

956

RELATIVE DENSITY

958

RESPONSE SPECTRUM

1038

RESTART LAST

460

RESTART

457

RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input)

1246

RESTRICTOR

1248

ROTATION A

528

RROD

328

209 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Model Definition Option

Page

SDRC

435

SERVO LINK

321

SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input)

864

SHAPE MEMORY

870

SHELL TRANSFORMATION

308

SHIFT FUNCTION

1014

SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input)

1054

SOIL (with TABLE Input)

959

SOIL

965

SOLVER

398

SPECIFIC WEIGHT

982

SPECIFIED NODES

221

SPLINE

710

SPRINGS

332

START NUMBER

219

STIFSCALE
STRAIN RATE (Fluid)
STRAIN RATE (Material Properties)
STREAM DEFINITION

388
1412
831
1196

STRING

286

SUMMARY

463

SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications)

367

SUPERELEM

365

SURFACE ENERGY

1183

SURFACES

280

SWLDPRM

359

SYMMETRY

228

TABLE

823

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal)

1415

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress)

843

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer)

1142

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic)

1253

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress)


THERMAL CONTACT (2-D)

838
1093

Chapter 3 Model Definition Options List 210

Model Definition Option

Page

THERMAL CONTACT (3-D)

1110

THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D)

1085

THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (3-D)

1099

THERMAL LOADS

576

THERMO-PORE

1178

THICKNESS (with TABLE Input)

1243

THICKNESS

1245

THROAT

1191

TIME-TEMP
TRACK STREAMLINE

860
1199

TRACK

426

TRANSFORMATION

298

TYING

313

UDUMP

462

UFCONN

240

UFRICTION

715

UFXORD

251

UHTCOEF

716

UHTCON

717

UMOTION

714

USDATA

394

UTRANFORM

309

VCCT

597

VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer)

1167

VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic)

1241

VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer)

1165

VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic)

1239

VIEW FACTOR

1155

VISCEL EXP

1016

VISCELFOAM

1013

VISCELMOON

1011

VISCELOGDEN

1012

VISCELORTH

1009

211 Marc Volume C: Program Input

Model Definition Option


VISCELPROP
VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input)
WEAR

Page
1008
977
721

WELD FILL

1082

WELD FLUX

1072

WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input)

1068

WELD PATH

1076

WORK HARD

835

WRITE

254

Chapter 3: Model Definition Options


Marc Volume C: Program Input

Model Definition Options

MESH2D

Mesh Definition

Program Control

Mechanical Analysis

Contact

Material Properties

Rate Effects

Dynamic Analysis

Joule Heating Analysis

Diffusion Analysis

Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis

Acoustic Analysis

Electrostatic Analysis

1272

Piezoelectric Analysis

1300

Magnetostatic Analysis

Electromagnetic Analysis

Fluid Analysis

214
230
395
481

604
723

997
1017
1200

1222

1255

1394

1317
1363

1238

213 Marc Volume C: Program Input

The model definition input consists of a series of optional blocks of data. These blocks define the
geometry of the mesh, material properties, boundary conditions, and analysis controls.
These options are read in by activating the respective option with an alphanumeric code word
(a keyword), followed by sets of data. In this document, both fixed format and free input are described.
This code word is given in capital letters at the top of each block of data in the following section. An END
OPTION is used to signify the end of all the model definition input data. Note that each option can be
exercised more than once.
In general, there is no specific order required in reading the options; however, you should be aware that
the same option flags can appear in different blocks and that the last data read controls that flag. The
exceptions are as follows:
1. If the FXORD or UFXORD option is used, it must come after the COORDINATES option when it
uses data read in the COORDINATES option;
2. If postprocessor and restart files are being used, the results are order dependent. See the POST
option for more details.
3. If the MESH2D option is used, it must follow the END parameter. If the MESH2D option is used
to write a mesh file containing connectivity, coordinates and optional boundary conditions, the
file needs to be read in sequential order. The CONNECTIVITY option must appear before the
COORDINATES option followed by BOUNDARY conditions if stored on mesh file. Other options
can be in any sequence and the above options can be repeated in any sequence to read data from
other files or data input.
Information given in the last option overwrites any previous information, thus facilitating any minor
corrections to the data. Any option not needed should be left out.

Chapter 3: Model Definition Options 214


MESH2D

MESH2D
Two-dimensional Mesh Generator
This two-dimensional mesh generator generates a mesh composed of either triangular or quadrilateral
elements. The results of the mesh generation are output on a specified file. This file can then be used as
input for Marc. A detailed description of the capabilities of the MESH2D generation is contained in Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information.
The call to the mesh generation feature is initialized by a block with MESH2D in the first six columns.
This is followed by a series of optional sets of blocks; each of which has an alphanumeric keyword. The
keywords are:
BLOCKS (Required as first set)
DEFINE
MANY TYPES
START NUMBER
BOUNDARY
SPECIFIED NODES
MAPPER
CONSTRAINT
MERGE
MERGE SELECTIVE
CONNECT
PRTCONNECT
SYMMETRY
GENERATE
BLOCKS must be the first set input. GENERATE must terminate the mesh generation. BLOCKS defines the
parameters and the working space for the mesh generation. GENERATE tells Marc to start generating the
mesh, and then returns control to Marc. You should note that the generated mesh is written out on the
specified file and must be read in from this file using the appropriate model definition data options
(CONNECTIVITY and COORDINATES) described in a following section before plotting or optimization
of the mesh can proceed.

When using the MESH2D option, divide the geometry into simpler regions called blocks. Marc meshes
each block into nodes and elements, and finally combines the blocks to form the complete mesh.
The MESH2D option can be used more than once in an analysis. Simply place the second group to be
included after the previous GENERATE.

215 MESH2D
Define a Two-dimensional Mesh

MESH2D

Define a Two-dimensional Mesh

Description
This option starts the call to the two-dimensional mesh generation feature. This data must follow the END
of the parameters.
Format
Format
Fixed
1-6

Free
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word MESH2D.

BLOCKS 216
Define Working Size

BLOCKS

Define Working Size

This option is required and must follow MESH2D.


Description
This option defines the parameters and the sizes of the working space for mesh generation.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word BLOCKS.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of blocks.

6-10

2nd

Number of principal boundary nodes defining the geometry of all blocks.


Note that principal nodes should be continuous in their numbering.

11-15

3rd

Code number of element type for use with Marc series of programs.

16-20

4th

Set to 1 for generation of 4-node quadrilateral elements.


Set to 0 for triangles.
Set to 2 for 8-node quads.

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

31-35

7th

Local file on which the output is written; to be used by the Marc series
of programs.
Not used. Enter 0.

Number of times the mesh is repeated due to use of the


SYMMETRY option.

36-40

8th

Maximum number of degrees of freedom constrained during mesh


generation. Default is 100.

41-45

9th

Number of degrees of freedom for each node. The default is two degrees
of freedom.

46-50

10th

Maximum number of nodes on symmetry axis. Default is 50.

51-55

11th

Maximum number of connections of any blocks. Default is 10.

217 DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type)


Define Block Type

DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type)

Define Block Type

Description
This option allows the block type and the nodal number of the boundary points to be specified.
Note:

Marc always generates node connections in a counterclockwise direction. See Marc


Volume A: Theory and User Information for correct specification of boundary node number
order when a distributed load has to be applied to any surface of the block.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word DEFINE.

2nd data block


One per block.
1-5

1st

Type of block: 1, 2, 3, or 4.

6-10

2nd

Number of intervals in the first direction (P1 - P2). Number of increments


between the first and second boundary nodes.

11-15

3rd

Number of intervals in the second direction (P2 - P3). M=N for a type 3
triangular block.
Number of increments between second and third boundary nodes.

16-20

4th

First boundary node number defining the block.

21-25

5th

Second boundary node number defining the block.

26-30

6th

Third boundary node number defining the block.

31-35

7th

Fourth boundary node number defining the block.

Continue until necessary boundary nodes have been defined. A maximum


of 12 is possible and these must follow the order defined in Marc Volume
A: Theory and User Information.

Etc.

MANY TYPES 218


Define Multiple Elements

MANY TYPES

Define Multiple Elements

Description
This option allows you to specify different element types per block. Default is that all elements are of the
same type specified in the BLOCKS option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words MANY TYPES.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Element type block 1.

6-10

2nd

Element type block 2.


Etc. for all blocks.

Continuations (more than 16 blocks) are given in Format 16I5.

219 START NUMBER


Specify Starting Element

START NUMBER

Specify Starting Element

Description
This option allows you to give a lowest element number and node number for this MESH2D sequence.
This option can be used more than once; for example, if MESH2D is used more than one time in a single
run. Default is that Marc starts generation with element 1 and node 1.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Enter

1st data block


1-12

1st

Enter the words START NUMBER.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Starting node number.

6-10

2nd

Starting element number.

BOUNDARY 220
Define Boundary Nodes

BOUNDARY

Define Boundary Nodes

Description
This allows the coordinates of the boundary nodes to be read in.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-8

1st

Enter the word BOUNDARY.

2nd data block


Boundary node coordinates, one per node; NNO series.
1-5

1st

Boundary node number.

6-15

2nd

First (X or Z) coordinate.

16-25

3rd

Second (Y or R) coordinate.

221 SPECIFIED NODES


Specify Node Coordinates

SPECIFIED NODES

Specify Node Coordinates

Description
This option allows the coordinates of certain nodes of the generated mesh to be specified.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-15

1st

Enter the words SPECIFIED NODES.

Number of sets of nodal points coordinates to be specified,


(maximum 100).

2nd data block


1-5

1st

3rd data block


One per specified node.
1-10

1st

First coordinate of a specified nodal point.

11-20

2nd

Second coordinate of a specified nodal point.

MAPPER 222
Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D

MAPPER

Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D

Description
This option invokes the MAP2D user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special
Routines) for boundary node coordinate generation or modification. It is used when it is more convenient
to program the boundary node coordinates rather than reading them in.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word MAPPER.


This invokes the MAP2D user subroutine. If the coordinates input on the
BOUNDARY parameter are to be modified, this option must follow the
BOUNDARY parameter.

223 CONSTRAINT
Generate Boundary Condition Constraints

CONSTRAINT

Generate Boundary Condition Constraints

Description
This feature allows boundary conditions to be generated for a particular degree of freedom for all the
nodal points on one side of a block. At the present time, there is no method available for setting boundary
conditions on those nodes generated via the SYMMETRY option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word CONSTRAINT.

Number of sides to be constrained.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Number of the block to be constrained.

6-10

2nd

Number of the side to be constrained.

11-15

3rd

Degree of freedom to be constrained.

16-25

4th

Displacement value to be given to the constrained degree of freedom.

MERGE (Model Definition) 224


Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes

MERGE (Model Definition)

Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes

Description
This allows a minimum distance between nodes to be specified. Any nodes separated by less than the
minimum distance is automatically merged into a single node.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-5

1st

Enter the word MERGE.

Separation distance below which nodes are merged together.

2nd data block


1-10

1st

225 MERGE SELECTIVE


Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block

MERGE SELECTIVE

Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block

Description
This option, used in conjunction with the CONNECT option, allows you to define which nodes are to be
merged in mesh blocks that border each other. This is especially useful if gaps are to be defined between
the blocks.
As with the MERGE option, you specify a minimum distance and a list of block numbers in which nodes
are to be merged. Nodes which are separated by less than the minimum distance specified are considered
duplicates, and merged into a single node if they lie within the same or connected blocks. Nodes located
within the specified minimum distance on unconnected blocks (those disconnected using the CONNECT
option) are not merged.
For more information about connecting blocks, see the description of the CONNECT option in
this document.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-15

1st

Enter the words MERGE SELECTIVE.

Enter the number of sets of data to be used to enter merge distance and
block numbers.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10

1st

Enter the minimum separation distance.

4th data block


Enter a list of block numbers.

CONNECT 226
Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks

CONNECT

Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks

Description
This option is used to connect or disconnect two blocks during the generation of the final mesh. Default
is that two blocks are connected if they join the same boundary points in the DEFINE option. It is
especially useful to disconnect two blocks if gaps are to be defined in between the blocks. The MERGE
SELECTIVE option must be used in combination with this option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-7

1st

Enter the word CONNECT.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of block connections to specify.

6-10

2nd

Unit number for input of 3rd data block; defaults to data input.

3rd data block


One per continuation.
1-5

1st

First connected block.

6-10

2nd

Second connected block.

11-15

3rd

Set to 0 to connect the two blocks; set to 1 to disconnect the two blocks.

227 PRTCONNECT
Print Out Block Connections

PRTCONNECT

Print Out Block Connections

Description
This option gives a printout of the current BLOCKS connection information.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word PRTCONNECT.

SYMMETRY 228
Define Axis of Symmetry

SYMMETRY

Define Axis of Symmetry

Description
This allows symmetry axes to be defined so that further mesh blocks can be generated by reflection about
the axes. Be sure that enough space is allocated in the BLOCKS option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-8

1st

Enter the word SYMMETRY.

Number of symmetric axes.

2nd data block


1-5

21st

3rd data block


One per symmetry axis.
1-10

1st

First coordinate of a point on the axis of symmetry.

11-20

2nd

Second coordinate of a point on the axis of symmetry.

21-30

3rd

First component of a vector along the axis of symmetry.

31-40

4th

Second component of a vector along the axis of symmetry.

229 GENERATE
End of Mesh Generation Data

GENERATE

End of Mesh Generation Data

Description
This signifies the end of the mesh generation data and instructs Marc to proceed with the mesh
generation. When the mesh has been generated, Marc proceeds to the next option found in the model
definition options. If you wish to stop without proceeding to plotting or analysis, a blank block should
immediately follow the GENERATE option. This causes Marc to stop on an illegal data exit. Provisions
should be made to save the mesh on permanent file by appropriate control blocks if only mesh generation
is desired.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-8

1st

Enter the word GENERATE.

Chapter 3: Model Definition Options 230


Mesh Definition

Chapt Mesh Definition


er 3: This section describes the geometry input required to describe the object to be analyzed. The finite
mesh can be generated using MESH2D, Mentat, Patran, or some other preprocessor. The element
Mode element
topology and coordinates can be processed using a variety of options. This final set of connectivity and
coordinates can be written to an auxiliary file through the WRITE option. Additional geometric quantities
l
can be input through the GEOMETRY or NODAL THICKNESS options; see Marc Volume B: Element
Defini Library for the data required for particular element types. The ROTATION A option is used to give the axis
for the calculation of centrifugal loads. The degrees of freedom associated with nodes can be transformed
tion
from their natural system (see Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition for each particular
Optio element) to a user-defined local system. Kinematic constraints can be imposed between degrees of
freedom using either the TYING or SERVO LINK option. Finally, springs can be defined using the
ns
SPRINGS option.
The NEW parameter can be used to specify a change in format.

231 NEW (Model Definition)


Use New Format

NEW (Model Definition)

Use New Format

Description
This option can be used to switch from input with extended format to the default width or vice-versa.
Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW option is encountered. This option
must not appear embedded inside any model definition option.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word NEW.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input. This
overrides the EXTENDED parameter.
Enter 2 if the double width of the data fields is used for input.

DEFINE (Sets) 232


Define Sets

DEFINE (Sets)

Define Sets

Description
This option allows you to define a setname and to associate members to the set. These sets can be used
wherever a list of items is requested. Multiple numbers of sets can be used by repeating this model
definition block. In defining the members of a set, any of the conventions in the Input of List Items in
Chapter 1 Introduction can be used. A previously defined set can be used to describe a set. If the input
version is 10 or greater, the set can be 32 characters in length.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word DEFINE.

The rest of this data block is free format beginning with the third field.
11-20

2nd

Enter the type of set:


ELEMENT set of elements
ELSQ

set of elements (unsorted)

NODE

set of nodes

NDSQ

set of nodes (unsorted)

INT

set of integration points

LAYER

set of beam or shell layers

DOF

set of degrees of freedom (unsorted)

INCS

set of increment numbers

POINT

set of points

CURVE

set of curves

SURFACE set of surfaces


BODY

set of body numbers

EDGE

set of element: edge pairs

FACE

set of element: face pairs

EDGEMT

set of element: edge pairs. Edge number given using


Marc Mentat convention.

FACEMT

set of element: face pairs. Face number given using Marc


Mentat convention.

233 DEFINE (Sets)


Define Sets

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
ORNSUR

set of surface: orientation, where the orientation is given


in Marc convention
1 top surface
2 bottom surface.

ORNCUR

set of curve: orientation, where the orientation is given in


Marc convention:
1 top surface
2 bottom surface.

MNORSU

set of surface: orientation, where the orientation is given


in Marc Mentat convention:
0 top surface
1 bottom surface.

MNORCU set of curve: orientation, where the orientation is given in


Marc Mentat convention:
0 top surface
1 bottom surface.
ELNODE
21-30

3rd

set of element relative_node pairs. For example,


relative_node is 1 or 2 for 2-node beam element.

Enter the word SET. (This is optional.)


Enter the word OSET for an open set (see Note 4).

31-62

4th

Enter the name of the set.

2nd data block


1-80

Notes:

1st

Enter a list of items that are of the type defined to be members of the set
whose name is given.

(1) A setname cannot be used in a list unless it has been previously defined.
(2) For unsorted set types DOF, ELSQ, and NDSQ, the verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT
cannot be used in the list of items.
(3) EDGE, EDGEMT, FACE, FACEMT, ORNSUR, MNORSU, ORNCUR, MNORCU can only be
used with the table input format.
(4) When an open set is requested, nodes or elements not defined elsewhere are not
automatically created.
(5) If this option is used to define domains associated with the DDM procedure, the name
of the set should be DOMAINi where i is the domain number.

DEFINE (Sets) 234


Define Sets

Example
The example below defines a set to be called WALL consisting of nodes 1, 3, 5, 7, 19.
DEFINE NODE SET WALL
1 TO 20 BY 2

The example below defines a set to be called LOADIT consisting of edge 2 of elements 1, 3, 5, 7, ... 19.
DEFINE EDGE SET LOADIT
1:2 TO 20:2 BY 2

235 CONNECTIVITY
Specify Element Connectivity

CONNECTIVITY

Specify Element Connectivity

Description
This series gives the element connectivity; for example, the nodal points for each element. Data can be
input from data or an external file by exercising the appropriate option. For two-dimensional elements,
the nodal points must be given in a counterclockwise sequence. Several blocks of connectivity data can
be input. For example, one block can be read in from file while additional ones are read from data blocks,
each block starting with the word CONNECTIVITY.
In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the element type (second field, 3rd data block) should be a stress
type element if both a structural and thermal analysis is required. If a heat transfer element type is given,
the element is considered rigid in the stress analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-12

1st

Enter the word CONNECTIVITY.

In many cases, when the whole mesh is in a file, just CONNECTIVITY and a blank should be included
here and the INPUT TAPE parameter must be used.
2nd data block
1-5

1st

Number of elements to be read in this option (optional); defaults to total


number of elements in the mesh.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input of connectivity; defaults to unit number
specified on the INPUT TAPE parameter.

11-15

3rd

Set to 1 to suppress printing of element connectivity list during


this option.

3rd data block


Element connectivity array. This data block is repeated once for each element given in data block 2.
1-5

1st

Element number.

6-10

2nd

Element type or alias (see ALIAS parameter).

11-15

3rd

Nodal point.

CONNECTIVITY 236
Specify Element Connectivity

Format
Fixed
16-20
21-25

Free
4th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Nodal point.

Repeat until all nodes of the element have been defined. The required
ordering of the nodes is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
Continuation for elements with more than 14 nodes/element (for example,
library element 21, 35, 57, etc.) is in format 16I5.

237 CONN FILL


Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator

CONN FILL

Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator

Description
This option completes the filling of connectivity lists by generating midside nodes in between the corner
nodes provided. At the same time, it generates coordinates for the new node created. The coordinates are
formed by averaging the coordinates of the end nodes of the respective side on the connectivity list. It is
used for converting linear displacement elements to quadratic displacement elements. The option works
for 4-node quadrilaterals and 8-node bricks. You must remember to turn on the bandwidth optimization
option after using this option and before an analysis.
Note:

This does not calculate the coordinates correctly if going from element 4 to element 22
or 24.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words CONN FILL.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the starting node number for the midside nodes.

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 to set the node count to the maximum node number used in
this option.

11-15

3rd

Give the start of the element list for this option.


Default is 1.

16-20

4th

Give the end of the element list for this option. Default is number of
elements specified in the analysis.

CONN GENER 238


Copy Element Connectivity Data

CONN GENER

Copy Element Connectivity Data

Description
This input performs the function of an incremental mesh generator by copying the pattern of the
connectivity data for previously defined elements. If the new elements are to be connected to the
master elements, a common node A needs to be given. The position of node A in the connectivity list of
the new element and its position in the connectivity list of the master element needs to be given. Marc
then numbers all the other nodes in the new element by making the algebraic difference between the
numbers of all the nodes in the new element the same as that of the corresponding nodes in the element
being copied.
This option copies the connectivity from a series of elements defined by a starting and end element
number and uses it to calculate the connectivity for a new series of elements. The new series of elements
is defined by the input of a starting and end element number. When the list of the elements being copied
from is ended, the recently generated elements will take its place as the elements to be copied from. This
is repeated until the list defined for the new elements is exhausted.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words CONN GENER.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of the first element for which the connectivity is being generated.

6-10

2nd

Number of the last element for which the connectivity is being generated.
All the elements between the first and last element will be generated.

11-15

3rd

Number of the first element used as a master.

16-20

4th

Number of the last element used as a master.

21-25

5th

Give the position of node A in the connectivity list of the generated


element. Node A can belong to a master element. If there is no common
node between the generated and the master elements, enter 1.

26-30

6th

Give the position of node A in the connectivity list of the master element.
If there is no common node, enter 1.

239 CONN GENER


Copy Element Connectivity Data

Format
Fixed
31-35

Free
7th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter 1 for decrease of 1 element per series of master elements.


Enter 2 for decrease of 2 elements per series of master elements. The two
element decrease is restricted to use with three-node triangular elements.

36-40

8th

This entry is only required if there is no common node between the


generated and master elements. This defines an increment to each of the
nodes in the master element which then gives the connectivity list of the
generated element.

UFCONN 240
Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine

UFCONN

Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine

Description
This option calls the UFCONN user subroutine to generate or modify element connectivity (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.) The option can be repeated as often as necessary.
This option must follow the CONNECTIVITY option. The user subroutine is called as soon as this option
is encountered.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Dat
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word UFCONN.

2nd data block


Enter a list of elements for which the UFCONN user subroutine is called.

241 COORDINATES
Enter Node Coordinates

COORDINATES

Enter Node Coordinates

Description
This option defines the coordinates of each nodal point. The nodal data can be input in several blocks.
The latest data input for a particular nodal point is used. Like the element connectivity data, this data can
be input from an external file since this coordinate data can be automatically generated by a mesh
generator. Local corrections can be made to the generated mesh by input of the modified nodal
coordinates from data blocks.
Usually for the general shell elements (4, 8, and 24), the FXORD option and the UFXORD user subroutine
can help with input of coordinates.
In Marc, the nodes need not be numbered sequentially.
In most cases, when all the coordinates are input by file, just the coordinates and a blank are required here
and the INPUT TAPE parameter must be used.
If the COORD SYSTEM, CYLINDRICAL, or FXORD options are used, the coordinate positions entered
here are with respect to coordinate system entered in these options.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-11

1st

Enter the word COORDINATES.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the maximum number of coordinate directions to be read in per


node; defaults to the number of coordinates per node. Repeated
COORDINATES blocks need not have the same value in this field.

6-10

2nd

Enter the number of nodal points read-in in this option; (optional) default
to the number of nodes in the mesh.

11-15

3rd

Enter the unit number for input of coordinates; defaults to the file number
specified on the INPUT TAPE parameter.

16-20

4th

Set to 1 to suppress print-out of nodal coordinate list during this


option input.

3rd data block


One data line per nodal point.
1-5

1st

Nodal point number.

6-15

2nd

Coordinate 1.

16-25

3rd

Coordinate 2.

COORDINATES 242
Enter Node Coordinates

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

26-35

4th

Coordinate 3.

36-45

5th

Coordinate 4.

Etc.

Etc.

See library element description in Marc Volume B: Element Library for the
definition of coordinates for a particular element.
Input 6 coordinates per data line; continuation data lines in format 6E10.5.

243 INCLUDE (Model Definition)


Insert File into the Input File

INCLUDE (Model Definition)

Insert File into the Input File

Description
Inserts an external file into the input file. The include statement may appear in either the parameter,
model definition, or history definition section. In Marc, an include file may reference another include
file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited to
240 characters.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word INCLUDE.

11-80

2nd

Physical filename.
If the file name is specified without a path, the file should be in the same
directory as the input file. If a path is given, the file should be in the path
relative to the current working directory. Also, note that the file name is
case sensitive and blanks should not be included in the name.

FXORD 244
Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates

FXORD

Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates

SHELL COORDINATE GENERATION OPTION


Description
This option is used to generate coordinates for Elements 4, 8, or 24. (Refer to Marc Volume B: Element
Library and Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for further information on the use of this
block). This can be used for mapping of certain types of standard shell geometries such as cylinders,
spheres, etc. It can also be used to transform cylindrical coordinates into Cartesian coordinates.
The CYLINDRICAL or COORD SYSTEM options are more powerful for cylindrical coordinates.
Note that when a continuous surface has a line of discontinuity in 1 or 2 (the surface coordinate) such
as a complete cylinder has at = 0 and 360, two nodes must be placed at each nodal location on the
line to allow the distinct coordinate input, and tying type 100 used to join degrees of freedom. In general,
different surfaces coming together must also use the intersecting shell tyings.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-5

1st

Enter the word FXORD.

11-12

2nd

Enter the word NO if coordinates after FXORD are not to be printed out.

Number of sets of shell geometry specifications to be input.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Data blocks 3, 4, 5, and 6 are provided once for each consecutive series of nodes with a different shell
geometry specification.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

Identification number of surface type. See Table 3-1 and Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information.

6-10

2nd

First node of this series.

11-15

3rd

Last node of this series.

16-20

4th

Set to 1 if local (x,y,z) set in which surface is defined must be transformed


to the global (x,y,z) set. If so, data blocks 4, 5 and 6 must be input to define
the transformation. If not, data blocks 4, 5 and 6 are omitted.

245 FXORD
Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

4th data block


Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of the origin of the local (x,y,z) system in which the shell surface
is generated.
1-10

1st

Global x-coordinate origin.

11-20

2nd

Global y-coordinate origin.

21-30

3rd

Global z-coordinate origin.

5th data block


Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on the positive x-axis of the local system.
1-10

1st

Global x-coordinate of the point.

11-20

2nd

Global y-coordinate of the point.

21-30

3rd

Global z-coordinate of the point.

6th data block


Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on, or near to, the positive y-axis of the local system. This
point defines the local (x,y) plane in the global system.
1-10

1st

Global x-coordinate of the point.

11-20

2nd

Global y-coordinate of the point.

21-30

3rd

Global z-coordinate of the point.

Table 3-1 describes the1,2 directions for the FXORD option contained in Marc.

FXORD 246
Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates

Table 3-1

Input to FXORD
Nodal Data Input
(See Marc Volume A:

Input
Code
Type

User Information

Surface
Description

General Surface

Surface
x3=x3(x1, x2)

All units are length measure,


unless specified otherwise
All 11 Coords. for El. 8
All 14 Coords. for El. 4
2

x 3 x 3 x 3
x 1 x 2 x 3 -------- -------- ----------------x 1 x 2 x 1 x 2

Surface
Coordinates
used in
program
(1, 2)

1, 2,

NonCartesian
Coordinate
s
YES

first two input


x1, x2

YES

YES

(last coordinate only needed for


element type 4)
2

Axisymmetric shell
(about x3 axis)

R
R ------

(in radians)

dR
length------- in ------------------units
d
radians

General Cylinder

dx 1 dx 2
s x 3 x 1 x 2 -------- -------ds ds

s, x3

NO

Circular Cylinder

q, x3, R: in degrees

NO

(about x3 axis)

R at 1st node only

R, , x3
(R, in length
measure)

Flat Plate x3=0

x1, x2

x1, x2

NO

Curved Pipe

, r, R: , in degrees
r and R at 1st node only

r, , R,
(both in length
measure)

YES

(elbow)
7

Cylindrical

r, , x3

x1, x2, x3

NO

Spherical

r, ,

x1, x2, x3

NO

247 NODE CIRCLE


Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs

NODE CIRCLE

Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs

Description
This option generates the coordinates of a series of nodes which lie on a circular arc. The coordinates of
the first node on the arc must be previously given. The circle must lie in the x-y plane.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NODE CIRCLE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Node number of the first node on the arc.

6-10

2nd

Total number of nodes on arc.

11-15

3rd

First increment in series of node numbers to be generated.

16-20

4th

Second increment in series of node numbers to be generated. Entry of


the second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is
used for 8 node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is
entered in this field.

21-25

5th

Scaling of angle between each pair of nodes as a percentage. A default of


100 percent is used.

26-35

6th

Number of degrees between the first pair of nodes.

3rd data block


1-10

1st

First coordinate of the center of the circle.

11-20

2nd

Second coordinate of the center of the circle.

NODE FILL 248


Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation

NODE FILL

Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation

Description
This option performs the function of an incremental mesh generator for nodes. It achieves this by
interpolation. In its simplest form, it takes the coordinates defined by two end nodes and divides the line
between them into a specified number of equally spaced nodes. Additional data can be input to vary the
distances between the generated nodes in a geometric ratio. This option is often used with the UFXORD
user subroutine to obtain a warped curve in space.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NODE FILL.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of the first node in the series. The coordinate data for this node
must have been previously defined.

6-10

2nd

Number of the last node in the series. The coordinate data for this node
must have been previously defined.

11-15

3rd

Node number increments to be taken in the above list.

16-20

4th

Second increment in series of node numbers to be generated. Entry of the


second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is used for
8-node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is entered in this
field.

21-25

5th

Scaling of the distances between successive nodes as a percentage. A


default of 100 percent is used.

26-30

6th

Number of times that the series will be repeated. You should ensure that
all starting and ending nodes in the series have been defined previously.
This repeat feature defaults to 1 series.

31-35

7th

Print flag is set equal to 1, nodal coordinate printout is omitted. If set equal
to 2, only the generated coordinates are printed. If set equal to 0 or left
blank, all coordinates are printed.

36-40

8th

Increment in first and last nodes in the series if the series is repeated more
than once. Defaults so that the next series will start from the node after the
last node in the preceding series.

249 NODE GENER


Generate Node Coordinates

NODE GENER

Generate Node Coordinates

Description
This option performs the function of an incremental mesh generator for nodes. It is used when elements
such as the quadratic 8-node elements require different spacing in successive nodal rows. It achieves this
by using a list of nodes as the master pattern. It then creates a new set of nodes by giving the new set of
nodes the same coordinate spacing as the list of nodes. Additional optional data allows the spacing to be
changed as a percentage of the spacing between the nodes. When the list of nodes is used up, the newly
generated nodes takes its place on the list and the process is repeated until the number of nodes to be
generated has been completed.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NODE GENER.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of the first node for which coordinates are being generated. This
coordinate data for this node must have been previously defined).

6-10

2nd

Number of the last node in the series. (This coordinate data for this node
must have been previously defined.)

11-15

3rd

Number of the first node used as a master.

16-20

4th

Number of the last node used as a master.

21-25

5th

Increment in the node numbers of the two node series above. A default
value of 1 is used.

26-30

6th

Second increment in series of node numbers to be generated. Entry of the


second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is used for
8-node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is entered in this
field.

31-35

7th

Scaling of distance between each pair of nodes as a percentage. A default


of 100 percent is used.

36-40

8th

Enter 1 for decrease of 1 node per series of master nodes. Default is 0.


Enter 2 for a decrease of 2 nodes per series.

41-45

9th

Print flag if set equal to 1, nodal coordinate printout is omitted.


If set equal to 2, only the generated coordinates are printed.
If set equal to 0 or left blank, all coordinates are printed.

NODE MERGE 250


Merge Duplicate Nodes

NODE MERGE

Merge Duplicate Nodes

Description
This option searches through all the nodes and merges all nodes which are closer to each other than a
minimum-specified distance. The default minimum distance is 0.001
The merge provision only alters the node numbers defined by the COORDINATES and CONNECTIVITY
options. Loading and boundary conditions must be applied to the new node numbers after nodal merge.
The node merge command cannot be used with shells or beam elements.
The WRITE option can be used to save the new mesh.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NODE MERGE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Set to 1 to set the node count to the minimum number found after the use
of this option.

6-10

2nd

Set to starting node number or nodal merge.


Default is 1.

11-15

3rd

Set to last node number for nodal merge. Default to total number of nodes
specified in SIZING parameter.

16-25

4th

Separation distance below which nodes will be merged together.

26-30

5th

Set to 1 to suppress printout of new connectivity.

251 UFXORD
Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine

UFXORD

Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine

Description
This block invokes the call to the UFXORD user subroutine to generate or modify nodal coordinates (see
Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines). The block can be repeated as often as
necessary. This option must follow the COORDINATES option.
If the nodes are specified in the CYLINDRICAL or COORD SYSTEM options, the coordinates defined in
the user subroutine are with respect to the local coordinate system.
The user subroutine is called as soon as this option is encountered.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word UFXORD.

2nd data block


Enter a list of nodes for which the UFXORD user subroutine is called.

CYLINDRICAL 252
Define Cylindrical Coordinate System

CYLINDRICAL

Define Cylindrical Coordinate System

Description
This option allows for the input of a cylindrical coordinate system such that both the nodal input and
output of a group of nodal points are treated in this cylindrical coordinate system. For nodes listed in this
option, nodal input (that is, COORDINATES, POINT LOAD, FIXED DISP, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL VEL,
etc.) and nodal output (that is, incremental and total displacements, etc.) are to be given in the cylindrical
coordinate system defined here.
Note:

All coordinate systems defined with this option are based upon the original model and they
are not updated during the analysis.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word CYLINDRICAL.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of sets of cylindrical coordinate data (required for this option).

6-10

2nd

Unit number for reading data. Defaults to input deck.

11-15

3rd

Enter nonzero integer to suppress printing of generated rectangular


coordinates and nodal transformations after the END OPTION option.

Repeat data blocks 3, 4, 5, and 6 once for each data set.


3rd data block coordinates of origin
1-10

1st

Enter x coordinate (with respect to global Cartesian coordinates) of point


defining origin of cylindrical coordinate system.

11-20

2nd

Enter y coordinate of origin.

21-30

3rd

Enter z coordinate of origin.

4th data block coordinates of point 1


1-10

1st

Enter x coordinate (with respect to global Cartesian coordinates) of point


such that vector from origin to this point defines the z axis of cylindrical
coordinate system.

11-20

2nd

Enter y coordinate of z axis point.

21-30

3rd

Enter z coordinate of z axis point.

253 CYLINDRICAL
Define Cylindrical Coordinate System

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Note:

If the calculated direction cosines of the local Z-axis are zero,


they are reset to (0., 0., 1.). This is the default for
two-dimensional cylindrical coordinates.

5th data block coordinates of point 2


1-10

1st

Enter x-coordinate (with respect to global Cartesian coordinates) of a


point such that a vector from the origin to this point defines the axis from
which is measured in planes perpendicular to the z-axis.

11-20

2nd

Enter y-coordinate of this point.

21-30

3rd

Enter z-coordinate of this point.


Note:

If the calculated direction cosines of the local X-axis are zero,


they are reset to (1., 0., 0.).

Point 1

Origin
Y

X Point 2

6th data block


Enter a list of nodes using this cylindrical coordinate system. Marc
assumes that the coordinates of these nodes are given in cylindrical
coordinates with respect to the cylindrical axes defined in data blocks 3,
4 and 5. Coordinates are entered as r, theta, z, where theta is in degrees.
Marc also calculates nodal transformations for these nodes such that
all nodal input and output is given with respect to the cylindrical
coordinate system attached to these nodes.

WRITE 254
Write Connectivity and Coordinates

WRITE

Write Connectivity and Coordinates

Description
This option allows you to write the final connectivity and coordinates to an auxiliary file. The values
written are those after all internal mesh generations (MESH2D, FXORD or incremental generators) and
all external (UFXORD, UFCONN) transformations have been performed. The coordinates are output in
the global system, not in the local coordinate system specified in either the CYLINDRICAL or COORD
SYSTEM options. All node numbers are in the user system; that is, nonoptimized.
Note:

The connectivity and coordinates data are written to the auxiliary file in the format (default
or extended) based on the last related valid option (see the EXTENDED parameter as well
as the NEW (model and history definition options).

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word WRITE.

11-15

2nd

Enter the unit number to write to. Default is unit 1.

255 ADAPTIVE
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

ADAPTIVE

Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Description
This model definition set controls the error criteria for local adaptive meshing. The ADAPTIVE parameter
must also be included.
The capability can be used for lower-order elements, 3-node triangular solids and shells, 4-node
quadrilateral solids and shells, 4-node tetrahedrals, 8-node hexahedral elements, and the 8-node
solid-shell elements. Local adaptive meshing cannot be used with the triangular and tetrahedral
Herrmann elements, type 155 - 157.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-8

1st

Enter the word ADAPTIVE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of criteria to use.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number to read data, defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter the frequency to perform adaptive meshing, default is


every increment.

16-20

4th

Enter the unit number to which the adaptive mesh data will be written.

21-25

5th

Enter 1 for ignoring attach information when an element edge or face


which is attached to a curve or surface is subdivided. By default, the new
nodes are projected to the curve or surface.

Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated in pairs for each criteria selected.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter the criteria type:


1: Mean Strain Energy
Subdivide element if:
element strain energy > f1 * total strain
energy/NUMEL
f2 to f6 is not used

ADAPTIVE 256
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
2: Zienkiewicz-Zhu Error Criterion
The error norm is defined as

dV
----------------------------------------------------------2
2
dV + dV
2
E E dV
----------------------------------------------------------2
2
E dV + E E dV
2

or

The stress error and strain energy errors are


X =

dV

and Y = E E dV
2

The allowable element stress error is


AES = f2 * X/NUMEL + f3 * X * f1//NUMEL
The allowable element strain energy error is
AEE = f4 * Y/NUMEL + f5 * X * f1//NUMEL
where
NUMEL is the number of elements in the mesh.
If f2, f3, f4, f5 are input as zero, f2 = 1.0.
If stress error testing is to be performed, f1 0
and f2 and/or f3 0, f4 = 0, f5 = 0.
The element will be subdivided when:
> f1 and Xel > AES.
If strain energy error testing is to be performed,
f1 0 and f2 = 0, f3 = 0, f4 0, and/or f5 0.
The element will be subdivided when:
> f1 and Yel > AEE
The default is f2 = 1.0 if f2, f3, f4, f5 are input
as 0.0.
It is advisable that f2 + f3 1 or f4 + f5 1.0.
3: Stress Discontinuity (not yet implemented)

257 ADAPTIVE
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
4: Node within Box
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes:
f1 < x < f2 and f3 < y < f4 and f5 < z < f6
The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be
automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of
the 3rd data block.
-4: Node location within box
Subdivision criteria is the same as Type 4.
If all nodes of element leave the box, the subdivided elements are
merged together.
The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be
automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of
the 3rd data block.
5: Node in Contact
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes is in contact or
belongs to a segment which is contacted
f1 to f6 are not used, enter 0 or blank
6: Aspect Ratio (not yet implemented)
7: Skewness Ratio (not yet implemented)
8: Thermal Gradient (used for heat transfer and coupled analysis)
Subdivide element if:
gradient > maximum gradient * f1
or gradient > f2
and temperature > f3 (if given)
typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)
f4 to f8 are not used, enter 0 or blank
9: Equivalent stress, strain
Subdivide element if:
von Mises stress > f1 * maximum von
Mises stress
or

ADAPTIVE 258
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
von Mises stress > f2
Equivalent strain > f3 * maximum equivalent strain
or
Equivalent strain > f4
Equivalent plastic strain > f5 maximum equivalent plastic strain
or
Equivalent plastic strain > f6
Equivalent creep strain > f7*maximum equivalent creep strain
or
Equivalent creep strain > f8.
10: User subroutine UADAP
Subdivide element if:
user/maximum user > f1 or user > f2
f3 to f6 are not used, enter 0 or blank
user is defined in user subroutine UADAP
11: Previously Defined Mesh
Use the refined mesh from a previous analysis as the starting point
to this analysis.
(see 4th data block).
12. Zienkiewicz-Zhu plastic strain error criterion:
2

p 2

* dV
= ------------------------------------------------------------p2
p* p 2
dV + dV
p

The plastic strain error is:


A =

p*

p 2

dV

The allowable element plastic strain error is AEPS = f2 *


A/NUMEL + f3 * A * f1//NUMEL
The element will be subdivided when: > f1 and Ae > AEPS.
NUMEL is the number of elements in the mesh.

259 ADAPTIVE
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
13. Zienkiewicz-Zhu creep strain error criterion:

c 2

* dV
------------------------------------------------------------c2
c* c 2
dV + dV
c

The creep strain error is:


B =

c*

c 2

dV

The allowable element creep strain error is AECS = f2 * B/NUMEL


+ f3 * B * f1//NUMEL
The element will be subdivided when:
> f1 and Bel > AECS.
NUMEL is the number of elements in the mesh.
14: Pressure Gradient (used only for diffusion analysis)
gradient > maximum gradient * f1
or gradient > f2
and pressure > f3 (if given)
typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)
15: Electrical Potential Gradient (used only for electrostatic analysis)
Subdivide element if:
gradient > maximum gradient * f1
or gradient > f2
and potential > f3 (if given)
typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)
16: Magnetic Potential Gradient (used only for magnetostatic analysis)
Subdivide element if:
gradient > maximum gradient * f1
or gradient > f2
and potential > f3 (if given)
typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)
17. Elements in cutter path. This criterion can only be used for analysis
of NC Machining problems.

ADAPTIVE 260
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
18. Angle between shell elements.
Subdivide element if the change in the angle between neighboring
shell elements is larger than f1.
19: Node location within a Cylindrical Region
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes is in the region
defined by a cylinder:
f1 = radius
f2 = x-coordinate of first point on axis
f3 = y-coordinate of first point on axis
f4 = z-coordinate of first point on axis
f5 = x-coordinate of second point on axis
f6 = y-coordinate of second point on axis
f7 = z-coordinate of second point on axis
The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be
automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of
the 3rd data block.
-19: Node location within a Cylindrical Region
Subdivision criteria is the same as Type 19.
If all nodes of element leave the cylinder, the subdivided elements
are merged together.
The coordinates of the cylinder may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the cylinder
may be automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th
fields of the 3rd data block.
20: Node location within a Spherical Region
Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes:
f1 = radius
f2 = x-coordinate of center
f3 = y-coordinate of center
f4 = z-coordinate of center

261 ADAPTIVE
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be
automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of
the 3rd data block.
-20: Node location within Spherical Region
Subdivision criteria is the same as Type 20.
If all nodes of element leave the sphere, the subdivided elements
are merged together.
The coordinates of the sphere may be moved at the end of each
increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the sphere may
be automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields
of the 3rd data block.

6-10

2nd

Enter the maximum number of levels to adapt an element.

11-15

3rd

Enter 3 for box associated with criteria 4 or -4 to automatically


follow weld pool.

16-20

4th

Enter the weld flux ID specified in the WELD FLUX option.

21-25

5th

Not used.

26-30

6th

Not used.

31-63

7th

Enter the name of the element set that will use this criteria. Default
is to apply the adaptive criteria to all elements.

Fields 3 and 4 are currently only used for the NODE IN BOX criterion in conjunction with a welding
analysis. Weld pool dimensions should be specified in the WELD FLUX option. Box dimensions
specified in the 4th data block below are not used.
4th data block (except for criteria type 11)
1-10

1st

First parameter f1

11-20

2nd

Second parameter f2

21-30

3rd

Third parameter f3

31-40

4th

Fourth parameter f4

41-50

5th

Fifth parameter f5

ADAPTIVE 262
Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

51-60

6th

Sixth parameter f6

61-70

7th

Seventh parameter f7

71-80

8th

Eighth parameter f8.

4th data block (criteria type 11)


Include the data file written by the previous analysis (the unit number was specified on the second
data block).

263 ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing
Description
This model definition set provides control parameters used for the global adaptive remeshing. The
REZONING parameter must also be included in the parameter section.
The ADAPT GLOBAL model definition option can also be used to support boundary conditions assigned
to the remeshing body for 2-D, 3-D solid (tetrahedral) and 3-D shell. When applying boundary
conditions, the new table style input format is preferred.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-8

1st

Enter the words ADAPT GLOBAL.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of bodies to be remeshed.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number to read data; defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Not used.

The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated as a set for each body to be remeshed.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter 2 for Advancing Front 2-D quad or mixed mesher.


Enter 3 for Delaunay 2-D mesher.
Enter 4 for 2-D Overlay mesher.
Enter 5 for 3-D Overlay Hexahedral mesher.
Enter 6 for Delaunay 3-D tetrahedral mesher.
Enter 7 for Relax mesh generator.
Enter 8 for Stretch mesh generator.
Enter 9 for Shave mesh generator.
Enter 10 for quadtree mesher. (Simufact externally supplied)
Enter 11 for MD Patran 3-D tetrahedral meshers.
Enter 12 for triangular shell mesh generator.
Enter 18 for reading new mesh from .mesh file.
Note:

jobid_b*.mesh file name is expected where * is the


remeshing body number and jobid is the job name.

ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) 264


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Enter 19 for quadrilateral shell mesh generator.

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 to remesh body (default).


Enter 2 if first relax mesh; if that fails, do full remeshing.
Enter 3 if relax mesh only.

11-15

3rd

Enter the body to be remeshed (default = 1).

16-20

4th

Enter the element type; default is to previous element type.


Note:

This element type must also be specified on the


ELEMENTS parameter.

21-25

5th

Enter the number of criteria.

26-30

6h

Not used; enter 0.

31-35

7th

Echo mode for Overlay Hexahedral Meshing


0 Default; no message print out.
1 Some message print out.
100 Prints out more messages and saves all the meshing input files. For
details about these files, see Appendix I: 3-D Remeshing Files.

Repeat the 4th block for each criteria (5th field, 3rd data block).
4th data block
1-5

1st

Enter 1 if increment frequency is used.


Enter 2 if element distortion is used (2-D only).
Enter 3 if angle based.
Enter 4 if aspect ratio based.
Enter 5 if strain change.
Enter 6 if penetration based.
Enter 7 if force remeshing at next opportunity.
Enter 8 if recession distance based.

6-10

2nd

Enter the frequency in increments if criteria 1.

11-20

3rd

For criteria 3, enter maximum change in angle from the reference angle
for quadrilaterals. Default is 40. The reference angle is the angle of the
current mesh without deformation. For 3-D analysis, enter minimum
volume ratio for hexahedral element. Default is 0.1.
For criteria 4, enter the maximum aspect ratio allowed. Default is 10.0.
For criteria 5, enter maximum change of equivalent strain allowed before
remeshing occurs.

265 ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Default is 0.4.
For criteria 6, enter the penetration limit; default is 2*contact tolerance.
For criteria 8, enter the maximum element side reduction fraction before
remeshing occurs.
If current length divided by the original length < tolerance, remeshing
will occur.

21-30

4th

For criteria 3, enter maximum change in angle from the reference angle
for triangles. Default is 40. The reference angle is the angle of the current
mesh without deformation.
For 3-D analysis, enter minimum volume ratio for tetrahedral element.
Default is 0.1.
For criteria 8, enter the total amount of recession before remeshing occurs.

5th data block


Two-dimensional Advancing Front All Quadrilateral or Mixed Mesher - Mesher type = 2
1-5

1st

Enter 0 for all quadrilateral mesh.


Enter 1 for mixed quadrilateral/triangular mesh.
Enter 2 for all triangular mesh.

6-15

2nd

Enter the target element size.

16-25

3rd

Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments. (Default = 120)

26-30

4th

Target number of elements after remeshing; default means no such


control.
If both the 2nd and 4th fields are default, the number of elements in the
previous mesh are used.

31-35

5th

Curvature outline control.


Enter number of divisions of line segments to fit a curvature circle.
Default = 36.
Enter -1 to obtain uniform outline points.

36-45

6th

Outline smoothing ratio range 0 - 1.0; default = 0.8.

46-55

7th

Minimum target element size; default = 1/3*target element size.

56-65

8th

Percentage of change allowed for the new number of elements created.


Default means no such control. Total of five remeshing trials will be used
to create the mesh to meet the requirement. Not to be used for the
remeshing with the automatic stop-and-restart option.

66-75

9th

Not used; enter 0.

76-80

10th

Number of local refinement boxes.

ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) 266


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

5th data block


Two-dimensional Delaunay Triangular Mesher - Mesher type = 3
1-5

1st

Not used; enter 0.

6-15

2nd

Enter the target element size.

16-25

3rd

Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments (default 120).

26-30

4th

Target number of elements after remeshing; default means no such


control.

31-35

5th

Curvature outline control.


Enter number of divisions of line segments to fit a curvature circle.
Default = 36.
Enter -1 to obtain uniform outline points.

36-45

6th

Outline smoothing ratio range 0-1.0; default = 0.8.

46-55

7th

Minimum target element size; default = 1/3*target element size.

56-65

8th

Percentage of change allowed for the new number of elements created.


Default means no such control. Total of five remeshing trials will be used
to create the mesh to meet the requirement. Not to be used for the
remeshing with the automatic stop-and-restart option.

66-75

9th

Not used; enter 0.

76-80

10th

Number of local refinement boxes.

5th data block


Two-dimensional Overlay Quadrilateral Mesher - Mesher type = 4
1-10

1st

Enter the element target length.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined one level


if necessary.
Enter 2 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined two levels
if necessary.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 if elements in the interior can be merged together. Four elements


at a time will be merged.

21-25

4th

Target number of elements after remeshing; default means no such


control.

26-30

5th

Not used; enter 0.

267 ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

31-40

6th

Not used; enter 0.

41-50

7th

Not used; enter 0.

51-60

8th

Percentage of change allowed for the new number of elements created.


Default means no such control. Total of five remeshing trials will be used
to create the mesh to meet the requirement. Not to be used for the
remeshing with the automatic stop-and-restart option.

5th data block


Three-dimensional Delaunay Tetrahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 6
1-10

1st

Enter target atom size (A).

11-20

2nd

Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0).


A value of 1 means that all element edges between elements not in the
same plane will be considered a hard edge.

21-30

3rd

Minimum edge length.

31-40

4th

Minimum edge angle.

41-50

5th

Gap distance.

51-55

6th

Not used; enter 0.

56-60

7th

Enter 1 for volume control.

5th data block


Relax Mesh Generator - Mesher type = 7
1-5

1st

Enter the number of relaxes to be performed.

6-10

2nd

Enter the global direction to relax in, default is all directions.

11-20

3rd

Enter the sweep distance, nodes closer than this distance will be swept
together.

5th data block


Stretch Generator - Mesher type = 8
1-5

1st

Enter the first corner node number, if zero, then the second field gives the
streamline region that is used to define the stretching orientation.

6-10

2nd

Enter the node increment in first direction, or the streamline


region number.

11-15

3rd

Enter number of nodes in first direction.


Enter the contact body which if nodes contact, they should not be
adjusted, if zero all nodes will be adjusted.

16-20

4th

Enter the node increment in second direction.

ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) 268


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

21-25

5th

Enter the number of nodes in second direction.

26-30

6th

Enter the node increment in third direction (3-D only).

31-35

7th

Enter the number of nodes in third direction (3-D only).

5th data block


Shave Mesh Generator - Mesher type = 9
This 5th data block is not required.
5th data block
Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 11
1-10

1st

Enter target element edge length.

11-20

2nd

Minimum element edge length; default 1/3 of the element edge length.

21-30

3rd

Feature vertex angle; default 100.

31-40

4th

Feature edge angle; default 60.

41-50

5th

Interior coarsening factor; default 1.5 times.

51-55

6th

Number of local refinement boxes; default = 0.

56-60

7th

Enter 1 for volume control; default = 1.

61-65

8th

Curvature refinement control. Enter number of division to fit a curvature


cycle. Default = 0 (no such control).

66-70

9th

Enter number of elements in the target mesh.


Default = 0 (no such control).

71-80

10th

Enter maximum element edge length.


Default = 3*element edge length.

5th data block


Three-dimensional Triangular Shell Mesher - Mesher type = 12
1-10

1st

Enter target element edge length.

11-20

2nd

Minimum element edge length; default 1/3 of the element edge length.

21-30

3rd

Feature vertex angle; default 100.

31-40

4th

Feature edge angle; default 60.

41-50

5th

Interior coarsening factor; default 1.5 times.

51-55

6th

Number of local refinement boxes; default = 0.

56-60

7th

Not used; enter 0.

61-65

8th

Curvature refinement control. Enter number of division to fit a curvature


cycle. Default = 0 (no such control).

269 ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed
66-70

Free
9th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter number of elements in the target mesh.


Default = 0 (no such control).

71-80

10th

Enter maximum element edge length.


Default = 3*element edge length.

5th data block


Three-dimensional Triangular Shell Mesher - Mesher type = 19
1-10

1st

Enter target element edge length.

11-20

2nd

Minimum element edge length; default 1/3 of the element edge length.

21-30

3rd

Feature vertex angle; default 100.

31-40

4th

Feature edge angle; default 60.

41-50

5th

Interior coarsening factor; default 1.5 times.

51-55

6th

Not used; enter 0.

56-60

7th

Not used; enter 0.

61-65

8th

Not used; enter 0.

66-70

9th

Enter number of elements in the target mesh.


Default = 0 (no such control).

71-80

10th

Enter maximum element edge length.


Default = 3*element edge length.

5th data block


Reading .mesh file - Mesher type = 18
1-10

1st

Enter mesh file type. Default = 3.


Enter 1 for mesh file in .t18 format
Enter 2 for mesh file in .feb format
Enter 3 for mesh file in .dat format (Marc input format)

5th data block


Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 5
1-10

1st

Enter target atom size (Ax). For cylindrical grid, Ar.

11-20

2nd

Enter target atom size (Ay). For cylindrical grid, A.

21-30

3rd

Enter target atom size (Az).

31-40

4th

Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0). A value of 1 means
that all element edges between elements not in the same plane will be
considered a hard edge.

ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) 270


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

41-50

5th

Minimum edge length. If an edge length is less than this value, it will not
be considered as a hard edge.

51-60

6th

Minimum edge angle. If the angle between element faces is less than this
value, the common edge will not be considered as a hard edge.

61-70

7th

Gap distance.

71-75

8th

The template file name is specified on the 9th data block.


Enter 1 if grid-based template
Enter 2 if mesh-based template.
Enter 3 if kernel-based template.

76-80

9th

Enter 1 for volume control.

6th data block


Two-dimensional Advancing Front or Delaunay Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]
Repeat for each box (6th field, 5th data block)
1-5

1st

Enter refinement level.

6-10

2nd

Enter the refinement type:


0 = refinement in box.

11-15

3rd

Body ID 1. If not zero, corner 1 will be attached to this rigid body.

16-20

4th

Body ID 2. If not zero, corner 2 will be attached to this rigid body.

21-30

5th

Enter x coordinate of corner 1.

31-40

6th

Enter y coordinate of corner 1.

41-50

8th

Enter x coordinate of corner 2.

51-60

9th

Enter y coordinate of corner 2.

6th data block


Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]
Repeat for each box (6th field, 5th data block)
1-5

1st

Enter refinement level.

6-10

2nd

Enter the refinement type:


0 = refinement in box.

11-15

3rd

Body ID 1. If not 0, corner 1 will be attached to this rigid body.

16-20

4th

Body ID 2. If not 0, corner 2 will be attached to this rigid body.

21-30

5th

Enter x coordinate of corner 1.

31-40

6th

Enter y coordinate of corner 1.

271 ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

41-50

7th

Enter z coordinate of corner 1.

51-60

8th

Enter x coordinate of corner 2.

61-70

9th

Enter y coordinate of corner 2.

71-80

10th

Enter z coordinate of corner 2.

6th data block


Two-dimensional Quadtree Mesher or 3-D Hexahedral Mesher
1-5

1st

Number of boxes used for element refinement; entered on 10th series.

6-10

2nd

Enter number of levels to coarsen (merge) the interior elements.

11-15

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

4th

Not used; enter 0.

21-25

5th

Not used; enter 0.

26-30

6th

Enter 0 for no wedge elements


Enter 1 to allow wedge elements.
Enter to split hexahedral elements.

31-35

7th

Enter 1 to perform shuffle after mesh is snapped to contact surface


(default).
Enter 2 to avoid shuffle.

36-40

8th

Enter 1 for Coons projection in meshing phase. This improves the


accuracy, but increases the cost.

41-45

9th

Number of shakes. Default is 10.

46-50

10th

Number of tries. Default is 5.

51-55

11th

Type of enhancement.

56-60

12th

Edge detection:
Enter 0 to detect new edges and use contact data.
Enter 1 to use contact data only.
Enter 2 to detect new edges.
Enter 3 to not use edge information.
Enter 4 to use previously detected edges, new edges, and contact
information.
Enter 5 to use contact data and previous edges.
Enter 6 to use user edges previously detected and new edges.
Enter 7 to use previous edge information only.

ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) 272


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

7th data block


Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher only
1-5

1st

Grid type:
Enter 1 for Cartesian (default).
Enter 2 for cylindrical.
Enter 3 for user defined.

6-10

2nd

For cylindrical grid:


Enter 1 for axis aligned with x-direction.
Enter 2 for axis aligned with y-direction.
Enter 3 for axis aligned with z-direction.

11-15

3rd

Maximum allowed refinement levels.

16-20

4th

First user-defined integer parameter.

21-25

5th

Second user-defined integer parameter.

26-30

6th

Third user-defined integer parameter.

8th data block


Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only [Version 11 only]
1-10

1st

For cylindrical grid, enter the angle of the part.

11-20

2nd

Enter the geometric refinement tolerance.

21-30

3rd

Enter the surface curvature tolerance.

31-40

4th

First user-defined real parameter.

41-50

5th

Second user-defined real parameter.

51-60

6th

Third user-defined real parameter.

9th data block


Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only And Template-based Mesh Requested
1-32

1st

Enter the template name.

273 ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition)


Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

10th data block


Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]
One can either specify that refinement is in a box based upon coordinate positions or between
two bodies.
Repeat for each box (1st field, 6th data block)
1-5

1st

Enter the refinement level.

6-10

2nd

Enter the refinement type:


0 = refinement in the box.
1 = minimum number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
2 = minimum number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
3 = minimum number of elements in z-direction between bodies.
4 = exact number of elements in x-direction between bodies.
5 = exact number of elements in y-direction between bodies.
6 = exact number of elements in z-direction between bodies.

11-15

3rd

Body ID 1. If refinement is in the box, corner 1 is attached to this


rigid body

16-20

4th

Body ID 2. If refinement is in the box, corner 2 is attached to this


rigid body

21-30

5th

Enter x coordinate of corner 1.

31-40

6th

Enter y coordinate of corner 1.

41-50

7th

Enter z coordinate of corner 1.

51-60

8th

Enter x coordinate of corner 2.

61-70

9th

Enter y coordinate of corner 2.

71-80

10th

Enter z coordinate of corner 2.

POINTS 274
Define Geometric Points

POINTS

Define Geometric Points

Description
These geometrical entities are used with the ADAPTIVE, ADAPT GLOBAL, or for prescribing boundary
conditions. Finite elements entities are associated with these geometric entities using the ATTACH NODE
options. The use of POINTS with these options has the following consequences:
1. ADAPT GLOBAL, ATTACH NODE
If a node is attached to a point entity, then this point is considered a hard point. Upon remeshing,
a new node will always be located at this point. This facilitates the application of fixed
displacements, point loads, etc.
2. ATTACH NODE and all nodal based boundary conditions
If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the point,
then all nodes attached to the point will have the boundary condition applied.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word POINTS.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of points to be defined.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number to read geometric information, defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to suppress printout of point data.

3rd data block (Repeat for each point)


1-5

1st

Point identifier

6-15

2nd

X-coordinate of point.

16-25

3rd

Y-coordinate of point.

26-35

4th

Z-coordinate of point.

275 CURVES
Define Geometric Curves

CURVES

Define Geometric Curves

Description
These geometrical entities are used with the ADAPTIVE, ADAPT GLOBAL, or for prescribing boundary
conditions. Finite elements entities are associated with these geometric entities using the ATTACH NODE
or ATTACH EDGE options. The use of CURVES with these options has the following consequences:
1. ADAPTIVE, ATTACH NODE, ATTACH EDGE, ELASTIC
If the nodes of an element edge (2-D) are attached to a curve then if this element is subdivided,
the newly created node will be placed on the curve. If ATTACH NODE or ATTACH EDGE are not
used, the newly created nodes are placed midway between the original nodes of this edge (face).
2. ATTACH EDGE and all boundary condition options
Distributed loads, foundations, and films may be applied to curves. All finite elements that have
edges attached to these curves will be appropriately loaded.
3. ATTACH NODE and all nodal based boundary conditions
If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the curve,
then all nodes that are attached to the curve will have the boundary condition applied.
4. ADAPT GLOBAL
If boundary conditions are applied to a curve, then, when a new mesh is created using ADAPT
GLOBAL, the edges are reattached to the curves automatically and the boundary conditions are
correctly applied.
5. CAVITY
The CAVITY option may use curves defined here as symmetry surfaces.
You can either directly enter the coordinates/dimensions of the curves or define geometric point entities
and then reference these point entities using negative curve types. In the following pages, this is called
relational input and is available for 2-D Polylines, Circular Arc, Circle, 2-D NURBS (internally
generated). This is the preferred input style.
Orientation
A curve has an orientation associated with it. This has three consequences:
1. If a table has an independent value of arc length and elements are attached to this curve. The
arc length is a monotonically increasing function which has a value of zero at the beginning of
the curve.

CURVES 276
Define Geometric Curves

2. If an axisymmetric shell or 2-D beam is attached to the curve, and a distributed boundary
condition is applied to the curve, then
for mechanical loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is in the direction opposite to the normal,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is in the direction of the normal.
for thermal loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is a flux added to the first degree of freedom,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is a flux added to the last degree of freedom.
3. A radiating cavity has an orientation based upon the normal to the surface.
The normal to a curve is based upon the right-hand rule relative to the direction of the curve.
When specifying the top and bottom surfaces of a curve, the following format is used in the ATTACH
EDGE, DIST LOADS, FILMS, FOUNDATION, EMISSIVITY, and CAVITY options.
Marc

Mentat

top

bottom

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word CURVES.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of curves to be defined.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number to read geometric information; defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to suppress printout of curve data.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Curve identifier

6-10

2nd

Enter the curve type:


1: 3-D Polyline
2: 2-D Circular Arc
3: 2-D Circle
4: 2-D NURBS Curve (full description)

277 CURVES
Define Geometric Curves

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
5: 2-D NURBS Curve (internally generate)
6: 3-D Trimming Curve
If the curve type is a negative number, it uses relational input format.

A. CURVE TYPE 1 FOR 3-D POLYLINE


For nonrelational input, use data block series 4a and 5a. For relational input, use data block 4b.
4a data block
1-5

1st

Number of points on polyline.

5a data block (nonrelational input)


Enter the coordinate points, one per line.
1-10

1st

X-coordinate.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate.

5b data block (relational input)


Enter a list of point identifiers making up the polyline.
B. CURVE TYPE 2 FOR 2-D CIRCULAR ARC (in x-y plane)
4a data block (nonrelational input)
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of starting point.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of starting point.

21-30

3rd

X-coordinate of ending point.

31-30

4th

Y-coordinate of ending point.

41-50

5th

X-coordinate of center.

51-60

6th

Y-coordinate of center.

61-70

7th

Radius.

4b data block (relational input)


1-5

1st

Enter point identifier of starting point.

6-10

2nd

Enter point identifier of ending point.

11-15

3rd

Enter point identifier of center.

C. CURVE TYPE 3 FOR 2-D CIRCLE (in x-y plane)


4a data block (nonrelational input)
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of center.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of center.

21-30

3rd

Radius.

CURVES 278
Define Geometric Curves

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

4b data block (relational input)


1-5

1st

Enter point identifier of center.

6-10

2nd

Enter point identifier of point whose first coordinate is the radius.

D. CURVE TYPE 4 FOR 2-D NURBS - FULL DESCRIPTION


4th data block
1-5

1st

Number of control points (NPU).

6-10

2nd

Order of NURBS (NOU).

5th data block


Enter NPU homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.
6th data block
Enter (NPU plus NOU) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.
7a data block (nonrelational input)
Enter the physical coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (3 coordinates). There should
be NPU lines.
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of control point.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of control point.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of control point.

7b data block (relational input)


Enter NPU point identifiers in I5 format (16 per line); use as many lines as necessary.
E. CURVE TYPE 5 FOR 2-D NURBS - INTERNALLY GENERATED
For nonrelational input, use data block series 4a and 5a. For relational input, use data block 4b
4a data block
1-5

1st

Number of control points (NPU); minimum number is four.

5a data block
Enter the physical coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (3 coordinates). There should
be NPU lines.
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of control point.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of control point.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of control point.

4b data block
Enter a list of control point identifiers; minimum number is four.

279 CURVES
Define Geometric Curves

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

F. CURVE TYPE 6 FOR 3-D TRIMMNG CURVE


4th data block
1-5

1st

Number of control points (NPU).

6-10

2nd

Order of NURBS (NOU).

5th data block


Enter NPU homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.
6th data block
Enter (NPU plus NOU) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The
components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.
7a data block (nonrelational input)
Enter the physical parametric and coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (5 coordinates).
There should be NPU lines.
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of control point.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of control point.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of control point.

30-40

4th

Enter first parametric coordinate with respect to the surface that this curve
trims.

41-50

5th

Enter second parametric coordinate.

7b data block (relational input)


For point identifiers and parametric coordinates with respect to the surface that this curve trims. There
should be NPU lines.
1-5

1st

Enter point identifier.

6-15

2nd

Enter first parametric coordinate with respect to the surface that this
curve trims.

SURFACES 280
Define Geometrical Surfaces

SURFACES

Define Geometrical Surfaces

Description
These geometrical entities are used with the ADAPTIVE, ADAPT GLOBAL, or for prescribing boundary
conditions. Finite elements entities are associated with these geometric entities using the ATTACH NODE
or ATTACH FACE options. The use of CURVES with these options has the following consequences:
1. ADAPTIVE, ATTACH NODE, ATTACH FACE, ELASTIC
If the nodes of an element face (3-D) are attached to a surface then if this element is subdivided,
the newly created node will be placed on the surface. If ATTACH NODE or ATTACH FACE are
not used, the newly created nodes are placed midway between the original nodes of this face.
2. ATTACH FACE and all boundary condition options
Distributed loads, foundations, and films may be applied to surfaces. All finite elements that have
faces attached to these surfaces will be appropriately loaded.
3. ATTACH NODE and all nodal based boundary conditions
If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the surface,
then all nodes that are attached to the surface will have the boundary condition applied.
4. The CAVITY option may use surfaces defined here to define symmetry surfaces.
You can either directly enter the coordinates/dimensions of the surfaces or define geometric point entities
and then reference these point entities, use negative surface types. In the following pages, this is called
relational input and is available for Plane, Sphere, Cylinder, 3-D NURBS (internally generated), and
Polysurface. This is the preferred input style.
Orientation
A curve has an orientation associated with it. This has three consequences:
1. If a table has an independent value of arc length and elements are attached to this curve. The arc
length is a monotonically increasing function which has a value of zero at the beginning of the
curve.
2. If an axisymmetric shell or 2-D beam is attached to the curve, and a distributed boundary
condition is applied to the curve, then
for mechanical loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is in the direction opposite to the normal,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is in the direction of the normal.
for thermal loads:
a. a positive load on the top surface is a flux added to the first DOF,
b. a positive load on the bottom surface is a flux added to the last DOF.
3. A radiating cavity has an orientation based upon the normal to the surface.

281 SURFACES
Define Geometrical Surfaces

The normal to a curve is based upon the right hand rule relative to the direction of the curve.
When specifying the top and bottom surfaces of a curve, the following format is used in the ATTACH
FACE, DIST LOADS, FILMS, FOUNDATION, EMISSIVITY, and CAVITY options.
Marc

Mentat

top

bottom

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word SURFACES.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of surfaces to be defined.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number to read geometric information; defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to suppress printout of surface data.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Surface identifier

6-10

2nd

Enter the surface type:


1: Plane
2: Sphere
3: Cylinder
4: NURBS Surface (full description)
5: NURBS Surface (internally generate)
6: 3-D Polysurface
If the surface type is a negative number, it uses relational input format.

A. SURFACE TYPE 1 FOR PLANE


4a data block (nonrelational input)
Enter coordinates at four points; one point per line.
1-10

1st

X-coordinate.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate.

SURFACES 282
Define Geometrical Surfaces

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

4b data block (relational input)


1-5

1st

Enter the first point identifier.

6-10

2nd

Enter the second point identifier.

11-15

3rd

Enter the third point identifier.

16-20

4th

Enter the fourth point identifier.

B. SURFACE TYPE 2 FOR SPHERE


4a data block (nonrelational input)
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of center.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of center.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of center.

31-40

4th

Radius.

4b data block (relational input)


1-5

1st

Enter the point identifier of the center.

6-10

2nd

Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius.

C. SURFACE TYPE 3 FOR CYLINDER/CONE


4a data block (nonrelational input)
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of starting point on axis.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of starting point on axis.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of starting point on axis.

31-40

4th

Radius at starting point.

41-50

5th

X-coordinate of ending point on axis.

51-60

6th

Y-coordinate of ending point on axis.

61-70

7th

Z-coordinate of ending point on axis.

71-80

8th

Radius at ending point.

4b data block (relational input)


1-5

1st

Enter the point identifier of the starting point on the axis.

6-10

2nd

Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius at
the start point.

11-15

3rd

Enter the point identifier of the endpoint on the axis.

16-20

4th

Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius at
the endpoint.

283 SURFACES
Define Geometrical Surfaces

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

D. SURFACE TYPE 4 FOR 3-D NURBS FULL DESCRIPTION


4th data block
1-5

1st

Number of control points in first direction (NPU).

6-10

2nd

Order of NURBS in first direction (NOU).

11-15

3rd

Number of control points in second direction (NPV).

16-20

4th

Order of NURBS in second direction (NOV).

21-25

5th

Enter the number of trimming curves (NTRIM).

5th data block


Enter NPU times NPV homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as
necessary. The homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.
6th data block
Enter (NPU plus NOU) plus (NPV plus NOV) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many
lines as necessary. The components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.
7a data block (nonrelational input)
Enter the physical coordinates of NPU times NPV control points 1 control point per line
(3 coordinates). There should be NPU times NPV lines.
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of control point.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of control point.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of control point.

7b data block (relational input)


Enter NPU times NPV point identifiers of the control points in I5 format
(16 per line); use as many lines as necessary.
8th data block
Enter NTRIM curve identifiers in I5 format (16 per line); use as many
lines as necessary. Note these curves should have previously defined
using the CURVES model definition option with a curve type of six.
E. SURFACE TYPE 5 FOR 3-D NURBS INTERNALLY GENERATED
4th data block
1-5

1st

Number of control points in first direction (NPU).


Minimum is 4.

6-10

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Number of control points in second direction (NPV).


Minimum is 4.

SURFACES 284
Define Geometrical Surfaces

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

5a data block (nonrelational input)


Enter the physical coordinates of NPU times NPV control points 1 control point per line
(3 coordinates). There should be NPU times NPV lines.
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of control point.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of control point.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of control point.

5b data block (relational input)


Enter NPV lists of control point identifiers. Each list must have
NPU points.
F. SURFACE TYPE 6 FOR 3-D POLYSURFACE
For 3-D polysurface, use the 4a, 5a, and 6a data blocks for nonrelational input.
For 3-D polysurface, use the 4b and 5b data blocks for relational input.
4a data block
1-5

1st

Number of Polygons.

6-10

2nd

Number of Polygon vertices.

5a data block
The 5a data block is repeated for each polygon.
1-5

1st

Polygon ID.

6-10

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

11-15

3rd

First vertex ID.

16-20

4th

Second vertex ID.

21-25

5th

Third vertex ID.

26-30

6th

Fourth vertex ID (if zero, then polygon is a triangle).

6a data block
The 6a data block is repeated for each vertex point.
1-5

1st

Vertex ID.

6-15

2nd

Enter the X-coordinate of vertex.

16-25

3rd

Enter the Y-coordinate of vertex.

26-35

4th

Enter the Z-coordinate of vertex.

Number of polygons.

4b data block
1-5

1st

285 SURFACES
Define Geometrical Surfaces

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

5b data block
The 5b data block is repeated for each polygon.
1-5

1st

Polygon ID.

6-10

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Enter point identifier for first vertex of polygon.

16-20

4th

Enter point identifier for second vertex of polygon.

21-25

5th

Enter point identifier for third vertex of polygon.

26-30

6th

Enter point identifier for fourth vertex of polygon.


If zero, this polygon is a triangle.

STRING 286
Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation

STRING

Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the
TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

Description
This option allows the user to associates a number of curves together, in a fixed order so that a continuous
arc length may be created. This arc length could be used as an independent variable in the TABLE option.
Note that the curves themselves do not need to match coordinates at their endpoints. The STRING option
indicates that they are topologically continuous.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word STRING.

Enter the number of strings.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated for each string.


3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter the string ID.

Enter a list of curves in the string. List must be in correct order.

4th data block


1-80

1st

List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.


As an example; given three parts with six curves, the string option could be used.

287 STRING
Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation

String
2,
1,
1,3,5,
2,
2,4,6,
For the outer surface (string number 1), the cap has a radius r = 1.0, so for points along curve 1, the
arc length goes from 0. to 1.5708, along curve 3 from 1.5708 to 2.5708, and along curve 5 from 2.5708
to 3.0707.

ATTACH NODE 288


Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces

ATTACH NODE

Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces

Description
This option allows you to attach nodes to a point, curve, or surface. This option is used for ADAPTIVE
meshing and/or application of boundary conditions. When used in conjunction with adaptive mesh
analysis, if two points on an edge of an element are attached to a curve or surface, any new points created
by the adaptive procedure are placed on the curve. This improves the geometric modeling.
Note:

In the case of Updated Lagrange or if no surface is defined, the new nodes are placed
midway between the previous nodes.

When used with boundary conditions if a nodal load (POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc.) is applied to a
point/curve/surface, the nodes attached to this point/curve/surface will all receive this same load.
If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a
point/curve/surface, the nodes attached to this point/curve/surface will be constrained to satisfy
this condition.
To utilize this option for the application of boundary conditions, the table driven boundary condition
input must be used. See the TABLE parameter on how to activate this input option.
Note that nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of the
nodes attached to the curve have local systems, the user may need to exercise caution.
A node can be attached to as many as three surfaces; any additional surfaces are ignored.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words ATTACH NODE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of data sets.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number to read data, defaults to input.

Repeat the third and possibly the fourth data block as often as necessary. You can enter a point ID, curve
ID, or a surface ID on the 3rd data block.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter the node number if a zero is entered, the 4th data block will be used.

6-10

2nd

Enter a point ID.

289 ATTACH NODE


Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

11-15

3rd

Enter a curve ID.

16-20

4th

Enter a surface ID.

4th data block


Enter a list of nodes which are attached to this curve or surface.

ATTACH EDGE 290


Define the Element Edges which are attached to Curves

ATTACH EDGE

Define the Element Edges which are attached to Curves

Description
This option allows you to attach an element edge to a curve. This option is used in conjunction with the
CURVES option.
To utilize this option, the table driven boundary condition input must be used. See the TABLE parameter
on how to activate this input option.
When used with boundary conditions if a nodal load (POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc.) is applied to a
curve, the nodes which define the edge that are attached to the curve will all receive this same load.
If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a curve, the
nodes which define the edges that are attached to the curve will be constrained to satisfy this condition.
When a distributed load (DIST LOADS, DIST FLUXES, etc.) is applied to a curve, the distributed load
will be applied to the element edges attached the curve.
Note:

Nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of
the nodes which define edges that are attached to the curve have local systems, the user
may need to exercise caution.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words ATTACH EDGE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of data sets.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number to read data, defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 0, if face given using Marc convention.


Enter 1, if face given using Marc Mentat convention.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter curve identifier.

Enter a list of element: edge pairs which are attached to this curve.

4th data block


1-80

1st

291 ATTACH FACE


Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces

ATTACH FACE

Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces

Description
This option allows you to attach an element face to a surface. This option is used in conjunction with the
SURFACES option.
To utilize this option, the table driven boundary condition input must be used. See the TABLE parameter
on how to activate this input option.
When used with boundary conditions if a nodal load (POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc.) is applied to a
surface, the nodes which define the faces that are attached to the surface will all receive this same load.
If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a surface,
the nodes which define the faces that are attached to the surface will be constrained to satisfy
this condition.
When a distributed load (DIST LOADS, DIST FLUXES, etc.) is applied to a surface, the distributed load
will be applied to the element faces attached the surface.
Note that nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of
the nodes which define faces that are attached to the surface have local systems, the user may need to
exercise caution.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words ATTACH FACE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of data sets.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number to read data, defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 0, if face given using Marc convention.


Enter 1, if face given using Marc Mentat convention.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter surface identifier.

Enter a list of element: face pairs which are attached to this surface.

4th data block


1-80

1st

GEOMETRY 292
Specify Geometrical Data

GEOMETRY

Specify Geometrical Data

Description
The element geometry is specified in distinct sets. The information required varies from one element type
to another. As a rule, the thickness of shell elements is given in the first defined variable (EGEOM1). The
geometry for a particular element can be defined repeatedly and only the last data is used. This feature is
designed for local variations of geometric data.
The GEOMETRY option is unnecessary if the element description does not require either EGEOM1,
EGEOM2, or EGEOM3. (See Marc Volume B: Element Library).
Notes:

The NODAL THICKNESS model definition option can also be used for the input of
beam/shell thickness.
For beam elements, the eighth data variable (EGEOM8) is used to indicate the use of offsets,
pin codes, and coordinate system to define local x-axis. Activating this flag requires the
input of additional data blocks (4 and/or 5a).
For shell elements, the eighth data variable (EGEOM8) is used to indicate shell offsets.
Activating this flag requires the input of the 5b data block.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-8

1st

Enter the word GEOMETRY.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of distinct sets of element geometries to be input (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of geometry defaults to input.

3rd data block


Element geometries. The 3rd through 6th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.
1-10

1st

EGEOM1

11-20

2nd

EGEOM2

21-30

3rd

EGEOM3

31-40

4th

EGEOM4

41-50

5th

EGEOM5

51-60

6th

EGEOM6

61-70

7th

EGEOM7

293 GEOMETRY
Specify Geometrical Data

Format
Fixed
71-80

Free
8th

Data
Entry Entry
F

EGEOM8
For beam and shells, EGEOM8 is the negative of the sum of three numbers
= -(ioffset + iorien + ipin)
ioffset

0 no offsets.
1 offsets with beams; include the 5a data block.
2 offsets with shells; include the 5b data block.

iorien

0 conventional definition of local beam orientation,


beam axis given in 4th through 6th field in global
system.
10 the local beam orientation is given with respect to the
coordinate system of the first beam node.

ipin

0 no pin codes are used.


100 pin codes are used; include the 4th data block.

Notes:

iorien and ipin are only valid for beam elements.

See library element descriptions in Quick Reference of Marc Volume B:


Element Library for the meaning of EGEOM1, etc. for each element type.
4th data block
Necessary only if ipin = 100
1-5

1st

Enter the pin code associated with the first node of the beam.

6-10

2nd

Enter the pin code associated with the second node of the beam.
The degrees of freedom are defined in the elements coordinate system and
the pin flags are applied at the offset ends of the beam.
The pin code is a packed integer of up to five unique integers 1 through 6
with no embedded blanks.

5a data block
Necessary only if ioffset = 1
1-10

1st

X component of offset vector at beam node 1

11-20

2nd

Y component of offset vector at beam node 1

21-30

3rd

Z component of offset vector at beam node 1

31-40

4th

X component of offset vector at beam node 2

41-50

5th

Y component of offset vector at beam node 2

51-60

6th

Z component of offset vector at beam node 2

GEOMETRY 294
Specify Geometrical Data

Format
Fixed
61-65

66-70

71-75

Free
7th

8th

9th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Interpolation flag for higher-order beams


0

no interpolation of offset vector for midside node (Offset


vector at midside node set to 0.).

linear interpolation of offset vector for midside node

Coordinate system flag for offset vector at beam node 1


0

vector in global coordinate system.

vector in element coordinate system.

vector along associated shell normal at node.

vector in local coordinate system at node 1.

Coordinate system flag for offset vector at beam node 2


0

vector in global coordinate system

vector in element coordinate system.

vector along associated shell normal at node.

vector in local coordinate system at node 2.

5b data block
Necessary only if ioffset = 2
1-10

1st

Offset magnitude at corner node 1

11-20

2nd

Offset magnitude at corner node 2

21-30

3rd

Offset magnitude at corner node 3

31-40

4th

Offset magnitude at corner node 4

41-45

5th

Interpolation flag for higher-order shells

46-50

6th

no interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes.

linear interpolation of offset for mid-side nodes

Constant Offset flag


0

offset magnitude is variable. Four data fields are used to


specify offset magnitudes at corner nodes.

offset magnitude is constant. First data field is used to specify


offset magnitudes at corner nodes.

6th data block


Enter a list of elements to which the above geometry is applied.

295 GEOMETRY
Specify Geometrical Data

Notes:

For elements 7, 10, 11, and 19, enter 1 in the EGEOM2 field to activate the constant dilatation
option. This improves the behavior of the element for nearly incompressible analysis. See
Marc Volume B: Element Library for further details.
For elements 3, 7, and 11, enter 1 in the EGEOM3 field to activate the assumed strain
formulation. This improves the element bending behavior. This is an alternative to the
ASSUMED STRAIN parameter.
For elements 109 and 110, the penalty factor used to add the constraint for the vector
potential (Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information) to the set of equations for
magnetostatic calculations can be set in the EGEOM2 field.
In 3-D magnetostatic analyses, a penalty factor can be set which controls an extra
constraint in the vector potential formulation (Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information). Use EGEOM7 for linear elements (109, 110, 181, and 204) and EGEOM8 for
quadratic elements (182, 205, and 206).
For element 185, enter a value greater than 0 and less than 1 in the EGEOM5 field to scale
down the transverse shear modulus for homogenous material (a common value is 5/6).
Beam offset capability is possible for elements 5, 14, 25, 36, 45, 52, 65, 76, 77, 78, 79, 98.
Enter -1 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4a data block. See Marc
Volume B: Element Library for further details.
The components of the local x-axis for beam elements are entered in the EGEOM4-EGEOM6
fields. These components can be entered in the global Cartesian coordinate system
(default) or in a local coordinate system. In the latter case, the local coordinate system used
to define the beam x-axis is flagged through the EGEOM8 field and is taken to be the
coordinate system defined at the first nodal point of the beam element using the
TRANSFORMATION, CYLINDRICAL, or COORD SYSTEM options. Enter -10 or -11 in the
EGEOM8 field to indicate that the fields EGEOM4-EGEOM6 are in the local coordinate system.
If EGEOM8 is -11, it further indicates that the beam elements are offset and that the nodal
offset vectors are provided via the 4a data block.
Shell offset capability is possible for elements 1, 22, 50, 75, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 138, 139,
140. Enter -2 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4b data block. See Marc
Volume B: Element Library for further details.

NODAL THICKNESS 296


Define Nodal Thickness

NODAL THICKNESS

Define Nodal Thickness

Description
This option allows you to specify beam or shell thicknesses on a nodal basis. Interpolation to the element
integration points is automatically taken care of using the element displacement shape functions as
discussed for each element in Marc Volume B: Element Library.
Notes:

If you specify element thicknesses for an element using the GEOMETRY model definition
option, that data is used instead of the NODAL THICKNESS data input here. Also note that
for composite elements, if you give the actual layer thicknesses, the sum of these layer
thicknesses overrides both GEOMETRY data and NODAL THICKNESS data. If you input
percentages of total thickness in the COMPOSITE data, then GEOMETRY data (or, if no
GEOMETRY, then NODAL THICKNESS data from this option) is used.
Since the NODAL THICKNESS option allows input of only one thickness per node,
thickness discontinuities must be input using GEOMETRY.
See Marc Volume B: Element Library for elements which use nodal thicknesses.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NODAL THICKNESS.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of data sets used to input nodal thickness values. The UTHICK
user subroutine can be used for modifying NODAL THICKNESS values.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input of nodal thicknesses. Defaults to


input deck.

Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-10

1st

Enter nodal thickness value

4th data block


Enter a list of nodes associated with the nodal thickness given above.

297 ACTUATOR
Define the Length of the Actuator Link

ACTUATOR

Define the Length of the Actuator Link

Description
This option can be used in conjunction with the truss element type 9 to simulate an actuator. This is often
used in mechanism analyses to allow the prescription of the relative distance between two points. This
option should be used with the LARGE DISP parameter whenever large rotations of the actuator or large
displacements are anticipated.
The original length of the actuator is given in the fourth field of the GEOMETRY option. The actuator is
treated as an elastic link.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word ACTUATOR.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of actuators (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of actuator data.


Defaults to input.

3rd data block


Repeat for each actuator to be modified.
1-5

1st

Enter the element number

6-15

2nd

Enter the new length of the actuator.

16-20

3rd

Enter the table ID for the length of the actuator.

TRANSFORMATION 298
Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation

TRANSFORMATION

Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation

Description
This option defines nodal coordinates for calculation of a direction cosine matrix, which is then used for
transforming the global degrees of freedom of a specified node to a new local coordinate system.
This block can be used to set up local coordinate systems at a number of flagged nodes, for application
of boundary conditions in a transformed system, or for printout purposes. Five points should be noted:
1. The displacements and loads or reactions are output in the transformed system at such nodes.
2. The transformation is done on all Cartesian displacements. Thus, for the shell elements, the
derivative degrees of freedom become the derivative of the transformed displacements with
respect to the original surface coordinate system.
3. Transformations are assumed to be orthogonal.
4. All kinematic conditions such as boundary conditions, initial displacements, initial velocity and
ties at that node must be input in the transformed system.
5. All concentrated nodal loads must be applied in the transformed system.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-14

1st

Enter the word TRANSFORMATION.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of distinct sets of transformations data to be entered (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of transformation data, defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to suppress printout of transformation data.

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

26-35

4th

Node number. Enter 0 to read a list of nodes. See 4th data block.
Global coordinates of a first point A such that the vector from this point
to the node is direction 1 of the local coordinate system. (See Figure 3-1a.)

299 TRANSFORMATION
Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

36-45

5th

46-55

6th

56-66

7th

Global coordinates of a second point, such that this point, the first point,
and the node define the 1-2 plane of the local coordinate system.
Direction 2 of the local coordinate system will be constructed
perpendicular to direction 1 such that this second point has a positive 2
coordinate in the local 1-2 plane.
See Figure 3-1b Three-dimensional Analysis). Direction 3 of the
local coordinate system is given by a cross product of direction 1 with
direction 2.

4th data block


Include only if the first field in the 3rd data block is 0.
Enter a list of nodes for which the above transformation is applied.
Note that for elements in a plane (for example,; 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 15,
16, 17, 19, etc.) only the first two coordinates of the first point (cols. 6-15
and 16-25) need be supplied.
See Figure 3-1.

TRANSFORMATION 300
Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation

TRANSFORMATION
1,

Local 1

Local 2

N,xA,yA,xB,yB
Point B

Node N

Point A
X
(a) Two-dimensional Analysis
Plane defined by Node N,
Point A, and Point B

TRANSFORMATION
1,
N,xA,yA,zA,xB,yB,zB

Point B
Local 2
Local 1
Node N
Y
Local 3 (= Local 1 x Local 2)
Point A

X
(b) Three-dimensional Analysis

Figure 3-1

Transformation Option

301 COORD SYSTEM


Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

COORD SYSTEM

Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and


Degrees of Freedom

Description
This option allows you to specify that the coordinates of a node are with respect to a local coordinate
system. This is consistent with the CP identification number on the MD Nastran GRID Bulk Data Entry.
This option also allows you to specify the nodal coordinate system of the degrees of freedom. This is
consistent with the CD identification number on the MD Nastran GRID Bulk Data Entry. The coordinate
systems defined here are similar to the MD Nastran CORD1R, CORD1C, CORD1S, CORD2R, CORD2C,
and CORD2S options. Note that the data entered here should not be changed upon restart. Similar to the
use of the TRANSFORMATION option, the following points should be noted:
1. The displacements and loads or reactions are output in the transformed system at such nodes.
2. The transformation is done on all Cartesian displacements. Thus, for the shell elements, the
derivative degrees of freedom become the derivative of the transformed displacements with
respect to the original surface coordinate system.
3. All kinematic conditions such as fixed displacement, initial displacements, initial velocity and ties
at that node must be input in the transformed system.
4. All concentrated nodal loads must be applied in the transformed system.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-12

1st

Enter the words COORD SYSTEM.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of coordinate systems (not required).

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number of read data; defaults to input file.

Enter coordinate system type:

3rd data block


1-6

1st

CORD1C
CORD1R
CORD1S
CORD2C
CORD2R
CORD2S

COORD SYSTEM 302


Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

Format
Fixed
11-15

Free
2nd

Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter 1 if coordinates defined are with respect to the coordinate system.


Enter 0 if coordinate data is not transformed based on this
coordinate system.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 if degrees of freedom are to be transformed based upon this


coordinate system.
Enter 0 if degrees of freedom are not to be transformed.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 if transformation is to be updated based upon the deformation of


nodes G1A, G2A, and G3A for coordinate systems CORD1C, CORD1R,
and CORD1S.
This option should only be used with table-driven boundary conditions.

Repeat 4a and 7th data block for each CORD1:coordinate system.


4a data block
Used if coordinate system type is CORD1C, CORD1R, or CORD1S; see Remarks.
1-5

1st

Enter coordinate system identification number; must be unique. Same as


MD Nastran CIDA.

6-10

2nd

Enter first node number ID; same as MD Nastran G1A.

11-15

3rd

Enter second node number ID; same as MD Nastran G2A.

16-20

4th

Enter third node number ID; same as MD Nastran G3A.

Repeat 4b, 5th, 6th, and 7th data block for each CORD2:coordinate system
4b data block
Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S; see Remarks.
1-5

1st

Enter coordinate system identification number; must be unique. Same as


MD Nastran CID.

6-10

2nd

Enter the coordinate system that points given below are with respect to.
Default is the global coordinate system. This is the same as MD
Nastran RID.

5th data block


Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S.
1-10

1st

First coordinate of point A.

11-20

2nd

Second coordinate of point A.

21-30

3rd

Third coordinate of point A.

31-40

4th

First coordinate of point B.

41-50

5th

Second coordinate of point B.

51-60

6th

Third coordinate of point B.

303 COORD SYSTEM


Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

Format
Fixed

Data
Entry Entry

Free

6th data block


Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S.
1-10

1st

First coordinate of point C.

11-20

2nd

Second coordinate of point C.

21-30

3rd

Third coordinate of point C.

7th data block


Enter a list of node numbers to which this system is to be applied.
Remarks
CORD1C
z

uz

G2

G3

u
P

G1

ur
R

Figure 3-2

CORDIC Definition

1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the coordinate
system being defined. The first point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis, and the third lies
in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not
coincident.
2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-2) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , Z) where
is measured in degrees.
3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are dependent on the location of P as shown above
by u r u u z .
4. It is recommended that points on the z-axis only have their z-displacement directions defined in
this coordinate system.

COORD SYSTEM 304


Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

CORD1R
z

uz
G2

P
G3

uy
G1

ux

y
X

Figure 3-3

CORD1R Definition

1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the coordinate
system being defined. The first point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis, and the third lies
in the x-z plane. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not coincident.
2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-3) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).
3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by u x u u u z .
CORD1S
z

G2

ur
P

G3
G1

x
y

Figure 3-4

CORD1S Definition

1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with a definition that does not involve the coordinate
system being defined. The first point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis, and the third lies
in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not
coincident.
2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-4) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , ) where
and are measured in degrees.

305 COORD SYSTEM


Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are dependent on the location of P as shown above
by u r u u .
4. It is recommended that points on the z-axis only have their z-displacement directions defined in
this coordinate system.
CORD2C
z

uz

u
P
C
A

ur

Figure 3-5

CORD2C Definition

1. The three points [(A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), (C1, C2, C3)] must be unique and noncolinear.
Noncolinearity is checked by the geometry processor. The first point defines the origin. The
second point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin.
The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
2. If RID is zero or blank, the basic coordinate system is used.
3. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-5) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , Z), where
is measured in degrees.
4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are dependent on the location of P as shown above
by u r u u z .
5. It is recommended that points on the z-axis only have their z-displacement directions defined in
this coordinate system.

COORD SYSTEM 306


Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

CORD2R
z
uz

uy

C
A

ux

y
X

Figure 3-6

CORD2R Definition

1. The three points [(A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), (C1, C2, C3)] must be unique and noncolinear.
Noncolinearity is checked by the geometry processor. The first point defines the origin. The
second defines the direction of the z-axis. The third point defines a vector which, with the z-axis,
defines the x-z plane. The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
2. If RID is zero or blank, the basic coordinate system is used.
3. The location of a grid point (P in the Figure 3-6) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).
4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown by u x u y u z .
CORD2S
z
B

ur

C
A

x
y

Figure 3-7

CORD2S Definition

1. The three points [(A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), (C1, C2, C3)] must be unique and noncolinear.
Noncolinearity is checked by the geometry processor. The first point defines the origin. The
second point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin.
The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.
2. If RID is zero or blank, the basic coordinate system is used.

307 COORD SYSTEM


Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

3. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-7) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , ), where
and are measured in degrees.
4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by u r u u .
5. It is recommended that points on the z-axis not have their displacement directions defined in this
coordinate system.

SHELL TRANSFORMATION 308


Define Shell Transformation

SHELL TRANSFORMATION

Define Shell Transformation

Description
This option allows you to transform the global degrees of freedom of (doubly curved) shells or beams to
local degrees of freedom. It facilitates the input of boundary conditions, point loads and bending
moments. A more detailed description of this capability is given in Marc Volume A: User Information.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-20

1st

Enter the words SHELL TRANSFORMATION.

Number of data sets to be input (optional).

Unit number from which input is to be read (defaults to input).

2nd data block


1-5

1st

6-10

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

Transformation type (see Marc Volume A: User Information).


Transformation type 1 is used for beam elements 15, 16, and 17.
Transformation types 2 to 4 are used for shell elements 4, 8 and 24.

6-15

2nd

First component of t vector in surface1 - 2 coordinate system. Only


needed for transformation types 2 and 4.

16-25

3rd

Second component of t vector in surface1 - 2 coordinate system. Only


needed for transformation types 2 and 4.

4th data block


Enter a list of nodes to which the above displacements are applied.

309 UTRANFORM
Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS

UTRANFORM

Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS

Description
This option allows you to transfer the global degrees of freedom to local degrees of freedom. This is done
through the UTRANS user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
Note:

This option should not be used on boundary nodes which can come into contact with rigid
surfaces in a contact analysis.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-9

1st

Enter the word UTRANFORM.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of data sets to be input.

6-10

2nd

Unit number from which input is to be read.


Defaults to input.

The 3rd data block is entered once for each data set.
3rd data block
Enter list of node numbers to which user transformations are applied.

CYCLIC SYMMETRY 310


Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure

CYCLIC SYMMETRY

Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure

Description
This option is used to define data for a structure possessing cyclic symmetry, which means that the
geometry and the loading vary periodically around a symmetry axis. This type of structure can be
effectively analyzed by modeling only one section and applying the proper multipoint constraint
equations to account for the cyclic symmetry. By defining the symmetry axis and the sector angle, the
Marc program sets up the constraint equations automatically. Additionally, the rigid body rotation around
the symmetry axis can be automatically suppressed.
Note:

Cyclic Symmetry is:


a. valid for only the continuum elements. However, the presence of beams and shells is
allowed, but there is no connection of shells to shells, so the shell part can, for example,
be a turbine blade and the volume part can be a turbine rotor. The blade is connected
to the rotor and if there are 20 blades, 1/20 of the rotor is modeled and one complete
blade.
b. valid for nonlinear static analysis including remeshing as well as coupled analysis.
c. invalid for pure heat transfer.
d. valid for all analysis involving contact. This option can be combined with the
CONTACT option. In this case, both sides of the cyclic symmetry sectors need to
belong to the same contact body.
Note:

If used with contact and the element is not in a contact body, it is not
detected as being on a symmetry surface.

e. valid also for: eigenvalue analysis such as buckling or modal analysis, harmonic
analysis, and transient dynamic analysis. However, there are restrictions in the case of
modal analysis which are described in more detail in Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information, Chapter 9, Cyclic Symmetry.
f. valid only if used in a non-contact analysis with a mixture of element types. If a
combination of beam, shell, linear continuum and/or quadratic continuum elements is
present and contact is not used in the model, exit 61 is issued. To overcome this
problem, two different contact bodies must be defined: one consisting of only the
linear continuum elements and one consisting of only the quadratic continuum
elements. Shell and/or beam elements do not have to be a part of any contact body (see
a. above). Only the elements belonging to the cyclically symmetric sector need to be
in a contact body. In order to prevent unwanted contact items (CPU due to unneeded
contact search, unwanted contacting nodes, etc.), turn off the normal Marc contact
calculations by defining an empty contact table. In this case, both sides of every cyclic
symmetry sector should belong to the same body, so that it is impossible to model one
side with linear continuum elements and the other side of the sector with quadratic
continuum elements.

311 CYCLIC SYMMETRY


Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure

Note (cont.): g. When using CYCLIC SYMMETRY in 3-D, tetrahedral elements must be used if the
body is to be remeshed.
h. If used with the SPLINE option, the ' continuity is not applied between across the
symmetry planes.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words CYCLIC SYMMETRY.

2nd data block


1-10

1st

First component of the direction cosine of symmetry axis.

11-20

2nd

Second component of the direction cosine of symmetry axis.

21-30

3rd

Third component of the direction cosine of symmetry axis.

3rd data block


1-10

1st

X-coordinate of point on symmetry axis.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of point on symmetry axis.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of point on symmetry axis.

4th data block


1-10

1st

Cyclic angle (in degrees).

11-20

2nd

Cyclic Symmetry Tolerance. Default is 0.5 times of the minimum


element size.

Enter:

5th data block


1-5

1st

-1 To automatically suppress rigid body mode.


This automatic suppression is applied to a single node only. So if
there are multiple unconnected groups of elements having a rigid
body rotation around the axis of symmetry, it is the users
responsibility to define a sufficient number of kinematic boundary
conditions.
0 To have no suppression.
>0 To suppress at node number given.

CYCLIC SYMMETRY 312


Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure

Format
Fixed
6-10

Free
2nd

Data
Entry Entry
I

Linearization flag; to be used if a cyclic symmetric structure consists of


quadratic elements:
1 The outer boundary of the structure is described based on the
corner nodes only. Multipoint constraints due to cyclic symmetry
are not assigned to midside nodes. Instead, they are linearly tied
to the corresponding corner nodes.
-1 The outer boundary of the structure is described using a quadratic
field. Due to cyclic symmetry, full quadratic multipoint
constraints are set up; they are assigned both to corner and
midside nodes.
The default value is 1.

11-15

3rd

Procedure used to impose the cyclic symmetry constraints:


0 Multipoint constraint equations (default).
1 Augmented Lagrangians.

16-20

4th

Augmentation method (used only if the 3rd field of this data block is 1):
0 No augmentation (default).
1 Augmentation procedure based on a constant penetration field for
linear elements and a bi-linear field for quadratic elements.
2 Augmentation procedure based on a constant penetration field.
3 Augmentation procedure based on a bi-linear penetration field.

21-30

5th

Penalty factor (only used if the 3rd field of this data block is 1).

31-40

6th

Penetration distance beyond which the augmentation procedure is applied


(only used if the 3rd field of this data block is 1).

313 TYING
Define Tying Constraints

TYING

Define Tying Constraints

Description
This option is used to define homogeneous constraints. Constraints are defined by specifying a tied node
and one or more associated retained nodes. Further details are provided in Marc Volume A: User
Information. Special types of tying can be obtained using the UFORMSN user subroutine (see Marc
Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).
A rigid link for either small deformation or large deformation can be implemented by using tying type
80 or using RBE2.
To obtain tying constraint based on updated current coordinates, add 1000 to tying type code. For tying
type associated with user derived tying (UFORMSN), subtract 1000 from tying type code.
Tying type 100 may be used to constrain all degrees of freedom of one node to another node. This may
be used for heat transfer shells as well.
In a coupled thermal-mechanical analysis during the heat transfer subincrements, tying type 1 is used for
all tying types except 31, 32, 33, 34, and 69.
It is possible to have a tying constraint equation to be active for only selective passes in a
multiphysics analysis.
A tying constraint always consists of a tied node (removed from the system) and one or more retained
nodes (which remain in the system). Each tying constraint is specified by a series of two data blocks (data
blocks 3 and 3a).
If a sequence of similar tying types must be specified, a list of nodes for tied nodes (3b) and
corresponding retained nodes (3c - 3d) must be given.
If the constraint equations utilize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK
parameter should be invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-5

1st

Enter the word TYING.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of constraint equations to be read (optional).

6-10

2nd

Unit number for input of tying data. Defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to suppress printout of tying data.

TYING 314
Define Tying Constraints

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3rd data block


Data blocks 3 and 3a or 3 and 3b, 3c, 3d, are given once for each constraint equation set.
1-5

1st

Enter the code for tying type. See Table 3-2 and Marc Volume A: User
Information for definition of default types and user-defined routines.

6-10

2nd

Enter 0 to indicate a list of nodes to be tied will be defined in data block


3b.
Enter a node number to indicate an individual node to be tied.

11-15

3rd

Number of retained nodes for this tying type. If a standard Marc tying type
is used this does not need to be entered.

16-20

4th

Enter a 0 if tying type is available for all passes in multiphysics analysis.


Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be active
using:
1 stress pass.
2 heat pass.
4 electrical pass in Joule analysis.
5 diffusion pass.
6 electrostatic pass
7 - Magnetostatic pass
8 - Electromagnetic pass
For example, 24 means tie is active only in heat and electrical pass, but is
not active in structural pass.

3a data block
If the number of a node is entered in the second field of the 3rd data block (above), use data block 3a
to list the retained nodes.
1-80

1st

Sequence of retained nodes for constraint in (16I5) format, etc.

3b data block
If no tied node is entered in the second field of the 3rd data block (that is, 0 is entered), use data blocks
3b, 3c, and 3d to enter a list of nodes to be tied.
Enter an unsorted list of nodes to be tied.
3c data block
Enter an unsorted list of nodes which will be the first retained nodes
associated with tied nodes given in data block 3b.

315 TYING
Define Tying Constraints

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3d data block
Same as 3c except second retained nodes, etc.
Note:

Table 3-2

List verbs EXCEPT, INTERSECT and sorted node sets are illegal
in these lists.

Summary of Standard Tying Types

Tying
Code

Number of
Retained Nodes

Purpose

I < NDEG

Tie the Ith degree of freedom


at the tied node to the Ith
degree of freedom at the
retained node

100

Tie all degrees of freedom at


the tied node to the
corresponding degrees of
freedom at the retained node

23

Tie axisymmetric solid node


to axisymmetric-shell
(element
type 1) node

15 Number of retained
nodes is 1 less than
the number of shell
nodes in the z-r plane
of the section

Remarks

Both tied and retained nodes


must be transformed to local
system. TRANSFORMATION
option must be invoked. (See
Marc Volume A: User
Information, Table 9-17)

Special tying types for pipe


bend element 17 to remove
rigid body modes (see
Volume B: Element Library)

16 Number of shell nodes Special tying types for pipe


in the z-r plane of the bend element 17 to remove
section
rigid body modes (see
Volume B: Element Library)
17

Special tying types for pipe


bend element 17 to couple
bend section into pipe line
(see Volume B: Element
Library)

Caution: TRANSFORMATION MUST NOT BE USED AT NODES INVOLVED IN TYING


TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

TYING 316
Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Summary of Standard Tying Types (continued)

Tying
Code

Number of
Retained Nodes
18

Purpose

Remarks

Joining together the


boundaries of intersecting
shell, element type 4, 8, or 24.
Fully moment carrying joint.

Tied node is also second


retained node. Neither node can
be transformed (see Marc
Volume A: User Information,
Table 9-15)

28

Joining intersecting shells,


element type 4, 8, or 24.
Pinned joint.

Tied node is also second


retained node (see Marc Volume
A: User Information,
Table 9-15)

19

Use beam element 13 as a


stiffener on shell elements 4
or 8. Tied node is beam node:
First retained node
is shell node, second is beam
node again. Beam node
should be on, or close to, the
normal to the shell at the shell
node.

20

Create an extra node in a shell Always use after tying type 21.
type 8 element tied to the
interpolation function of the
shell. Use in conjunction with
tying type 21 to tie a beam
element 13 or a stiffener
across a shell element.

21

Same as type 19, but tying


beam to an interpolated shell
node not as a vertex of an
element element type 8
only. Must be followed by
type 20 to tie the interpolated
shell node into the shell
mesh.

Must be followed by a tying


type 20.

Caution: TRANSFORMATION MUST NOT BE USED AT NODES INVOLVED IN TYING


TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

317 TYING
Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Summary of Standard Tying Types (continued)

Tying
Code

Number of
Retained Nodes

Purpose

Remarks

24

Join intersecting shells or


beams, element type 15-17.

Tied node is also second


retained node. Neither node can
be transformed. Tying is
necessary only when there is a
large angle between the two
plates.

25

Join solid mesh to shell or


beam (type 15 or 16).

Tied node is also second


retained node.

26

Join solid mesh to


axisymmetric shell (type 1 or
89).

Similar to 23, but no


transformation needed. Tied
node is also second to retained
node.

27

Join Fourier solid to Fourier


shell (type 90).

Tied node is also second


retained node.

31

Refine mesh of first order


(linear displacement)
elements in 2-D.

Tie interior nodes on refined


side to corner nodes on coarse
side.

32

Refine mesh of second order


(quadratic displacement)
elements in 2-D.

Tie interior nodes on refined


side to the edge of an element
on the coarse side.

33

Refine mesh of 8-node bricks Tie interior node on the refined


side to the 4 corner nodes of an
element face on the coarse side.
The retained nodes must be
entered in the same or opposite
order as they occur in the
element connectivity.

34

Refine mesh of 20-node


bricks

Tie interior nodes on refined


side to the 8 (4 corner, 4
midside) nodes of an element
on the coarse side. The retained
nodes must be entered in the
same or opposite order as they
occur in the
element connectivity.

Caution: TRANSFORMATION MUST NOT BE USED AT NODES INVOLVED IN TYING


TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

TYING 318
Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Summary of Standard Tying Types (continued)

Tying
Code

Number of
Retained Nodes
44 2 is 2-D or
axisymmetric
lower-order element
edge

Purpose
Rigidly tie a node with
displacements and rotations
to a surface patch. This is
internally used for CWELD
and CFAST option.

Remarks
The number of retained nodes
is required. This tying type
fully supports large
deformation/rotations. No
transformations are required.

3 is 2-D or
axisymmetric
higher-order
element edge
3 if 3-D lower-order
triangular face
4 if 3-D lower-order
quadrilateral face
6 if 3-D higher-order
triangular face
8 if 3-D higher-order
quadrilateral face
52

Pin joint for beam types 14,


25, or 52.

53

Fully moment carrying joint


for beam types 14, 25, or 52.

13

Joining two elements type 13 Tied node is also the second


under an arbitrary angle.
retained node.
Fully moment carrying joint.

>100

Generate several tyings


of type
< NDEG.

Tying code is the first degree of


freedom multiplied by 100
added to the last degree of
freedom; that is, 209 means tie
2nd to 9th d.o.f. at tied node to
resp. 2nd and 9th degrees of
freedom at retained node.

Caution: TRANSFORMATION MUST NOT BE USED AT NODES INVOLVED IN TYING


TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

319 TYING
Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Summary of Standard Tying Types (continued)

Tying
Code

Number of
Retained Nodes

Purpose

Remarks

69

Joint for creating gaps or


overlaps between two parts
of a model either by
prescribing the total force on
the nodes on either side of the
gap or overlap or by
prescribing the size of the gap
or overlap.

The second retained node is the


control node of the tying. The
force on this node is equal to the
total force on the tied nodes of
all tyings that share this control
node. The displacement of the
node is equal to size of the gap
or overlap between the parts. In
non-mechanical passes, the
tying reduces to tying type 100
between the tied and the first
retained node.

80

Form a rigid link between


tied node and retained node.
This works for either small or
large deformation. If a rigid
region is to be modeled, use
multiple ties of type 80, with
the tied node of each link
being a different node, and
use the same common node
as the retained node.

The second retained node is an


extra node which contains the
rigid body rotation. Therefore,
it may not be connected to any
elements in a model.

85

Tying of temperatures
between shell and solid
elements in heat transfer
analysis
(linear/quadratic/new
composite temperature
distribution in the thickness
direction of shell elements).

Tied node is the shell node and


two retained nodes are nodes of
the solid element. Order of the
retained nodes follows the shell
node degrees of freedom. The
assumption here is that the shell
and brick have the
same thickness.

Caution: TRANSFORMATION MUST NOT BE USED AT NODES INVOLVED IN TYING


TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

TYING 320
Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Summary of Standard Tying Types (continued)

Tying
Code

Number of
Retained Nodes

Purpose

Remarks

86

Tying of temperatures
between shell and solid
element in heat transfer
analysis (quadratic/new
composite temperature
distribution in the thickness
direction of shell element).

Tied node is the shell node and


three retained nodes are nodes
of the solid element. Order of
the retained nodes follows shell
node degrees of freedom. Tied
node should not have linear
temperature distribution. The
assumption here is that the shell
and brick have the
same thickness.

87

Tying of temperatures
between two shell elements
in a heat transfer analysis
(linear/quadratic/new
composite temperature
distribution).

Tied and retained nodes are


shell nodes. The tied node
should have more or equal
number of degree of freedom
than the retained node. The
assumption here is that the tied
shell and retained shell have
equal thickness.

Caution: TRANSFORMATION MUST NOT BE USED AT NODES INVOLVED IN TYING


TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

321 SERVO LINK


Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints

SERVO LINK

Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints

Description
This option uses homogeneous linear constraint capability (TYING) to input simple constraints of
the form:
ut = a1 ur1 + a2 ur2 + . . .
where ut is a degree of freedom to be constrained.
ur1, ur2 etc., are the other retained degrees of freedom in this structure.
a1, a2 etc., are constants provided in this option.
If the constraint equations utilize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK
parameter should be invoked.
For more information, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. Note that more complex
constraints can be entered via the TYING model definition set and the UFORMSN user subroutine.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words SERVO LINK.

11-15

2nd

Number of servo links to be entered below; defaults to number given on


the TIE parameter.

16-20

3rd

Enter unit number for input of servo links. Defaults to input.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 if the 4th data block is being used to define in which pass of a
multiphysics analysis the servo link should be active.

Data blocks 2, 3, and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each servo link.
2nd data block
1-5

1st

Number of retained nodes (must not exceed the value given in the TIE
parameter, fourth field).

6-10

2nd

Tied degree of freedom, at tied node.

11-15

3rd

Tied node.

16-20

4th

First retained degree of freedom at first retained node.

21-25

5th

First retained node.

SERVO LINK 322


Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

26-30

6th

Second retained degree of freedom at second retained node.

31-35

7th

Second retained node.


Etc. (Continuation data in 16I5 format).

3rd data block


One set of this data block goes with each set from data block 2.
1-10

1st

Numerical constant a1 joining tied and first retained variables.

11-20

2nd

Numerical constant a2 joining tied and second retained variables


Etc.

4th data block


Needed only if 4th entry on the 1st data block is set to 1.
1-5

1st

Enter 0 if servo link is active for all passes in multiphysics analysis


(default).
Enter a packed number indicating which passes the servo link should be
active using:
1 stress pass.
2 heat pass.
4 electrical pass in Joule analysis.
5 diffusion pass.
6 electrostatic pass.
7 - Magnetostatic pass
8 - Electromagnetic pass
For example, 24 means servo link is active only in heat and electrical pass,
but is not active in structural pass.

323 RBE2
Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element

RBE2

Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element

Description
The RBE2 option defines a rigid kinematic link between a single retained node with dependent degrees
of freedom specified at an arbitrary number of tied nodes. The distance between the tied nodes to the
retained node must be greater than zero.
To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP parameter. If the updated Lagrange
option is set, then the large rotation formulation is automatically used. If all degrees of freedom of the
tied nodes are tied, then RBE2 simulates rigid body motion. This is similar with tying 80. But RBE2 is
more general than tying 80. For example, when the rotations are not tied, then RBE2 simulates spherical
link or it can be used to simulate slider connection. The degrees of freedom of the tied nodes are
co-rotated with the rotation of the retained node.
If the constraint equations utilize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK
parameter should be invoked.
For more information, see Marc Volume A: User and Theory Information.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word RBE2.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of distinct sets of RBE2 to be input.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input of RBE2; defaults to input.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Retained (reference) node. This node has 3 degrees of freedom in 2-D


(two translations and one rotation about the global z-axis) and six degrees
of freedom in 3-D (three translations and three rotations). Note that this
may require the use of the RBE parameter.

6-10

2nd

Packed list of degrees of freedom of tied nodes to be constrained. If, for


example, the first and the third degree of freedom must be constrained,
enter 13. Put blank or zero if all translational and rotational degrees of
freedom are constrained.

11-15

3rd

Number of tied nodes.

RBE2 324
Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element

Format
Fixed
16-20

Free
4th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter a 0 if tying type is available for all passes in multiphysics analysis.


Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be
active using:
1 stress pass.
2 heat pass.
4 electrical pass in Joule analysis.
5 diffusion pass.
6 electrostatic pass.
7 - Magnetostatic pass
8 - Electromagnetic pass
For example, 24 means tie is active only in heat and electrical pass, but is
not active in structural pass.

21-25

5th

RBE2 ID; default equals 0.

4a data block
Sequence of tied nodes in (1615) format.

325 RBE3
Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element

RBE3

Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element

Description
The RBE3 option defines the motion at a reference node as the weighted average of the motion at a set
of other nodes. The distance between the reference node to the retained nodes must be greater than zero.
This option is a powerful tool to distribute applied loads in a model. Forces and moments applied to
reference nodes are distributed to a set of independent degrees of freedom based on the RBE3 geometry
and local weighting factors.
By defaults, the reference node is considered as a tied node. It is also possible to specify the subset of the
retained nodes as tied nodes. In this case, the total number of degrees of freedom specified for every tied
node must be the same as the degrees of freedom specified for the reference node. In this way, it possible
to use the reference node as tied node for other tyings. If the choice of the tied nodes is not done properly,
a singularity may occur during the internal manipulation of the tying matrix, user should modify their
input file.
To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP parameter. If the updated Lagrange
option is set, then large rotation formulation is automatically used. The degrees of freedom of the
reference node are not co-rotated.
The constrained degrees of freedom of all retained nodes on an RBE3 option must be adequate to define
its rigid body motion, otherwise, A-matrix is singular and an error message is issued. It is recommended,
that for most applications, only the translation components be used for the degrees of freedom of the
retained nodes. An exception is the case where the retained nodes are colinear. A rotation component may
then be added to one node to stabilize its associated rigid body mode.
If the constraint equations utilize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK
parameter should be invoked.
For more information, see Marc Volume A: User and Theory Information.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word RBE3.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of distinct sets of RBE3 to be input.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input of RBE3; defaults to input.

RBE3 326
Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Reference node. This node has three degrees of freedom in 2-D (two
translations and one rotation about the global z-axis) and six degrees of
freedom in 3-D (three translations and three rotations). Note that this may
require the use of the RBE parameter.

6-10

2nd

Packed list of degrees of freedom of tied node to be constrained. If (e.g.


the first and the third degree of freedom must be constrained) enter 13. Put
blank or zero if all translational and rotational degrees of freedom are
constrained.

11-15

3rd

Number of different weighting factors.

16-20

4th

Number of user-defined MSETS, maximum is eight. This indicates that a


subset of retained nodes entered on the 5th data block are also tied nodes
given on the 6th data block.

21-25

5th

Enter a 0 if tying type is available for all passes in multiphysics analysis.


Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be
active using:
1 stress pass.
2 heat pass.
4 electrical pass in Joule analysis.
5 diffusion pass.
6 electrostatic pass
7 - Magnetostatic pass
8 - Electromagnetic pass
For example, 24 means tie is active only in heat and electrical pass, but is
not active in structural pass.

4th data block


The 4th and 5th data blocks are repeated as pairs, one for each weighting factor.
1-10

1st

Weighting factor.

11-15

2nd

Packed list of degrees of freedom belonging to the weighting factor.

16-20

4th

Enter the number of tied nodes with this weighting factor. The nodes are
entered in the 5th data block.

5th data block


Sequence of retained nodes in (1615) format.

327 RBE3
Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

6th data block


Required only if 4th field of 3rd data block is nonzero. The listed tied nodes must be a subset of the
retained nodes. The total number of tied degrees of freedom must be the same as the number of degrees
of freedom specified for the reference node.
1-5

1st

The first tied node number.

6-10

2nd

Packed list of degrees of freedom belonging to the first tied node.

11-15

3rd

The second tied node number.

16-20

4th

Packed list of degrees of freedom belonging to the second tied node.

etc.

RROD 328
Rigid 2-node Constraint

RROD

Rigid 2-node Constraint

Description
This option defines a 2-noded rigid constraint that has the similar characteristics as the MD Nastran
RROD element. The constraint is applied using equation elimination like tying or servolinks. The link
must have finite length and may undergo large rotations.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word RROD.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of rigid links (not required).

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number (defaults to the standard input).

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the ID of this link.

6-10

2nd

Enter the first node ID.

11-15

3rd

Enter the second node ID.

16-20

4th

Enter component number of one and only one dependent translational


degree of freedom in the global coordinate system (MD Nastran CMA).

21-25

5th

Enter component number of one and only one dependent translational


degree of freedom in the global coordinate system (MD Nastran CMB).
Note:

Either CMA or CMB must be nonzero, but not both.

329 PIN CODE


Define Pin Code for Beam Element

PIN CODE

Define Pin Code for Beam Element

Description
The PIN CODE option is used to remove connections between the node and selected degrees-of-freedom
of the beam. The degrees of freedom are defined in the elements coordinate system and the pin codes
are applied at the offset end of the beam.
By default, a new internal node is generated for every pinned node, and constraints are setup between
these two nodes. When FEATURE, 6901 is activated, Marc condenses out the pinned degrees of freedoms
instead of creating a new node.
To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP, LARGE STRAIN, or
UPDATE parameter.
Note:

The degrees of freedom listed in the 3rd data block are with respect to an element
coordinate system defined by the beam cross section axis.

For more information, see Marc Volume A: User and Theory Information.
Format
Format
Fixe

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word PIN CODE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of distinct sets of PIN CODE to be input.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input of PIN CODE; defaults to input.

Packed list of degrees of freedom to be flagged. For example, when the


first and the third degree of freedom are to remain free (unconstrained),
enter 13.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

4th data block


List of element:node pairs. For example, 100:1 means the first node of
element ID 100. The node value must be 1 or 2. For 3-node beam
elements, only the end nodes can be flagged with pin code.

INSERT 330
Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted

INSERT
3
Model
Definiti
on
Option
s

Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted

Description
This option allows the definition of host bodies and lists of elements or nodes to be inserted in the host
bodies. The degrees of freedom of the nodes in the inserted node list or element list are automatically tied
using the corresponding degrees of freedom of the nodes in host body elements based on their
isoparametric location in the elements.
This option can be used to place reinforcing cords or rods, such as 2-D rebar membrane elements, into
solid elements.
This option can be used to apply point loads in some specific locations other than element nodes. It also
can be used to link two different meshes.
After local adaptive meshing or global meshing, the constraint equation is reformulated. In this way, one
can apply a point load in a region and it will continue to be applied in the correct location after remeshing.
If a node to be inserted is also a node of a host body element, no tying is applied to the node.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word INSERT.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of data sets to be read in (optional).

6-10

2nd

Unit numbers for input; defaults to standard input (unit 5).

Data blocks 3, 4, and 5 are given for each data set.


3rd data block
1-5

1st

INSERT data set ID.

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 if a list of elements to be inserted; default is 0 - a list of nodes to


be inserted.

11-20

3rd

Exterior tolerance. A node is considered within a host element if the


distance between the element and the node is smaller than the tolerance
times average edge length of the element, unless the node is actually
inside another host element. Default is 0.05.

21-25

4th

Enter a 0 if a list of elements defines the host body.


Enter a 1 if a list of contact bodies defines the host body.

331 INSERT
Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry

4th data block


Enter a list of elements or contact bodies which define the host body.
5th data block
If the second field of the 3rd data block is 1, enter a list of elements to
be inserted.
Otherwise, enter a list of nodes to be inserted.

SPRINGS 332
Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)

SPRINGS

Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)

Description
This data set is used to input any linear or nonlinear springs. For dynamic analysis, a dashpot capability
is offered as well. The spring can be used for mechanical, thermal, and electrical analysis. Note that for
input files that have the VERSION,10 or later parameter, two data blocks are needed to define each linear
or nonlinear spring.
The force in a linear mechanical spring/dashpot is given by:
F = K u 2 u 1 + C u 2 u 1

where K is the spring stiffness, C is the damping coefficient, u 2 is the displacement of the degree of
freedom at the second end of the spring (third and fourth fields), and u 1 is the displacement of the degree
of freedom at the first end of the spring (first and second fields).
During heat transfer or electrical analysis (regular heat transfer analysis, Joule heating analysis, or
the thermal part of a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis), the spring acts like a link. The dashpot is
not active.
During a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis, springs can act in only the stress part (only 5th field of the
2nd data block is nonzero), or can act in only the thermal part (only 8th field of the 2nd data block is
nonzero), or in both stress and thermal parts (both 5th and 8th fields of the 2nd data block are nonzero).
In the last case, care should be taken to ensure that the degrees of freedom specified are uniformly valid
for both the stress and thermal parts of the coupled run.
If the degrees of freedom are specified as zero for a mechanical run, the spring acts along the line joining
the two nodes. This line direction is updated during an incremental stress analysis only if large
displacement is flagged. If the thermal conduction or electrical conduction is specified for a true direction
spring, the associated degrees of freedom for the spring are assumed as one.
If the second node is specified as zero, the spring is assumed to be fixed to ground along the specified
degree of freedom. The displacement of the ground along the specified degree of freedom is assumed to
be zero. In the thermal part, the temperature of the ground is assumed to be zero. In the electrical part,
the voltage of the ground is assumed to be zero.
Note that for degree of freedom springs, the spring force is positive if the displacement of node 2 along
the specified degree of freedom is greater than the displacement of node 1 along the specified degree of
freedom. Note also that for degree of freedom springs, if user nodal transformations are used for one or
both nodes, the spring force is calculated based on the local transformed degree of freedom. For springs
connected to the ground, the displacement of node 2 along the appropriate degree of freedom is always
zero. For true direction springs, the spring force is positive if the spring is in tension and negative if the
spring is in compression and is independent of any nodal transformations.

333 SPRINGS
Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)

For a nonlinear spring/dashpot (mechanical, thermal or electrical analysis), the spring stiffness can be
specified in one of three ways:
a. Nonlinear Spring Force: This is defined using the TABLE parameter and TABLE model
definition option. The spring force computed from the multi-variate table is scaled by the
corresponding reference value provided in the 5th, 6th, 8th or 9th field of the 2nd data block.
The gradient of the table is internally calculated and used for the spring stiffness. To facilitate
the gradient calculation, the spring force needs to be specified as a function of: relative
displacement for mechanical springs (type 38), relative velocity for dashpots (type 22),
relative temperature for thermal links (type 12), relative voltage for electrical links (type 31).
In addition, the spring force can be optionally varied as a function of: time (type 1),
normalized time (type 2), increment number (type 3), or normalized increment number (type
4). In thermo-mechanical coupled analysis, the mechanical spring force and damping force
can also be specified as a function of the average temperature of the spring (type 12). In Jouleheating analysis, the electrical conduction can also be specified as a function of the average
temperature of the spring (type 12). If the value of any independent variable falls beyond its
minimum or maximum value in the table, the last force value associated with that independent
variable is used by default and can be linearly extrapolated by the user if desired. For more
general nonlinearities, option (c) (USPRNG) can be used independently or in conjunction
with option (a).
b. Nonlinear Spring Stiffness: This is defined using the TABLE parameter and TABLE model
definition option. The stiffness value computed from the multi-variate table is scaled by the
corresponding reference value provided in the 5th, 6th, 8th or 9th field of the 2nd data block.
The stiffness can be varied as a function of time (type 1), normalized time (type 2), increment
number (type 3), or normalized increment number (type 4). The spring stiffness can also be
varied as a function of relative displacement for mechanical springs (type 38), relative
velocity for dashpots (type 22), relative temperature for thermal links (type 12), relative
voltage for electrical links (type 31). In thermo-mechanical coupled analysis, the mechanical
spring stiffness and dashpot damping can also be specified as a function of the average
temperature of the spring (type 12). In Joule heating analysis, the electrical conduction can
also be specified as a function of the average temperature of the spring (type 12). If the value
of any independent variable falls beyond its minimum or maximum value in the table, the last
stiffness value associated with that independent variable is used by default and can be linearly
extrapolated by the user if desired. For more general nonlinearities, option (c) (USPRNG) can
be used independently or in conjunction with option (b).
c. The nonlinear spring stiffness can also be specified with the USPRNG user subroutine with
the general relation:
F = F u 2 u 1 u 2 u 1

See Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for details.

SPRINGS 334
Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-7

1st

Enter the word SPRINGS.

2nd data block


Enter one data block per spring/dashpot.
1-5

1st

Node to which first end of spring/dashpot will be attached.

6-10

2nd

Degree of freedom at above node to which spring/dashpot will


be attached.
Enter 0 for a spring/dashpot acting in the direction from the first to the
second node (this also requires a 0 on the 4th field).

11-15

3rd

Node to which other end of spring/dashpot will be attached.


Enter 0 if the spring goes from the first end to the ground.

16-20

4th

Degree of freedom at above node to which spring will be attached.


Enter 0 if the spring goes from the first end to the ground.
Enter 0 for a spring/dashpot acting in the direction from the first to the
second node (this also requires a 0 on the 2nd field).

21-30

5th

Reference stiffness of spring or scale factor to force versus displacement


table.

31-40

6th

Reference damping coefficient of dashpot or scale factor to force versus


relative velocity table (for dynamic analysis only).

41-50

7th

Initial force in spring.

51-60

8th

Reference thermal conduction of link or scale factor to flux versus relative


temperature table.

61-70

9th

Reference electrical conduction of link or scale factor to electrical flux


versus relative voltage table.

71-75

10th

Spring ID

76-80

11th

Numerical Stabilizer Flag

335 SPRINGS
Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3rd data block


Only required if input version is 10 or greater.
Enter one data block per spring/dashpot
1-5

1st

Table ID for nonlinear mechanical stiffness.

6-10

2nd

Table ID for nonlinear dashpot damping.

11-15

3rd

Table ID for nonlinear thermal conduction.

16-20

4th

Table ID for nonlinear electrical conduction.

21-25

5th

-1 mechanical stiffness is obtained from gradient values. Force versus


relative displacement table is entered.
1 mechanical stiffness is obtained from direct values. Stiffness versus
relative table is entered.

26-30

6th

-1 dashpot damping is obtained from gradient values. Force versus


relative velocity table is entered.
1 dashpot damping is obtained from direct values. Damping coefficient
versus relative velocity is entered.

31-35

7th

-1 thermal conduction is obtained from gradient values. Flux versus


relative temperature table is entered.
1 thermal conduction is obtained from direct values. Thermal
conduction versus temperature table is entered.

36-40

8th

-1 electrical conduction is obtained from gradient values. Electrical flux


versus relative voltage table is entered.
1 electrical conduction is obtained from direct values. Electrical
conductivity versus voltage table is entered.

PBUSH 336
Input Data for Cbush Elements

PBUSH

Input Data for Cbush Elements

Description
This data set is used to input all relevant data for cbush elements (2-D - type 194 and 3-D - type 195).
The definition of the cbush coordinate system, cbush nodal offsets and coefficients for stiffness,
damping, mass, stress and strain recovery, thermal and electrical behavior can be provided through these
data blocks. The connectivity for the cbush elements are specified through the CONNECTIVITY model
definition option.
Some details for each of the data specifications are provided herein. The reader is referred to Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 9 for more details.
Cbush Coordinate System

Options are provided to define the local cbush coordinate system along the element, in the global
coordinate system or in a user-defined coordinate system.
For the element coordinate system, the x axis is defined along the element length and forms a
perpendicular triad with the local y and z axes. For 3-D cbush elements, an extra node or an orientation
vector is specified to define the local y-z plane. For large displacement analysis, this local coordinate
system attached to the element is constantly updated.
Alternately, the element coordinate system can be defined along global Cartesian coordinates or in a usercoordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM model definition option. In these options, the
coordinate system remains fixed through the analysis and is not updated for large displacement analysis.
Cbush Nodal Offsets

Options are provided for locating an offset point along the cbush element axis, in the global coordinate
system, or in a user-defined coordinate system. In the first option, the offset point is located along the
line joining the two end nodes of the cbush element. The distance of the offset point along this line from
the first end node is user defined. Alternately, the offset point position can be defined in the global
Cartesian coordinate system or in a user-coordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM model
definition option.
For all options, the offset vectors from each cbush end node are internally calculated, and for large
displacement analysis, these offset vectors are updated based on the respective rotations at each end node.
Cbush Properties

Mechanical stiffness and damping properties are defined in the local cbush coordinate system. Stiffness
properties can be specified in coefficient form or through force-displacement curves. Damping properties
are specified as nominal damping either in coefficient form or force-velocity curves, and structural
damping in the form of coefficients. For 2-D cbush elements, up to three coefficients can be specified
and for 3-D cbush elements, up to six coefficients can be specified.

337 PBUSH
Input Data for Cbush Elements

The force in a linear mechanical cbush element is given by:


F = K u 2 u 1 + C u 2 u 1

where F is the force vector in the local coordinate system of the cbush element, K is a diagonal
matrix of the cbush stiffness coefficients, C is a diagonal matrix of the cbush damping coefficients,
u 2 is the vector of displacement degrees of freedom in the local cbush coordinate system at the second
end of the cbush, and u 1 is the vector of displacement degrees of freedom in the local cbush coordinate
system at the first end of the cbush. C includes the contributions of nominal damping, structural
damping, and stiffness proportional damping. If the second node is specified as zero, the cbush element
is assumed to be fixed to ground with all the ground degrees of freedom taken as zero.
Note that for cbush elements defined in the global coordinate or user-coordinate system, the cbush force
for a particular degree of freedom is positive if the displacements of node 2 along the specified degrees
of freedom is greater than the displacement of node 1 along the specified degrees of freedom. For cbush
elements defined in the element coordinate system, the cbush force is positive if the cbush is in tension
and negative if the cbush is in compression.
Field Analysis

During heat transfer or electrical analysis (regular heat transfer analysis, Joule heating analysis, or the
thermal part of a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis), the cbush element acts like a link. The dashpot
is not active. For the ground cbush element in the thermal part, the temperature of the ground is assumed
to be zero and in the electrical part, the voltage of the ground is assumed to be zero.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-5

1st

Enter the word PBUSH.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of distinct sets of PBUSH entries.

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of PBUSH data (default to standard input).

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to suppress printout.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter PBUSH ID.

6-10

2nd

Method to enter cbush spring behavior (default = 0).


Enter 0 if no stiffness.
Enter 1 if stiffness is entered in coefficient form.
Enter 2 if stiffness is specified via force-displacement tables.

PBUSH 338
Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format
Fixed
11-15

Free
3rd

Data
Entry Entry
I

Method to enter cbush damping behavior (default=0).


Enter 0 for no damping.
Enter 1 if nominal damping is entered in coefficient form.
Enter 2 if nominal damping is specified via force-velocity tables.
Enter 3 if structural damping coefficients are entered.
Enter 4 if both nominal damping and structural damping are specified in
coefficient form.
Enter 5 if nominal damping is specified via force-velocity tables and
structural damping is entered in coefficient form.

16-20

4th

Enter node ID G0 (default 0).

21-25

5th

Enter Coordinate System ID CID.


Enter -1 if element coordinate system is used. For 3-D, either G0 or Xi can
be used to define the local y-z plane.
Enter 0 if global coordinate system is to be used.
Enter > 0 if user-defined coordinate system given via COORD SYSTEM
option is to be used.

26-35

6th

Enter X1.

36-45

7th

Enter X2.

46-55

8th

Enter X3.

Note:

The local y-z plane for each 3-D cbush element are defined through either G0 or Xi. Xi are
the components of an orientation vector measured from the first end-node GA in the
displacement coordinate system at node GA. Node ID G0 is an alternate method to supply
this orientation vector. The G0 method supersedes the Xi method. The orientation vector is
measured from end GA to G0.
To use either of them, CID (field 5) should be set to -1.
of G0 or Xi

CID 0

supersedes any definition

4th data block


1-5

1st

Enter Offset Coordinate System ID (OCID)


Enter -2 if no offsets are to be provided.
Enter -1 if offset point is located on the line joining the two nodes. The
value of offset is provided by the 2nd field.

339 PBUSH
Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Enter 0 if offset point coordinates in fields 3 - 5 are given in the global
coordinate system.
Enter > 0 if offset point coordinates in fields 3 - 5 are given in a userdefined coordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM option.

6 - 15

2nd

Enter the value of S for the location of the cbush spring-dashpot along the
line joining the two end-nodes.

16-25

3rd

Enter S1

26-35

4th

Enter S2

36-45

5th

Enter S3

Notes:

The value of S defined in field 2 is used with OCID = -1 in field 1. 0 S 1 . S is


measured from end GA. (1-S) is the distance from end GB.
Si in fields 3 - 5 are used with OCID 0 in field 1. They refer to the components of the
vector measured from the origin to the offset point.
OCID = -2 is set when no offsets are to be provided. It is commonly used when only the
local x stiffness is defined along the cbush element and effectively behaves like a
true-direction spring. This is also the equivalent of the CBUSH1D element in
MD Nastran.

Enter 5th and 6th data blocks if field 2 of 3rd data block (method to enter stiffness) is 1.
5th data block
1-10

1st

Enter reference stiffness in the first direction.

11-20

2nd

Enter reference stiffness in the second direction.

21-30

3rd

Enter reference stiffness in the third direction.

31-40

4th

Enter reference stiffness in the fourth direction.

41-50

5th

Enter reference stiffness in the fifth direction.

51-60

6th

Enter reference stiffness in the sixth direction.

6th data block


1-5

1st

Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the first direction.

6-10

2nd

Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the second direction.

11-15

3rd

Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the third direction.

16-20

4th

Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the fourth direction.

21-25

5th

Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the fifth direction.

26-30

6th

Enter table ID associated with stiffness in the sixth direction.

PBUSH 340
Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

Enter 7th and 8th data blocks if field 2 of the 3rd data block (method to enter stiffness) is 2.
7th data block
1-10

1st

Enter reference force in the first direction.

11-20

2nd

Enter reference force in the second direction.

21-30

3rd

Enter reference force in the third direction.

31-40

4th

Enter reference force in fourth direction.

41-50

5th

Enter reference force in fifth direction.

51-60

6th

Enter reference force in sixth direction.

8th data block


1-5

1st

Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the first direction.

6-10

2nd

Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the


second direction.

11-15

3rd

Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the


third direction.

16-20

4th

Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the


fourth direction.

21-25

5th

Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the fifth direction.

26-30

6th

Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the


sixth direction.

Notes:

Up to six coefficients and table IDs can be provided in data blocks 5 - 8. Note that for
the tables referenced in data blocks 6 and 8, the stiffness or force can be a function of up
to four independent variables. For data block 8, a mandatory independent variable type is
displacement. Other independent variables in the tables referenced by data blocks 6 or 8
can be time, normalized time, increment number, normalized increment number, x, y, z
original and current position coordinates, frequency (for harmonic analysis), temperature.
For 3-D cbush elements, the first three directions refer to x, y and z translations while the
4 - 6 directions refer to x, y and z rotations. For 2-D cbush elements, the first two
directions refer to x and y translations while the 3rd direction refers to z rotation.

Enter 9th and 10th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 1 or 4.
9th data block
1-10

1st

Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in first direction.

11-20

2nd

Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the second direction

21-30

3rd

Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the third direction.

341 PBUSH
Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

31-40

4th

Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the fourth direction.

41-50

5th

Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the fifth direction.

51-60

6th

Enter reference nominal damping coefficient in the sixth direction.

10th data block


1-5

1st

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the first direction.

6-10

2nd

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the second direction.

11-15

3rd

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the third direction.

16-20

4th

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the fourth direction.

21-25

5th

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the fifth direction.

26-30

6th

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping in the sixth direction.

Enter 11th and 12th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 2 or 5.
11th data block
1-10

1st

Enter reference force in the first direction.

11-20

2nd

Enter reference force in the second direction.

21-30

3rd

Enter reference force in the third direction.

31-40

4th

Enter reference force in the fourth direction.

41-50

5th

Enter reference force in the fifth direction.

51-60

6th

Enter reference force in the sixth direction.

12th data block


1-5

1st

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
first direction.

6-10

2nd

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
second direction.

11-15

3rd

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
third direction.

16-20

4th

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
fourth direction.

21-25

5th

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
fifth direction.

26-30

6th

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the
sixth direction.

PBUSH 342
Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

Enter 13th and 14th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 3, 4 or 5.
13th data block
1-10

1st

Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the first direction.

11-20

2nd

Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the second direction.

21-30

3rd

Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the third direction.

31-40

4th

Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the fourth direction.

41-50

5th

Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the fifth direction.

51-60

6th

Enter reference structural damping coefficient in the sixth direction.

14th data block


1-5

1st

Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the first direction.

6-10

2nd

Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the second direction.

11-15

3rd

Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the third direction.

16-20

4th

Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the fourth direction.

21-25

5th

Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the fifth direction.

26-30

6th

Enter table ID associated with structural damping in the sixth direction.

Notes:

Up to six coefficients and tables can be provided in data blocks 9- 14. These coefficients
and associated table IDs are used for transient dynamic analysis. Data blocks 9, 10, 13,
and 14 can also be used for harmonic analysis with complex-valued damping. Note that
for the tables referenced in data blocks 10, 12, and 14, the damping coefficient or force
can be a function of up to four independent variables. For data block 12, a mandatory
independent variable type is velocity. Other independent variables in the tables
referenced by data blocks 10, 12, or 14 can be time, normalized time, increment number,
normalized increment number, x, y, z position coordinates, frequency (for harmonic
analysis), temperature.
For 3-D cbush elements, the first three directions refer to x, y and z translations while the
four - six directions refer to x, y and z rotations. For 2-D cbush elements, the first two
directions refer to x and y translations while the third direction refers to z rotation.

15th data block


1-10

1st

Enter stress recovery coefficient for the translational components


(default = 0).

11-20

2nd

Enter stress recovery components for the rotational components (default


= 0).

21-30

3rd

Enter strain recovery coefficient for the translational components


(default = 0).

31-40

4th

Enter strain recovery coefficients for the rotational components


(default = 0).

343 PBUSH
Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

41-50

5th

Enter lumped translational mass.

51-60

6th

Enter lumped rotational mass.

Note:

Fields 5 and 6 refer to the lumped mass values at each end-node. They are used for
dynamic/harmonic analysis.

Enter 16th and 17th data blocks only for analyses where heat transfer plays a role (e.g., thermal
analysis, thermo-mechanical coupled, Joule heating, etc.)
16th data block
1-10

1st

Enter the thermal conduction coefficient.

11-20

2nd

Enter the electrical resistance coefficient.

17th data block


1-5

1st

Enter the table ID associated with the thermal conduction coefficient.

6-10

2nd

Enter the table ID associated with the electrical resistance coefficient.

18th data block


Enter a list of elements associated with this PBUSH ID.

CFAST 344
Shell Patch Fastener Connection

CFAST

Shell Patch Fastener Connection

Description
The CFAST option defines a flexible connection between two surface patches. The surfaces may be either
shell elements or faces of continuum elements in 3-D applications and truss, beam, axisymmetric shell
elements or edges of continuum elements in 2-D applications. The PFAST option is used in conjunction
with the CFAST option to define the characteristics of the connection which behaves like a generalized
spring. This option internally creates a bushing element (element type 194 or 195 for 2-D or 3-D analysis,
respectively) and a set of tyings to connect the bushing nodes to the parts of the structure that are to
be connected. For more information about the geometric definition of the flexible connector, see Marc
Volume A, Chapter 9, Mesh Independent Connection Methods.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word CFAST.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets of CFAST data to follow (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input; defaults to input file.

11-15

3rd

Set to 1 to suppress printout.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the value of identifier of CFAST. Leave blank to allow internally


created identifier.

6-15

2nd

Enter the method of connection as one of PROP or ELEM.

16-20

3rd

Enter the value of the property identifier of a PFAST entry.

21-25

4th

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the CFAST location.
If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 7, 8, and 9.
GS is ignored if GA in field 5 and GB in field 6 are both nonzero.

26-30

5th

Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CFAST.


If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A.
If not blank and GB in field 6 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

31-35

6th

Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CFAST.


If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.
If not blank and GA in field 5 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

345 CFAST
Shell Patch Fastener Connection

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

36-45

7th

Enter XS, the x-coordinate of the approximate CFAST location.

46-55

8th

Enter YS, the y-coordinate of the approximate CFAST location.

56-65

9th

Enter ZS, the z-coordinate of the approximate CFAST location.

66-75

10th

Enter the name of the CFAST. This name is only used for output purposes.
If left blank, a default name is given as cf followed by the order number
of the CFAST in the input sequence left-padded with zeros to obtain a
ten-character string.

For the PROP method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5

1st

Not used.

6-10

2nd

Not used.

5th data block


1-32

1st

Enter the set name of SetA containing the items to search from for the first
patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto an element from this set, and
all the elements comprising the patch are automatically selected from the
set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set entered in the 2nd
field of this data block, but the search procedure is facilitated if it is.

33-64

2nd

Enter the set name of SetB containing the items to search from for the
second patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto an element from this
set, and all the elements comprising the patch are automatically selected
from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set entered
in the 1st field of this data block, but the search procedure is facilitated
if it is.

For the ELEM method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5

1st

Enter the element number identifying the first patch.


For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 3rd field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto
this element/face, and the elements comprising the patch are
automatically selected. GS or GA must have a projection onto this
element/face.

6-10

2nd

Enter the element number identifying the second patch.


For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 4th field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto
this element/face, and the elements comprising the patch are
automatically selected. GS or GB must have a projection onto this
element/face.

CFAST 346
Shell Patch Fastener Connection

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

11-15

3rd

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 1st field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell
elements).

16-20

4th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 2nd field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell
elements).

Enter the set name of SetA containing the items to search from for the first
patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto the master element specified
in the 1st field of the 4th data block and all further elements comprising
the patch are automatically selected from the set.

5th data block


1-32

1st

This entry is required for continuum elements, but is not required for
shells.
33-64

2nd

Enter the set name of SetB containing the items to search from for the
second patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto the master element
specified in the 2nd field of the 4th data block and all further elements
comprising the patch are automatically selected from the set.
This entry is required for continuum elements, but is not required for
shells.

347 PFAST
CFAST Fastener Property

PFAST

CFAST Fastener Property

Description
Defines the CFAST fastener property values.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word PFAST.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets of PFAST data to follow (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input file.

11-15

3rd

Set to 1 to suppress printout.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the PFAST property identification number.

6-15

2nd

Enter the diameter of the fastener.

16-20

3rd

Specify the element stiffness coordinate system.


Enter -1 to use element connectivity to define x-axis. Value in 4th field
is ignored.
Enter 0 to use global x-axis as the element x-axis (default).
Enter n to use the x-axis of the users defined coordinate system to define
the element x-axis.

30-35

4th

Define if the coordinate system in the 3rd field is absolute or relative.


Enter 0 for relative (default). The element y- and z-axis is determined
internally. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User
Information.
Enter 1 for absolute. It is only valid when the value in the 3rd field is
greater than -1. The selected coordinate system is used for the element.

36-45

5th

Enter the mass of the fastener.

4th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the reference stiffness value in direction 1.

11-20

2nd

Enter the reference stiffness value in direction 2.

21-30

3rd

Enter the reference stiffness value in direction 3.

31-40

4th

Enter the reference rotational stiffness value in direction 1.

PFAST 348
CFAST Fastener Property

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

41-50

5th

Enter the reference rotational stiffness value in direction 2.

51-60

6th

Enter the reference rotational stiffness value in direction 3

5th data block


1-5

1st

Enter the table ID for the stiffness value in direction 1.

6-10

2nd

Enter the table ID for the stiffness value in direction 2.

11-15

3rd

Enter the table ID for the stiffness value in direction 3.

16-20

4th

Enter the table ID for the rotational stiffness value in direction 1.

21-25

5th

Enter the table ID for the rotational stiffness value in direction 2.

26-30

6th

Enter the table ID for the rotational stiffness value in direction 3.

6th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the reference damping value in direction 1.

11-20

2nd

Enter the reference damping value in direction 2.

21-30

3rd

Enter the reference damping value in direction 3.

31-40

4th

Enter the reference rotational damping value in direction 1.

41-50

5th

Enter the reference rotational damping value in direction 2.

51-60

6th

Enter the reference rotational damping value in direction 3.

7th data block


1-5

1st

Enter the table ID for the damping value in direction 1

6-10

2nd

Enter the table ID for the damping value in direction 2

11-15

3rd

Enter the table ID for the damping value in direction 3

16-20

4th

Enter the table ID for the rotational damping value in direction 1.

21-25

5th

Enter the table ID for the rotational damping value in direction 2.

26-30

6th

Enter the table ID for the rotational damping value in direction 3.

349 CWELD
Weld or Fastener Element Connection

CWELD

Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Description
This option allows the CWELD connector information to be specified. A and B refer to the two surfaces
(shell elements or solid element faces), that are to be connected by the CWELD. Patch-to-patch
connections can be shell-to-shell, shell-to-solid, and solid-to-solid. Point-to-patch connections can be
point-to-shell or point-to-solid. For each CWELD connection, a complete set of data is entered. The first
data block contains:
EWID, METHOD, PWID, MCID, BTYPE, TTYPE, , WGHT, IPROJ, CWNAME

EWID is the connector beam element number and it may be left blank. In that case, Marc
automatically generates the element, but its end nodes GA and GB can still be entered. If GA
and/or GB are not specified, Marc automatically generates the missing nodes as well. If EWID is
not blank, the element may be defined in the CONNECTIVITY option, but this is not required. If
it is not defined in the CONNECTIVITY option, the nodes GA and/or GB are automatically
generated if they were left blank. If the element is defined in the CONNECTVITY option, its
definition must be made after the CWELD option in order to take effect. In that case, the element
is redefined in terms of its type and its nodes. METHOD defines the connection method and is
one of PARTPAT, ELPAT, ELEMID, GRIDID, or ALIGN. PWID is the identification number
of a corresponding PWELD property entry. BTYPE is the beam element type used for the
connector element. The orientation of the beam cross section is computed by using the
GEOMETRY or PWELD input data. Alternatively the orientation of the beam cross section can be
specified by MCID, the identification number of a coordinate system defined in the
COORD SYSTEM option. The value is the angle over which the beam cross section is rotated
about the beam axis to obtain its final orientation. TTYPE specifies the connection type for the
auxiliary nodes. WGHT is the exponent used in computing distance weight factors for RBE3
constraints. IPROJ is a flag to control the projection of auxiliary nodes to their respective
patches. CWNAME is an optional CWELD name (character string) used only in the output file to
reference the CWELD.
Depending on the connection method, one or more data blocks follow.
For PARTPAT, they contain: GS, SetA, SetB, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS
For ELPAT, they contain: GS, SHIDA, SHIDB, GA, GB, XY, YS, ZS, FaceA, FaceB, SetA,

SetB
For ELEMID, they contain: GS, SHIDA, SHIDB, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS, FaceA, FaceB
For GRIDID, they contain: GS, SPTYP, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS followed by GA1...GA8,

GB1...GB8 where SPTYP defines the surface patch type on both sides of the weld and can be
QQ, TT, QT, TQ, Q, or T and GAi are the nodes of patch A and GBi are the nodes of patch B.
For ALIGN, they contain: GA, GB. No additional data is needed.

For all methods, the pairing surface patch information is required, which identifies the master patches
and, in addition, for the indirect connection methods, the regions from where to select the secondary
patches. It is possible to have point connections on either side when the master patch information for that

CWELD 350
Weld or Fastener Element Connection

side is omitted (i.e., the SetA or SetB for PARTPAT, the SHIDA or SHIDB for ELPAT and ELMID or
the GA1..GA8 or GB1..GB8 for GRIDID is left blank). It is not possible to make point connections to
automatically generated nodes. The node GS is the approximate CWELD location node or CWELD
reference node. If GS is blank, the coordinates may be entered directly through XS, YS, and ZS and a
GS-node is automatically created. If GA and GB are both entered explicitly, the GS input is ignored;
otherwise, the GS input is used for the projection onto the surfaces on each side of the CWELD to
determine the end locations of the beam. If GS is ignored, GA and GB are projected onto their respective
surfaces. If GS and GA are not specified but GB is, then GB is used as GS. If GS and GB are not specified,
but GA is, then GA is used as GS. If GS, GA, and GB are not specified, then the coordinates XS, YS, ZS
are used. If GS is specified and maximally one of the GA or GB, then GS is used for the projections on
both sides and GA or GB are ignored for this purpose. If one side of the connector makes a point
connection and the connector node for that side has been left blank and the GS-node has been specified,
the point connection is made to the GS-node and the GS-node is projected onto the opposite side to
determine the location of the other connector node. If the node on the opposite side also makes a point
connection, the node for that side must have been specified. SHIDA and SHIDB are element numbers
defining master patches. For solid elements, face information must be entered as well to fully identify the
patch. For shell elements, the face information is not required. Face identifiers for FaceA and FaceB
follow the definitions specified in the FACE IDS option described in Marc Volume C: Program Input.
Valid set types specifying the sets SetA and SetB with patches to search from when finding the
projections are element and face sets for shell elements in 3-D models, face sets for continuum elements
in 3-D models, element and edge sets for truss, beam and axisymmetric shell elements in 2-D models and
edge sets for continuum elements in 2-D models. Below faces should be understood as edges when
entering the data for a 2-D model.
For more information about the geometric definition of the flexible connector, see Marc Volume A,
Chapter 9, Mesh Independent Connection Methods.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word CWELD.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets of CWELD data to follow (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input file.

11-15

3rd

Set to 1 to suppress printing of the CWELD data during this option.

Enter the element number (EWID) of the connector element between the
patches.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Leave blank when the automatic element generation is used.

351 CWELD
Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

6-15

2nd

Enter the method of connection as one of PARTPAT, ELPAT, ELEMID,


GRIDID, ALIGN.

16-20

3rd

Enter the value of PWID, the property identifier of a PWELD entry.

30-35

4th

Enter the value of MCID, the identification number of a coordinate system


defined in the COORD SYSTEM option to define the orientation of the
beam cross section. Leave blank or enter 0 if the automatic procedure is
to be used.

36-40

5th

Enter the value for BTYPE (the Marc beam element type to be used for the
connection). Default is 98 in a 3-D and 5 in a 2-D analysis when EWID is
blank or the element type used on the CONNECTIVITY input when EWID
is not blank.

41-45

6th

Enter the value for TTYPE (the type of constraint used to connect the
auxiliary nodes in the CWELD).
Enter 0 (default) for RBE3 constraints.
Enter 44 for Kirchhoff constraints.
Enter 80 for combined RBE2 and RBE3 constraints.

46-55

7th

Enter the value for , the angle over which to rotate the cross section
about the beam axis to obtain its final orientation.

56-65

8th

Enter the value for WGHT, the RBE3 distance weighting exponent.
Defaults to the value given on the SWLDPRM input.

66-70

9th

Enter the value for IPROJ.


Enter 0 (default) if the auxiliary nodes should not be relocated.to their
projections on the finite element model.
Enter 1 to have the auxiliary nodes relocated to their projections on the
finite element model.

71-80

10th

Enter the name of the CWELD. This name is only used for output
purposes.
If left blank, a default name will be given as cw followed by the order
number of the CWELD in the input sequence left-padded with zeros to
obtain a ten-character string.

For the PARTPAT method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5

1st

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate CWELD
location.
If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8.
GS is ignored if GA in field 4 and GB in field 5 are both nonzero.

CWELD 352
Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

6-10

2nd

Not used; enter zero.

11-15

3rd

Not used; enter zero.

16-20

4th

Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD.


If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A.
If not blank and GB in field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

21-25

5th

Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD.


If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.
If not blank and GA in field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

26-35

6th

Enter XS, the x-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

36-45

7th

Enter YS, the y-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

46-55

8th

Enter ZS, the z-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

Enter the setname of SetA containing the patches to search from for side
A of the connection. The GS or GA node is projected onto a patch from
this set and all further patches involved in the connection are
automatically selected from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint
with the set entered in the 2nd field of this data block, but the search
procedure is facilitated if it is.

5th data block


1-32

1st

If left blank, a point connection is assumed on this side.


33-64

2nd

Enter the setname of SetB containing the patches to search from for side
B of the connection. The GS or GB node is projected onto a patch from this
set and all further patches involved in the connection are automatically
selected from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set
entered in the 1st field of this data block, but the search procedure is
facilitated if it is.
If left blank, a point connection is assumed on this side.

For the ELPAT method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5

1st

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate CWELD
location.
If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8.
GS is ignored if GA in field 4 and GB in field 5 are both nonzero.

6-10

2nd

Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side A of


the connection.

353 CWELD
Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 9th field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GA node will be projected
onto this patch.
If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.

11-15

3rd

Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side B of


the connection
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 10 field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GB node will be projected
onto this patch.
If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.

16-20

4th

Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD.


If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A.
If not blank and GB on field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

21-25

5th

Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD.


If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.
If not blank and GA on field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

26-35

6th

Enter XS, the x-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

36-45

7th

Enter YS, the y-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

46-55

8th

Enter ZS, the z-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

56-60

9th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 2nd field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell
elements).

61-65

10th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 3rd field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for
shell elements).

Enter the setname of SetA containing the patches to search from for side
A of the connection. The GS or GA node is projected onto the master patch
specified in the 2nd field of the 4th data block and all further patches
involved in the connection are automatically selected from the set.

5th data block


1-32

1st

If the master patch is a shell element, this field can be left blank and all
shell elements in the model are considered.
If the master patch is the face of a continuum element, a face set is
required here.

CWELD 354
Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format
Fixed
33-64

Free
2nd

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the setname of SetB containing the patches to search from for side
B of the connection. The GS or GB node is projected onto the master patch
specified in the 3rd field of the 4th data block and all further patches
involved in the connection are automatically selected from the set.
If the master patch is a shell element, this field can be left blank and all
shell elements in the model are considered.
If the master patch is the face of a continuum element, a face set is
required here.

For the ELEMID method, enter the 4th data block as follows:
4th data block
1-5

1st

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate CWELD
location. If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8.
GS is ignored if GA on field 4 and GB on field 5 are both nonzero.

6-10

2nd

Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side A of


the connection.
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 9th field of this
data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GA node is projected onto
this patch.
If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.

11-15

3rd

Enter the element number identifying the master patch on side B of


the connection.
For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 10th field of
this data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GB node is projected
onto this patch.
If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.

16-20

4th

Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD.


If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A
If not blank and GB on field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

21-25

5th

Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD.


If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.
If not blank and GA on field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

26-35

6th

Enter XS, the x-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

36-45

7th

Enter YS, the y-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

46-55

8th

Enter ZS, the z-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

355 CWELD
Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

56-60

9th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 2nd field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell
elements).

61-65

10th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 3rd field
of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell
elements).

For the GRIDID method, enter the 4th, 5th and 6th data blocks as follows:
4th data block
1-5

1st

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate cweld
location.
If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8. GS is
ignored if GA on field 4 and GB on field 5 are both nonzero.

6-10

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

4th

Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD. If blank, GS is used
for the projection on side A.
If not blank and GB on field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

21-25

5th

Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD. If blank, GS is
used for the projection on side B.
If not blank and GA on field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

26-35

6th

Enter XS, the x-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

36-45

7th

Enter YS, the y-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

46-55

8th

Enter ZS, the z-coordinate of the approximate CWELD location.

56-65

9th

Enter the value of SPTYP defining the surface patch combination being
connected as one of QQ, TT, QT, TQ, Q, or T.
This field is optional and may be left blank.

5th data block


If this data block is blank, a point connection is assumed on side A.
1-5

1st

Enter the node number GA1.

6-10

2nd

Enter the node number GA2.

11-15

3rd

Repeat until all nodes of the patch on side A have been defined. A patch
can have up to 8 nodes.

CWELD 356
Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

6th data block


If this data block is blank, a point connection is assumed on side B.
1-5

1st

Enter the node number GB1.

6-10

2nd

Enter the node number GB2.

11-15

3rd

Repeat until all nodes of the patch on side B have been defined. A patch
can have up to 8 nodes.

For the ALIGN method, enter the 4th data block as follows:
4th data block
1-5

1st

Not used; leave blank or enter 0.

6-10

2nd

Not used; leave blank or enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Not used; leave blank or enter 0.

16-20

4th

Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD. May be blank if the
element is entered through the CONNECTIVITY option.

21-25

5th

Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD. May be blank if
the element is entered through the CONNECTIVITY option.

357 PWELD
Connector Element Property

PWELD

Connector Element Property

Description
The properties of the cweld connector element are entered through the PWELD option. The geometrical
properties of the connector element between the two patches may also be entered here instead of entering
them through the GEOMETRY option. The PWELD option contains the following information:
PWID, D, MID, LDMIN, LDMAX, WTYPE
EGEOM1, EGEOM2, ..., EGEOM8
The first line defines the general CWELD characteristics. If the second field on the first line (D) is
nonzero, it represents the characteristic diameter (3-D analysis) or thickness (2-D analysis) of the
CWELD that will be used to compute the positions of the auxiliary nodes. It also defines the cross-section
properties if no further geometric data is supplied. PWID is the PWELD identifier referenced on the
CWELD option. LDMIN and LDMAX are the minimum and maximum length to diameter ratios of the
CWELD. WTYPE defines the connection type as either a general connection or a spotweld connection.
MID is a material identification number.
The second line defines the geometrical properties of the element in the same way they are defined in the
GEOMETRY option for the particular element type. The data required for each element type can be found
in Marc Volume B: Element Library. This second line is always required even when the characteristic
dimension (diameter or thickness) D has been defined and no further data is needed. In that case, it should
be left blank (or contain zeros only) and in 3-D models, the cross section will be circular with diameter
D or in 2-D models, the cross section will be rectangular with thickness D and unit width. If the
characteristic dimension D on the first line is zero and the first field on the second line is nonzero, a
characteristic dimension will be estimated from the geometric properties. If the first field on the second
line is zero, a nonzero value for D is required on the first line when using a method that generates auxiliary
nodes and patches for its connections because it is currently not possible to estimate a characteristic
diameter from BEAM SECT data. If the EGEOM4, EGEOM5, and EGEOM6 fields are all blank or zero, the
local directions of the connector element are determined by one of the two procedures outlined in the
Connector Orientation section of Marc Volume A: Theory and User information; otherwise, these values
are used to define the local directions. In the latter case, it is possible to use a coordinate system defined
at the first node of the element, but it is not possible to offset its nodes. If the geometrical properties are
defined in both the PWELD and GEOMETRY options for the same connector element, the properties
defined in the PWELD option are used.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word PWELD.

PWELD 358
Connector Element Property

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets of PWELD data to follow (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input. Defaults to input file.

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the value for PWID, the PWELD identification number.

6-15

2nd

Enter the characteristic dimension D of the CWELD. If blank or zero,


Marc will make an estimate if the cross-section data are not entered
through the BEAM SECT parameter.
In a 3-D analysis, D is the characteristic diameter.
In a 2-D analysis, D is the characteristic thickness and the section will
have a unit width.

16-20

3rd

Enter the value for MID; a material identification number to assign the
material properties.

21-30

4th

Enter the value of LDMIN; the smallest ratio of length to diameter for
stiffness calculation
Default is DLDMIN, which defaults to 0.2 if not specified on the
SWLDPRM option.

31-40

5th

Enter the value of LDMAX, the largest ratio of length to diameter for
stiffness calculation.
Default is DLDMAX, which defaults to 5.0 if not specified on the
SWLDPRM option.

41-50

6th

Enter the value for WTYPE, the type of connection as SPOT for a spotweld
connector or leave blank for a general connector.

4th data block


1-10

1st

EGEOM1

11-20

2nd

EGEOM2

21-30

3rd

EGEOM3

31-40

4th

EGEOM4

41-50

5th

EGEOM5

51-60

6th

EGEOM6

61-70

7th

EGEOM7

71-80

8th

EGEOM8

359 SWLDPRM
Parameters for CWELD Connectors

SWLDPRM

Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Description
A number of global parameters that control the behavior of CWELD and CFAST connections and their
output to the jobid.out file can be entered through this model definition option. These parameters and
their descriptions are summarized in Table 3-3.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word SWLDPRM.

Enter the name of the first parameter.

2nd data block


1-10

1st

11-

2nd

3rd

4th

E or I Enter the value for the first parameter.


A

Enter the name of the second parameter.

E or I Enter the value for the second parameter.

A maximum of four parameter,value pairs can be entered per line, but it may also be less. The
parameter,value pairs can appear in any order. A parameter and its value cannot occur in different lines;
they must appear on the same line. At least one pair is required per line. The second data block can be
repeated as many times as desired. If a parameter is defined more than once, the last assigned value is the
active value.
Table 3-3
Name

SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions

Type

Default

Description

CHKRUN

Integer > 0
(0 or 1)

This parameter is available in MD Nastran but has no


meaning in Marc and is ignored.

GSMOVE

Integer > 0

Maximum number of times GS is moved in case a


complete projection of all points has not been found.

NREDIA

0 < Integer < 4

Maximum number of times the characteristic diameter


D is reduced in half in case a complete projection of all
points has not been found.

SWLDPRM 360
Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3
Name
PRTSW

SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions (continued)

Type
0 < Integer < 4

Default
0

Description
Parameter to control the CWELD/CFAST diagnostic
output to the Marc output file (jobid.out).
0 = no diagnostic output
1 = print errors only
2 = print errors and warnings only
3 = print projection diagnostics with no tying details
4 = print all diagnostics

GSPROJ

-90 < Real < 90

20.0

Maximum angle allowed between the normal vectors of


master patch A and master patch B. The connection will
not be generated if the angle between these two normal
vectors is greater than the value of GSPROJ. If GSPROJ
is negative, the program will always accept the
connection and will only issue a warning if the angle is
larger than |GSPROJ| (see Figure 9-62 in Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information).

GSCURV

-90 < Real < 90

20.0

Maximum angle allowed between the normal vectors of


a patch to which an auxiliary node projects and its
corresponding auxiliary and master patches. It provides
a measure to monitor the curvature of a surface and to
recognize patches that belong to, for example, stiffeners.
A connection is not generated if the angle between the
normal vectors is greater than 90-GSCURV meaning
that the patches are almost normal to each other. In that
case, the patch is rejected and the search proceeds to the
next patch in the list. If the angle is between zero and
GSCURV, no message is displayed. If the angle is between
GSCURV and 90-GSCURV, a large angle warning is
displayed. The following three tests are performed in the
order given below when GSCURV is positive:
If 0 < angle < GSCURV => OK
If GSCURVE < angle < 90-GSCURV => trigger a warning.
If angle > 90-GSCURV => reject.
Note that the warning condition is never triggered when
GSCURV > 45 as it is overruled by the reject condition.
If GSCURV is negative, the projection is always accepted
and a warning is issued when the angle is larger than
|GSCURV| (see Figure 9-62 in Marc Volume A: Theory
and User Information)

361 SWLDPRM
Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3

SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions (continued)

Name

Type

Default

Description

GSTOL

Real

0.0

Maximum allowable distance of the node GS to its


projection on a patch. IF GSTOL is positive, the distance
is relative to the characteristic CWELD/CFAST diameter
D, (the tolerance is GSTOL*D). If GSTOL is negative, the
distance is absolute (i.e., the tolerance is -GSTOL). If GS
is used for the projection together with one of the
methods PARTPAT/PROP or ELPAT/ELEM, an error is
issued if the distance is too large. If GA and GB are used
for the projection or if one of the ELEMID or GRIDID
methods is used, the test only issues a warning if the
distance is too large. If GSTOL is zero, any distance
is accepted.

PROJTOL

0.0 < Real < 0.2 0.0

Tolerance to accept the projected point GA or GB if the


computed coordinates of the projection point lie outside
the patch boundary, but are located within
PROJTOL*(dimension of the patch).

ACTVTOL

Integer > 0

Parameter controlling the behavior of PROJTOL for the


different CWELD/CFAST connection methods. This
parameter is entered as an integer and is converted to a
four-character string. If its value is less than 1000, the
string is prepended with zeros. The first character (from
the left) controls the behavior when the PARTPAT/PROP
method is used. The second controls the behavior when
the ELPAT/ELEM method is used. The third controls the
behavior when the ELEMID method is used and the
fourth controls the behavior when the GRIDID method is
used. For ALIGN, the PROJTOL tolerance has no
significance. Each digit d i in the string can have the

Integer < 2211

1111

value 0 or 1 or 2, where the value 2 only has significance


for the ELPAT/ELEM or PARTPAT/PROP methods. The
values have the following meaning:
0 = PROJTOL is completely deactivated

SWLDPRM 362
Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3
Name

SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions (continued)

Type

Default

Description
1 = PROJTOL is activated for ELEMID and GRIDID,
PROJTOL is activated in initial projections for
ELPAT/ELEM, PROJTOL is only activated over free
edges of the patch in auxiliary projections for
ELPAT/ELEM, and in initial and auxiliary
projections for PARTPAT/PROP. Free edges have
no neighbors within the set that defines the
complete surface.

ACTVTOL
(cont)

2 = PROJTOL is always activated


CWSETS

Integer > 0

(0 or 1)

Parameter to control the automatic creation of four


element sets with the elements involved in the
CWELD/CFAST connections.
0 = the sets are not created
1 = four sets are created automatically:
fastener_all_beams_inc000, the set
containing all connector beam elements.
fastener_all_faces_sidea_inc0000,
the set containing all elements with patches on side
A of the connection.
fastener_all_faces_sideb_inc0000,
the set containing all elements with patches on side
B of the connection.
fastener_all_warnings_inc0000, the set
containing all elements involved in CWELD/CFAST
warning messages.
Defining sets with any of these names must be avoided
and are considered an error.

MAXEXP

Integer > 0

Parameter to control the maximum number of


expansions in the search for projections of the auxiliary
nodes. First, the master patch is tried. If no projection is
found on the master patch, a first expansion is made
including all neighboring patches of the master patch. If
no projection is found on any of the new patches, a
second expansion is made including all neighbors of the
patches tried so far. This process continues until the
number of expansions exceeds MAXEXP. Two patches are
neighbors if they share at least one node in their
connectivities.

DLDMIN

Real > 0.0

0.2

Default value for LDMIN; the smallest ratio of length to


characteristic diameter.

363 SWLDPRM
Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3

SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions (continued)

Name

Type

Default

Description

DLDMAX

Real > 0.0

5.0

Default value for LDMAX; the largest ratio of length to


characteristic diameter.

MAXITR

Integer > 0

25

The maximum number of iterations allowed in the


iteration process for finding the projection on a patch.

EPSITR

Real > 0.0

1.0E-5

Tolerance to terminate the iteration process for finding


the projection on a patch. If the parametric coordinate
change in an iteration is less than EPSITR, the projection
is accepted as converged.

DELMAX

Real > 0.0

0.1

Maximum allowable parametric coordinate change


during the iteration process for finding the projection on
a patch. At first DELMAX is not activated (i.e., the
parametric coordinate change is not limited during the
iteration process). The parameter is only activated when
the full Newton Raphson iteration process for a
projection did not converge. In that case, the iteration
process is restarted with DELMAX activated.

CWSPOT

0 < Integer < 3

Parameter to choose the method for modifying the


beam length.
1 = scale the stiffness of the beam
2 = reposition the end nodes of the beam
3 = reposition the auxiliary patch nodes and the end
nodes of the beam.

RBE3WT

Real

0.0

Default RBE3 distance weighting exponent.


The weight factor for each retained node in a RBE3
1
involved in a CWELD/CFAST connection is: f i = ---n
di

where
fi

is the weighting factor for retained node i.

di

is the distance from the tied node to retained node i

is the weighting exponent RBE3WT.

Negative values for RBE3WT are not recommended,


since they result in heavier weighting for nodes further
away. The default results in uniform weighting
fi = 1 .

SWLDPRM 364
Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3
Name
BOXING

SWLDPRM Parameter Names and Descriptions (continued)

Type

Default

-1 < Integer < 1 0

Description
Parameter to control the boxing algorithm used to speed
up the search for master patches when connection
method PARTPAT/PROP is used.
-1 =The boxing algorithm is always deactivated
0 = The boxing algorithm may or may not be activated
depending on the number of elements in the sets.
1 = The boxing algorithm is always activated

365 SUPERELEM (Model Definition)


Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface

SUPERELEM

Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface

(Model Definition)

Description
This option triggers Marc to perform the Craig-Bampton method of Component Mode Synthesis and
generate a Modal Neutral File (MNF) that can be uploaded into MD Adams models to represent flexible
components. The option allows direct definition of the boundary or interface degrees of freedom. The
option also allows automatic definition of interface degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact
with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint
analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are not known a priori. It also allows the specification
of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The
two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies are consolidated into one node with six degrees of
freedom before exporting to the MNF.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word SUPERELEM.

1-5

1st

Not used; enter 0.

6-10

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to generate MNF.

2nd data block

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs. Data blocks 3a and 4a may be repeated if needed.
A. List of Interface Degrees of Freedom.
3a data block
1-80

1st

Enter a list of degrees of freedom.

1st

Enter a list of interface nodes.

4a data block
1-80

B. List of Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of all nodes in contact with
these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.
3b data block
1-5

1st

Enter -1.

1st

Enter a list of rigid contact bodies.

4b data block
1-80

SUPERELEM (Model Definition) 366


Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

C. List of Load-controlled Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of the control
nodes of these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.
3c data block
1-5

1st

Enter -2.

1st

Enter a list of load-controlled rigid contact bodies.

4c data block
1-80

367 SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition)


Create DMIG of Substructure

SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model


Definition)

Create DMIG of Substructure

Description
This option allows the creation of a DMIG file containing the stiffness associated with the degrees of
freedom specified here. This DMIG may be subsequently read into Marc or Nastran. The option allows
direct definition of the degrees of freedom. The option also allows automatic definition of interface
degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful
for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are
not known a priori. It also allows the specification of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes
of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies
are consolidated into one node with six degrees of freedom before exporting to the DMIG.
This option can only occur once in the analysis. However, it may be used in either the model definition
or the load increment section.
The DMIG will be written to file jidname_dmigst_inc, where:
jidname

is the job name

inc

is the increment number

Note:

If a node is subsequently going to be transformed, all degrees of freedom of all nodes must
be specified here.

This option may only be used with direct solution techniques.


Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word SUPERELEM.

1-5

1st

Not used; enter 0.

6-10

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

2nd data block

SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition) 368


Create DMIG of Substructure

Format
Fixed
16-20

Free
4th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter 1 to create a DMIG file.


Enter 3 to create a DMIGB file.
DMIGB uses a different output format, which results in a smaller file
(about one third of the size of a DMIG file). When a DMIGB file is
included in a Marc analysis, the program uses a column-wise storage
instead of a full in-core matrix storage. This memory reduction can be
important for large DMIG files. The DMIGB format can be used only
as input for a Marc analysis; it can not be used in a Nastran analysis.

21-25

5th

Not used; enter 0.

26-30

6th

Enter 0 if all stiffness terms written to DMIG.


Enter 1 if terms less than xf K 1 are filtered out.
Enter 2 if terms less than xf are filtered out.

31-40

7th

Enter the value used for filtering xf ; default = 1.e-8.

41-50

8th

Enter the name of the matrix; default is KAAX which is limited to


eight characters.

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs. Data blocks 3a and 4a may be repeated if needed.
A.

List of Interface Degrees of Freedom.

3a data block
1-80

1st

Enter a list of degrees of freedom.

1st

Enter a list of interface nodes.

4a data block
1-80

B. List of Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of all nodes in contact with
these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.
3b data block

1-5

1st

Enter -1.

1st

Enter a list of rigid contact bodies.

4b data block
1-80

369 SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications - Model Definition)


Create DMIG of Substructure

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

C. List of Load-controlled Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of the control
nodes of these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.
3c data block
1-5

1st

Enter -2.

1st

Enter a list of load-controlled rigid contact bodies.

4c data block
1-80

DMIG-OUT (Model Definition) 370


Output Control of Matrices

DMIG-OUT (Model Definition)

Output Control of Matrices

Description
This option allows you to control the output of matrices into DMIG format. These matrices may then be
read in using the DMIG option and activated using either the B2GG, B2PP, K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP,
and P2G options within Marc or within MD Nastran. To output the substructure matrix, use the
SUPERELEM option. In the case of element matrix, they can either be written in the Marc global
(MSC.Nastran Basic) or a local coordinate system. Both symmetric and nonsymmetric matrices are
supported. Note that the scalar factor associated with the STIFSCALE option is not applied to the element
matrices. This option may be repeated in each loadcase.
The files created associated with element matrices have the names jidname_dmigXX_inc, where:
Jidname

is the job ID name

XX

is the suffix associated with the matrix type

ST

stiffness matrix

DF

differential stiffness matrix

MS

mass matrix

DM

damping matrix

CO

conductivity matrix

SP

specific heat matrix

Inc

is the increment number

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word DMIG-OUT.

The 2nd and 3rd, 4th and 5th, 6th and 7th, 8th and 9th, 10th and 11th, 12th and 13th data blocks are
entered as pairs as required.
2nd data block
1-10

1st

Enter the word STIFFNESS.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for element matrices.


Enter 2 for global matrix.
Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

371 DMIG-OUT (Model Definition)


Output Control of Matrices

Format
Fixed
16-20

Free
3rd

Data
Entry Entry
I

Frequency to write (default is every increment).


Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.
Enter -2 to switch off writing DMIG output.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to output in Marc global (MSC.Nastran basic) (default).


Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is
always written in transformed system.

26-30

5th

Control of which element matrices are to be written. If only the global


matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.
Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).
Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.
Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.
Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

Enter 0 to output global stiffness in untied state.


Enter 1 to output global stiffness in tied state.

36-45

7th

Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Stiffness values below this


value will be ignored.

46-50

8th

Enter 1 if DMIG name is to be unique for each element matrix written to


the DMIG file. (default)
Enter 2 is all element matrices share the same name.

3rd data block


Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.
1-80

Enter a list of elements or bodies.

4th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words DIFF MATRIX.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for element matrices.


Enter 2 for global matrix.
Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Frequency to write (default is every increment).


Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to output in Marc global (MSC.Nastran basic) (default).


Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is
always written in transformed system.

DMIG-OUT (Model Definition) 372


Output Control of Matrices

Format
Fixed
26-30

Free
5th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Control of which element matrices are to be written. If only the global


matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.
Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).
Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.
Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.
Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

Not used; enter 0.

36-45

7th

Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Stiffness values below this


value will be ignored.

5th data block


Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.
1-80

Enter a list of elements or bodies.

6th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words MASS MATRIX.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for element matrices.


Enter 2 for global matrix.
Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Frequency to write (default is every increment).


Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to output in Marc global (MSC.Nastran basic) (default).


Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is
always written in transformed system.

26-30

5th

Control of which element matrices are to be written. If only the global


matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.
Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).
Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.
Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.
Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

Not used; enter 0.

36-45

7th

Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Mass values below this


value will be ignored.

373 DMIG-OUT (Model Definition)


Output Control of Matrices

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

7th data block


Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.
1-80

Enter a list of elements or bodies.

8th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words DAMPING MATRIX.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for element matrices.


Enter 2 for global matrix.
Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Frequency to write (default is every increment).


Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to output in Marc global, Nastran basic (default).


Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is
always written in transformed system.

26-30

5th

Control of which element matrices are to be written. If only the global


matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.
Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).
Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.
Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.
Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

Not used; enter 0.

36-45

7th

Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Damping values below this


value will be ignored.

9th data block


Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.
1-80

Enter a list of elements or bodies.

10th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word CONDUCTIVITY.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for element matrices.


Enter 2 for global matrix.
Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Frequency to write (default is every increment).


Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to output in Marc global (MSC.Nastran basic) (default).

DMIG-OUT (Model Definition) 374


Output Control of Matrices

Format
Fixed
26-30

Free
5th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Control of which element matrices are to be written. If only the global


matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.
Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).
Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.
Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.
Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

Enter 0 to output global conductivity in untied state.


Enter 1 to output global conductivity in tied state.

36-45

7th

Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Conductivity values below


this value will be ignored.

11th data block


Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.
1-80

Enter a list of elements or bodies.

12th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word SPECIFIC.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for element matrices.


Enter 2 for global matrix.
Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Frequency to write (default is every increment).


Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to output in Marc global (MSC.Nastran basic) (default).

26-30

5th

Control of which element matrices are to be written. If only the global


matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.
Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).
Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.
Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.
Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

Not used; enter 0.

36-45

7th

Enter minimum value to be written to DMIG. Specific heat values below


this value will be ignored.

13th data block


Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.
1-80

Enter a list of elements or bodies.

375 BSQUEAL
Specify Data for Output of Matrices used in Brake Squeal Analysis

BSQUEAL

Specify Data for Output of Matrices used in Brake Squeal Analysis

Description
This option allows the user to define inputs necessary for brake squeal analysis or general perturbation
complex eigenvalue analysis. Marc writes out normal contact stiffness and frictional stiffness in DMIG
format for normal contact (nonglued) interfaces. This data is used by Nastran in a complex
eigenvalue analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word BSQUEAL.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of pairs of Master-Slave for normal stiffness and frictional


stiffness output in DMIG format.

6-10

2nd

If set to 1, write at increment 1 (before actual nonlinear analysis) (default).


If set to 2, write after last increment (after nonlinear analysis).

11-15

3rd

Set to 1 for conventional brake squeal based upon rotating axis (default).
Set to 2 for calculation based on conventional sliding contact.

16-20

4th

Enter unit number of read data. Default is standard input (5).

The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated for each set of contact body pairs.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

First contact flexible body ID.

6-10

2nd

Second contact flexible body ID.

11-20

3rd

Enter the friction coefficient.


If 0, the friction coefficient is obtained from the CONTACT TABLE option

21-25

4th

Enter the table ID for the friction coefficient (only if value is given for
friction coefficient).

26-35

5th

Average stiffness per unit area (F/L3).

36-40

6th

Table ID of defining temperature-dependent average stiffness per unit


area.
Independent value is temperature only.

41-45

7th

Rotation ID associated with first flexible body ID.


If 0, the rotation axis is given on 4th data block

BSQUEAL 376
Specify Data for Output of Matrices used in Brake Squeal Analysis

Format
Fixed
46-50

Free
8th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Rotation ID associated with second flexible body ID.


If 0, the second rotation axis is given on 5th data block

51-55

9th

Enter 0 if vector of stiffness and friction at tied node is the same as at


retained (default)
Enter 1 if vector of stiffness and friction at tied node is tangential at
the node.

56-60

10th

Enter 1 if using the UBSQUEAL user subroutine.

4th data block


1-10

1st

X-coordinate of center of rotation axis.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of center of rotation axis.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of center of rotation axis.

31-40

4th

For brake squeal, enter x-component of direction cosine of rotation axis.


For general contact, enter x-component of sliding direction cosine.

41-50

5th

For brake squeal, enter y-component of direction cosine of rotation axis.


For general contact, enter y-component of sliding direction cosine.

51-60

6th

For brake squeal, enter z-component of direction cosine of rotation axis.


For general contact, enter z-component of sliding direction cosine.

For general contact, leave the 5th data block blank.


For brake squeal, if there is only one axis, leave the 5th data block blank.
5th data block
1-10

1st

X-coordinate of center of second rotation axis.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of center of second rotation axis.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of center of second rotation axis.

31-40

4th

Enter x-component of direction cosine of second rotation axis.

41-50

5th

Enter y-component of direction cosine of second rotation axis.

51-60

6th

Enter z-component of direction cosine of second rotation axis.

377 MPCOUT (Model Definition)


Output Control of Tying Matrices (MPC Entries) for all Glued Contacts

MPCOUT (Model Output Control of Tying Matrices (MPC Entries) for all
Glued Contacts
Definition)
Description
This option allows the user to output tying matrices of all glued contacts in Nastran MPC format.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word MCPOUT.

Frequency to output tying matrix:

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter 1 to write out in every increment (default).


Enter 2 to output only in the end of load case.
Enter 3 to switch off writing.

DMIG 378
Direct Matrix Input

DMIG

Direct Matrix Input

Description
This option is compatible with MD Nastran and allows the direct input of matrices at nodal points. It
permits matrices generated with either product to be entered into Marc.
The matrix is defined by a single header entry and one or more column entries. A column entry is required
for each column with nonzero element.
The matrix may only be used for real symmetric or nonsymmetric stiffness matrices, real mass matrices,
or for load matrices. The matrices are not activated unless a K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP, or P2G model
or history definition option is used.
It is advisable to have K2GG, M2GG, etc. placed before the DMIG in the input file.
Note:

This option must be in fixed format using the MD.Nastran conversion of ten fields per line
of width 8 or 16.

Header Entry Format


1

DMIG

NAME

"0"

IFO

TIN

TOUT

POLAR

G1

C1

10

NCOL

Column Entry Format


DMIG

NAME

GJ

CJ

G2

C2

A2

B2

DMIG

STIF

DMIG

STIF

27

2.5+10

A1

B1

3.+5

3.+3

1.0

0.

- etc. -

Example
4
2
0.

50

379 DMIG
Direct Matrix Input

Field

Contents

NAME

Name of the matrix. See Remark 1.(One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of
which is alphabetic.) The name is case sensitive.

IFO

Form of matrix input. IFO = 6 must be specified for matrices selected by the K2GG,
M2GG and B2GG options. (Integer)
1 = Square
9 or 2 = Rectangular
6 = Symmetric

TIN

Type of matrix being input: (Integer)


1 = Real, single precision (One field is used per element.)
2 = Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)
3 = Complex, single precision (Two fields are used per element.) (not available)
4 = Complex, double precision (Two fields are used per element.) (not available)

TOUT

Type of matrix created (not used; enter 0).

POLAR

Input format of Ai, Bi. (Integer=blank or 0 indicates real, imaginary format; Integer > 0
indicates amplitude, phase format.)

NCOL

Number of columns in a rectangular matrix. Used only for IFO = 9. See Remarks 5 and 6
(Integer > 0)

GJ

Node identification number for column index. (Integer > 0)

CJ

Degree of freedom number for node point GJ. (1 < Integer < 6;)

Gi

Node identification number for row index. (Integer > 0)

Ci

Degree of freedom number for Gi for a grid point. (1<CJ < 6)

Ai, Bi

Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the matrix is
real (TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)

Remarks
1. Matrices may also be selected for all simulations by K2GG = NAME and M2GG = NAME.
2. The header entry containing IFO, TIN, and TOUT is required. Each nonnull column is started
with a GJ, CJ pair. The entries for each row of that column follows. Only nonzero terms need be
entered. The terms may be input in arbitrary order. A GJ, CJ pair may be entered more than once,
but input of an element of the matrix more than once produces a fatal message.
3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer 0.
4. For symmetric matrices (IFO = 6), a given off-diagonal element may be input either below or
above the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a fatal message is issued
if an element is input both below and above the diagonal.

DMIG 380
Direct Matrix Input

5. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and IFO = 9. The
number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all rectangular DMIG matrices
is always the number of nodal points.) The GJ term is used for the column index. The CJ term is
ignored.
6. If NCOL is not used for rectangular matrices, it is taken to be the maximum number of degrees of
freedom per node.
7. The matrix names must be unique among all DMIGs.
8. TIN should be set consistent with the number of decimal digits required to read the input data
adequately. For a single-precision specification on a short-word machine, the input is truncated
after about eight decimal digits, even when more digits are present in a double-field format. If
more digits are needed, a double precision specification should be used instead. However, note
that a double precision specification requires a D type exponent even for terms that do not need
an exponent. For example, unity may be input as 1.0 in single precision, but the longer form 1.0D0
is required for double precision.
Note:

In Marc, all matrices are stored as double precision.

381 K2GG, K2PP (Model Definition)


Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix

K2GG, K2PP (Model Definition)

Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix

Description
This option activates or deactivates a stiffness matrix defined by the DMIG option.
This option should be in the input file before the matrix is read in by the DMIG option.
Note:

If transformation or rigid body rotations of the stiffness matrix are to occur, all degrees of
freedom of the nodes must appear on the DMIG file.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word K2GG or K2PP.

11-20

2nd

Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.

21-25

3rd

Enter 0 or 1 to activate matrix.


Enter -1 to deactivate matrix.

26-35

4th

Enter scale factor; default is 1.0.

36-40

5th

Not used; enter 0.

41-45

6th

Enter 0 to suppress the transformation to the stiffness matrix although a


transformation has been applied to the node (default - this implies that the
stiffness matrix used is provided in the transformed system).
Enter 1 to apply transformations to the stiffness matrix.

46-50

7th

Enter first node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.

51-55

8th

Enter second node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.

56-60

9th

Enter third node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.

Remarks
1. DMIG matrices are not used unless selected.
2. Terms are added to the stiffness matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. A scale factor may be applied to the stiffness matrix specified here or to all stiffness matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CK2 entry.
4. If a transformation is to be applied to the stiffness matrix, the DMIG must contain all of the
degrees of freedom associated with the node to which the transformation is applied.
5. Large rotation DMIG is based upon the node numbers given in the 7th, 8th, and 9th fields. If only
the 7th field is used, then the rotation is based upon the rotation degrees of freedom of this node.
If all these nodes are specified, then a triad is formed, and the rotation of this triad is used.

M2GG, M2PP (Model Definition) 382


Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix

M2GG, M2PP (Model Definition)

Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix

Description
This option activates or deactivates a mass matrix defined by the DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixe

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word M2GG or M2PP.

11-20

2nd

Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.

21-25

3rd

Enter 0 or 1 to activate matrix.


Enter -1 to deactivate matrix.

26-35

4th

Enter scale factor; default is 1.0.

Remarks
1. DMIG matrices are not used unless selected.
2. Terms are added to the mass matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain a 6.
4. M2GG input must either be in consistent mass units or the COEFFICIENT model definition option,
CM2 entry may be used.

383 B2GG, B2PP (Model Definition)


Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix

B2GG, B2PP (Model Definition)

Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix

Description
This option activates or deactivates a damping matrix for dynamic or harmonic analysis defined by the
DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word B2GG or B2PP.

11-20

2nd

Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.

21-25

3rd

Enter 0 or 1 to activate matrix.


Enter -1 to deactivate matrix.

26-35

4th

Enter scale factor; default is 1.0.

Remarks
1. DMIG matrices are not used unless selected.
2. Terms are added to the damping matrix before any constraints are applied.
3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain the integer 6.
4. A scale factor may be applied to the damping matrix specified here or to all damping matrices via
the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CB2 entry.

P2G (Model Definition) 384


Selects Direction Input Load Vector

P2G (Model Definition)

Selects Direction Input Load Vector

Description
This option activates or deactivates a load vector defined by the DMIG option. This load vector may be
scaled by referencing a table which is a function of time.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the word P2G.

11-20

2nd

Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.

21-25

3rd

Enter 0 or 1 to activate the load vector.


Enter -1 to deactivate the load vector.

26-30

4th

Enter scale factor; default is 1.0.

31-35

5th

Enter a table ID.

Remarks
1. Terms are added to the load matrix before any constraints are applied.
2. The matrix must be rectangular in form (i.e., field 4 on DMIG entry - IFO -must contain the integer
9).
3. A scale factor may be applied to the vector specified here or to all vectors via the COEFFICIENT
model definition option entry.

385 BACKTOSUBS (Model Definition)


Recover Substructure Output

BACKTOSUBS (Model Definition)

Recover Substructure Output

Description
This option allows you to perform a displacement and stress calculation for the substructure. It can be
followed by output control options, such as PRINT ELEMENT, PRINT CHOICE, POST, etc.
The file containing the displacements of the external nodes is given using the -sid option when the job
is submitted.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word BACKTOSUBS.

MNF UNITS 386


MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units

MNF UNITS

MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units

Description
This option defines the units used to define the model. If this option is not included, default is SI units
(kilogram, meter, second, Newton). This option is only used for creating the MNF file.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word MNF UNITS.

Enter mass unit:

2nd data block


1-5

1st

1: kilogram
2: pound mass
3: slug
4: gram
5: ounce mass
6: kpound mass
7: megagram
8: dozen slug
6-10

2nd

Enter length unit:


1: kilometer
2: meter
3: centimeter
4: millimeter
5: mile
6: foot
7: inch

11-15

3rd

Enter time unit:


1: hour
2: minute
3: second
4: millisecond

387 MNF UNITS


MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units

Format
Fixed
16-20

Free
4th

Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter force unit:


1: newton
2: pound force
3: kilogram force
4: ounce force
5: dyne
6: kNewton
7: kpound force

STIFSCALE 388
Define Stiffness Scaling Factor

STIFSCALE

Define Stiffness Scaling Factor

Description
This option allows the contributions of an element stiffness and mass matrix to be scaled before including
them into the global stiffness matrix. The distributed loads associated with the element are also scaled.
Note that this is a scalar multiple; no transformation occurs.
Caution:

If you use this option, you must define the scale factor for all elements; the default is zero.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word STIFSCALE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter number of sets to be entered (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number from which the following data is read. Defaults
to input.

Enter scaling factor.

3rd data block


1-10

1st

4th data block


Enter a list of elements for which the above scaling is applied.

389 COEFFICIENT
Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices

COEFFICIENT

Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices

Description
This option allows you to put in global coefficients that can be used to either define or scale matrices. It
allows compatibility with MD Nastran PARAM of the same names that are used here.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word COEFFICIENT.

2nd data block


1-10

1st

Enter the value of ALPHA1 mass coefficient of Rayleigh Damping


(default=0.0). If the DAMPING model definition option is included, the
value entered here is ignored.

11-20

2nd

Enter the value of ALPHA2 stiffness coefficient of Rayleigh Damping


(default=0.0). If the DAMPING model definition option is included, the
value entered here is ignored.

21-30

3rd

Enter the value of CB1, factor applied to spring damping matrix. Default
is 1.0

31-40

4th

Enter the value of CB2, factor applied to damping DMIG, default is 0.0
unless, B2GG references DMIG.

41-50

5th

Enter the value of CK1, factor applied to element stiffness matrix, and
springs. Default is 1.0

51-60

6th

Enter the value of CK2, factor applied to Stiffness DMIG; default is 0.0
unless, K2GG references DMIG.

61-70

7th

Enter the value of CK3, factor applied to stiffness matrix from user
element (USELEM user subroutine). Default =1.0

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter table ID for ALPHA1.

6-10

2nd

Enter table ID for ALPHA2.

11-15

3rd

Enter table ID for CB1.

16-20

4th

Enter table ID for CB2.

21-25

5th

Enter table ID for CK1.

26-30

6th

Enter table ID for CK2.

31-35

7th

Enter table ID for CK3.

COEFFICIENT 390
Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

4th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the value of CM1 factor applied to element mass matrix, and mass
points. Default is 1.0

11-20

2nd

Enter the value of CM2, factor applied to Mass DMIG; default is 0.0
unless M2GG references DMIG.

21-30

3rd

Enter the value of CM3, factor applied to use-defined element mass


matrix. Default is 1.0

31-40

4th

Enter the value of CP1, factor applied to external loads, this is only
allowed if the ELASTIC parameter is included. Caution should be
exercised if the load is due to centrifugal effects, as this reflects a scaling
of the mass, not the rotational speed.

41-50

5th

Enter the value of CP2, factor applied to load DMIG; default is 0.0 unless
P2G references DMIG.

51-60

6th

Enter the value of CP3, factor applied to external load associated with
user-defined elements. Default is 1.0

61-70

7th

Enter the value of G, uniform structural coefficient in the formulation of


dynamic problems. Default is 0.0

5th data block


1-5

1st

Enter table ID for CM1.

6-10

2nd

Enter table ID for CM2.

11-15

3rd

Enter table ID for CM3.

16-20

4th

Enter table ID for CP1.

21-25

5th

Enter table ID for CP2.

26-30

6th

Enter table ID for CP3.

31-35

7th

Enter table ID for G.

6th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the value of W3, coefficient in damping matrix; default is 0.0,


indicating do not include term.

11-20

2nd

Enter the value of W4, coefficient in damping matrix; default is 0.0,


indicating do not include term.

7th data block


1-5

1st

Enter table ID for W3.

6-10

2nd

Enter table ID for W4.

391 COEFFICIENT
Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices

Remarks
1. If the DAMPING model definition option is used to specify different damping coefficients based
upon the element number, it is assumed to be active for all elements, and ALPHA1, ALPHA2, and
CB1 coefficients are ignored.
2. If the STIFSCALE model definition option is used to specify scale factors based upon the element
number, it is assumed to be active for all elements and the CK1, CK3, CM1, CM3, CP1, and CP3
coefficients are ignored.

DEACTIVATE (Model Definition) 392


Deactivate Elements

DEACTIVATE (Model Definition)

Deactivate Elements

Description
This option allows you to deactivate elements during the course of an analysis, which can be useful to
model ablation or excavation. By default, after the elements are deactivated, they demonstrate zero
stresses and strains on the post file. However, internally, they retain the stress state in effect at the time
of deactivation and this state can be postprocessed or printed at any time. At a later stage in the analysis,
the elements can again be activated with the ACTIVATE history definition option. As an alternative, you
can use the UACTIVE user subroutine. The stress state is restored on the post file when the elements are
reactivated. If this is not desirable, the stress/strain states can be permanently set to zero at deactivation
by using the additional command line option STRESS/STRAIN.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word DEACTIVATE.

11-20

2nd

Enter the word STRESS to set the stresses to zero.

21-30

3rd

Enter the word STRAIN to set the strains to zero.

31-40

4th

Enter the word POST to update the post file geometry so deactivated
elements are not shown.

41-50

5th

Enter the word NOPO to not update the post file geometry; the deactivated
elements are shown.

2nd data block


1-80

1st

Enter the list of elements to be deactivated at this time.

393 ERROR ESTIMATE


Create Error Estimation

ERROR ESTIMATE

Create Error Estimation

Description
You can request that Marc give information regarding the error associated with the finite element
discretization. There are two measures; the first evaluates the stress discontinuity between elements. A
large value implies that the stresses gradients are not accurately represented in the finite element mesh.
In a classical linear elastic solution, this could be resolved by choosing quadratic elements over linear
elements or refining the mesh.
The second error measure examines geometric distortion in the model. It first examines the aspect ratios
and warpage of the elements and in subsequent increments measures how much these ratios change. This
measure can be used to indicate if the original mesh is good and whether, at a later time, rezoning
is required.
The evaluation of the stress error measure is moderately expensive. The evaluation of the geometric error
measure is very inexpensive.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words ERROR ESTIMATE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter 1 if the stress measure is to be evaluated.

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 if the geometric measure is to be evaluated.

USDATA 394
Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization

USDATA

Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization

Description
This option invokes the call to the USDATA user subroutine for the initialization of user variables. These
variables (data) are stored in a common block USDACM that can be used in other user subroutines. This
option also provides for the definition of the amount of memory for the data in the common block in
REAL*4 words. If this memory is specified as nonzero, the data is automatically saved on the restart file
for use in subsequent analysis.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-6

1st

Enter the word USDATA.

11-15

2nd

Enter the number of REAL*4 words needed for the data stored in
common block USDAM via the USDATA user subroutine.

395
Program Control

Chapt Program Control


er 3: This section of the document describes various program control options. The information in this section
relevant to all types of analyses (mechanical, heat, Joule, bearing, acoustic, electrostatic,
Mode ismagnetostatic,
and electromagnetic). In particular, the CASE COMBIN option allows you to combine
separate load cases obtained from elastic analyses. The SOLVER option is used to control the solution
l
procedure of the linearized equations. The default is the direct solvers; as an alternative, the iterative
Defini solver can be chosen. The OPTIMIZE option is very important to minimize the computational cost of the
analysis, as the cost of analysis is proportional to the square of the size of the bandwidth. (Options POST,
tion
PRINT CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, PRINT SPRING, PRINT CONTACT, PRINT NODE, NODE SORT,
Optio SUMMARY, ELEM SORT, and UDUMP all control the amount and method that you can obtain the
resultant quantities.) The RESTART option is important for all nonlinear analysis or for postprocessing
ns
with Marc. As the solution to nonlinear problems is obtained using the incremental technique, the
RESTART option is used to stop the analysis (checkpoint) and then continue it at some later time.
The REAUTO option is used to overwrite previously defined control values upon restarting an analysis.
The POST option is used to control the database that is used by Marc Mentat and MD Patran

for postprocessing.

CASE COMBIN 396


Combine Load Cases

CASE COMBIN

Combine Load Cases

Description
This option allows you to combine different load cases for an elastic analysis. Each load case must be
stored on a RESTART file and then combined with other cases as a scalar multiple (LAMBDA) of itself.
All output element variables and nodal variables are combined.
This option can be used only in conjunction with the ELASTIC parameter. A new restart file of the
resulting combination is written as increment 0 if it is requested.
The use of the CASE COMBIN option precludes the addition of any further load cases in the same run.
Cases can only be combined from restart files.
This option can be used to perform the superposition of the results of a Fourier analysis at certain
locations around the circumference. The positions for which superposition is requested can be either
equally spaced or specified by you.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-11

1st

Enter the words CASE COMBIN.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of load cases to be read in and combined.

6-10

2nd

Number of stations for superposition of Fourier analysis. If input as a


positive number the stations are equally spaced around the circumference
starting at = 0. If preceded by a minus sign, the - values are read from
data lines.

3rd data block


Only used for Fourier result superposition and if the second integer on the 2nd data block is negative.
1-10

1st

Value of in degrees for first printout station.

11-20

2nd

Value of in degrees for second printout station.


Continuation data is in Format 8E10.0.

397 CASE COMBIN


Combine Load Cases

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

4th data block


The 4th data block is repeated for each load case.
1-5

1st

Increment number on restart file to be read for this load case.

6-10

2nd

Input file number for restart file to be read. Default is Unit 9.

11-20

3rd

LAMBDA Scalar multiplication factor to be used with this load case.


Default is 1.0.

SOLVER (Model Definition) 398


Specify Direct or Iterative Solver

SOLVER (Model Definition)

Specify Direct or Iterative Solver

Description
This option defines the solver to be used in the analysis. You can specify either the direct or iterative
solver. The choice of whether the in-core or out-of-core procedure is used is automatically determined
by Marc, based upon the amount of workspace required and the amount of memory that can be allocated.
You can also select whether a symmetric or nonsymmetric solver is used. Additionally, you can specify
if the solution of a nonpositive definite system is to be obtained.
For DDM, an out-of-core procedure is only available for solver type 8. As a convenience, it is necessary
to specify the control parameters for the decoupled pre-conditioner only in the first domain file.
When the iterative solver, type 2 or type 9, is chosen, additional parameters must be defined which are
used to control the accuracy.
Notes:It is not recommended to use the iterative solver type 2 for beam or shell models, because these
problems are ill conditioned, resulting in a large number of iterations. For a well-conditioned
system, the number of iterations should be less than the square root of the total number of degrees
of freedom in the system.
You control the maximum number of iterations allowed. If this is a positive number, Marc stops
if this is exceeded. If this is a negative number, Marc prints a warning and continues to the next
Newton-Raphson iteration or increment.
The Pardiso solver can only be used on shared memory computers.
The MUMPS solver can be used on either shared memory or distributed memory computers.
Solver types 6, 10, and 11 are not available on all hardware platforms. If the solver type is not
supported, solver type 8 is used.
Format
Format
Fixed
Free
1st data block
1-10
1st
2nd data block
1-5
1st

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter the word SOLVER.

Solver Type, enter:


0 for profile direct solver.
2 for sparse iterative.
4 for sparse direct solver
6 for hardware provided direct sparse solver
8 for multifrontal direct sparse solver.

399 SOLVER (Model Definition)


Specify Direct or Iterative Solver

9 for CASI iterative solver.


10 for mixed direct/iterative solver.
11 for Pardiso parallel direct solver.
12 for MUMPS parallel direct solver
6-10

2nd

Enter 1 for solving a nonsymmetric system. Only available for solver


types 0, 8, 11 and 12. (Not supported for DDM.)

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 if the solution of nonpositive definite system is to be obtained.

16-20

4th

Enter the solution procedure (0, 1, 2) when using DDM.


Solver Type

Procedure

D/I

N/A

D/I

11

12

I/I

D/I

I/I

N/A

Full K

D/I

I/I

Full K

Full K

Full K

Full K

I/I

Full K

Full K

I/I

D/I

D/I

D/I

I/I

D/I

D/I

where D/I means do a direct solve in the domains and an iterative solution
between the domains.
where I/I means do an iterative solution in the domains and an iterative
solution between the domains.
where Full K means form a complete stiffness matrix and use the parallel
direct solution.
21-25

5th

Maximum number of iterations in inter-domain iterative solver (default


is 500)

26-30

6th

Size of domain overlap for parallel CASI solver, default is 2. A negative


number turns off the overlap.

31-35

7th

Not used; enter 0.

36-40

8th

Enter, in millions, the number of four-byte words to be used by solver type


6, 8, or 10 before going out-of-core. Default is the same behavior as for
other solvers. For solver type 6, this option is only available on SGI. For
solver type 8 or 10, it is available on all platforms.

41-45

9th

Not used; enter 0.

46-50

10th

Used for parallel CASI solver to input coarse preconditioner type.


Enter 0 to use coarse preconditioner (default).
Enter -1 to not use coarse preconditioner.

51-55

11th

Not used; enter 0.

56-60

12th

Not used; enter 0.

61-65

13th

Not used; enter 0.

SOLVER (Model Definition) 400


Specify Direct or Iterative Solver

66-70

14th

Enter 1 to activate AUTOSPC when singularity occurs. This is only


applicable to the direct solvers except types 11 and 12.
Enter -1 to deactivate AUTOSPC.

71-75

15th

Not used; enter 0.

76-80

16th

For parallel CASI solver


Enter 1 for domain pre-conditioner (default)
Enter 2 for global preconditioner (uses more memory).

The 3rd data block is only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9 (CASI). It may
also be used with the solver type 10.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter maximum number of conjugate-gradient iterations. Default is 1000.


For solver type 10, set to 0.

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 if the previous solution is to be used as the initial trial solution.

11-15

3rd

Solver type 2:
Enter 3 for diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 4 for scaled-diagonal preconditioner.
Enter 5 for incomplete Cholesky preconditioner.
Solver type 9:
Enter 0 for CASI Primal Preconditioner.
Enter 1 for CASI Standard Preconditioner.
Solver type 10:
Enter 0; not used.

The 4th data block is only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9 (CASI). It may
also be used with solver type 10 if the 3rd data block is also entered. It may be used with DDM if the
inter-domain iterative solver is used (pre-conditioner type 0 or 3) in the 4th field of the 2nd data block.
4th data block
1-10

1st

Enter tolerance on conjugate gradient convergence for stress analysis.


The default for solver type 2 is 1.e-3.
The default for solver type 9 is 1.e-8.
The default for solver type 10 is 1.e-4.

When using the multifrontal direct sparse solver, one can specify the number of threads when submitting
a job by using the nthread command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nthread ntx

where ntx is the number of threads.

401 SOLVER (Model Definition)


Specify Direct or Iterative Solver

When using the Pardiso solver, one needs to specify the number of threads when submitting a job by
using the nthread command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nthread ntx

When using the MUMPS parallel solver, one needs to specify the number of processors when submitting
a job by using the nsolver command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nsolver nsx

where nsx is the number of processors.


It is also possible to use the MUMPS parallel solver in a distributed environment over several processors;
each of which has multiple CPUs/cores. One would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nsolver nsx -nthread ntx.

where ntx should be defined as the total numbers of processors.


When using the Pardiso solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:
SOLVER
11

Additionally, one needs to specify the number of threads when submitting a job by using the nthread
command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx -nthread ntx

where ndx is the number of domains and ntx is the number of threads. The default number of threads is
equal to the number of domains.
When using the MUMPS parallel solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:
SOLVER
12

Additionally, one needs to specify the number of processors when submitting a job by using the nsolver
command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx -nsolver nsx

where nsx is the number of processors. If the nsolver option is not given, then nsx = ndx.
When using the CASI iterative solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:
SOLVER
9

Additionally, one needs to specify the number of processors when submitting a job by using the nsolver
command line option. As an example, one would use:
run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx

OPTIMIZE 402
Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers

OPTIMIZE

Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers

Description
This option allows a choice of bandwidth optimizers to be invoked and is used to reduce computer costs
in larger problems. Note that this option creates an internal node numbering different from your node
numbering, but that all data input and output is in your node numbering system.
In addition, you can output the obtained correspondence table for later use. This correspondence table
can then be read in subsequent analyses.
In a deformable contact analysis, the bandwidth is re-optimized when the contact conditions change.
Note:

Gap elements can change the internal node numbers. This can result in a non-optimal node
numbering system.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-8

1st

Enter the word OPTIMIZE.

11-15

2nd

Enter:
2 Cuthill-McKee algorithm.
5 Read externally supplied correspondence table from unit specified in
the fifth field.
9 Sloan Algorithm (default).
10 Minimum Degree Algorithm (only available for sparse direct solver
- Solver Type 4).
11 Metis Nested Dissection Algorithm (only available for Multifrontal
Direct Sparse Solver - Solver Type 8 or 10).
Note:

If sparse direct solver is used, the minimum degree


Algorithm is used by default.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 to have optimized mesh (elements then nodes) written to a file.


(Not available for optimizer 11.)

21-25

4th

Unit number of optimized mesh file. Only used if the third field is set to
1. Default is 18 if left blank.

403 OPTIMIZE
Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

26-30

5th

Unit number of correspondence table. If the second field is not equal to 5


the correspondence table is written to this unit. If the second field is 5 then
the correspondence table is read from this unit. (Not available for
optimizer 11.)

31-35

6th

Print flag for correspondence table.


Set to 1 to suppress print out (default).
Set to 2 to print table.
0

Special treatment of nodes with LM for R-P Flow and gap elements
for all analysis types (default).

Special treatment for all nodes with LM, all analysis types.

No special treatment for nodes with LM.

Option 2 Cuthill-McKee
2nd data block
1-5

1st

Number of different numbering schemes to be tried. Usually less than 20.

Option 5 User-specified Correspondence Table


2nd data block
1st

Internal node numbers, continuation in 16I5 format on logical unit


number given in the fifth field of data block 1.

Option 9 Sloan Algorithm


No continuation data.
Option 10 Minimum Degree Algorithms
No continuation data.
Option 11 Metis Nested Dissection Algorithms
No continuation data.

POST (Model Definition) 404


Create File for Postprocessing

POST (Model Definition)

Create File for Postprocessing

Description
This option creates a postprocessor file for time-history or variable versus variable plots using Marc
Mentat or your own postprocessing. In the latter case, the file is accessed via the utility PLDUMP given
in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.
You have two possibilities for the post file in association with restarted runs:
a. If the POST option follows the RESTART option, Marc first copies the previous post file onto
the new post file (up to the restart increment), thus providing a continuous post file from the
beginning of the analysis. The old post file is closed after it has been read. It is important that
the POST option of the restart job requests the same post variables to be written to the post
file as requested in the previous data file. Otherwise, loss of data or I/O errors can occur.
b. If the POST option precedes the RESTART option, the new post file contains only those
increments analyzed in the current run.
One or the other options should be chosen if (B) is used, a continuous post file is not created, so that
(A) cannot subsequently be used for this analysis unless you combine the files with your own program.
Note:

In a modal or buckling analysis in addition to POST option, the RECOVER history


definition option must be used for storing eigenvectors on post file.

Element data is written to the post file for each integration point of a continuum element or for the
integration points on the layer requested; unless, either the CENTROID parameter is used or the average
value is requested via the 14th field.
Note:

The stresses/strains are generally engineering stresses/strains in an analysis involving only


small deformations. In a geometrically nonlinear analysis, if the total Lagrangian
formulation is used, the stresses and the strains are the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress and
the Green-Lagrange strains, respectively. You can always request to output Cauchy stresses
(post code 41-47 and 341) in the post file. If the updated Lagrangian formulation is used in
the large deformation analysis, the stresses and the strains are generally Cauchy stresses
and the logarithmic strains, respectively.

405 POST (Model Definition)


Create File for Postprocessing

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-4

1st

Enter the word POST.

Number of element variables to be written on the file (optional)

2nd data block


1-5

1st

For heat transfer, by default, the temperatures are written to a post file.
Enter -1 to suppresses this.
6-10

2nd

Unit number on which to open the new binary post file (jid.t16).
Defaults to unit 16 if left blank. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.

11-15

3rd

Unit number on which to open the previous binary post file (rid.t16)
for a restarted run. Defaults to unit 17 if left blank. Note that all data from
this file (up to the restart increment) is copied to the new file upon restart,
so that the post file is continuous from the start of the analysis, provided
the POST option follows the RESTART option.

16-20

4th

Set to 0 for binary post file.


Set to 1 for formatted post file.
Set to 2 for both binary and formatted post file.

21-25

5th

Set to 2 to generate a single post file in DDM runs. Defaults to multiple


post files.

26-30

6th

Unit number on which to open the new formatted post file (jid.t19).
Defaults to unit 19. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.

31-35

7th

Unit number on which to open the previous formatted post file for a restart
run. Defaults to unit 20. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.

36-40

8th

Set to 1 to convert restart file to post file with no analysis. Increments to be


converted are given in the third and eleventh field of RESTART model
definition section.

41-45

9th

Number of increments between writing of post data. Defaults to write post


file every increment.

46-50

10th

Number of user-defined post vectors.


Vector is defined UPOSTV in user subroutine. This field is only used for
7- and 8-style post files.

51-55

11th

Enter 7 to generate Marc K7 style post file.


Enter 8 to generate Marc 8 (not released) style post file.
Enter 9 to generate MSC.Marc 2000 style post file.

POST (Model Definition) 406


Create File for Postprocessing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Enter 10 to generate MSC.Marc 2001 style post file.
Enter 11 to generate MSC.Marc 2003 style post file.
Enter 12 to generate MSC.Marc 2005 style post file (default).
Enter 13 to generate MSC.Marc 2005r3 style post file.

56-60

12th

This field can be used for debugging purposes in a stress analysis:


Enter 0 if no iterative data is needed.
Enter 1 to get the iterative displacements.
Enter 2 to get the iterative displacements and reaction/residual forces.
Enter 3 to get the iterative displacements, reaction/residual forces and the
touched bodies in a contact analysis.
The iterative data is written as subincremental data.
Note:

61-65

13th

The use of this option can generate a huge post file since the
post data is written for every iteration.

Only for MSC.Marc 2000 and higher style post file.


Enter the total number of nodal post codes (including user-defined nodal
post codes).
If a 0 is entered a default set of nodal data is written on the post file,
depending on the analysis type.
If a -1 is entered, no nodal data is written.
Note:

66-70

14th

Displacements are not automatically written in the custom post


file unless explicitly chosen. Besides the chosen quantities, if
the deformation also needs to be visualized then the
displacements also need to be chosen as nodal quantities.

Enter 1 if per element only the average element integration point data
should be written on the post file. This might considerably reduce the size
of the post file, but some significant information might be lost.
The default is 0 where the element data is written on the post file for all
available integration points.

71-75

15th

Enter 1 if automatically generated extra nodes associated with element


types 80-84 and 155-157 do not appear on the post file.
The default is 0, where all the available nodes are written on the post file.

76-80

16th

Enter 1 to exclude forces caused by glued contact from the contact normal
and friction forces.
The default is 0 where the contact normal and friction forces also contain
the contributions due to glued contact.

407 POST (Model Definition)


Create File for Postprocessing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

Data blocks 3 and 4 are used for input of variables to be written on the post file. For 8- and lower style
post files, only element data can be selected and the nodal data is written by default. For 9- and higher
style post files, both element and nodal data can be selected. This data block is repeated for all selected
element variables, and, for 9- and higher style post files, all selected nodal variables.
3rd data block (POST Version 13)
Use for defining element post codes.
1-10

1st

Enter the word ELEMENT.

11-15

2nd

Enter an element post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-4.

16-20

3rd

Enter the layer number for shell elements or continuum composite


elements.
For post codes 471 and 481, enter the global identification number of the
rebar layer

21-68

4th

Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use
in postprocessing.

3rd data block (POST Version 12 and earlier)


1-5

1st

Enter an element post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-4.

6-10

2nd

Enter the layer number for shell elements or continuum composite


elements.
For post codes 471 and 481, enter the global identification number of the
rebar layer

11-35

3rd

Enter a 24-character label associated with this post code for use in
postprocessing.

4th data block


Use for defining nodal post codes.
1-10

1st

Enter the word NODAL.

11-15

2nd

Enter a nodal post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-5.

16-63

3rd

Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use
in postprocessing.

Data blocks 5, 6, and 7 are used for post file version 13 or higher to select elements and nodes to be
written on the post file. They are all optional. If none of the block is present, all elements are written in
the post file.
5a data block
1-10

1st

Enter the words SELECT ELEMENT

Enter a list of elements to be written to post file.

5b data block
1-80

1st

POST (Model Definition) 408


Create File for Postprocessing

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

6a data block
1-10

1st

Enter the words SELECT BODY

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if all elements of the selected contact body are placed on post file
(default)
Enter 2 if only the elements on the exterior surface are placed on the post
file.

6b data block
1-80

Enter a list of contact bodies, for which the elements are to be written to
post file.

For the 7th data block, these nodes are in addition to nodes based upon element selection; typically, it
would be used for nodes not associated with elements.
7a data block
1-10

1st

Enter the words SELECT NODE

Enter a list of nodes to be written to post file.

7b data block
1-80

409 POST (Model Definition)


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Element Post Codes

Codes

Description

1-6

Components of strain. For rigid-perfectly plastic flow problems, components of strain rate

Equivalent plastic strain (integral of equivalent plastic strain rate). For rigid-perfectly
plastic flow problems, equivalent plastic strain rate

Equivalent creep strain (integral of equivalent creep strain rate)

Total temperature

10

Increment of temperature

11-16

Components of stress

17

Equivalent von Mises stress

18

Mean normal stress (tensile positive) for Mohr-Coulomb

19

User-defined variable via the PLOTV user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines.

20

Thickness of element

21-26

Components of plastic strain

27

Equivalent plastic strain. =

28

Plastic strain rate

29

Total value of second state variable

30

Forming Limit Parameter: FLP = calculated major engineering strain/maximum major


engineering strain

31-36

Components of creep strain

37

Equivalent creep strain. =

38

Total swelling strain (from the VSWELL user subroutine)

39

Total value of third state variable

41-46

Components of Cauchy stress

47

Equivalent Cauchy stress

48

Strain energy density

49

Thickness strain for plane stress: Mooney or Ogden material

51-56

Real components of harmonic stress

57

Equivalent real harmonic stress

58

Elastic strain energy density

59

Equivalent stress/yield stress

60

Equivalent stress/yield stress (at current temperatures)

2
--- ijp ijp
3

2
--- ijc ijc
3

POST (Model Definition) 410


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Element Post Codes (continued)

Codes

Description

61-66

Imaginary components of harmonic stress

67

Equivalent imaginary harmonic stress

68

Plastic strain energy density

69

Current volume if the updated Lagrange procedure is used.

71-76

Components of thermal strain

78

Original volume

79

Grain size

80

Damage indicator for Cockroft-Latham, Oyane, and Principal Stress criteria, and criteria
using the UDAMAGE_INDICATOR user subroutine.

81-86

Components of cracking strain (only for stress analysis)

91-107

Failure indices associated with failure criteria

108-109

Interlaminar shear for thick composite shells (TSHEAR parameter must be present)

110

Interlaminar shear bond index for thick composite shells (only available if TSHEAR
parameter is present and Allowable Shear Bond Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the
COMPOSITE option) = max(Interlaminar shear components given by post codes 108 and
109)/SB

111-116

Components of stress in preferred coordinate system defined by the ORIENTATION option

121-126

Elastic strain

127

Equivalent elastic strain

128

Major engineering strain

129

Minor engineering strain

175

Equivalent viscoplastic strain rate (powder material)

176

Relative density (powder material) (Total volumetric strain based)

177

Void volume fraction (damage model)

178

Lemaitre damage factor

179

Lemaitre relative damage

189

Fictive temperature for Narayanaswamy Shift Function for thermal rheologically simple
viscoelastic material

<0

User-defined variable via the PLOTV user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User
Subroutines and Special Routines.

241

Gasket Pressure

242

Gasket Closure

243

Plastic Gasket Closure

411 POST (Model Definition)


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Element Post Codes (continued)

Codes

Description

244

Exponential powder parameter ()

245

Exponential powder parameter (x)

246

Current relative density based upon plastic volumetric strain.

251

Global components of Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1

254

Global components of Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1

257

Interlaminar shear bond index for composite solids (only available if Allowable Shear Bond
Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the COMPOSITE option) = magnitude of interlaminar
shear vector calculated by post code 254/SB

261

Beam axis (required if beam moment plots are created with Marc Mentat). Orientation axis
of CBUSH/CFAST elements 194 and 195.

264

Axial Force (for beam elements)

265

Moment Mxx (for beam elements)

266

Moment Myy (for beam elements)

267

Shear Force Vxz (for beam elements)

268

Shear Force Vyz (for beam elements)

269

Torque (for beam elements)

270

Bimoment (for beam elements)

301

Total strains tensor

311

Stress tensor

321

Plastic strain tensor

331

Creep strain tensor

341

Cauchy stress tensor

351

Real harmonic stress tensor

361

Imaginary harmonic stress tensor

371

Thermal strain tensor

381

Cracking strain tensor

391

Stresses in preferred direction tensor

401

Elastic strain tensor

411

Stress in global coordinate system tensor

421

Elastic strain in global coordinate system tensor

431

Plastic strain in global coordinate system tensor

441

Creep strain in global coordinate system tensor

POST (Model Definition) 412


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Element Post Codes (continued)

Codes

Description

451

Velocity strains (for fluids)

461

Elastic strain in preferred direction tensor

471

Global components of the rebar stresses in the undeformed configuration


(Second Piola-Kirchhoff). See Marc Volume B: Element Library for details.

481

Global components of the rebar stress in the deformed configuration (Cauchy). See Marc
Volume B: Element Library for details.

487

Rebar angle.

491

Stress-based error estimates

492

Strain-based error estimates

493

Plastic strain-based error estimates

494

Creep strain-based error estimates

501

Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element
Library for details.

511

Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element Library
for details.

531

Volume fraction of Martensite

541

Phase transformation strain tensor

547

Equivalent Phase Transformation strain


PH =
eq

548

Equivalent TWIN Strain


TWIN =
eq

549

2 3 ijTWIN ijTWIN

Equivalent TRIP Strain in the forward transformation


TRIP =
eq

551

2 3 ijPH ijPH

2 3 ijTRIP ijTRIP

Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Multiphase Aggregate:


PL =
eq

2 3 ijPL ijPL

552

Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Austenite

553

Equivalent Plastic Strain in the Martensite

557

Yield Stress of Multiphase Aggregate

601-617

Strength ratios based upon FAIL DATA failure modes.

621

Real Harmonic Strain Tensor

413 POST (Model Definition)


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Element Post Codes (continued)

Codes

Description

627

Equivalent Real Harmonic Strain

631

Imaginary Harmonic Strain Tensor

637

Equivalent Imaginary Harmonic Strain

641

Real Harmonic Curvature Tensor (for shell elements)

651

Imaginary Harmonic Curvature Tensor (for shell elements)

661

Real Harmonic Moment Tensor (for shell elements)

671

Imaginary Harmonic Moment Tensor (for shell elements)

681

Logarithmic Strain Tensor (for continuum elements)

691

Element Orientation Vector 1

694

Element Orientation Vector 2

697

Layer Orientation Angle

704

Real Harmonic Axial Force (for beam elements)

705

Real Harmonic Moment Mxx (for beam elements)

706

Real Harmonic Moment Myy (for beam elements)

707

Real Harmonic Shear Force Vxz (for beam elements)

708

Real Harmonic Shear Force Vyz (for beam elements)

709

Real Harmonic Torque (for beam elements)

710

Real Harmonic Bimoment (for beam elements)

714

Imaginary Component of Harmonic Axial Force (for beam elements)

715

Imaginary Component of Harmonic Moment Mxx (for beam elements)

716

Imaginary Component of Harmonic Moment Myy (for beam elements)

717

Imaginary Component of Harmonic Shear Force Vxz (for beam elements)

718

Imaginary Harmonic Shear Force Vyz (for beam elements)

719

Imaginary Harmonic Torque (for beam elements)

720

Imaginary Harmonic Bimoment (for beam elements)

721

Cauchy Stress Tensor in Preferred Coordinate System

731

Curvature Tensor (for shell elements)

741

Moment Tensor (for shell elements)

POST (Model Definition) 414


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Element Post Codes (continued)

Codes

Description

Post Codes for Heat Transfer Analysis


9 or 180

Total temperature

181-183

Components of temperature gradient T

184-186

Components of flux

271

Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysised solid (model C) or nonhomogeneous density

272

Volumetric Mass density of pyrolysis gas (model C)

273

Volumetric Mass density of liquid (model C)

274

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

275

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

276

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

277

278

279

g w

280

mg

281

s p

(Pyrolysis model C only)

282

s l

(Pyrolysis model C only)

283

s c

(Pyrolysis model C only)

eff

eff

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

(Pyrolysis model B or C)
Pyrolysis Volumetric Mass density of water vapor

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

Post Codes for Bearing Analysis


190

Pressure

191-193

Components of pressure gradient

194-196

Mass flux vector

Post Codes for Joule Heating Analysis


87

Voltage

88

Current density (per unit of cross-sectional area)

89

Thermal energy density (from electric current)

197-199

Components of electric potential gradient

577-579

Components of current density

Post Codes for Acoustic Analysis


190

Pressure

191-193

Components of pressure gradient

415 POST (Model Definition)


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Element Post Codes (continued)

Codes

Description

Post Codes for Electrostatic Analysis


130

Electric potential (V)

561-563

Components of electric field intensity (E)

564-566

Components of electric displacement (D)

Post Codes for Magnetostatic Analysis


140

Magnetic potential (2-D analysis only) (Az)

570

Lamination loss

571-573

Components of magnetic induction (B)

574-576

Components of magnetic field intensity (H)

Post Codes for Magnetostatic Thermal Analysis


89

Thermal energy density (from electric current and lamination loss)

570

Lamination loss

Post Codes for Transient Electromagnetic Analysis


561-563

Components of electric field intensity (E)

564-566

Components of electric displacement (D)

567-569

Components of Lorentz force (force per unit volume)

571-573

Components of magnetic induction (B)

574-576

Components of magnetic field intensity (H)

577-579

Components of current density (J)

Post Codes for Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis


131-133

Real components of electric field intensity (E)

134-136

Real components of electric displacement (D)

137-139

Real components of Lorentz force (force per unit volume)

141-143

Real components of magnetic induction (B)

144-146

Real components of magnetic field intensity (H)

147-149

Real components of current density (J)

151-153

Imaginary components of electric field intensity (E)

154-156

Imaginary components of electric displacement (D)

157-159

Imaginary components of Lorentz force (force per unit volume)

POST (Model Definition) 416


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Element Post Codes (continued)

Codes

Description

161-163

Imaginary components of magnetic induction (B)

164-166

Imaginary components of magnetic field intensity (H)

167-169

Imaginary components of current density (J)

Post Codes for Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)


561-563

Components of electric field intensity (E)

564-566

Components of electric displacement (D)

Post Codes for Harmonic Piezoelectric Analysis (Electrical Part)


131-133

Real components of electric field intensity (E)

134-136

Real components of electric displacement (D)

151-153

Imaginary components of electric field intensity (E)

154-156

Imaginary components of electric displacement (D)

Post Codes for Soil Analysis


171

Porosity

172

Void ratio

173

Pore pressure

174

Preconsolidation pressure

Post Codes for Cure and Cure Shrinkage Analysis


285

Degree of cure

286

Total cure reaction heat

287

Degree of cure shrinkage

288

Volumetric cure shrinkage of resin

289-294

Cure shrinkage strain components in global coordinate system

295-300

Cure shrinkage strain components in preferred coordinate system

581-586

Cure shrinkage strain tensor in global coordinate system

591-596

Cure shrinkage strain tensor in preferred coordinate system

Notes:

For heat transfer, code 9 is used for all heat transfer elements.
When using shells in heat transfer, it is important to enter a code for each layer in
chronological order if post file is to be correctly read by the INITIAL STATE or CHANGE
STATE options.

417 POST (Model Definition)


Create File for Postprocessing

Note that you do not need to select nodal values (that is, displacement, velocities and
accelerations, and temperature for a heat transfer run) as these are automatically written to
the post file.
Eigenmodes (dynamic analysis) and eigenvectors (buckling analysis) are written to
the post file only if indicated by the RECOVER or MODAL
INCREMENT/BUCKLE INCREMENT option.
Layered quantities for beams, shells, composite shells, composite solids, and
rebar quantities.
For many post codes, a layer number is required, and is conventionally one to the last layer
number in the element. Layer 1 is the top layer, layer 2 is the next layer, etc. for shells,
composite shells, bricks, or rebar elements. In many shell applications, the number of
layers in different elements is not the same. Two alternative mechanisms may be used to
specify the layer number:
I.The user can specify the following layer codes:
15000 - top layer
10000 - bottom layer
5000 - middle layer
If the number of layers in a shell is an even number, it will use (nlayer +1)/2 where
nlayer is the number of layers.
II.If the user specifies the layer ID for the composite elements, then the user must specify
the layer ID. This is useful in ply drop-off simulations.
Note that post codes 91-107 refer to failure indices for different failure criteria and post
codes 601-617 refer to associated strength ratios. More than 17 quantities are allowed in
the analysis but only the first 17 quantities are available for postprocessing. For example.
if three failure criteria (say, max. stress, Hoffman and Puck) are flagged, post codes 9197/601-607 would contain the six indices/ratios associated with maximum stress, post code
98 / 608 would contain the one index / ratio associated with Hoffman and post codes 99103 / 609-613 would contain the five indices / ratios associated with Puck criterion.

POST (Model Definition) 418


Create File for Postprocessing

Post codes 691 and 694 provide access to the first and second orientation vectors
respectively. These vectors depict the alignment of the material coordinate system at the
element level with respect to the global cartesian system. They are available for elements
that are either composites, or using materials that are orthotropic/anisotropic / requiring the
HOOKLW ANELAS user subroutines, or using the ORIENTATION option to identify the
material coordinate system. Note that these element orientation vectors are averaged across
all integration points of the element and presented as a single set of vectors at the element
centroid. They are always calculated on the current element geometry and any layer IDs
associated with post codes 691 and 694 are ignored. Note also that while the normal usage
of these post vectors is in conjunction with the ORIENTATION option, if no special material
orientation is provided, then they can also be used to obtain the element coordinate system
for orthotropic materials, composites, etc. For composites, post code 697 provides access
to the fiber angle in any layer. If used without any associated layer id, post code 697
provides access to all layer angles. Else, the user can obtain the angle for a specific layer L
by using 697,L as the post code. Note that if there are no composite elements, post code
697 is ignored. The orientation vectors on the post file are available for visualization in
Marc Mentat. Either element orientations or layer orientations can be plotted. Note that for
layer orientation vectors to be available for a set of layers, the associated layer orientation
angle should be available on the post file through post code 697.
For post codes 411, 421, 431, and 441, global quantities for shell elements are reported for
as many layers as requested and the same layer numbering system is used as for regular
shell quantities. Layer 1 is the top surface; layer 2 is the next surface, etc. This convention
is followed from MSC.Marc 2000 on.
Caution has to be exercised in interpreting the results when strain and/or stress tensors are
requested for beam and shell elements:
1. For most elements in this category (elastic beam elements 31, 52, 98 are exceptions),
stress tensors (post codes 311, 351, 361) or their associated component values (post
codes 11-16, 51-56, 61-66) and total strain tensor (post code 301) or its associated
component values (post codes 1-6) can be requested with or without an associated layer
number. When no layer number is requested, the generalized strains (stretches, shear
strains) are reported for the strain post values and generalized stresses (axial force,
shear forces) are reported for the stress post values. Generalized curvature strains and
generalized moments can be requested through post codes 641 and 651 for shells and
numerically integrated beams. Note that for shell elements, the generalized stresses are
forces per unit length. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a definition of the
generalized strain and stress output for each element type. When a layer number is
used, the actual strain and stress components at the requested layer are reported. Layer
number are ignored for post codes 641 and 651.

419 POST (Model Definition)


Create File for Postprocessing

2. For conventional (non-numerically integrated) elastic beams (types 31, 52, 98), there
are no layers - so only the generalized strains and stresses are reported for these
elements. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a definition of the generalized
strain and stress output for each element type. Equivalent quantities are not computed
for these element types since they do not make physical sense. The thermal strain tensor
(post code 371) or its associated components (post codes 71-76) are available.
3. For other stress tensors (post codes 341, 391, 411) and strain tensors (post codes 321,
331, 371, 381, 401, 421, 431, 441, 461), there are no generalized values and they can
only be requested for a particular layer. If no layer number is provided by the user, by
default, the tensors are reported for layer number 1. Numerically integrated solidsection beam elements (type 52 or 98) have layer numbers and from a postprocessing
perspective behave as open or closed section beams or shells.

POST (Model Definition) 420


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-5

Nodal Post Codes

Code
1 Displacement
2 Rotation
3 External Force
4 External Moment
5 Reaction Force
6 Reaction Moment
7 Fluid Velocity
8 Fluid Pressure
9 External Fluid Force
10 Reaction Fluid Force
11 Sound Pressure
12 External Sound Source
13 Reaction Sound Source
14 Temperature
15 External Heat Flux
16 Reaction Heat Flux
17 Electric Potential
18 External Electric Charge
19 Reaction Electric Charge
20 Magnetic Potential
21 External Electric Current
22 Reaction Electric Current
23 Pore Pressure
24 External Mass Flux
25 Reaction Mass Flux
26 Bearing Pressure
27 Bearing Force
28 Velocity
29 Rotational Velocity
30 Acceleration
31 Rotational Acceleration
32 Modal Mass

Description

421 POST (Model Definition)


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-5

Nodal Post Codes (continued)

Code
33 Rotational Modal Mass
34 Contact Normal Stress
35 Contact Normal Force
36 Contact Friction Stress
37 Contact Friction Force
38 Contact Status
39 Contact Touched Body
40 Herrmann Variable
41 solid (Pyrolysis Model B only)
42 M g (Pyrolysis Model B or C)
43 s p (Pyrolysis Model B only)
44 s l (Pyrolysis Model B only)
46 Tying Force
47 Coulomb Force
48 Tying Moment
49 Generalized Nodal Stress
50 Generalized Nodal Strain
51 Inertia Relief Load
52 Inertia Relief Moment
53 J-Integral
54 Stress Intensity, Mode I
55 Stress Intensity, Mode II
56 Stress Intensity, Mode III
57 Energy Release
58 Energy Release Rate I
59 Energy Release Rate II
60 Energy Release Rate III
61 Crack Growth Direction
62 Crack System Local X
63 Crack System Local Y
64 Crack System Local Z

Description

POST (Model Definition) 422


Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-5

Nodal Post Codes (continued)

Code

Description

65 Near Contact Distance


66 Breaking Index (Normal)
67 Breaking Index (Tangential)
68 Breaking Index
69 Delamination Index (Normal)
70 Delamination Index Tangential)
71 Delamination Index
72 Recession
73 Glue Deactivation Status
74 VCCT Failure Index
75 Remesh displacement (relative displacement between two models on the post file)
76 Lorentz Force
77 Wear Index
78 Wear Rate
<0 User-defined nodal quantity via the UPSTNO user subroutine.

Note: The contact status (code 38) can have the following values:
0 if a node is neither in contact nor has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
0.5 if a node is in near contact.
1 if a node is in true contact.
2 if a node has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.
The Touched Body (code 39) and the Near Contact Distance (code 65) are not available for
segment-to-segment contact.

423 LOADCASE (Model Definition)


Define Loadcase

LOADCASE (Model Definition)

Define Loadcase

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the
TABLE parameter to activate this input option.
Description
This option is used to specify the boundary conditions and initial conditions that are active in this
loadcase. This is used to activate or deactivate FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc., DIST LOADS,
DIST FLUXES, etc., POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc., FOUNDATION, FILMS, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL
VEL, INITIAL TEMP, etc. Boundary conditions not explicitly activated are deactivated.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word LOADCASE.

11-32

2nd

Enter the name of the loadcase (no blanks).

Enter the number of labels. This is required.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

3rd data block (Repeat as many times as specified on 2nd data block.)
1-32

1st

Enter the boundary condition or initial condition label.

33-40

2nd

Enter flag to control application of this boundary condition.


This is applicable to FIXED DISP, DIST LOADS, POINT TEMP, and
CHANGE STATE only.
If a time dependent table (independent variable types 1,2,3,4) is applied to
this boundary condition, this flag is ignored and the table is used to control
the temporal variations.
Enter 0 if load is applied instantaneously,
or if boundary condition has been previously activated, it
remains constant (default).
Enter 1 if point load, distributed load or kinematic load is to be
linearly changed from current magnitude to prescribed
magnitude,
or point temp is to be linearly changed from initial temp to
prescribed magnitude,
or change state is to be linearly changed from initial state
to prescribed state.

LOADCASE (Model Definition) 424


Define Loadcase

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Enter 2 if point load, distributed load or kinematic load is to be
linearly changed from zero to prescribed magnitude,
or point temp is to be linearly changed from initial temp to
prescribed magnitude,
or change state is to be linearly changed from initial state
to prescribed state.
If the boundary condition is not included in a subsequent
loadcase: point load, distributed load or kinematic load is
linearly reduced in magnitude to zero,
point temperature is linearly changed to the
initial temperature,
change state is linearly changed to the initial state.
Enter 3 if point load, distributed load or kinematic load is to be
linearly changed from zero to prescribed magnitude,
or point temp is to be linearly changed from initial temp to
prescribed magnitude,
or change state is to be linearly changed from initial state
to prescribed state.
If the boundary condition is not included in a subsequent
loadcase:
point load, distributed load is linearly reduced in
magnitude to zero,
kinematic displacements are to be instantaneously
removed, and the previous reaction force is linearly
reduced to zero,
point temperature is linearly changed to the
initial temperature,
change state is linearly changed to the initial state.
Enter -1 or -2 load is removed gradually.
point load, distributed load or kinematic load is linearly
reduced in magnitude to zero,
point temperature is linearly changed to the
initial temperature,
change state is linearly changed to the initial state.
Enter -3 load is removed gradually,

425 LOADCASE (Model Definition)


Define Loadcase

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
point load, distributed load is linearly reduced in
magnitude to zero,
kinematic displacements are to be instantaneously
removed, and the previous reaction force is linearly
reduced to zero,
point temperature is linearly ramped to the
initial temperatures,
change state is linearly ramped to the initial state.
Enter -4 Load is removed instantaneously,
point load, distributed load is instantaneously reduced to
zero,
kinematic displacements are to be instantaneously
removed, and the previous reaction force is linearly
reduced to zero,
point temperature is instantaneously changed to the initial
temperature,
change state is instantaneously changed to the
initial state.
When POINT TEMP is used, the initial temperatures are
prescribed in the INITIAL TEMP option.
When CHANGE STATE is used, the initial temperatures
are prescribed in the CHANGE STATE option.

TRACK 426
Enter a List of Points to be Tracked

TRACK

Enter a List of Points to be Tracked

Description
The analysis program creates a file containing information regarding the motion of a material particle
which is at the coordinate position of the node in the undeformed state. This file is then used by the
graphical user interface to visualize the motion of the point. It is also possible to track the material
behavior (equivalent stress and equivalent plastic strain). This can be used for time history plots. This
information is written to a file, jid.trk.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-5

1st

Enter the work TRACK.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of nodal lists. Default is 1.

6-10

2nd

Unit number to read list of nodes. Defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 0 if no quantities are to be tracked.


Enter 1 to track equivalent stress and equivalent plastic strain.
Enter -1 if quantities specified in the 3rd data block are to be tracked.

16-20

4th

Enter the body number which contains these nodes. This is optional, but
it does speed up the calculation.

3rd data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word QUANTITY.

11-15

2nd

Enter the element post code of the quantity to be tracked (see Table 3-4 in
the POST option description).

16-40

3rd

Enter a 24 character label associated with this quantity for use


in postprocessing.

4th data block


Enter a list of nodes to be tracked.

427 FLOW LINE


Define a Flow Line Grid

FLOW LINE

Define a Flow Line Grid

Description
This option allows you to define a grid (possibly independent of the original mesh) which is tracked
during the analysis. This information is written to the post file. This facilitates viewing the motion of the
material particles.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-9

1st

Enter the words FLOW LINE.

Enter 1 if original mesh is used as a grid (default).

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter 2 if Cartesian grid is used.


Enter 3 if flow line file is used. See Appendix G Flow Line File Format: for
the format of the .flw file.
Enter 4 if circular grid is used for 2-D analysis only. The initial diameter
will be 80% of the grid size specified in the 3rd data block.
6-10

2nd

Enter the body number to be flow lined.


Default is body 1.
Enter -1 to put flow lines on all bodies.

11-15

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

4th

Number of segments used to draw flow line.


Default =

5 for original mesh grid

= 100 for Cartesian grid


=

50 for circular grid

3rd data block


Required if a Cartesian or circular grid is used, Option 2 or 4.
1-5

1st

Enter 0 if Marc is to position grid.


Enter 1 if grid is to pass through a point specified in the 8th, 9th, or
10th field.

6-10

2nd

Enter the number of grid atoms in the x-direction.

FLOW LINE 428


Define a Flow Line Grid

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

11-15

3rd

Enter the number of grid atoms in the y-direction.

16-20

4th

Enter the number of grid atoms in the z-direction.

21-30

5th

Enter the grid spacing in the x-direction.

31-40

6th

Enter the grid spacing in the y-direction.

41-50

7th

Enter the grid spacing in the z-direction.

51-60

8th

Enter the x-coordinate of the reference point.

61-70

9th

Enter the y-coordinate of the reference point.

71-80

10th

Enter the z-coordinate of the reference point.

3rd data block


Required if flow line file is used, Option 3.
1-80

1st

Enter the flow line file name.

429 IRM
Intergraph Interface

IRM

Intergraph Interface

Description
This option allows you to generate an IRM file which is compatible with Intergraph. Two types of
quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses, strains, etc.)
can either be component values or invariant values or both. They are each an average value within the
element. The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points and a weighted average
is calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam and/or shell elements. If the
IRM option is used simultaneously with either or both of the SDRC and HYPERMESH options, internally the
program treats the data in a cumulative manner. For example, if stresses are requested for the Intergraph file
and creep strains are requested for the SDRC Universal file, both quantities are output into both files. The
Intergraph results file is named jid.g.
Note:

When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the Hypermesh results file, the
invariant element quantities are automatically written into the Intergraph results file.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data
block
1-4

1st

Enter the word IRM.

11-15

2nd

Enter the unit number to which to write file; default is 39.

16-20

3rd

Frequency to write out file (default to every increment).

If no element data is required, skip to the 4th data block.


2nd data block
1-10

1st

Enter the word ELEMENT.

Repeat 3rd data block as often as required.


3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter:
1

for stresses.

for total generalized strains.

for creep strains.

for thermal strains.

for plastic strains.

IRM 430
Intergraph Interface

Format
Fixed

6-10

Free

2nd

Data
Entry Entry

for strain energy.

for von Mises equivalent stress divided by the yield stress.

for failure indices.

Enter a layer number if shell elements.


If the value in the first field is a 2, enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Enter 0 for component values.


Enter 1 for invariants.
Enter 2 for component and invariant values.
Note:

When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the


Hypermesh results file, the invariant element quantities are
automatically written into the Intergraph results file.

If no nodal data is required, skip to the next model definition point.


4th data block
1-8

1st

Enter the word NODAL.

Repeat 5th data block as often as required


5th data block
1-5

1st

Enter:
1 for displacements.
2 for velocities.
4 for reaction forces.
5 for temperatures.
6 for generalized stresses.
7 for generalized strains.
8 for top/middle/bottom layer stresses.
9 for top/middle/bottom elastic strains.
10 for top/middle/bottom plastic strains.
11 for top/middle/bottom creep strains.
13 for eigenmodes.
14 for harmonic displacements and reactions.
Note:

If shell elements are not included in the model, specifying 8, 9,


10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component.

431 IRM
Intergraph Interface

Internals of IRM files


Element Data
CAT = ELEM
TYPE - A.B.C.D where A = S for stress
E for total strain
C for creep strain
T for thermal strain
P for plastic strain
B = C for component
I for invariant
C = 1 for 1st component
2 for 2nd component
3 for 3rd component
4 for 4th component
5 for 5th component
6 for 6th component
or
C = 1 for lowest principal
2 for intermediate principal
3 for highest principal
4 for Von Mises Intensity
5 for mean normal (hydrostatic)
6 for Tresca
D=

layer number

If strain energy is requested, then:


TYPE A.D where

A = ETT for total strain energy density


ETI for incremental strain energy density
EET for total elastic strain energy density
EEI for incremental elastic strain energy density
EPT for total plastic strain energy density
EPI for incremental plastic strain energy density
D = layer number

IRM 432
Intergraph Interface

If stress/yield stress is requested, then:


TYPE A.D where

A = SYI for stress/original yield stress


SYT for stress/yield stress at current temperature
D = layer number

If failure indexes are requested, then:


TYPE A.B.D where

A = FL
B = 1 to 6
D = layer number

Nodal Data
CAT = NODE
TYPE = A.B.C.
A= D

for displacement

for velocity

for acceleration

for reactions

for eigenmode

for magnitude of harmonic displacement

for phase of harmonic displacement

for magnitude of harmonic reaction

for phase of harmonic reaction

TEMP

for temperatures

GSC

for generalized stress components

GSI

for generalized stress invariants

GNC

for generalized strain components

GNI

for generalized strain invariants

TSC

for stress components, top layer

TSI

for stress invariants, top layer

MSC

for stress components, middle layer

MSI

for stress invariants, middle layer

BSC

for stress components, bottom layer

BSI

for stress invariants, bottom layer

433 IRM
Intergraph Interface

TEC

for elastic strain components, top layer

TEI

for elastic strain invariants, top layer

MEC

for elastic strain components, middle layer

MEI

for elastic strain invariants, middle layer

BEC

for elastic strain components, bottom layer

BEI

for elastic strain invariants, bottom layer

TPC

for plastic strain components, top layer

TPI

for plastic strain invariants, top layer

MPC

for plastic strain components, mid layer

MPI

for plastic strain invariants, mid layer

BPC

for plastic strain components, bottom layer

BPI

for plastic strain invariants, bottom layer

TCC

for creep strain components, top layer

TCI

for creep strain invariants, top layer

MCC

for creep strain components, mid layer

MCI

for creep strain invariants, mid layer

BCC

for creep strain components, bottom layer

BCI

for creep strain invariants, bottom layer

B= X

for the X direction

for the Y direction

for the Z direction

THX

for rotation about X

THY

for rotation about Y

THZ

for rotation about Z

Skipped if A is not D, V, A or R
C = 1 for 1st component
2 for 2nd component
3 for 3rd component
4 for 4th component
5 for 5th component
6 for 6th component

IRM 434
Intergraph Interface

Skipped if A is D, V, A, or R
I=

1 for minimum principle value


2 for intermediate principle value
3 for maximum principle value
4 for von Mises intensity
5 for dilatational value
6 for Tresca intensity

435 SDRC
SDRC I-DEAS Interface

SDRC

SDRC I-DEAS Interface

Description
This option allows you to generate a Universal file which is compatible with the SDRC I-DEAS program.
Two types of quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses,
strains, etc.) written into the Universal file are only the component values. Once the Universal file is read
into I-DEAS, the invariants are computed internally. They are each an average value within the element.
The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points and a weighted average is
calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam and/or shell elements. If the
SDRC option is used simultaneously with either or both of the IRM and HYPERMESH options, internally the
program treats the data in a cumulative manner. For example, if stresses are requested for the SDRC Universal
file and creep strains are requested for the Hypermesh results file, both quantities are output into both files.
The SDRC Universal file is named jid.unv.
In addition, if the SDRC Universal file is required, the element results can be output as element or
nodal variables. To output the element variables, use ELEMENT. To output the nodal variables, use
ELEMENT NODE.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-4

1st

Enter the word SDRC.

11-15

2nd

Enter the unit number to which to write file; default is 40.

16-20

3rd

Frequency to write out file (default to every increment).

If no element data is required, skip to the 4th data block.


Enter either the 2a data block or 2b data block.
2a data block
1-10

1st

Enter the word ELEMENT.

Enter the word ELEMENT NODE.

2a data block
1-10

1st

Repeat 3rd data block as often as required.

SDRC 436
SDRC I-DEAS Interface

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter:
1 for stresses.
2 for total strains.
3 for creep strains.
4 for thermal strains.
5 for plastic strains.
6 for strain energy.
7 for von Mises equivalent stress divided by the yield stress.
8 for failure indices.

6-10

2nd

Enter a layer number if shell elements.

If layer number equals zero, total generalized strain is output.


If no nodal data is required, skip to the next model definition point.
4th data block
1-8

1st

Enter the word NODAL.

Repeat 5th data block as often as required


5th data block
1-5

1st

Enter:
1 for displacements.
2 for velocities.
3 for acceleration.
4 for reaction forces.
5 for temperatures.
6 for generalized stresses.
7 for generalized strains.
8 for top/middle/bottom layer stresses.
9 for top/middle/bottom elastic strains.
10 for top/middle/bottom plastic strains.

437 SDRC
SDRC I-DEAS Interface

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
11 for top/middle/bottom creep strains.
13 for eigenmodes.
14 for harmonic displacements and reactions.
Note:

If shell elements are not included in the model, specifying


8, 9, 10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component.

HYPERMESH 438
HyperMesh Interface

HYPERMESH

HyperMesh Interface

Description
This option allows you to generate a results file which is compatible with HyperMesh. Two types of
quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses, strains, etc.)
written into the results file are both the component values and the invariant values. They are each an
average value within the element. The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points
and a weighted average is calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam
and/or shell elements. For writing of eigenmodes into the HYPERMESH results file, the Marc data file
should contain either the MODAL INCREMENT or the BUCKLE INCREMENT model definition option, as
appropriate, together with the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter. Do not use related history definition
options MODAL SHAPE, BUCKLE, or RECOVER. If the HYPERMESH option is used simultaneously with
either or both of the IRM and SDRC options, internally the program treats the data in a cumulative manner.
For example, if stresses are requested for the SDRC Universal file and creep strains are requested for the
Hypermesh results file, both quantities are output into both files. The HyperMesh results file is named
jid.hmr.
Note:

When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the HyperMesh results file, the
invariant element quantities are automatically written into the Intergraph results file.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-4

1st

Enter the word HYPERMESH.

11-15

2nd

Leave blank.

16-20

3rd

Frequency to write out file.

If no element data is required, skip to the 4th data block.


2nd data block
1-10

1st

Enter the word ELEMENT.

Repeat 3rd data block as often as required.


3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter:
1 for stresses.
2 for total generalized strains.
3 for creep strains.

439 HYPERMESH
HyperMesh Interface

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
4 for thermal strains.
5 for plastic strains.
6 for strain energy.
7 for von Mises equivalent stress divided by the yield stress.
8 for failure indices.

6-10

2nd

Enter a layer number if shell elements.

If the value in the first field is a 2, enter 0.


If no nodal data is required, skip to the next model definition point.
4th data block
1-8

1st

Enter the word NODAL.

Repeat 5th data block as often as required.


5th data block
1-5

1st

Enter:
1 for displacements.
2 for velocities.
3 for acceleration.
4 for reaction forces.
5 for temperatures.
6 for generalized stresses.
7 for generalized strains.
8 for top/middle/bottom layer stresses.
9 for top/middle/bottom elastic strains.
10 for top/middle/bottom plastic strains.
11 for top/middle/bottom creep strains.
13 for eigenmodesa.
Note:

If shell elements are not included in the model, specifying 8, 9,


10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component

For writing of eigenmodes into the HYPERMESH results file, the Marc data file should contain either the
MODAL INCREMENT or the BUCKLE INCREMENT model definition option, as appropriate, together with
the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter. Do not use related history definition options MODAL SHAPE,
BUCKLE, or RECOVER.

PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition) 440


Specify Output

PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition)

Specify Output

Description
This option allows you the control of the output from Marc. The data given here remains in control until
a subsequent PRINT CHOICE set is inserted such a set can be included with either the model definition
or with history definition data set. See also PRINT ELEMENT and PRINT NODE.
The default values print all elements and all nodes. Element quantities are printed at each integration
point or at the centroid only, depending on whether the CENTROID parameter is used. For shells,
only the extreme fibers are output, plus layers where the inelastic strains or state variables are nonzero.
For beams, fibers with inelastic strains or nonzero state variables are printed. In addition, section forces
are given for these elements. This option also allows debug output of certain items. The default is no
debug printout.
All of the above defaults are reset by the PRINT CHOICE option.
The PRINT CHOICE option has no effect on the post processor file.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-12

1st

Enter the words PRINT CHOICE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of sets of first and last element numbers to be printed (maximum


10).

6-10

2nd

Number of sets of first and last node numbers to be printed


(maximum 10).

11-15

3rd

Number of integration points to be printed in each element (not used if


CENTROID is flagged).

16-20

4th

Number of layers to be printed. This is for beams and shells only and
overrides the default described above.

21-25

5th

Increments between printout. Default is print every increment.

26-30

6th

Enter 1 for complex nodal quantities to be output as magnitude and phase,


otherwise real and imaginary components are given.

31-35

7th

Debug print flag. Enter a nonzero value and use data block 7.

36-40

8th

Log file flag. Enter unit number to which log file is to be written.

441 PRINT CHOICE (Model Definition)


Specify Output

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3rd data block


Include only if the first field of 2nd data block is not zero.
1-5

1st

First element in first set.

6-10

2nd

Last element in first set.

11-15

3rd

First element in second set.

16-20

4th

Last element in second set.

Etc.

5th

Etc. in I5 format.

4th data block


Include only if the second field of 2nd data block is not zero.
1-5

1st

First node in first set.

6-10

2nd

Last node in first set.

11-15

3rd

First node in second set.

16-20

4th

Last node in second set.

Etc.

5th

Etc. in I5 format.

5th data block


Include only if the third field of 2nd data block is not zero.
I

Enter the list of integration points to be printed in (16I5) format (number


of entries given in third field of data block 2). This is only used if
CENTROID is not flagged. Be careful with analyses with several different
element types.

6th data block


Include only if the fourth field of 2nd data block is not zero.
I

Enter the list of shell or beam fibers to be printed in (16I5) format. This
overrides Marc default, so you should be careful to not unintentionally
suppress plasticity or creep printout.

7th data block


Include only if the seventh field of 2nd data block is not zero
1-5

1st

16I5

Enter debug print flags. See the PRINT parameter.

PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) 442


Specify Elements to be Included in Output

PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) Specify Elements to be Included in Output


Description
This option allows you to choose which elements, and what quantities associated with an element are to
be printed. If you do not specify NODE on the first data line, these values are at the integration points.
This option can be used to print response quantities for the first 28 integration points of any element. This
suffices for all elements, except continuum composite elements (types 149 - 154, 175 - 180) which can
have as many as 2040 integration points. For print-outs at integration point numbers greater than 28 for
continuum composite elements, use PRINT CHOICE. If you specify the word NODE, these values are the
extrapolated nodal values. This extrapolation is currently not available for rebar elements, composite
continuum elements, semi-infinite elements, or cavity elements.
Note:

This option revokes any NO PRINT that precedes it. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by
PRINT ELEMENT and not followed by PRINT NODE results in the selected element
printout and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE with a blank node list to suppress
node output.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words PRINT ELEMENT.

11-20

2nd

Enter the word NODE (optional).

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets to be given below (optional).

6-10

2nd

Increment between printout. Default is print every increment.

11-15

3rd

File unit to which output is to be written. Defaults to standard output,


unit 6.

Data blocks 3, 4, and, if necessary, 5 and 6 are given once for each data set.
3rd data block
1-80

1st

Enter one or more of the following:


STRAIN

output total strain.

STRESS

output total stress.

PLASTIC

output plastic strain.

CREEP

output creep, swelling and viscoelastic strain.

THERMAL output thermal strain

443 PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition)


Specify Elements to be Included in Output

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
CREEP

output creep, swelling and viscoelastic strain.

THERMAL

output thermal strain

ENERGY

output of strain energy densities:


total strain energy
incremental total strain energy
total elastic strain energy
incremental elastic strain energy
plastic strain energy
incremental plastic strain energy

CRACK

output of cracking strain.

CAUCHY

output Cauchy stress.

STATE

output state variables.

PREFER

output stresses in preferred system.

ELECTRIC

output electric field and electric flux.

MAGNETIC output magnetic field and magnetic flux.


CURRENT

output current.

ALL

output of all of the above.

4th data block


Enter a list of elements to be printed.
Note:

To suppress all element print-out, enter a blank list for the list
of elements.

5th data block


If the NODE option is not specified on the 1st data block, enter a list of
integration points to be printed.
If the NODE option is specified on the 1 data block, enter a list of node
positions based upon the CONNECTIVITY option. These node positions
range from one to the maximum number of nodes per element.

PRINT ELEMENT (Model Definition) 444


Specify Elements to be Included in Output

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

6th data block


Enter a list of layers to be printed. This is only necessary if there are either
thin walled beam, shell, rebar, solid composite elements in the mesh, (that
is, element types 1, 4, 5, 8, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 22, 23, 24, 25, 45,46, 47,
48, 49, 50, 72, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 98, 138, 139, 140,
142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 165, 166,
167, 168, 169, 170, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180).
It is also necessary to include this data block if there are beam element
types 52 or 98 and they are used with integrated solid cross sections.

445 PRINT NODE (Model Definition)


Specify Nodes to be Included in Output

PRINT NODE (Model Definition)

Specify Nodes to be Included in Output

Description
This option allows you to choose which nodes and what nodal quantities are to be printed.
Note:

This option revokes any NO PRINT that precedes it. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by
PRINT NODE and not followed by PRINT ELEMENT results in the selected nodal output
and full element output. Use PRINT ELEMENT with a blank element list to suppress
element printout.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words PRINT NODE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets to be given below (optional).

6-10

2nd

Increment between printout. Default is print every increment.

11-15

3rd

File unit to which output is to be written, default to standard output, unit 6.

Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-80

1st

Enter one or more of the following:


INCR

output incremental displacement or potentials

TOTA

output total displacement or potentials

VELO

output velocity

ACCE

output acceleration

LOAD

output total applied load

REAC

output reaction/residual force

TEMP

output temperature

FLUX

output flux
Note:

MODE

Fluxes are only available if the parameter HEAT, 0,


0, 2 is used.

output eigenvector (modal or buckle)

STRESS output average generalized stresses at nodes

PRINT NODE (Model Definition) 446


Specify Nodes to be Included in Output

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
VOLT

output voltage (Joule analysis)

PRES

output pressure (bearing analysis)

COOR

output coordinates (for rezoning)

INER

output inertia relief load (for interia relief analysis)

ALL

output all relevant quantities

4th data block


Enter a list of nodes to be printed.
Note:

To suppress all nodal printout, enter a blank list for the list of nodes. The average nodal
generalized stresses are obtained via an extrapolation and averaging procedure. If there is
a geometric or material discontinuity at a node, this value is not correct unless either double
nodes are used with kinematic tying, or you control which elements are to be averaged
using the PRINT ELEMENT feature.

447 NO PRINT (Model Definition)


Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output

NO PRINT (Model Definition)

Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output

Description
This option suppresses element and nodal output.
Note:

This option is revoked by using either the PRINT CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, or PRINT
NODE options. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by a PRINT ELEMENT, for example, results
in element and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE or PRINT ELEMENT with blank node
or element lists to suppress all node or element output.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NO PRINT.

PRINT SPRING (Model Definition) 448


Controls the Print Out of Springs

PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)


Description
This option controls the output for selected springs.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word PRINT SPRING.

2nd data block


Enter a list of springs to be printed

Controls the Print Out of Springs

449 NO PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)


Deactivates the Printing of All Springs

NO PRINT SPRING (Model Definition)

Deactivates the Printing of All Springs

Description
This options suppresses the output of spring results.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word NO PRINT SPRING.

PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition) 450


Prints the Contact Body Summary

PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition)

Prints the Contact Body Summary

Description
This option ensures that the summary of contact information for each body is printed to the output file
even if the NO PRINT option is activated.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words PRINT CONTACT.

451 NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition)


Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout

NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition) Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout
Description
This option deactivates the output of the summary of contact information.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NO PRINT CONTACT.

GRID FORCE (Model Definition) 452


Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level

GRID FORCE (Model Definition)

Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level

Description
This option allows the user to output the contributions to the nodal force at either an element level or a
nodal level. This is useful when constructing a free body diagram of part of the structure. The Marc for
grid force balance is with respect to the global coordinate system. In Marc, the following contributions
are considered:
On an element level, the grid force balance is based upon the
Internal forces
Distributed Loads
Foundation Forces
Reaction Force
On a nodal basis, it is much more complete and includes
Internal Forces

Distributed + Point Forces

Foundation Forces

Spring Forces

Contact Normal Forces

Contact Friction Forces

Tying/MPC Forces

Inertia Forces

Damping Forces

DMIG Forces

Reaction Force
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word GRID FORCE.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Frequency (increments) between writing out the grid forces (default to


every increment).

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 if force output is based upon elements.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 if force output is based upon nodes.

16-20

4th

Enter 0 if grid force output is to be written to standard output (default).


Enter 1 if grid force output is to be written to file jid.grd.

21-25

5th

Enter the number of times that grid force should be output in a load case;
if 1 is entered, the output will occur at the last increment of the load case.

453 GRID FORCE (Model Definition)


Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3rd and 4th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)
3rd data block
1-10

1st

Enter the words SELECT ELEMENT.

4th data block


1-80

Enter a list of elements for which grid force output will be done

5th and 6th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)
5th data block
1-10

1st

Enter the words SELECT BODY.

6th data block


1-80

Enter a list of contact bodies; grid force on an element level will be given
for elements in these bodies.

7th and 8th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)
7th data block
1-10

1st

Enter the words SELECT NODE.

8th data block


1-80

Enter a list of nodes for which forces will be output on a nodal basis.

PRINT VMASS (Model Definition) 454


Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies

PRINT VMASS (Model Definition) Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies
Description
This option allows you to obtain printed output of element volumes, masses, costs and strain energies.
Options are provided for you to print the total quantities for each group of elements and the quantities for
each element in the group or the total quantities for each group of elements only.
In order to have correct mass computations, mass density for each element must be entered through one
of the material options. In order to have the correct cost, the cost per unit mass or the cost per unit volume
must be defined through the ISOTROPIC/ORTHOTROPIC option. The total strain energy and the plastic
strain energy, if applicable, are printed. Note that volumes and masses for some special elements (for
example, gap element, semi-infinite element, etc.) is not be computed. These quantities can be written on
either standard output file unit 6, or your specified unit.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-11

1st

Enter the words PRINT VMASS.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets to be given below.

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 for option to print only total volumes, masses, costs, and strain
energy for groups of elements. Default is 0.

11-15

3rd

File unit to which output is to be written; default to standard output, unit 6.

Either data block 3a or 3b may be used


3a data block
Enter a list of elements to be printed.
3b data block
Enter the negative of deformable body number (only one body number per
data block).

455 REAUTO
Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis

REAUTO

Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis

Description
Used for changing conditions on restart of a problem in an autoloading sequence, dynamics, creep, or
heat transfer.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word REAUTO.


This entry allows a reset of various parameters during restart. It can be
used to override previously set values in the middle of automatic load
incrementation. These values are originally set in the AUTO CREEP,
AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, DYNAMIC CHANGE, or
TRANSIENT. Only the nonzero values set here are used. For AUTO LOAD,
only the 3rd, 4th, and 5th fields are used; set other fields to 0.

2nd data block


1-10

1st

Time step size. The value should only be set in dynamic problems.

11-20

2nd

End value of time for this set of boundary conditions.

21-25

3rd

Total number of time steps in this set of boundary conditions or, for AUTO
LOAD, number of equal load increments. To immediately complete
previous set of load history data, set to 1.

26-30

4th

Not used, enter 0.

31-35

5th

Reassembly interval for mass and stiffness matrices; for linear problems,
set equal to the value given in the third field.

36-40

6th

Desired number of recycles for the AUTO INCREMENT option.

41-50

7th

Maximum step size in AUTO INCREMENT option.

51-60

8th

Current percentage of total load to be applied (AUTO TIME or AUTO


INCREMENT).

61-65

9th

Enter 1 to force remeshing immediately after restart. The meshing


parameters based upon the ADAPT GLOBAL option, before the END
OPTION, are used.
Enter 2 to force remeshing immediately after restart and user will provide
mesh file in jid_b*.mesh file in the format of a .t18 file.
Enter 3 to force remeshing immediately after restart and user will provide
mesh file in jid_b*.mesh file in the format of a .feb file.

REAUTO 456
Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Enter 4 to force remeshing immediately after restart and user will provide
the mesh file in jid_b*.mesh in the format of a standard Marc data file.

66-70

Notes:

10th

Enter 1 to force recalculation of radiation viewfactors immediately after


restart.

* is the remeshing body number.


When using REAUTO to read mesh files, you need to prepare mesh files for all defined
remeshing bodies.
Use ADAPT GLOBAL to read mesh files immediately after the restart. With this option, you
can select the remeshing body.

457 RESTART
Set Flags for Restart

RESTART

Set Flags for Restart

Description
This option sets up the flags for the restart files; both for the input of a previous restart file and for output
of a restart file from the current analysis. When the ELASTIC parameter is included, always restart at
increment 0.
The following points should be noted concerning the RESTART option.
A restart write frequency must be specified when a restart file is to be output. The analysis can

then be restarted from any increment at which restart has been written.
The restart file contains only those increments written during the current part of the analysis. The

restart file is not continuous because of the large volume of data that can be involved. If it were
written on the same file, the input/output time would be increased and also you might overflow
the file storage in large problems.
At restart, the data governing the increments (or increment set) next to be analyzed must follow
the END OPTION as incremental input data. Any file input, such as a file of temperature

increments describing a thermal history, must be skipped forward by you to the appropriate
point; that is, to the beginning of the increment of the new part of the analysis.
During any option set for a series of increments (AUTO CREEP, DYNAMIC CHANGE, AUTO
INCREMENT, AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, AUTO THERM CREEP, TRANSIENT), restart can be

effected and control parameters changed. Marc then continues to the end of the part of the
analysis specified by the option. You have the option to terminate such a part of the analysis
prematurely through the use of restart with the REAUTO option.
The RESTART INCREMENT history definition option can be used to modify parameters defined

in this option, or terminate the writing of a restart file.


The RESTART LAST option can be used to save only the last converged increment or to

periodically write restart data to individual files.


The old restart file is closed after it has been read.

The input data describing the problem is not saved, and therefore must be read in with each restart. This
should include the model geometry including CONNECTIVITY and the COORDINATES material
properties contact data and boundary conditions. Additional tables may be added, or they can have
additional data added. The RESTART option specifies restart parameters; for example, input/output files,
restart increment, and intervals at which restarts are to be written.

RESTART 458
Set Flags for Restart

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-7

1st

Enter the word RESTART.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Set to 1 to write out restart data on a file. Set to 2 to read restart data from
a file (that is, to restart a problem). Set to 3 to restart a problem and
continue writing restart data for subsequent restart.

6-10

2nd

Number of increments between writing of restart data. For example, to


write every three increments, set the second field to 3. This data is only
used if the first field is set to 1 or 3. Defaults to 1 if left blank.

11-15

3rd

Enter the increment at which the restarted problem run begins. Only used
if the first field of this data block is set to 2 or 3. The number here should
be the number given in the message:
RESTART DATA AT INCREMENT
i on TAPE j

which appears on the output of the previous run of the problem at the point
where the restart is desired.
Note:

The problem can only be restarted at such points. The frequency


of such points is determined by the data in columns 6 through
10 of this data block in the previous run of the problem.
A restarted run should, in principle, have the same parameters
as the original run. Only those parameters can be changed
which do not affect the storage allocation within Marc.

16-20

4th

Logical unit number for output of restart data; default logical unit number
is 8 if nothing is given here and the RESTART option is specified in the
parameters. Note that this file must be specified in the main program.

21-25

5th

Logical unit number for input of restart data from previous run; default is
9 if nothing is given here. Specify file in main program.

26-30

6th

Not used; enter 0.

31-35

7th

Not used; enter 0.

36-40

8th

Not used; enter 0.

41-45

9th

Not used; enter 0.

46-50

10th

Set to 1 to print out increment specified in the third field through


increment specified in the eleventh field. The job does not do any analysis.
This is to, for example, allow you to recover increments suppressed by
PRINT CHOICE.

459 RESTART
Set Flags for Restart

Format

Data
Entry Entry

Fixed

Free

51-55

11th

Set to last increment on restart file to be read. This is used in conjunction


with the tenth field above or the eighth field of the POST option.

56-60

12th

Enter the subincrement at which the restart problem begins. Defaults to


zero. This can be used to postprocess either eigenvectors or harmonics.

61-65

13th

Enter the last subincrement to be read. This is used in conjunction with the
tenth field above or the eighth field of the POST option.

RESTART LAST 460


Use Condensed Restart File

RESTART LAST

Use Condensed Restart File

Description
This option sets up the flags for a condensed restart file where only the last converged increment or some
specific increment is saved. It can also be used to write a restart file on separate files at a
specified frequency.
The input data describing the problem is not saved, and therefore must be read in with each restart. This
should include the model geometry including CONNECTIVITY and the COORDINATES material
properties contact data and boundary conditions. Additional tables may be added, or they can have
additional data added. The RESTART option specifies restart parameters; for example, input/output files,
restart increment, and intervals at which restarts are to be written.
Notes: Upon writing, the last converged increment is written to the restart file. Upon reading, this
increment is subsequently read in and the analysis continues. The restart file is closed after it
has been read. The REAUTO option can be used to terminate any multi-increment history
definition block.
The restart file name to store data at the last increment or at the end of analysis is jid.t08
by default. This file is overwritten when it is used. The file name to store data at specific
increment or increment intervals or at the end of each loadcase is jid.i_n.t08, n being the
increment number.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-12

1st

Enter the word RESTART LAST.

Set to 1 to write out last increment of restart data on a file.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter -1 to write out the last increment at the end of each loadcase and at
the end of the analysis.
Set to 2 to read restart data from a file (that is, to restart a problem).
Set to 3 to restart a problem and write out the last increment of restart data
for subsequent restart.
Enter -3 to restart a problem and write out the last increment at the end of
each loadcase and at the end of the analysis.
6-10

2nd

Logical unit number for output of restart data; default unit number is 8 if
nothing is given here.

461 RESTART LAST


Use Condensed Restart File

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Logical unit number for input of restart data from previous run; default is
9 if nothing is given here.
Enter frequency to write restart to individual files. The files will be named
jid_i_nn.t08 (where nn is the current increment).

If the number here is less than zero, its positive number is the specific
increment to write out the restart file. This option works when the first
field is set to -1 or -3.

UDUMP 462
Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing

UDUMP

Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing

Description
This option allows you to specify which nodes and elements can be referenced for postprocessing
through user subroutines. Nodal quantities are accessed through subroutine IMPD, element quantities are
accessed through the ELEVAR user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special
Routines). During harmonic subincrements, the ELEVEC user subroutine is used.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-5

1st

Enter the word UDUMP.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

First element, defaults to 1.

6-10

2nd

Last element, defaults to last element in mesh.

11-15

3rd

First node, defaults to 1.

16-20

4th

Last node, defaults to last node in mesh.

463 SUMMARY (Model Definition)


Create Summary Report

SUMMARY (Model Definition)

Create Summary Report

Description
This option produces a summary of the results of the increment and outputs them in a report format. This
option is in effect until a NO SUMMARY option is encountered. The summary consists of the maximum
and minimum of temperatures, stresses, strains, plastic strains, creep strains, displacements, velocities,
accelerations and reaction forces. The option also produces a detailed accounting of both the memory
usage and timing information.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word SUMMARY.

11-15

2nd

Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output,
unit 6.

16-20

3rd

Enter the increment frequency of summary, default is every increment.

NO SUMMARY (Model Definition) 464


Do Not Create Summary

NO SUMMARY (Model Definition)

Do Not Create Summary

Description
This option turns off the summary feature. The default is off unless the SUMMARY option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NO SUMMARY.

465 ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition)


Sort Element Results

ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition)

Sort Element Results

Description
This option allows various element quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This
option is in effect until a NO ELEM SORT option is encountered. This option allows you to sort either in
ascending or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute
value. A range can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words ELEM SORT.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block, as given


below, defines each sort.

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number to read sort data.

11-15

3rd

Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output, unit
6.

16-20

4th

Enter the increment frequency, default is every increment.

3rd data block


The 3rd data block is repeated once for each sort.
1-5

1st

Enter code indicating type of quantity to be sorted (see Table 3-6).

6-10

2nd

Enter 0 for sort in descending order. Enter 1 for sort in ascending order.
Default is 0; sort in descending order.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value.


Enter 0 for sort by absolute value. Default is 0; sort by absolute value.

16-20

4th

Enter number of items to be included in sorted list.

21-25

5th

Enter lowest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.

26-30

6th

Enter highest element number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last


element in mesh.

ELEMENT SORT (Model Definition) 466


Sort Element Results

Table 3-6

Element Sort Codes

Code

Description

Code

Description

1 first stress

28 fourth plastic strain

2 second stress

29 fifth plastic strain

3 third stress

30 sixth plastic strain

4 fourth stress

31 equivalent plastic strain

5 fifth stress

32 mean plastic strain

6 sixth stress

33 Tresca plastic strain

7 equivalent stress

34 first principal plastic strain

8 mean stress

35 second principal plastic strain

9 Tresca stress

36 third principal plastic strain

10 first principal stress

37 first creep strain

11 second principal stress

38 second creep strain

12 third principal stress

39 third creep strain

13 first strain

40 fourth creep strain

14 second strain

41 fifth creep strain

15 third strain

42 sixth creep strain

16 fourth strain

43 equivalent creep strain

17 fifth strain

44 mean creep strain

18 sixth strain

45 Tresca creep strain

19 equivalent strain

46 first principal creep strain

20 mean strain

47 second principal creep strain

21 Tresca strain

48 third principal creep strain

22 first principal strain

49 temperature

23 second principal strain

61 voltage

24 third principal strain

73 first gradient

25 first plastic strain

74 second gradient

26 second plastic strain

75 third gradient

27 third plastic strain

467 NO ELEM SORT (Model Definition)


Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element

NO ELEM SORT (Model Definition)

Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element

Description
This option turns off the ELEM SORT feature. The default is off unless the ELEM SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NO ELEM SORT.

NODE SORT (Model Definition) 468


Sort Nodal Results

NODE SORT (Model Definition)

Sort Nodal Results

Description
This option allows various nodal quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This option
is in effect until a NO NODE SORT is encountered. NODE SORT allows you to sort either in ascending
or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute value. A range
can be given over which to sort.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NODE SORT.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter number of sorts to be performed (optional). One data block as given


below defines each sort.

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number to read sort data.

11-15

3rd

Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output, unit
6.

16-20

4th

Enter the increment frequency, default is every increment.

3rd data block


The 3rd data block is entered once for each sort.
1-5

1st

Enter code indicating type of quantity to be sorted (see Table 3-7).

6-10

2nd

Enter 0 for sort in descending order. Enter 1 for sort in ascending order.
Default is 0, sort in descending value.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value. Enter 0 for sort by absolute value.
Default is 0, sort by absolute value.

16-20

4th

Enter number of items to be included in sorted list.

21-25

5th

Enter lowest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to 1.

26-30

6th

Enter highest node number of range to be sorted. Defaults to last node in


mesh.

469 NODE SORT (Model Definition)


Sort Nodal Results

Table 3-7
Code

Node Sort Codes


Meaning

1-12 sort code I

Result
Results in the Ith component of the incremental displacement to
be sorted.

13-34 sort code I +12

Results in the Ith component of the total displacement to be sorted.

25-36 sort code I + 24

Results in the Ith component of the velocity to be sorted.

37-48 sort code I + 36

Results in the Ith component of the acceleration to be sorted.

48-60 sort code I + 48

Results in the nodal temperature to be sorted.

61-72 sort code I + 60

Results in the Ith component of the reaction force to be sorted.

71-84 sort code I + 72

Results in the Ith component of the contact force to be sorted.

101 101

Sort on magnitude of incremental displacement.

102 102

Sort on magnitude of total displacement.

103 103

Sort on magnitude of velocity.

104 104

Sort on magnitude of acceleration.

105 105

Sort on magnitude of temperature.

106 106

Sort on magnitude of reaction force.

107 107

Sort on magnitude of contact force.

NO NODE SORT (Model Definition) 470


Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes

NO NODE SORT (Model Definition)

Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes

Description
This option negates the NODE SORT option. The default is off unless the NODE SORT option has been
previously invoked.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words NO NODE SORT.

471 DESIGN OBJECTIVE


Define Objective Function to be Optimized

DESIGN OBJECTIVE

Define Objective Function to be Optimized

Description
This option defines the objective function for the optimization process. It is not needed for a pure
sensitivity analysis run. If it is specified for a pure sensitivity analysis run, the gradient of the objective
function is also computed. Currently, the only option is to minimize the objective function.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-16

1st

Enter the words DESIGN OBJECTIVE.

Enter one of the following:

2nd data block


N/A

1st

MATERIAL VOLUME
MATERIAL MASS
MATERIAL COST
USER DEFINED
Note:

For MATERIAL MASS, the mass density, and for MATERIAL


COST, the material unit cost should be defined with the
material data (for example, see ISOTROPIC)
For USER DEFINED, you need to modify the user subroutine
uobjfn.f. This routine is self-explanatory together with an
example.

DESIGN VARIABLES 472


Define Variable Design Parameters

DESIGN VARIABLES

Define Variable Design Parameters

Description
This option defines the design variables. If a sensitivity analysis is required, the derivative of the response
with respect to each design variable and the element contributions to the response are reported. If an
optimization analysis is performed, then the design variables are modified to optimize the objective
function. The option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-15

1st

Enter the words DESIGN VARIABLES.

Data blocks 2 through 5 are repeated


for each design variable.
2nd data block
N/A

1st

Enter design variable set ID (optional). In general, this is not the same as
design variable numbers assigned by Marc and defined in the output.

N/A

2nd

Enter, as appropriate, one of the words GEOMETRY, MATERIAL, or


COMPOSITE.

N/A

3rd

For GEOMETRY, enter one of the following:


CTHIC

constant thickness over element

AREA

cross-sectional area

IXX

moment of inertia Ixx

IYY

moment of inertia Iyy

BMHEI

beam height

BMWID beam width


RADIU

radius

WLLTH

wall thickness

For MATERIAL, enter one of the following:


YNGMD Youngs modulus (isotropy)
YNG11

Youngs modulus E11

YNG22

Youngs modulus E22

YNG33

Youngs modulus E33

473 DESIGN VARIABLES


Define Variable Design Parameters

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
POISR

Poissons ratio (isotropy)

PSR12

Poissons ratio 12

PSR23

Poissons ratio 23

PSR31

Poissons ratio 31

SHR12

Shear modulus G12

SHR23

Shear modulus G23

SHR31

Shear modulue G31

MASSD

Mass density

For COMPOSITE, enter one of the following:

N/A

4th

LYRTH

layer thickness (the layer thickness option needs to be


selected in the 3rd field of the 3rd data block under the
COMPOSITE model definition option.)

PLYAN

ply angle

Enter related composite group number if applicable.

3rd data block


N/A

1st

Enter lower bound for value of variable.

N/A

2nd

Enter upper bound for value of variable.

Enter one of the following:

4th data block


N/A

1st

LINKED or UNLINKED.
N/A

2nd

Enter one of the following:


ELEMENTS, MATERIALS, or LAYERS, depending on the second field
in the 2nd data block.

5th data block


N/A

Enter a list of elements if the second field of the 4th data block is
ELEMENTS.
Enter a list of material IDs if second field of the 4th data block is
MATERIALS.
Enter a list of layer numbers if second field of the 4th data block is
LAYERS.

DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS 474


Define Limits on Displacement Response

DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS

Define Limits on
Displacement Response

Description
This option is used to specify displacement constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization
process. The option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-19

1st

Enter the words DESIGN DISPLACEMENT.

Data blocks 2 through 7 are repeated for each displacement constraint group.
2nd data block
N/A

1st

Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE where needed;
for example, ABSOLUTE TRANSL1):
TRANSL1

translation parallel to first axis

TRANSL2

translation parallel to second axis

TRANSL3

translation parallel to third axis

ROTATN1

rotation about first axis

ROTATN2

rotation about second axis

ROTATN3

rotation about third axis

RESTRAN

resultant translation

RESROTA

resultant rotation

DIRTRAN

translation along a vector

DIRROTA

rotation about a vector

DIRLTRA

relative translation along a vector

DIRLROT

relative rotation about a vector

RLTRAN1

relative translation 1 (first axis)

RLTRAN2

relative translation 2 (second axis)

RLTRAN3

relative translation 3 (third axis)

RLROTA1

relative rotation 1 (first axis)

RLROTA2

relative rotation 2 (second axis)

RLROTA3

relative rotation 3 (third axis)

475 DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS


Define Limits on Displacement Response

Format
Fixed
N/A

Free
2nd

Data
Entry Entry
A

Enter either:
< (for less than or equal to)
or
> (for greater than or equal to)

N/A

3rd

Enter the bound with the correct sign

The 3rd data block is only used if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is DIRTRAN, DIRROTA,
DIRLTRA, DIRLROT; otherwise, it is skipped.
3rd data block
N/A

1st

Enter first component of vector.

N/A

2nd

Enter second component of vector.

N/A

3rd

Enter third component of vector.


Note:

Marc extracts the direction cosines.

4th data block


N/A

1st

Enter the words LOAD CASES.

Enter a list of load cases for which this constraint is prescribed.

Enter the word NODES.

5th data block


N/A
6th data block
N/A

1st

7th data block


N/A

If first field of 2nd data block does not begin with RL, enter the list of
constrained nodes.
If first field of 2nd data block begins with RL, enter the first and second
node numbers which are constrained relative to one another.

DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS 476


Define Limits on Stress Response

DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS

Define Limits on Stress Response

Description
This option is used to specify stress constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization process. The
option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-13

1st

Enter the words DESIGN STRESS.

Data blocks 2 through 7 are repeated


for each stress constraint group.
2nd data block
N/A

1st

Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE where needed;
for example, ABSOLUTE STRESS1):
STRESS1
STRESS2
The stress components as defined for each
element separately in Marc Volume B: Element
Library (see below for generalized stresses).

STRESS3
STRESS4
STRESS5
STRESS6
VOMSTRS

von Mises equivalent stress

OSHSTRS

octahedral shear stress

MAPSTRS

maximum absolute principal stress

PRSTRS1

algebraically highest (first) principal stress

PRSTRS2

second principal stress

PRSTRS3

third principal stress

TRESTRS

Tresca equivalent stress

STRESSV

normal stress along a vector

SHSTRSP

maximum shear stress on a plane

477 DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS


Define Limits on Stress Response

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
GENSTS1
GENSTS9

N/A

2nd

generalized stresses
1 through 9
obtained by integration through thickness of
layered elements as defined in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.

Enter either:
< (for less than or equal to)
or
> (for greater than or equal to)

N/A

3rd

Enter the bound with the correct sign.

The 3rd data block is only used if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is STRESSV or SHSTRSP;
otherwise, it is skipped.
3rd data block
N/A

1st

Enter first component of vector.

N/A

2nd

Enter second component of vector.

N/A

3rd

Enter third component of vector.


Note:

Marc extracts the direction cosines.

4th data block


N/A

1str

Enter the words LOAD CASES.

5th data block


N/A

Enter a list of load cases for which this constraint is prescribed.

6th data block


N/A

1st

Enter the word ELEMENTS.

7th data block


N/A

Enter the list of constrained elements.

DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS 478


Define Limits on Strain Response

DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS

Define Limits on Strain Response

Description
This option is used to specify strain constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization analysis. The
option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-13

1st

Enter the words DESIGN STRAIN.

Data blocks 2 through 6 are repeated for each constraint group.


2nd data block
N/A

1st

Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE if needed; for
example, ABSOLUTE STRAIN1):
STRAIN1
STRAIN2
STRAIN3
STRAIN4

The strain components as defined


for each element separately in
Marc Volume B: Element Library.

STRAIN5
STRAIN6
VOMSTRN von Mises equivalent strain
MAPSTRN maximum absolute principal strain

N/A

2nd

PRSTRN1

algebraically highest (first) principal strain

PRSTRN2

second principal strain

PRSTRN3

third principal strain

TRESTRN

Tresca equivalent strain

Enter:
< (for less than or equal to)
or
> (for greater than or equal to)

N/A

3rd

Enter the bound with the correct sign.

Enter the words LOAD CASES.

3rd data block


N/A

1st

479 DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS


Define Limits on Strain Response

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

4th data block


N/A

Enter a list of load cases for which this constraint is prescribed.

5th data block


N/A

1st

Enter the word ELEMENTS.

6th data block


N/A

Enter the list of constrained elements.

DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS 480


Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response

DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS

Define Limits on
Eigenfrequency Response

Description
This option is used to specify free vibration frequency constraints for a design sensitivity or design
optimization case. The option can be used more than once.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-16

1st

Enter the words DESIGN FREQUENCY.

Data blocks 2 though 4 are repeated for each constraint group.


2nd data block
N/A

N/A

1st

2nd

Enter one of the following words:


FRQCYCL

frequency in cycles per unit time

FRQRADS

frequency in radians per unit time

FGPCYCL

difference or gap in frequency between any two modes to


be prescribed; in cycles per unit time

FGPRADS

difference or gap in frequency between any two modes to


be prescribed; in radians per unit time

Enter either:
< (for less than or equal to)
or
> (for greater than or equal to)

N/A

3rd

Enter the bound. This is always positive.

Enter the word FREQUENCIES.

3rd data block


N/A

1st

4th data block


N/A

1st

If the constraint is on the frequencies of modes, enter a list of constrained


mode numbers.
If the constraint is on the difference between the frequencies of two modes,
enter the numbers of the two modes.

481
Mechanical Analysis

Chapt Mechanical Analysis


er 3: This section is the first of four sections describing the input format for mechanical analysis. This section
analysis controls and boundary conditions. The three subsequent sections concentrate on
Mode describes
material properties, rate effects, and dynamic analysis.
l
The CONTROL option is required in all nonlinear analysis. It governs the number of increments and the
Defini accuracy associated with the analysis. This section also discusses the procedures for J-integral calculation
in fracture mechanics.
tion
The boundary conditions available for performing mechanical analysis are:
Optio
Kinematic constraints of either zero or specified displacements.
ns
Surface, volumetric or nodal loads.
Thermal loads.
Foundation support.
Surface contact.

These boundary conditions can be specified using a variety of techniques. The boundary conditions
when given here in the model definition sections represent the total quantities to be applied in the
zeroth increment. Mechanical loads are scaled if the SCALE parameter is included so that the model is
at impending yield. Note that thermal loads are not scaled. In addition, as the zeroth increment is
treated as linear elastic, the applied boundary conditions should not produce either material or
geometry nonlinearities.

CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) 482


Control Option for Stress Analysis

CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) Control Option for Stress Analysis


Description
This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for nonlinear
analysis. For heat transfer analysis, see the CONTROL (Heat Transfer) history definition option in
Chapter 4, History Definition Options.
For coupled thermal-stress analysis, data block 6 must be used.
For coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, data block 7 must be used.
For nonlinear static analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.
They do not appear on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-7

1st

Enter the word CONTROL.

11-20

2nd

Enter the word STRUCTURAL. (required in a multiphysics analysis)

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Maximum number of load steps/increments in this run. Default is 9999.


This is a cumulative number and is usually used to stop the run when
restart is being used. If an ELASTIC parameter is included, this field is
ignored and all load cases are analyzed.

6-10

2nd

Maximum number of recycles/increments during an increment for


plasticity, or other tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 3. This
should usually be increased to 10 for rigid-plastic flow option.
If a negative number is entered, Marc does a maximum of the absolute
value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is
given and Marc proceeds to the next increment. This is not recommended.

11-15

3rd

Minimum number of recycles during an increment for plasticity or other


tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 0.
Note:

This data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all
subsequent increments.

Caution: This value is overwritten by the PROPORTIONAL


INCREMENT option.
16-20

4th

Flag for convergence testing.


0 or left blank Convergence is achieved when residuals satisfy
the criterion.

483 CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition)


Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
1 Convergence is achieved when displacements satisfy
the criterion.
2 Convergence is achieved when strain energy satisfies
the criteria.
4 Convergence is achieved when either residual or
displacement satisfies the criterion.
5 Convergence is achieved when both residual and
displacement satisfies the criterion.
Notes:

Testing on relative displacements or strain energy always


requires at least one iteration. If nonlinear analysis is done
with the CENTROID parameter, the residuals are not
calculated and testing is always done on displacements.
Nonlinear analysis with the CENTROID parameter is not
recommended.
If the fields are set as 0, 1, or 2, only the 3rd data block is
needed.
If the fields are set as 4 or 5, the 3a data block is also
needed. In this case, the 3rd data block is set for residual
testing and 3a data block is set for displacements
check only.

21-25

5th

Flag to specify relative or absolute error tolerance and whether checking


is on component values or magnitude of vector.
Enter imag+irel where:
Irel = 0

Testing is done on relative error.

Irel = 1

Testing is done on absolute value.

Irel = 2

Testing is done on relative error testing unless reactions or


incremental displacements are below minimum value, in
which case absolute tolerances testing is used.

Imag = 0

Component value

Imag = 10

Component values

Imag = 20

Use magnitude of vector

This entry is consistently used for displacements, rotations, forces, and


moment testing.
26-30

6th

Iterative procedure flag.


1 Full Newton-Raphson (default).
2 Modified Newton-Raphson (no reassembly
during iteration).

CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) 484


Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
3 Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification (see
Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information).
8 Secant method.

31-35

7th

Nonpositive definite flag.


If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system is forced.
Note:

With use of gap and Herrmann elements, the matrix always is


nonpositive definite and this entry has no significance.

36-40

8th

No longer used; enter 0.

41-45

9th

To print convergence control messages to log file, enter 1.

46-50

10th

Control on initial stress stiffness.


0 Normal-full contribution.
1 For Mooney material, reduce contribution of hydrostatic
pressure on initial stress stiffness according to:
initial = f r p I

where initial is the stress tensor used in the initial stress


stiffness matrix, is the current stress tensor, f r is entered
through the PARAMETERS option, p is the hydrostatic
pressure and I I is a unit tensor.
2 No initial stress stiffness.
3 Use stress at beginning of increment, not last iteration.
4 Results in the inclusion of only the positive stresses in the
initial stress stiffness during the equilibrium iteration.
Besides faster convergence, this leads to a stable analysis
of very thin shell structures.
51-55

11th

Control parameter:
0 Do not allow switching of convergence testing between
residuals and displacements.
1 Allow switching of convergence testing between residual
and displacements if reaction forces or displacements
become extremely small. For more details, see Marc
Volume A: Theory and User Information.
Note:

Set this parameter to 0 if any kind of absolute value testing is


being used.

485 CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition)


Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format

Data
Entry Entry

Fixed

Free

56-60

12th

Assembly flag. If set to 1, the stiffness matrix is assembled each iteration.


Note that this switches off the modified Newton-Raphson procedure if
chosen in the sixth field of this data block.

61-65

13th

For some material models, such as damage, cracking, and Chaboche,


there is an inner iteration loop to insure accuracy. The maximum number
of iterations allowed can be set here.
Default is 50.

3rd data block


Include if residual testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 0, 4, or 5.
1-10

1st

If relative residual checking:


Maximum allowable value of maximum residual force divided by
maximum reaction force.
Default is 0.10.

11-20

2nd

If relative residual checking:


Maximum allowable value of maximum residual moment divided by
maximum reaction moment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on
residual moment occurs.

21-30

3rd

If relative residual checking:


Minimum reaction force, if reaction force is less than this value, checking
is bypassed or absolute testing is performed.

31-40

4th

If relative residual checking:


Minimum moment: if moment is less than this value, checking is
bypassed or absolute testing is performed.

41-50

5th

If absolute residual testing:


Maximum value of residual force.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual force takes place.

51-60

6th

If absolute residual testing:


Maximum value of residual moment.
Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual moments
takes place.
If absolute displacement testing, maximum value of rotation increment.
Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking or rotations take place.

61-70

7th

Rigid Link Rotation Tolerance:

CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) 486


Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
Maximum allowable value of the change in rotation increment at the
retained nodes of RBE2, rigid link (tying type 80) or beam-shell offset
nodes. Default is 0.001 radians.

Notes:

If the 4th field of the 2nd data block is 4 or 5, the rigid link rotation tolerance entered in
the 4th data block circumvents the corresponding value in the 3rd data block.
The rigid link rotation tolerance if left at 0, is reset to 0.001 radians by the Marc solver to
ensure backward compatibility for RBE2.Theare two ways to by-pass the link
rotation check: the rigid link rotation tolerance can be set to a negative number, or the
rigid link rotation tolerance can be left as 0.0 with an additional FEATURE,5701 added to
the parameter section of the input.

4th data block


Include if displacement testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 1, 4, or 5.
1-10

Maximum allowable value of the change in displacement increment


divided by the displacement increment.
Default is 0.10.

11-20

2nd

Maximum allowable value of the change in rotational increment divided


by the rotational increment.
Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on change in rotational
increment occurs.

21-30

3rd

Minimum displacement, if displacement increment is less than this value,


checking is bypassed or absolute testing is performed.

31-40

4th

Minimum rotation: if rotation increment is less than this value, checking


is bypassed.

41-50

5th

Maximum value of displacement increment.


Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on displacements takes place.

51-60

6th

Maximum value of rotation increment.


Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on rotations takes place.

61-70

7th

Rigid Link Rotation Tolerance:


Maximum allowable value of the change in rotation increment at the
retained nodes of RBE2, rigid link (tying type 80) or beam-shell offset
nodes. Default is 0.001 radians.

Notes:

If the 4th field of the 2nd data block is 4 or 5, the rigid link rotation tolerance entered in
the 4th data block circumvents the corresponding value in the 3rd data block.
The rigid link rotation tolerance if left at 0, is reset to 0.001 radians by the Marc solver to
ensure backward compatibility for RBE2.Theare two ways to by-pass the link
rotation check: the rigid link rotation tolerance can be set to a negative number, or the
rigid link rotation tolerance can be left as 0.0 with an additional FEATURE,5701 added to
the parameter section of the input.

487 CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition)


Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

5th data block


Include if energy testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 2.
1-10

1st

Maximum allowable value of the change is energy increment.


Default is 0.1.

6th data block


Only necessary for coupled thermal-mechanical analysis and the first data block does not have the word
STRUCTURAL.
1-10

1st

Maximum nodal temperature change allowed. Used to control automatic


time step scheme for heat transfer.
Default value of 20.

11-20

2nd

Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are reevaluated and matrices reassembled.
Default value of 100.

21-30

3rd

Maximum error in temperature estimate used for property evaluation.


This control provides a recycling capability to improve accuracy in highly
nonlinear heat-transfer problems (for example, latent heat, radiation
boundary conditions).
Default is 0, which bypasses this test. Set to maximum temperature error
which is considered acceptable.
Note:

Only the temperature estimate error (3rd field) is checked for


the TRANSIENT NON AUTO fixed stepping procedure. All three
fields are checked for the transient adaptive stepping procedure.
None of the three fields are checked for the auto step adaptive
stepping procedure.

31-40

4th

Not used; enter 0.

41-50

5th

Maximum change of xsi,p allowed in pyrolysis calculation. Used to


control automatic time step scheme.

51-60

6th

Maximum change of xsi,v allowed in pyrolysis calculation. Used to


control automatic time step scheme.

61-70

7th

Maximum change of xsi,c allowed in pyrolysis calculation. Used to


control automatic time step scheme.

71-80

8th

Maximum change in surface displacement per time step due to recession.


This is used to control the time step for the TRANSIENT option.

7th data block

CONTROL (Mechanical - Model Definition) 488


Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

Only necessary for coupled electrostatic structural analysis and the first data block does not have the
word STRUCTURAL.
1-10

1st

Maximum allowed relative error in residual charge.

11-20

2nd

Maximum allowed absolute error in residual charge.

489 PARAMETERS (Model Definition)


Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

PARAMETERS (Model Definition)Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis


Description
There are many parameters that are used in the finite element calculations. These parameters can be
customized for your particular application. Some of these constants can be entered in other input blocks
as well. The last nonzero value is used for the calculation.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word PARAMETERS.

Enter the scale factor which, when multiplied with the incremental strain,
is used to predict the incremental strain in the next increment.

2nd data block


1-10

1st

Default is 1.0.
11-20

2nd

Enter the multiplier used to calculate the penalty factor to impose


boundary conditions. The penalty factor is this multiplier times the
maximum diagonal value of the operator matrix. Default multiplier is
1 x 109. If the APPBC parameter is used, this option is not used.

21-30

3rd

Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in rigid plastic


analysis for plane strain, axisymmetric, or solid analysis when
displacement elements are used.
Default is 100.

31-40

4th

Enter the penalty factor used to satisfy incompressibility in fluid analysis


when displacement elements are used.
Default is 1 x 106.

41-50

5th

Beta parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmark-beta


procedure.
Default is 0.25.

51-60

6th

Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Newmarkbeta procedure.


Default is 0.50.

61-70

7th

Gamma1 parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step


Houbolt procedure.
Default is 1.5.

PARAMETERS (Model Definition) 490


Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Format
Fixed
71-80

Free
8th

Data
Entry Entry
E

Gamma parameter used in transient dynamic analysis using Single Step


Houbolt procedure.
Default is -0.5.

3rd data block


1-10

1st

Enter the angle at which a node separates from a convex corner or


becomes stuck in a concave corner for two-dimensional contact.
Default is 8.625.

11-20

2nd

Enter the angle at which a node separates from a convex corner or


becomes stuck in a concave corner for three-dimensional contact.
Default is 20.0.

21-30

3rd

Enter the initial strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.


Default is 1 x 10-4.

31-40

4th

Enter the cutoff strain rate for rigid plastic analysis.


Default is 1 x 10-12.

41-50

5th

Enter the fraction of the hydrostatic pressure that is subtracted from the
stress tensor in the initial stress calculation. See the tenth field of the
CONTROL option.
Default is 1.0

51-60

6th

Enter the factor used to calculate the drilling mode for shell elements type
22, 75, 138, 139, and 140.

Default is 0.0001.
61-70

7th

Enter the scale factor to the initial incremental displacements estimate for
the increment after a rezoning increment. The default value is 1.0, which
usually improves friction convergence, but may result in an inside-out
element.

4th data block (Optional)


1-10

1st

Universal gas constant (R). Default is 8.314 J mol-1K-1.

11-20

2nd

Offset temperature between user units and absolute temperature.


Default is 273.15; that is, user input in Centigrade.
If user temperature is in Kelvin (K) or Rankine (R), enter a negative value.
The offset temperature is then set to zero.

21-30

3rd

Thermal Properties Evaluation Weight.


Default is 0.5

491 PARAMETERS (Model Definition)


Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Format
Fixed
31-40

Free
4th

Data
Entry Entry
E

Surface projection factor for single step Houbolt.


Default is 0.0.

41-50

5th

Stefan Boltzmann Constant.


Default is 5.67051 x 10-8 W/m2K4.

51-60

6th

Planks second constant.


Default is 14387.69 MK.

61-70

7th

Speed of light in a vacuum.


Default is 2.9979 x 1014 M/s

71-80

8th

Maximum change in the incremental displacement in a Newton-Raphson


iteration.
Default is 1 x 1030.

5th data block (Optional)


1-10

1st

Initial friction stiffness (only for friction models 6 and 7). This stiffness
will be used during the first cycle of an increment to define the friction
stiffness matrix in cases where a touching node has a zero normal force
and the amount of sliding does not exceed the elastic sticking limit.
If set to zero, Marc will estimate the initial friction stiffness based on
the initial average stiffness of the contact body to which the touching
node belongs.

11-20

2nd

Specifies the minimum value that indicates a singularity if a direct solver


is used. If a zero is given, that this value is set internally by Marc and
depends on the solver being used.

21-30

3rd

Specify the maximum change in temperature per iteration in radiation


simulations. This is useful to stabilize the solution. The default is 100.

31-40

4th

Enter parameter alphaf for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.


Note that the value of alphaf defined here may be overruled by defining
the spectral radius on the 6th field.

41-50

5th

Enter parameter alpham for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.


Note that the value of alpham defined here may be overruled by defining
the spectral radius on the 6th field.

PARAMETERS (Model Definition) 492


Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Format
Fixed
51-60

Free
6th

Data
Entry Entry
E

Define the spectral radius S for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.
The following conventions apply:
0 S 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and alphaf and alpham

are calculated based upon the spectral radius according to


alphaf = - S /(1+ S ) and alpham = (1-2 S )/(1+ S )
S = 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and neither alphaf nor
alpham will be changed
S = 2 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and the values of alphaf
and alpham will be optimized for a dynamic contact analysis
S = 3 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and the values of alphaf
and alpham will be optimized for an analysis without dynamic

contact
S = 4 : use the values of alphaf and alpham as entered on the 4th

and 5th field


61-70

7th

RBE3 conditioning number. If the conditioning number is greater than


this value, the RBE3 is probably singular and a warning message is
printed. If the value is negative, the analysis is stopped. Default is 1 x 106.

6th data block (Optional)


1-10

1st

Lowest temperature for elastic temperature dependent material check.

11-20

2nd

Highest temperature for elastic temperature dependent material check.

21-30

3rd

Permeability of vacuum.
Default is 0 = 1.25664 10 6 Hm 1

31-40

4th

Permittivity of vacuum.
Default is 0 = 8.85419 10 12 Fm 1

41-50

5th

Limit angle for segment-to-segment contact. If the angle between the


normal vectors of two segments is smaller than this limit angle, then these
segments will not come into contact. Default value is 120 degrees.

493 MATUDS
Provide Additional Data for Material User Subroutines

MATUDS

Provide Additional Data for Material User Subroutines

Description
This option is used to define a material user subroutine to be associated with a material ID and to pass
additional data into the user subroutine. This will activate the call to the md_ version of the user
subroutine. See Volume D for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Type Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word MATUDS.

2nd data block


1-10

1st

Enter the user subroutine name.

11-15

2nd

Enter the material ID, if zero, the user specified subroutine will be used
for all materials for which it is applicable.

16-20

3rd

Enter the value of IOPT

21-25

4th

Enter the number of auxiliary integer data

26-30

5th

Enter the number of auxiliary real data

31-35

6th

Enter the number of auxiliary character data

36-40

7th

Print out flag


Set to 0 to not print auxiliary data (default)
Set to 1 to print out auxiliary data

3rd data block


Repeat as necessary, maximum of 16 integers per line
1-5

1st

First auxiliary integer data

4th data block


Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 reals per line
1-10

1st

First auxiliary real data

5th data block


Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 character strings per line
1-10

1st

First auxiliary character string ,etc

CONUDS 494
Provide Additional Data for Contact User Subroutines

CONUDS

Provide Additional Data for Contact User Subroutines

Description
This option is used to define a contact user subroutine to be associated with a contact body and to pass
additional data into the user subroutine. This will activate the call to the md_ version of the user
subroutine. See Volume D for more details.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Type Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the word CONUDS.

2nd data block


1-10

1st

Enter the user subroutine name.

11-15

2nd

Enter the contact body ID, if zero, the user specified subroutine will be
used for all contact bodies for which it is applicable.

16-20

3rd

Enter the value of IOPT

21-25

4th

Enter the number of auxiliary integer data

26-30

5th

Enter the number of auxiliary real data

31-35

6th

Enter the number of auxiliary character data

36-40

7th

Print out flag


Set to 0 to not print auxiliary data (default)
Set to 1 to print out auxiliary data

3rd data block


Repeat as necessary, maximum of 16 integers per line
1-5

1st

First auxiliary integer data

4th data block


Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 reals per line
1-10

1st

First auxiliary real data

5th data block


Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 character strings per line
1-10

1st

First auxiliary character string ,etc

495 FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)


Define Fixed Displacement

FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)

Define Fixed Displacement

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the
TABLE parameter to activate this input option.
Description
This data block defines potential fixed displacements, including the magnitude, degrees of freedom and
applied locations, and associates it with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition is activated
or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The boundary conditions are
specified either by giving the kinematic displacement, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of
nodal numbers or a list of surfaces. The prescribed displacements are with respect to the degrees of
freedom associated with the element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system
using either the TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or
UTRANFORM options.
The FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter
nonuniform time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Note:

In static analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to remove
all rigid body modes.
It is advised that boundary conditions not be placed on nodes which might come into
contact. Using a symmetry rigid body is preferred.
Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the
non-table driven input instead.

Further detail is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. See Marc Volume B: Element
Library, for a definition of the degrees of freedom for each element type.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words FIXED DISP.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of sets of boundary condition data to be read (optional).

6-10

2nd

Unit number to read data default is the standard input file.

Data blocks 3 through 10 are repeated for each set.

FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) 496


Define Fixed Displacement

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3rd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of geometric types used to define boundary condition,


default is 1. See 9th and 10th data blocks.

6-10

2nd

Enter 0 if no user subroutine required.


Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines are required for this
boundary condition.

11-15

3rd

Enter 0 if real value given.


Enter 1 if complex value given as real and imaginary numbers.
Enter 2 if complex value given as magnitude and phase.

16-20

4th

Enter the Fourier series number associated with prescribed displacement,


enter 0 if no Fourier series.

21-25

5th

Enter a 0 if total displacements are to be given (default).


Enter a 1 if incremental displacements relative to the position at the
beginning of this loadcase are to be given.

26-30

6th

Not used.

31-63

7th

Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label
will be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.

If a real displacement is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 are used.


If a complex harmonic displacement is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or
the magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.
4th data block - Magnitudes
1-10

1st

Prescribed displacement for first degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

11-20

2nd

Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data


block 8.

21-30

3rd

Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 8.


A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified.

5th data block - Table IDs


1-5

1st

Enter the table ID for the first degree of freedom listed.

6-10

2nd

Enter the table ID for the second degree of freedom listed.

11-15

3rd

Enter the table ID for the third degree of freedom listed.

The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.

497 FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical)


Define Fixed Displacement

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

6th data block - Imaginary Component or Phase Angle


1-10

1st

Prescribed imaginary component of displacement or the phase of the first


degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

11-20

2nd

Prescribed imaginary component of displacement or the phase of the


second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

21-30

3rd

Prescribed imaginary component of displacement or the phase of the third


degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

7th data block - Table IDs for Imaginary Component or Phase Angle
1-5

1st

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the first degree
of freedom listed.

6-10

2nd

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second
degree of freedom listed.

11-15

3rd

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the third degree
of freedom listed.

8th data block


Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed
displacements are prescribed.
Note:

List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.

The 9th and 10th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd
data block, 1st field.
9th data block
1-5

1st

Enter the geometry type:


1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
3: Volume/Region/Body IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
11: Element-Edges IDs
12: Element-Faces IDs
13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention
14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention

FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) 498


Define Fixed Displacement

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

10th data block


Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions
are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the
9th data block.

499 FIXED DISP (Mechanical)


Define Fixed Displacement

FIXED DISP (Mechanical)

Define Fixed Displacement

The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven
input style.
Description
This data defines the fixed displacement that each specified degree of freedom must take during the first
and subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the DISP CHANGE option. The boundary
conditions are specified either by giving the kinematic displacement and a list of degrees of freedom and
a list of nodal numbers or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation
(MESH2D). The prescribed displacements are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the
element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the
TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.
Note:

In static analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to remove
all rigid body modes.
Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the
non-table driven input instead.

Further detail is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. See Marc Volume B: Element
Library, for a definition of the degrees of freedom for each element type.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words FIXED DISP.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of sets of boundary condition data to be read (optional).

6-10

2nd

This field is set to nonzero to flag input of boundary conditions set during
mesh generation (MESH2D). If this field is activated, no further data is
required in this option.

11-15

3rd

Unit number used for MESH2D option.


Note:

The boundary conditions are stored after the connectivity and


coordinate data on this file, so that the model definition data
must be arranged accordingly.

For each set of boundary conditions use the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks.

FIXED DISP (Mechanical) 500


Define Fixed Displacement

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3a data block
Use only if not Fourier Analysis.
1-10

1st

Prescribed displacement for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4.

11-20

2nd

Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data


block 4.

21-30

3rd

Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.


A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified. The third
data block is read as 8E10.3.

3b data block
Use for Fourier analysis only.
1-5

1st

Enter the series number associated with this boundary condition.

6-15

2nd

Prescribed displacement for first degree of freedom listed in data block 4.

16-25

3rd

Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data block


4.

26-35

4th

Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 4.

36-45

5th

Prescribed displacement for fourth degree of freedom listed in data block


4.

46-55

6th

Prescribed displacement for fifth degree of freedom listed in data block 4.

4th data block


Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed
displacements are prescribed.
Note:

List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.

5th data block


Enter a list of nodes to which the above boundary conditions are applied.

501 DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)


Define Distributed Loads

DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) Define Distributed Loads
The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the
TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

Description
This data block defines potential distributed loads applied to the model, including the magnitude, type of
load and location, and associates this with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition will be
activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The FORCEM user
subroutine can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads, or the TABLE model definition
option may be used.
The distributed loads entered here are total loads. If no time-dependent tables are referenced and the
ramping options in the LOADCASE model or history definition option are not used, the distributed load
will be instantaneously applied in the loadcase.
When used with global adaptive meshing, if the load is applied to a curve or a surface where element
edges or faces are attached, the load is correctly applied after remeshing.
For more information on pressure cavity loading, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information,
Chapter 9, Pressure Cavity Loading.
Note:

If distributed load is applied on the bottom of a shell, the sign of the load is reversed, that
is, a positive load is now in the direction of the normal to the surface.
Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the
non-table driven input instead.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words DIST LOADS.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets of distributed loads to be entered (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of distributed load data, defaults to input.

The 3rd through 9th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter the number of geometric types used to define boundary condition,


default is 1. See 9th and 10th data blocks.

DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 502


Define Distributed Loads

Format
Fixed
6-10

Free
2nd

Data
Entry Entry
I

Enter 0 if no user subroutine required.


Enter 1 if the FORCEM user subroutine required for this
boundary condition.

11-15

3rd

Enter 0 if real value given.


Enter 1 if complex value given as real and imaginary numbers.
Enter 2 if complex value given as magnitude and phase.

16-20

4th

Enter the Fourier series number associated with the load, enter 0 if no
Fourier series.

21-25

5th

Enter the value of ibody_cavity.


ibody_cavity = icavity * 10000 + icavity_type * 1000 + ibody

where
ibody_cavit is the cavity-modified value for the distributed load type.
y
icavity is the cavity ID.
icavity_type is the cavity load type:
0: cavity is closed.
1: cavity is loaded with an applied pressure.
2: cavity is loaded with an applied mass.
9: cavity load is defined by the UCAV user subroutine.
ibody is the original value for the distributed load type (see library
element description in Marc Volume B: Element Library.)
26-30

6th

Enter 1 to exclude applied load when the edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is fully
in contact.

31-63

7th

Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label
will be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.

If a real distributed load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 are used.


If a complex harmonic distributed load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component
or the magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.

503 DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)


Define Distributed Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

4th data block


1-10

1st

Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed load.


For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first
coordinate direction.

11-20

2nd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the load in second


coordinate direction.

21-30

3rd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the load in third coordinate direction.

5th data block


1-5

1st

Enter the table ID associated with the load. For load type 21 or 102 to 113,
enter the table ID associated with the load in the first direction.

6-10

2nd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID associated with the load
in the second direction.

11-15

3rd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID associated with the load
in the third direction.

The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.
6th data block - Imaginary Component or Phase Angle
1-10

1st

Prescribed imaginary component of load or phase angle.

11-20

2nd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the imaginary component of load in
second coordinate direction.

21-30

3rd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the imaginary component of load in
third coordinate direction.

7th data block - Table IDs for Imaginary Component or Phase Angle
1-5

1st

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase.

6-10

2nd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID for imaginary component
or phase in second direction.

11-15

3rd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID for imaginary component
or phase in third direction.

8th data block


If geometry type is element IDs (1) use either the first field or the second and third field.
If geometry type is volume (3), surface (4), or curve (5) use the second field only.
1-5

1st

Enter the distributed load type based upon element library description in
Marc Volume B: Element Library.

6-10

2nd

Enter the distributed load type based upon:


1: Normal pressure

DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 504


Define Distributed Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
2: Shear stress in 1st tangent direction
3: Shear stress in 2nd tangent direction
4: Volumetric in x-direction
5: Volumetric in y-direction
6: Volumetric in z-direction
7: force/length in beams x-direction
8: force/length in beams y-direction
9: force/length in beams z-direction
11: Wave loading
13: Force/length on edge of shell on midplane; perpendicular to
edge
14: Force/length on edge of shell on midplane; tangent to the
edge; positive is from node 1 to node 1+1
15: Force/length on edge of shell; perpendicular to shell, for
example, -v3 direction
21: General traction
100 + jaxis: Centrifugal based upon entering 2, in radians/time
101: Inelastic heat generation
102: Gravity
103 + jaxis: Coriolis based upon entering 2, in radians/time
104 + jaxis: Centrifugal based upon entering (cycles/time)
105 + jaxis: Coriolis based upon entering (cycles/time)
106: Uniform body load (force per unit volume)
107: Nonuniform body load (force per unit volume)
110: Uniform beam load (force per unit length)
111: Nonuniform beam load (force per unit length)
112: Uniform load per unit area
113: Nonuniform load per unit area
Note:

11-15

3rd

For problems with more than one rotation axes, jaxis equals the
rotation ID times a thousand.

Enter the face ID.

505 DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)


Define Distributed Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

9th data block


The 9th and 10th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd
data block, 1st field.
1-5

1st

Enter the geometry type:


1: Element IDs
3: Volume/Region/Body IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
9: Polycurve IDs
10: Polysurface IDs
11: Element-Edges IDs
12: Element-Faces IDs
13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention
14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention
15: Cavity ID
16: Surface ID: orientation ID
17: Curve ID: orientation ID
18: Surface ID: orientation ID - Mentat convention
19: Curve ID: orientation ID - Mentat convention

10th data block


1-80

Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions


are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the
9th data block.

DIST LOADS (Model Definition) 506


Define Distributed Loads

DIST LOADS (Model Definition)

Define Distributed Loads

The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven
input style.
Description
This block of data allows pressure (surface and volumetric) loads to be specified. These values are
incremental values per increment if a fixed time-step procedure is used or the total change over the
loadcase if an adaptive time-step procedure is used or the total value of the load if the ELASTIC parameter
is used. User subroutine FORCEM can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads.
Note:

If FOLLOW FOR is included in the input file with DIST LOADS, the input about type of
load, magnitude etc. (data blocks 3 and 4) needs to be consistent in the model and history
definition options.

If FEATURE,10101 is used, then the pressure on an edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is applied, unless all nodes
of that edge or face are in contact with another body. If separation occurs, the distributed load is reapplied
to the surface. This feature internally turns on FOLLOW FOR.
For most distributed load types, one enters a load per unit length (on beams or shell edges) or a load per
unit area. There are a few exceptions listed below:
Load Type
100

Centrifugal

Enter 2 ( in radians/time)

102

Gravity

Enter three values (Force/mass)

103

Centrifugal and Coriolis

Enter 2 ( in radians/time)

104

Centrifugal

Enter ( in cycles/time)

105

Centrifugal and Coriolis

Enter ( in cycles/time)

106

Uniform Volumetric load

Enter three values force/volume

107

Nonuniform Volumetric load

Enter three values force/volume

110

Uniform load per unit length

Enter three values force/length

111

Nonuniform load per unit length

Enter three values force/length

112

Uniform load per unit area

Enter three values force/area

113

Nonuniform load per unit area

Enter three values force/area

General traction

Enter three values force/area

-10 to -21

507 DIST LOADS (Model Definition)


Define Distributed Loads

Table 3-8

CID Load Types (Not Table Driven Input)

IBODY

Specify Traction on Edge or Face

User Subroutine

-10

No

-11

Yes

-12

No

-13

Yes

-14

No

-15

Yes

-16

No

-17

Yes

-18

No

-19

Yes

-20

No

-21

Yes

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words DIST LOADS.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets of distributed loads to be entered (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of distributed load data, defaults to input.

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3a data block
Use if conventional Marc input, not Fourier, not applied to a cavity, and not Nastran PLOAD4 style.
1-5

1st

Parameter identifying the type of load. See library element description in


Marc Volume B: Element Library.
For problems with more than one rotation axes, add the rotation axis ID
times a thousand.

6-15

2nd

Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed load.


For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first
coordinate direction.

DIST LOADS (Model Definition) 508


Define Distributed Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

16-25

3rd

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in
second coordinate direction

26-35

4th

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in third
coordinate direction

36-40

5th

Distributed load index (optional). (Distributed load index is to be used in


the FORCEM user subroutine.)

3b data block
Use if distributed load is applied to cavity and not Fourier. The CAVITY parameter and CAVITY model
definition option is also required.
1-5

1st

Enter the value of ibody_cavity.


ibody_cavity = icavity * 10000 + icavity_type * 1000 + ibody

where
ibody_cavity is the cavity-modified value for the distributed load type.
icavity is the cavity ID.
icavity_type is the cavity load type:
0: cavity is closed.
1: cavity is loaded with an applied pressure.
2: cavity is loaded with an applied mass.
9: cavity load is defined by the UCAV user subroutine.
ibody is the original value for the distributed load type (see
library element description in Marc Volume B:
Element Library.)
6-15

2nd

If icavity_type = 1, enter incremental pressure.


If icavity_type = 2, enter incremental mass.

16-25

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

26-35

4th

Not used; enter 0.

36-40

5th

Distributed load index (optional). (Distributed load index is to be used in


the FORCEM user subroutine.)

41-45

6th

Enter -1 if the cavity load is not active.

509 DIST LOADS (Model Definition)


Define Distributed Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

3c data block
Use if Fourier Analysis.
1-5

1st

Parameter identifying the type of load. See library element description in


Marc Volume B: Element Library.
For problems with more than one rotation axes, add the rotation axis ID
times a thousand.

6-15

2nd

Enter the series number associated with this load.

16-25

3rd

Enter the magnitude of this type of distributed load.


For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first
coordinate direction.

26-35

4th

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in
second coordinate direction.

36-40

5th

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in third
coordinate direction.

3d data block
Use if Nastran PLOAD4 style input.
1-5

1st

Parameter identifying the type of load plus 200. See library element
description in Marc Volume B: Element Library.

6-15

2nd

Enter P1, the magnitude of load at node 1 of face or edge.

16-25

3rd

Enter P2, the magnitude of load at node 2 of face or edge.

26-35

4th

Enter P3, the magnitude of load at node 3 of face or edge.

36-45

5th

Enter P4, the magnitude of load at node 4 of face or edge. Not required if
a triangular face.

46-55

6th

Enter first component of direction of load.

56-65

7th

Enter second component of direction of load.

DIST LOADS (Model Definition) 510


Define Distributed Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

66-75

8th

Enter third component of direction of load.

76-80

9th

If positive, distributed load index (optional). (Distributed load index is to


be used in the FORCEM user subroutine.) If the direction of the load is
given with respect to a COORD SYSTEM option, then enter the negative
of the coordinate system ID.

Notes:

If the direction of the load is not defined, then the conventional Marc direction is used.
If the direction of the load is defined, then it is fixed and not updated even if the FOLLOW
FOR parameter is activated.

4th data block


Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed loads.

511 FACE IDS


Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

FACE IDS

Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source,


Films, and Foundations

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the
TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

1-D 2-Node Elements


y

FACE ID

NODES

12

FACE ID

NODES

123

2
1

1-D 3-Node Elements


3
2
1

2-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Elements


4

Load shown on FACE ID 1

FACE ID

NODES

12

23

34

41

FACE IDS 512


Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

2-D 8-Node Quadrilateral Elements


7

FACE ID

NODES

152

263

374

481

2-D 3-Node Triangle


3

FACE ID

NODES

12

23

31

FACE ID

NODES

142

253

361

2-D 6-Node Triangle


3

3-D 3-Node Shell


z

1
y
x

FACE ID

NODES

123

(top)

132

(bottom)

513 FACE IDS


Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

3-D 4-Node Shell/Membrane


4

FACE ID

NODES

1234

(top)

1432

(bottom)

3-D 6-Node Shell


3

FACE ID

NODES

123456

(top)

132654

(bottom)

3-D 8-Node Shell


4

FACE ID

NODES

12345678

(top)

14328765

(bottom)

3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral


4
3

1
2

FACE ID

NODES

124

234

314

123

FACE IDS 514


Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

3-D 6-Node Pentahedral


6
4

FACE ID

NODES

1254

2365

3 1 4 6

132

456

1
2

3-D 15-Node Pentahedral


3
15
6

NODES

1
2
3
4
5

1 2 5 4 7 14 10 13
2 3 6 5 8 15 11 14
3 1 4 6 9 13 12 15
321879
4 5 6 10 11 12

11

12

14

13
4

FACE ID

10

3-D 8-Node Brick


8

5
6
4

FACE ID

NODES

1265

2376

3487

4158

1234

6587

515 FACE IDS


Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral


4

10

FACE ID

NODES

1 2 4 5 09 08

2 3 4 6 10 09

3 1 4 7 08 10

1 2 3 5 06 07

9
7
6

1
5
2

3-D 20-Node Brick


8
16

15
7

5
20

13

14

19

17

4
12

11
18

3
9

10
2

FACE ID

NODES

1 2 6 5 09 18 13 17

2 3 7 6 10 19 14 18

3 4 8 7 11 20 15 19

4 1 5 8 12 17 16 20

1 2 3 4 09 10 11 12

6 5 8 7 13 16 15 14

POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 516


Define Nodal Point Loads

POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)Define Nodal Point Loads
The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the
TABLE parameter to activate this input option.
Description
This data block defines potential point loads, including the magnitude and location of application and
associates this with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition will be activated or deactivated
using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. Point loads can be specified as fixed direction
loads or follower loads. The prescribed forces are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with
the element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the
TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.
The point loads entered here are total loads. If no time-dependent tables are referenced and the ramping
options in the LOADCASE model or history definition option are not used, the point load will be
instantaneously applied in the loadcase.
The FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter
nonuniform time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.
Notes:

Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the
non-table driven input instead.
The fourth field of the FOLLOW FOR parameter should be set to 1 when follower force
point loads are used in the model. The follower load is only supported through the mesh
based automated option wherein the nodal loads are specified in vector form and the initial
load orientation with respect to the mesh is maintained as the structure deforms. The
follower force option is not available for fourier loads or harmonic loads. Also, the
follower force capability is not supported for point loads specified through the FORCDT
user subroutine.

Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words POINT LOAD.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter number of sets of point loads to be entered (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of point load data, defaults to input.

517 POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)


Define Nodal Point Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

The 3rd through 8th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter the number of geometric types used to define boundary condition,


default is 1. See 8th and 9th data blocks.

6-10

2nd

Enter 0 if no user subroutine required.


Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDT user subroutine is required for this
boundary condition.

11-15

3rd

Enter 0 if real value given.


Enter 1 if complex value given as real and imaginary numbers.
Enter 2 if complex value given as magnitude and phase.

16-20

4th

Enter the Fourier series number associated with the nodal load; enter 0 if
no Fourier series.

21-25

5th

Enter 0 for fixed direction load.


Enter -1 for automated follower force

26-30

6th

Not used; enter 0.

31-63

7th

Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label
will be referenced by the LOADCASE option.

If a real point load is to be defined, data blocks 3 and 4 are used.


If a complex harmonic point load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or the
magnitude; and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.
4th data block
Real magnitude.
1-10

1st

Nodal load associated with first degree of freedom.

11-20

2nd

Nodal load associated with second degree of freedom.

21-30

3rd

Nodal load associated with third degree of freedom.

31-40

4th

Nodal load associated with fourth degree of freedom.

41-50

5th

Nodal load associated with fifth degree of freedom.

51-60

6th

Nodal load associated with sixth degree of freedom.

5th data block - Table ID for Real Magnitude


1-5

1st

Table ID associated with the first degree of freedom.

6-10

2nd

Table ID associated with the second degree of freedom.

11-15

3rd

Table ID associated with the third degree of freedom.

POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) 518


Define Nodal Point Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

16-20

4th

Table ID associated with the fourth degree of freedom.

21-25

5th

Table ID associated with the fifth degree of freedom.

26-30

6th

Table ID associated with the sixth degree of freedom.

The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.
6th data block - Imaginary Component or Phase Angle
1-10

1st

Imaginary component/phase associated with first degree of freedom.

11-20

2nd

Imaginary component/phase associated with second degree of freedom.

21-30

3rd

Imaginary component/phase associated with third degree of freedom.

31-40

4th

Imaginary component/phase associated with fourth degree of freedom.

41-50

5th

Imaginary component/phase associated with fifth degree of freedom.

51-60

6th

Imaginary component/phase associated with sixth degree of freedom.

7th data block - Table IDs for Imaginary Component or Phase Angle
1-5

1st

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for first degree
of freedom.

6-10

2nd

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for second degree
of freedom.

11-15

3rd

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for third degree
of freedom.

16-20

4th

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for fourth degree
of freedom.

21-25

5th

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for fifth degree
of freedom.

26-30

6th

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for sixth degree
of freedom.

The 8th and 9th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data
block, 1st field.
8th data block
1-5

1st

Enter the geometry type:


1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
3: Volume/Region/Body IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs

519 POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)


Define Nodal Point Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry
11: Element-Edges IDs
12: Element-Faces IDs
13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention
14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention

9th data block


Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions
are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the
8th data block.

POINT LOAD (Model Definition) 520


Define Nodal Point Loads

POINT LOAD (Model Definition)

Define Nodal Point Loads

The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven
input style.
Description
This block of data allows nodal point loads to be specified. The nodal loads can be specified as fixed
direction loads or follower loads. For the fixed direction loads, the nodal forces are always specified in
vector form. For the follower loads, two options are possible: Option 1 is the MD Nastran style Follower
Force wherein the magnitudes of the nodal force and moment are specified and the direction is
independently specified using 2 or 4 nodes. Option 2 is the Mesh Based Automated Follower Force
wherein the nodal loads are specified in vector form and the initial load orientation with respect to the
mesh is maintained as the structure deforms. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information.
These values are incremental values unless the ELASTIC parameter is used or the 3rd field of the
FOLLOW FOR parameter is set to 1, in which case they are total loads. When specified in the form of a
load vector, the prescribed forces are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the element,
unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the TRANSFORMATION,
COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.
Notes:

Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes with point loads on the DIST
LOADS parameter.

The fourth field of the FOLLOW FOR parameter should be set to 1 when follower force
loads are used in the model. When this global parameter for follower force point loads is
turned on, the 5th data block is mandatory. The follower force option is not valid for fourier
loads or harmonic loads. Also, the follower force capability is not supported for point
loads specified through user subroutine FORCDT.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words POINT LOAD.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter number of sets of point loads to be entered (optional).

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of point load data, defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to signal existence of more than one point load on the same node.
The loads are summed in this case.

521 POINT LOAD (Model Definition)


Define Nodal Point Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.
3a data block
Use if not Fourier Analysis.
1-10

1st

Nodal load associated with first degree of freedom.


Nodal force magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.

11-20

2nd

Nodal load associated with second degree of freedom.


Nodal moment magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.

21-30

3rd

Nodal load associated with third degree of freedom.

31-40

4th

Nodal load associated with fourth degree of freedom.

41-50

5th

Nodal load associated with fifth degree of freedom.

51-60

6th

Nodal load associated with sixth degree of freedom.

61-70

7th

Nodal load associated with seventh degree of freedom.

71-80

8th

Nodal load associated with eighth degree of freedom.

Continuation data is necessary, must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data is needed if more than
eight degrees of freedom per node in analysis.
Notes:

The nodal load vector is valid for fixed direction force or for automated follower force.
Only the first two fields are used for the MD Nastran style follower force.

3b data block
Use only if Fourier Analysis.
1-5

1st

Enter the series number associated with this load.

6-15

2nd

Nodal load associated with first degree of freedom.

16-25

3rd

Nodal load associated with second degree of freedom.

26-35

4th

Nodal load associated with third degree of freedom.

36-45

5th

Nodal load associated with fourth degree of freedom.

46-55

6th

Nodal load associated with fifth degree of freedom.

4th data block


Enter a list of nodes having the point load given above.

POINT LOAD (Model Definition) 522


Define Nodal Point Loads

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

5th data block


Used only when 4th field of FOLLOW FOR parameter is 1.
For the Nastran style follower force, enter as many lines as there are nodes in the 4th data block.
1-5

1st

0 = Fixed direction force


-1 = Automated follower force
First node for Nastran style follower force

6-10

2nd

Second node for Nastran style follower force

11-15

3rd

Third node for Nastran style follower force

16-20

4th

Fourth node for Nastran style follower force

523 HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input)


Neglect Incremental Displacement

HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input)

Neglect Incremental Displacement

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the
TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

Description
This model definition option indicates that the incremental displacement of the indicated nodes is to be
neglected. This allows you to apply a load or displacement on the structure to generate a stress in the body
without the displacements changing. In this way, an initial stress field may be generated. This option
cannot be used with the multiplicative (FeFp) plasticity formulation (PLASTICITY, 5).
At the end of the increment, this option is automatically deactivated.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words HOLD NODES.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Number of sets of boundary condition data to be read (optional).

6-10

2nd

Unit number to read data default is the standard input file.

Data blocks 3 through 10 are repeated for each set.


3rd data block
1-5

1st

Enter the number of geometric types used to define boundary condition,


default is 1. See 9th and 10th data blocks.

6-10

2nd

Not used; enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Not used; enter 0.

16-20

4th

Not used; enter 0.

21-25

5th

Not used; enter 0.

26-30

6th

Not used; enter 0.

31-63

7th

Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label
will be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.

HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input) 524


Neglect Incremental Displacement

Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

4th data block - Magnitudes


1-10

1st

Prescribed displacement for first degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

11-20

2nd

Prescribed displacement for second degree of freedom listed in data


block 8.

21-30

3rd

Prescribed displacement for third degree of freedom listed in data block 8.


A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified.

5th data block - Table IDs


1-5

1st

Enter the table ID for the first degree of freedom listed.

6-10

2nd

Enter the table ID for the second degree of freedom listed.

11-15

3rd

Enter the table ID for the third degree of freedom listed.

6th data block - Imaginary Component or Phase Angle


Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed
displacements are prescribed.
Note:

List verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT are illegal here.

The 7th and 8th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd
data block, 1st field.
7th data block
1-5

1st

Enter the geometry type:


1: Element IDs
2: Nodes IDs
3: Volume/Region/Body IDs
4: Surface IDs
5: Curve IDs
6: Point IDs
11: Element-Edges IDs
12: Element-Faces IDs
13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention
14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention

8th data block


Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions
are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the
7th data block.

525 HOLD NODES


Neglect Incremental Displacement

HOLD NODES

Neglect Incremental Displacement

Description
This model definition option indicates that the incremental displacement of the indicated nodes is to be
neglected. This allows you to apply a load or displacement on the structure to generate a stress in the body
without the displacements changing. In this way, an initial stress field may be generated. This option
cannot be used with the multiplicative (FeFp) plasticity formulation (PLASTICITY, 5).
At the end of the increment, this option is automatically deactivated.
Format
Format
Fixed

Free

Data
Entry Entry

1st data block


1-10

1st

Enter the words HOLD NODES.

2nd data block


1-5

1st

Enter the number of sets of data.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number to read the data from.

Enter a list of degrees of freedom.

Enter a list of nodes for which the displacements will not be updated in
this increment.

3rd data block


1-80

1st

4th data block


1-80

1st

INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition) 526


Define Inertia Relief

INERTIA RELIEF (Model Definition)

Define Inertia Relief

Description
This option defines the parameters necessary for conducting an inertia relief analysis. The parameters are
used to evaluate the Rigid Body Modes of the system. Once the modes are evaluated, the program
evaluates the inertia relief load vector which balances the external load vector acting on the system. For
more details of these procedures, you are referred to Inertia Relief in Chapter 5 in the Marc Volume A:
Theory and User Information manual.
When inertia relief is no longer active in a current loadcase, an option can be provided to remove or retain
inertia relief loads fro